SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

WORKSHOP MANUAL

AGROTRON 108
AGROTRON 118
AGROTRON 128
 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instruction for repair technicians and
a practical guide to improving the quality of repairs.
This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the ma-
chine, indicating the correct methods for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for
accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections. The instructions also indicate the
products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data.
The technical material contained in this manual is reserved to Authorised Dealers and
Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the machines in
question through the issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and sup-
plements for optional equipment.
All technicians and their colleagues are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part
of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties without
the express written permission of the Manufacturer, who remains the sole owner of this
document with all rights reserved in accordance with applicable laws.

00-1
 GENERAL SAFETY RULES

SAFETY NOTES
To ensure that machines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue
to function correctly, it is very important that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner.
The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are safe and effective.
Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment: these tools
have been designed for a specific purpose and may ordered directly from the Manufacturers.
DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not only is there is risk of personal injury, but such tools are
rarely suited to the purpose for which they are used.

To prevent injury to operators, the symbols and are used in this manual to indicate the
safety precautions required. The warnings accompanying these symbols must always be ad-
hered to carefully.
In potentially hazardous situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary
actions to eliminate the danger.

GENERAL SAFETY RULES

1 - Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the machine as regards its com-
ponents, operation and controls, always take particular care when carrying
out the following operations. Remember that the machine you are working
on is in need of repair or overhaul and consequently may not always be-
have as expected.
2 - Before starting work, clean the machine thoroughly to remove all mud,
dust and road dirt.
Also clean the cab to remove all traces of oil, snow and ice from the access
steps and grab rails.
3 - When climbing up to or down from the cab, always ensure you maintain
three points of contact at a time (foot or handholds) in order to keep your
balance and prevent accidental falls.
4 - Always take special care when carrying out fault diagnosis operations;
these operations often require two persons, who must never stand in front
of the wheels when the engine is running.
5 - When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close-fitting clothing, safety
goggles and protective gloves that are suitable for the task (cleaning,
draining fluids, repairs).
When working near moving parts, long hair should be gathered up and se-
cured safely under a cap to prevent the risk of entanglement and sever in-
jury.
6 - Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in the work to come near
the machine; ensure that they remain at a safe distance.
7 - Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is running, some moving
parts are not easily visible and therefore present a risk of entanglement,
even if protected by safety guards.
8 - Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting the engine in order to
avoid the formation of dangerous concentrations of toxic gases; always
connect suitable fume extraction equipment to the exhaust pipe.

00-3
 GENERAL SAFETY RULES

9 - Under no circumstances start the engine with the safety guards removed;
all repair and adjustment operations must be carried out with the engine
stopped.
10 - Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the engine is running.
11 - Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames nearby when topping
up fuel or oil.
Always remove the battery from the machine before recharging.
12 - Before checking or removing the battery, stop the engine and remove the
key from the starter switch.
13 - Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated area where the tem-
perature exceeds 0°C.
14 - When checking or recharging the battery, do not smoke or allow naked
flames in the vicinity as the hydrogen gas given off by the battery is highly
explosive.
15 - The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very harmful if it comes
into contact with the skin and the eyes; for this reason, always wear gloves
and safety goggles with side shields when checking or topping up the bat-
tery.
Should any electrolyte accidentally come into contact with your skin, wash
the affected parts immediately with copious amounts of water. If electro-
lyte comes into contact with your clothing, this should be removed as soon
as possible.
In case of accidental ingestion of electrolyte, drink copious amounts of wa-
ter, milk or vegetable oil and take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbo-
nate, etc.. and seek medical attention immediately.
16 - Before working on the electrical systems, always disconnect the battery
terminals.
IMPORTANT!
Always disconnect the negative terminal (--) first and then the positive ter-
minal (+); when re-connecting the battery on completion of the work, first
connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative (--).
17 - Before carrying out any arc welding, on the tractor, always disconnect the
battery terminals and unplug all the connectors of the electronic control
units and the alternator.
18 - When topping up lubricants, always wear suitable protective gloves.
19 - Do not wear clothing contaminated by engine or hydraulic oil; prolonged
contact with the skin can be harmful and may cause allergic reactions.
20 - Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed of in a proper manner;
recover used lubricants and dispose of them in accordance with the ap-
plicable regulations.
21 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or pneumatic systems, dis-
charge all residual pressure from the circuits.
22 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system or engine, allow the
oil and engine coolant to cool down.

00-4
 GENERAL SAFETY RULES

23 - When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it will be necessary to

support the machine; use stands, jacks or blocks capable of supporting
the weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to prevent the machine
from overturning.
24 - To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane.
Check that wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not worn and that hooks
are not damaged.
25 - Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for the weight of the com-
ponents to be removed. Ensure lifting equipment is attached correctly.
26 - When lifting or supporting an assembly or component, manoeuvre the
parts slowly and carefully to avoid oscillation or collision with other com-
ponents.
27 - Never work on components suspended from a hoist or crane.
28 - When removing the retaining bolts of a component that could fall, always
leave two opposing bolts in place for safety; these bolts should only be re-
moved when the component has been securely attached to a hoist or when
supporting blocks have been put in position.
29 - Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling operations should be
cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent the risk of slipping and fire.
30 - When refitting electrical wiring looms and wires, ensure that they are prop-
erly secured with their original retaining straps or brackets to prevent the
possibility of damage caused by vibration.
31 - Never insert your fingers or hands to check the alignment between fixing
holes in components; always use a suitable dowel of soft material.
32 - When refitting assemblies or components, always use the specified tight-
ening torques; the tightening torques indicated in the paragraphs regard-
ing assembly/refitting operations have been determined through
experimentation and must be scrupulously adhered to.
33 - When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or that rotate at high
speed, take particular care when carrying final installation checks.

00-5
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING

OPERATIONS
★ When removing or refitting parts, always take the following safety precau-
tions.

1. PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL OPERATIONS

• Unless otherwise indicated, lower the working equipment until it rests on
the ground.
• After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the
open ends of the pipes to prevent ingress of impurities.
• Before removing a cylinder, fully retract the piston and secure it in this po-
sition using a retaining strap.
• Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
• Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings in-
dicating the correct assembly position. If necessary, make new markings
to ensure correct assembly.
• When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly
to avoid pulling on the wires.
• Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion
when reconnecting.
• Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them to-
gether in a safe place.
• To lift the machine or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of
suitable capacity.
• When using eyebolts for lifting tractor components, first check that they
are not deformed or damaged, screw them fully home and then turn the
bolt so that the eye is aligned with the lifting hook.
• Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the
part, cover it to prevent the ingress of dirt and dust.

2. PRECAUTIONS FOR REFITTING OPERATIONS

• Tighten nuts and bolts to the specified tightening torques.
• When refitting flexible pipes and wires, take care not to twist or tangle
them.
• Always fit new seals, O-rings, cotter pins and safety stop rings on reas-
sembly; make sure that the ends of the cotter pins are separated and bent
back so that the pin cannot be withdrawn from the hole.
• Ensure that circlips are correctly installed in their seatings.
• Always fit new seals, O-rings, cotter pins and safety stop rings; ensure that
cotter pins are bent over so that they cannot work loose.
• When applying sealant, first clean the surface removing all traces of oil and
grease and check for dirt or indentations, then apply the sealant evenly
making sure that it forms a continuous film around any fixing holes.
• Clean all parts, removing dirt, oxidisation, carbon deposits, burrs and in-
dentations.

00-6
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS

• Coat all moving parts with a thin film of engine oil.

• When reconnecting electrical connectors, first remove all traces of oil, dust
and water from the inside of the connector and then push the two halves to-
gether firmly; only apply the force necessary to clip the two halves togeth-
er.
• Bolt down flanged fittings evenly, tightening the bolts gradually in a cross-
wise pattern.

3. PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN ON COMPLETION OF REMOVAL/REFITTING OPERATIONS

• If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and add
new coolant to the correct level. Start the engine to circulate the coolant
and then check the level again and top up.
• After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the spec-
ified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the hydraulic circuits and
then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
• After having removed a variable displacement pump, connect the drain
pipe and fill the pump casing with oil through the filler hole provided.
• Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts thor-
oughly after assembly.

00-7
 LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS

LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS

Components weighing over 25 kg or of significant size must be supported and removed using suitable lifting equip-
ment with wire rope or polyester slings.
In the paragraphs regarding removal and refitting operations, the weight of the component or assembly to be lifted is

indicated with the symbol

WIRE ROPES - SLINGS

• Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:

WIRE ROPES POLYESTER SLINGS

(standard twisted «S» or «Z» type) (eye-and-eye - simple loop)
Capacity (kg) Capacity (kg)
Ø rope Width
mm 60° 90° (mm) 60° 90°

8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

10 1000 1740 1420 50 1000 800 1730 1410
12 1450 2500 2050 62 1250 1000 2160 1760
14 2000 3460 2820 75 1400 1120 2420 1980
16 2600 4500 3670 100 2000 1600 3460 2820
18 3300 5710 4660 150 2500 2000 4330 3530

NOTE. Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

• The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the
rope/sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
• Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
• Never lift a heavy load when the two branches of the ropes form a wide angle.
The permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse proportion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the
permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension for two Ø 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000 kg.

2000
1900
1700
2000
Load capacity: kg

1400

1000
1000
500

30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

Angle of suspension: ␣

00-8
 HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED

HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED

SECTION 00 Contains the general safety rules, information on how to use and update
the manual, the symbols used, the products required, the standard tight-
ening torques and a conversion table for units of measurement.

SECTION 10 Contains technical descriptions and information regarding the mechan-

ical and hydraulic operation of machine components, the designations of
the various components, hydraulic diagrams and general technical data.

SECTION 20 Contains information on the tractor's electrical and electronic systems,

the procedures for putting into service, the list of alarms and a guide to the
use of the software required for tractor and engine configuration and ac-
cess to diagnostic codes.

SECTION 30 Contains the methods, checks and adjustments regarding the external
components; the operations dealt with in this section do not require re-
moval of the various assemblies that form the tractor frame and cab.

SECTION 40 Contains information and diagrams regarding the machine's electrical

and electronic systems.

ATTENTION!
This manual does not contain the engine and transmision sections.
For these sections refer to the follow manuals:

Italian
English
Engine DEUTZ 2012 0312 0361
French
German
0298 6831 German
0298 6832 English
Trasmission/rear axle 7200 L-S-H
0298 6833 French
0298 6834 Spanish
0298 6803 German
0298 6856 English
Front axle ZF 2025-2035-2045 AS
0298 6857 French
0298 6858 Spanish

00-9
 HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL

HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL

1. Removal and refitting of assembled units

(1) For the removal or refitting of assembled units, the sequence of operations and the methods to be applied are de-
scribed in the removal procedure; if the refitting sequence of operations is the exact reverse of the removal pro-
cedure, it is not described.
(2) All special techniques that apply only to the refitting procedure are indicated by the symbol 1 ; this same
symbol appears at the end of each major step in the removal procedure to indicate the parts for which special
techniques are to be applied during refitting.
E.g.: REMOVAL OF UNIT : ................................................ Operation heading
: ............................................................................. Safety rules to be observed when carrying out the pro-
cedure described
1 - Remove part (1):...................................................... Step of the procedure
★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the re-
moval operation.
2 - Disconnect (2) ......... 1 : ...................................Indicates the existence of special information regard-
ing refitting of the component in question.
.......... ᐉ: .............................................................. Recover oil, liquid or fuel and the quantity to be recov-
ered
E.g.: REFITTING UNIT: ...................................................... Operation heading
• Refitting is the reverse of removal

1 :.......................................................................Technique to be applied during refitting

★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the refit-
ting operation
• .......... ᐉ: ........................................................... Filling with oil or liquid with quantity
2. During removal and refitting operations, in addition to the general safety rules, you must also apply the specific
«SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS».
Always adhere to these precautions.

3. List of special tools

(1) For details regarding the type, code numbers and quantity of all the tools (T1, T2, etc.) specified in the operating
procedures, see the heading «SPECIAL TOOLS».

4. Tightening torques
1 - In the operating procedures, the symbol denotes a specific tightening torque that has been determined ex-
perimentally and that must be adhered to.
2 - If the symbol does not appear, the torque values to be used are those indicated in the table in Section 00 of this
manual.

00-10
 HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL

HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL

1. UPDATING THE MANUAL

All additions, corrections or amendments to the manual will be sent to the Authorised Service Centres.
Before starting any repair or overhaul operations, check that you have the most recent updates as these may contain
supplementary data not present in previous issues.

2. INSERTING UPDATES
1- Check the number of the page and insert it in the appropriate section of the manual following the consecutive or-
der of the page numbers. Example:
20 5

Consecutive page number

Section number

2 - Supplementary pages: indicated with a hyphen (-) and consecutive number after the page number. Example:
20-5
20-5-1
Supplementary page
20-5-2
20-6
NOTE. The contents of supplementary pages are structured so that there is no overlap with existing pages.
3 - Updated pages: indicated by a consecutive number in a circle; this symbol appears below the page number.
Example:
20-5
20-5-1 Existing page
20-5-1 Update page

20-5-2 Existing page

NOTE. All supplementary and updated pages are indicated in the manual page list; a revised page list is
sent with each update and supersedes the previous list.

3. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

For greater clarity, important information pertaining to operator safety and to critical stages in the working proce-
dures is highlighted by the symbols shown in the following table.

Symbol Meaning Notes Symbol Meaning Notes

Safety rules to be applied during Parts must be coated with adhesive,
Coating
operation. lubricant, etc.
Safety Points at which oil, water or fuel
Operation requiring special safety
Oil, water must be added and quantity requi-
measures due to internal pressure.
red.
Operations requiring special techni-
★ Warning cal or other precautionsto ensure
compliance with standard values.
Drain
Points from which oil, water or fuel
must be drained with quantity.

Weight of main assemblies.

Tightening Parts requiring special tightening
Weight Choose lifting ropes/slings careful-
torques torque during refitting or assembly.
ly; supports required, etc.

00-11
 STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES

1. NUTS AND BOLTS

The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the
relative assembly paragraphs.
★ The tightening torques indicated below refer to bolts and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where ap-
plicable, with anaerobic threadlocking compound.
The values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, copper,
plastic, sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.

BOLT CLASS

BOLT SIZE 8.8 10.9 12.9

Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft.
M6x1 8.0 – 8.8 5.9 – 6.5 11.8 – 13.0 8.7 – 9.6 13.8 – 15.2 10.2 – 11.2

M8x1.25 19.4 – 21.4 14.3 – 15.8 28.5 – 31.5 21.0 – 23.2 33.3 – 36.9 24.5 – 27.2

M10x1.5 38.4 – 42.4 28.3 – 31.2 56.4 – 62.4 41.6 – 46.0 67.4 – 74.4 49.7 – 54.8

M12x1.75 66.5 – 73.5 49.0 – 54.2 96.9 – 107 71.4 – 78.9 115 – 128 84.8 – 94.3
COARSE THREAD

M14x2 106 – 117 78.1 – 86.2 156 – 172 115.0 – 126.8 184 – 204 135.6 – 150.3

M16x2 164 – 182 120.9 – 134.1 241 – 267 117.6 – 196.8 282 – 312 207.8 – 229.9

M18x2.5 228 – 252 168.0 – 185.7 334 – 370 246.2 – 272.7 391 – 432 288.2 – 318.4

M20x2.5 321 – 355 236.6 – 261.6 472 – 522 347.9 – 384.7 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3

M22x2.5 441 – 487 325.0 – 358.9 647 – 715 476.8 – 527.0 751 – 830 553.5 – 611.7

M24x3 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3 812 – 898 598.4 – 661.8 950 – 1050 700.2 – 773.9

M27x3 816 – 902 601.4 – 664.8 1198 – 1324 882.9 – 975.8 1419 – 1569 1045.8 – 1156.4

M8x1 20.8 – 23.0 15.3 – 17.0 30.6 – 33.8 22.6 – 24.9 35.8 – 39.6 26.4 – 29.2

M10x1.25 40.6 – 44.8 29.9 – 33.0 59.7 – 65.9 44.0 – 48.6 71.2 – 78.6 52.5 – 57.9

M12x1.25 72.2 – 79.8 53.2 – 58.8 106 – 118 78.1 – 87.0 126 – 140 92.9 – 103.2

M12x1.5 69.4 – 76.7 51.1 – 56.5 102 – 112 75.2 – 82.5 121 – 134 89.2 – 98.8
FINE THREAD

M14x1.5 114 – 126 84.0 – 92.9 168 – 186 123.8 – 137.1 199 – 220 146.7 – 162.1

M16x1.5 175 – 194 129 – 143 257 – 285 189.4 – 210.0 301 – 333 221.8 – 245.4

M18x1.5 256 – 282 188.7 – 207.8 375 – 415 276.4 – 305.9 439 – 485 323.5 – 357.4

M20x1.5 355 – 393 261.6 – 289.6 523 – 578 385.5 – 426.0 611 – 676 450.3 – 498.2

M22x1.5 482 – 532 355.2 – 392.1 708 – 782 521.8 – 576.3 821 – 908 605.1 – 669.2

M24x2 602 – 666 443.7 – 490.8 884 – 978 651.5 – 720.8 1035 – 1143 762.8 – 842.4

00-12
 STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES

2. FITTINGS
★ The tightening torques indicated below refer to fittings assembled on any material.

Straight end fittings “T” end fittings “L” end fittings 90° end fittings

Torque Torque Torque Torque

Thread size Wrench Wrench Wrench Wrench
Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
17 14 14 14 14 14
M10x1.25 14 14
19 14 17 14 17 14
M12x1.25 19 30 17 30 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40 19 40
METRIC THREADS

M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 24 58 24 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 27 65 27 65 27 65
M22x1.5 30 73 30 73 30 73 30 73
M26x1.5 36 95 36 95 36 95 36 95
M27x2 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
M33x2 41 160 41 160 41 160 41 160
M42x2 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
M48x2 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305

17 13
G 1/8” 14 13 14 13 14 13
19 13
19 37
G 1/4” 19 37 19 37 19 37
THREADS IN INCHES

22 37
G 3/8” 24 53 24 53 24 53 24 53
27 73
G 1/2” 27 73 27 73 27 73
30 73
G 3/4” 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
41 160
G 1” 41 160 41 160 41 160
46 160
G 1 1/4” 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
G 1 1/2” 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305

00-13
 STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES

3. PLUGS

Hex plugs Threaded plugs with hex socket head

Torque Torque
Thread size Wrench Wrench
Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
M6x1 10 10 – –
M8x1 13 12 – –
M10x1 13 14 5 14
M10x1.25 13 14 – –
M10x1.5 13 14 – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – –
M12x1.5 17 30 6 30
M12x1.75 17 30 – –
M14x1.5 19 40 6 40
METRIC THREADS

M14x2 19 40 – –
M16x1.5 22 48 8 48
M16x2 22 48 – –
M18x1.5 17 58 10 58
M18x2.5 17 58 – –
M20x1.5 19 65 – –
M22x1.5 – – 12 73
M24x1.5 22 80 12 80
M24x2 22 80 – –
M27x2 22 100 – –
M28x1.5 – – 17 110
M30x1.5 22 130 – –
M32x1.5 – – 19 150
M35x1.5 – – 22 180
M40x1.5 – – 24 225
THREADS IN INCHES

G 1/8” 14 13 – –
G 1/4” 19 37 – –
G 3/8” 22 53 – –
G 1/2” 19 73 – –
G 5/8” 22 85 – –
G 3/4” 22 100 – –
G 1” 22 160 – –

00-14
 STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES

4. FITTINGS WITH SEAL AT 37°

Torque Torque
Thread size Wrench Thread size Wrench
Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
7/16” - 20 14 13 1 3/16” - 12 36 138
1/2” - 20 16 19 1 5/16” - 12 38 155
9/16” - 18 17 28 1 5/8” - 12 50 215
3/4” - 16 22 47 1 7/8” - 12 60 290
7/8” - 14 27 76 2 1/2” - 12 75 345
32 110
1 1/16” - 12
36 110

5. FITTINGS FOR PIPES WITH EYE ATTACHMENT

★ These tightening torques refer to tightening the fitting with new copper sealing washers.
Unions for one-way fittings Unions for three-way fittings Unions for four-way fittings

Torque Torque Torque

Thread size Wrench Wrench Wrench
Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
M8x1 – – 12 14 – –
M8x1.25 13 14 – – – –
M10x1 – – 14 20 14 20
M10x1.25 13 20 – – – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – – – –
M12x1.5 – – 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40
M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 22 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 – – – –
M22x1.5 – – 27 73 27 73
M24x1.5 32 80 – – – –
M26x1.5 – – 32 95 32 95
M28x1.5 36 110 – – – –
M30x1.5 – – 36 130 36 130
M35x2 41 180 – – – –
M38x1.5 46 200 46 200
M42x2 50 250 – – – –
M45x1.5 – – 55 280 55 280
M50x2 60 320 – – – –
M52x1.5 – – 60 320 60 320
M65x2 – – 75 450 75 450

00-15
 THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS

THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND

LUBRICANTS

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

Loctite 222
Anaerobic product suitable or low-strength locking of retaining, adjustment and precision
Colour:
fasteners.
opaque fluorescent All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
purple

Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and bolt; used in place of con-
THREADLOCKER

Loctite 242
ventional mechanical locking systems.
Colour:
Used for medium-strength locking.
fluorescent blue All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.

Loctite 243
Alternative product to 242; oil tolerant and so can used on lightly lubricated surfaces without
Colour: opaque
prior use of activator.
fluorescent blue

Loctite 270 Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs that do not normally require
disassembly.
Colour:
Parts must be heated to approximately 80°C for removal.
fluorescent green All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
DEGREASERS AND

Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to application of Loctite anaerobic prod-
Loctite 703
ACTIVATORS

ucts; after drying, promotes uniform curing of threadlockers.

Product used for specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to use of slow-cure anaer-
obic threadlockers(series 5 and 6).
Loctite 747
Can also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in applications where there is
large gaps between the parts.

Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal faces; can eliminate the need
Loctite 510 for conventional gaskets as it can fill gaps up to 0.4 mm.
Colour: red Does not shrink and therefore fasteners do not need re-tightening to specified torque values
after curing.

Loctite 542 Anaerobic product used a liquid sealant for threaded fittings up to 3/4” gas; rapid curing and
Colour: brown parts may be disassembled with ordinary tools.
(for faces and flanges)

Loctite 554 Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cooling and industrial fluid circuits.
SEALANTS

Colour: red Slow curing, also suitable for use on non-ferrous alloys.

Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes and threaded fittings up to 2"
Loctite 572
in diameter.
Colour: white Very slow curing on most metal surfaces.

Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between metal faces.
Loctite 573 Ensures total contact between surfaces with maximum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling micro-
Colour: green voids caused by flatness errors.
Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires prior application of an activator.

Loctite 576 Anaerobic product used a liquid thread sealant for large diameter threaded fittings (up to 2").
Colour: brown Very slow curing; also suitable for non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent removal.

00-16
 THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range of acidic and porous ma-
Loctite 401 terials including, ceramics, wood, rubber and plastic (excluding polyolefin).
ADHESIVES
INSTANT

Colour: colourless Curing takes place in a few seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental conditions.

Loctite 495 Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber, plastics and metal in any com-
Colour: colourless bination.

Silastic 738 One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, ready for use.

(Dow Corning) Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the need for conventional seals
SEALANTS
SILICONE

Colour: milky white on flexible joints, filling gaps greater than 1 mm.

One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.

Dirko Transparent
Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rubbery solid; resistant to high
Colour: transparent temperatures.
POLYURETHANE
SEALANTS

Betaseal HV3 Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity, suitable for permanent,
high-strength flexible bonding.
(Gurit Essex)
Slow curing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates, etc. surfaces must be
Colour: black degreased with primer.

Loctite 601 Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive.

Colour: Suitable for sealing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of up to 0.10 mm;
fluorescent green used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys, bushes etc. on shafts.
RETAINING COMPOUNDS

Loctite 638
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength; suitable for bonding cylin-
Colour:
drical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
fluorescent green

Loctite 648 Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical
parts, permanent retention of threaded parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of
Colour:
bearings, etc.
fluorescent green Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.

Loctite 986/AVX Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.

Colour: Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemical pressure.
fluorescent red Parts must be first treated with an activator.

Grease
Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to prevent oxidization and to fa-
(NLGI 2 EP
cilitate assembly operations.
ASTM D217: 265/295)
LUBRICANTS

Molikote Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, use neat or diluted with engine oil
(Dow Corning) for assembly of main engine bearings.

Vaseline Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against oxidization and corrosion.

Engine oil
Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of main engine bearings.
10W - 30

00-17
 CONVERSION FACTORS

CONVERSION FACTORS

CONVERSION FROM BRITISH TO METRIC UNITS CONVERSION FROM METRIC TO BRITISH UNITS
inch x 25,40 = mm mm x 0,0394 = inch
foot x 0,305 m x 3,281 = foot
=m
yard x 0,914 m x 1,094 = yard
Eng.miles x 1,609 = km km x 0,622 = Eng.miles
Sq.in. x 6,452 = cm² cm² x 0,155 = Sq.in.
Sq.ft. x 0,093 m² x 10,77 = Sq.ft.
= m²
Sq.yard x 0,835 m² x 1,197 = Sq.yard
Cu.in. x 16,39 = cm³ cm³ x 0,061 = Cu.in.
Cu.ft. x 28,36 m³ x 0,035 = Cu.ft
= m³
Cu.yard x 0,763 m³ x 1,311 = Cu.yard
Imp.gall. x 4,547 litres x 0,220 = Imp.gall.
US gall. x 3,785 litres x 0,264 = US gall.
= litres
pint x 0,568 litres x 1,762 = pint
quart x 1,137 litres x 0,880 = quart
US.gpm x 3,785 = ᐉ/min ᐉ/min x 0,2642 = US.gpm
oz. x 0,028 kg x 35,25 = oz.
= kg
lb. x 0,454 kg x 2,203 = lb.
lb.ft. x 0,139 = kgm kgm x 7,233 = lb.ft.
lb.in. x 17,87 = kg/m kg/m x 0,056 = lb.in.
psi x 0,070 = kg/cm² kg/cm² x 14,22 = psi
lb./Imp.gall x 0,100 kg/ᐉ x 10,00 = lb./Imp.gal.
= kg/ᐉ
lb./US.gall x 0,120 kg/ᐉ x 8,333 = lb./US.gal.
lb./cu.ft. x 16,21 = kg/m³ kg/m³ x 0,062 = lb./cu.ft.
lb.ft. x 1,356 = Nm Nm x 0,737 = lb.ft.
psi x 1,379 = bar bar x 14,503 = psi

00-18
 CONTENTS

SECTION 10

CONTENTS

1. TRANSMISSION ................................................................. 1 4. FRONT AXLE.................................................................... 40

• INTRODUCTION.................................................................. 1 • 4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT......... 41
• 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version) .................... 3 • 4.2 DIFFERENTIAL ........................................................... 43
• • 1.1.1
MAIN COMPONENTS ........................................ 3
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ..................................................... 45
• • 1.1.2
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ............ 6
• • 1.1.3
GEARBOX........................................................... 7 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CC version) .................................. 46
• • 1.1.4
MAIN CLUTCH ................................................... 9 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (LS version) ................................... 47
• • 1.1.5
HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE • 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP........................... 48
DISTRIBUTION VALVE ..................................... 10
• • 5.1.1 BOOST PUMP .................................................. 51
• • 1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC.................... 14 • • 5.1.2 HYDRAULIC PUMP .......................................... 52
• • 1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM • • 5.1.3 LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE
SCHEMATIC ..................................................... 16 CUT-OFF VALVE .............................................. 54

• 1.2 REAR AXLE ................................................................ 17 • 5.2 HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP....................... 62

• • DESCRIPTION............................................................ 17 • 5.3 STEERING GEAR PUMP............................................ 63

• • COMPONENTS .......................................................... 17 • 5.4 PRIORITY VALVE ....................................................... 64
• 1.3 REAR PTO.................................................................. 19 • 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE................. 65
• • 5.5.1 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH
2. BRAKING SYSTEM.......................................................... 21
FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP (CC) ................ 67
• 2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ..................................... 22 • • 5.5.2 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH
• 2.2 BRAKE ....................................................................... 23 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP (LS) .......... 69
• • 5.5.3 SERVICES CONTROL SECTION...................... 70
• 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM .................................... 24
• • 5.5.4 DESCRIPTIONS OF COMPONENTS................ 71
• • 2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING
• • 5.5.5 FLOW CONTROL SECTION (CC version) ........ 73
(ITALY VERSION).............................................. 24
• • 5.5.6 LIFT CONTROL VALVE SECTION .................... 76
• • 2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING
(EXPORT VERSION) ......................................... 26
• • 2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)....... 28
• • 2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION) .. 29
• • COMPRESSOR .......................................................... 30
• • PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE .................................... 31
• • CAB SUSPENSION FEED VALVE .............................. 32
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY).......................... 33
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1-WAY).......................... 34

3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION..................... 35

• 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ................. 36

10-i
1. TRANSMISSION INTRODUCTION

1. TRANSMISSION

INTRODUCTION
• This series of tractors is supplied to the customer with the POWER SHUTTLE transmission.
In this transmission, reversal of the direction of travel is managed entirely by the electronic control unit without the op-
erator having to depress the clutch pedal.
This is achieved by way of a proportional solenoid valve that directly controls the main clutch.

• The transmission can be divided into the following sections:

A. Fluid coupling
B. Gearbox
C. Rear axle
D. Rear PTO

A B C

D0004360

10-1
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1. TRANSMISSION
1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)
1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS

1 2 3 4 5 6

17

16

15

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 D0022540

1. Rear PTO control solenoid valve 6. Hydraulic gearbox distribution valve 11. Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve 16. Rear PTO speed selector lever
2. Rear PTO control valve 7. Transmission oil low pressure sensor 12. Transmission oil suction line filter 17. Rear PTO speed selector lever (Optional)
3. Engine speed sensor (nLse - nMot) 8. Gearbox output shaft speed sensor (nLsa) 13. Speed sensor for odometer (nAb)
4. Clutch control solenoid valve 9. Creeper engagement shaft 14. Clutch speed sensor (nHk)
5. Hydraulic pump for transmission 10. Transmission oil temperature sensor 15. Rear power take-off

10-3
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

18

19

23

22 21 20
18. Left brake cylinder
19. 30 km/h speed limiting pin
20. Mechanical gearbox shift lever
21. Right brake cylinder
22. Differential lock control valve
23. Differential lock control solenoid valve

10-4
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

25

24
26

29 28 27 D0022560

24. Left axle casing

25. Lift shaft
26. Right axle casing
27. Rear PTO speed sensor
28. Gearbox oil level indicator
29. Rear reduction unit oil level indicator

10-5
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

The transmission hydraulic system is supplied by a gear pump driven from a lateral power take-off.
The gear pump supplies pressurised fluid for the following uses:
• hydraulic gearbox control valve
• forward/reverse shuttle control valve
• proportional solenoid control valve for main clutch
• 4WD control solenoid valve
• rear PTO control solenoid valve
• differential lock control solenoid valve
• lubrication of the gearbox, rear differential and rear PTO clutch control shaft.

Lubrication circuit
pressure relief valve

Lubrication of
rear differential
PTO control
solenoid valve

Lubrication
Gearbox of rear PTO
lubrication drive shaft

Cooler
(not part of the
Main clutch transmission)
Four-wheel
drive control
solenoid valve

Proportional
solenoid valve

Pressure Temperature Distributore

sensor sensor comando cambio

Gear pump

Cold starting Suction filter

safety valve

D0022653

10-6
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1. TRANSMISSION
1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)
1.1.3 GEARBOX

DESCRIPTION
• IThe POWER SHUTTLE transmission receives drive from the engine (1) and transmits drive through the hydraulically-
controlled gearbox (2), the creeper unit (3), the main clutch (4) and the 6-speed mechanical gearbox (5) to the pinion
(6) and the power take-off (7) that provides the drive to the front axle .
The POWER SHUTTLE transmission is also equipped with a double-output power take-off (9) to drive the hydraulic
system pumps.

9 4
2
1
3 5
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª 2ª 1ª

8 7 D0004400

COMPONENTS
1. Engine
2. Hydraulically-controlled 8-speed gearbox (4 forward and 4 reverse)
3. Creeper unit
4. Main clutch
5. 6-speed mechanical gearbox
6. Pinion
7. 4WD engagement clutch
8. Power take-off for front axle drive
9. Power take-off for hydraulic pumps

10-7
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

GEARBOX COMPONENTS

1 2 3 4 7 10 15

5 6 8 9 11 12 13 14
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª

2ª 1ª

D0005190
23 21 22 20 19 18 17 16
1. Flywheel and damper 6. Clutch “A” 11. Hydraulic pumps PTO drive gear 16. 1st and 2nd speed synchronizer 21. Clutch “G”
2. Clutch housing 7. Creeper unit 12. 3rd and 4th speed synchronizer 17. Pinion 22. Clutch “B”
3. Input shaft 8. Creeper unit synchronizer 13. 5th and 6th speed synchronizer 18. 4WD control clutch 23. Clutch “D”
4. Hydraulically-controlled gearbox 9. Main clutch 14. 1st and 2nd speed drive shaft 19. Creeper unit driven shaft
5. Clutch “C” 10. Mechanical gearbox 15. Rear PTO drive shaft 20. Clutch “F”

10-8
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1. TRANSMISSION
1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)
1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH
The main clutch of the POWER SHUTTLE transmission is an oil-bath multiplate unit with hydraulic control.
Clutch operation is entirely automatic and is controlled by an electronic control unit which receives signals from the clutch
pedal position sensor.
The system has a clutch control solenoid valve that directs pressurised fluid to the clutch in accordance with the pedal po-
sition.

4
2
3
1

ECU

D0005200

1. Clutch pedal
2. Clutch pedal position sensor
3. Electronic transmission control unit
4. Transmission gear pump
5. Clutch control proportional solenoid valve
6. Main clutch

10-9
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE

The function of the hydraulic gearbox distribution valve is to pilot and control the engagement of the gears in the hy-
draulically-controlled gearbox.
The distribution valve controls the operation of:
A. the hydraulic gearbox control valve (1) to select S, H, M and L ratios
B. the shuttle control valve (2) to select FORWARD and REVERSE gears.
This distribution valve also supplies hydraulic fluid for the lubrication of the mechanical gearbox, the rear differential and
the rear PTO control shaft.

1
A

Y7
B

F
Y6

Y5

VR1 VR2

VR
Y1

G1
Y4

H1

B1 S2

W
S1
R1 U

P2

P1

H2

PILOT P4
PRESSURE
VALVE 10 bar
Y2 G2

PILOT PRESSURE P4
VALVE 18 bar

1
Y3
D

Y8

CONTROL AND
LUBRICATING PUMP D0005210

10-10
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

A. GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE

PRESSURE TEST POINTS

a b c d e f

g
h

n m D0004440

Pos. Function Thread size

a. A or F clutch pressure M10x1

b. B or G clutch pressure M10x1

c. Y3 or Y4 solenoid valve pressure M10x1

d. Pressure Pg to relief valve M10x1

e. Pressure Pr from relief valve (18 bar) M10x1

f. Engagement pressure of clutch C or D M10x1

g. General pressure (18 bar) M10x1

h. Engagement pressure of clutch A/B or F/G M10x1

l. Pilot pressure (10 bar) M10x1

m. D clutch pressure M10x1

n. C clutch pressure M10x1

p. Modulated pressure M10x1

10-11
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

MAIN COMPONENTS

G1 S1 H2 H1

B1 Y3

R1 Y4

P1 Y1

P2 Y5

U Y2

P4 G2 P3

D0005320

B1 Breather valve
G1 Clutch selection valve for A/B or F/G clutches
S1 Relief valve
H2 Clutch engagement valve for C/D clutches
H1 Clutch engagement valve for A/B or F/G clutches
Y3 Pilot solenoid valve for engagement valve H2
Y4 Pilot solenoid valve for engagement valve H1
Y1 Pilot solenoid valve for clutch selection valve G1
Y5 Pilot solenoid valve for road/field selection valve
Y2 Pilot solenoid valve for C or D clutch selection valve G2
P3 Pilot pressure regulating valve
G2 Clutch selection valve forC or D clutches
P4 General pressure regulating valve
U Road/field operating mode selection valve
P1 Pressure modulating valve
P2 2-stage valve
R1 Null shift valve

10-12
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

B. SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE

MAIN COMPONENTS

VR Y6 Y7 S2

1 1

D0005330

Y6 Pilot solenoid valve for FORWARD gear

Y7 Pilot solenoid valve for REVERSE gear
VR FORWARD/REVERSE control spool valve
S2 Relief valve
1 Neutral return device

10-13
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC

Forward

C A C A C A C A

Input
shaft D B D B D B D B

C A

Output
shaft GF GF GF GF

L gear M gear H gear S gear

D B

Reverse

GF

C A C A C A C A
Neutral

D B D B D B D B

GF GF GF GF

L gear M gear H gear S gear

D0004501

a b

n m D0004441

10-14
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1. TRANSMISSION
1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from L to S gear (L –> M –> H –> S)
Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
L M H S L M H S

Y6 ● ● ● ● ● = Solenoid valve energised

Y7 ● ● ● ● ❍ = Solenoid valve briefly
energised
Y1 ● ● ● ● during gear change
Y2 ● ● ● ●
Y3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Y4 ❍ ❍
Clutches A A B B F F G G
engaged C D C D C D C D

Pressure test a a b b a a b b
points n m n m n m n m

Solenoid valve operation when shifting from S to L gear (S –> H –> M –> L)
Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
S H M L S H M L

Y6 ● ● ● ● ● = Solenoid valve energised

Y7 ● ● ● ● ❍ = Solenoid valve briefly
energised
Y1 ● ● ● ● during gear change
Y2 ● ● ●
Y3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Y4 ❍ ❍
Clutches B B A A G G F F
engaged D C D C D C D C

Pressure test b b a a b b a a
points m n m n m n m n

10-15
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)

1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

COMPONENTS
A1 Electronic transmission control unit (EST45)
EST-45
SD 2 59 36 SD 4 A9
A2.1 Range selector lever (L M H S)
ED 11 29
ED 8 44 57 ADM 5
EU 1
ED 6
38
67
11
34
ADM 6
ADM 7
A2.2 Shuttle control lever (FORWARD/REVERSE
ED 7 22 33 ADM 8
ED 1 63 50 AIP 7
ED 2
ED 3
65
20 A1
32
55
AIP 3
AIP 4
A3 Gearbox control valve
ED 12 30
EDM 1
ER 1
31
39
56 AIP 1 H3 A5 Diagnostics
EF 7 17 5 ADM 4 A12
EF 6 40
EF 5 16 A6 Display
EF 4 62 14 SD 1 A6
15 SDDK
H5
A9 Tachymeter

S7 A5 A10 Engine load sensor

A11 Proportional solenoid valve for main clutch control
B10 +
-
A2.1 A12 INFOCENTER
A2.2

B1 Engine speed sensor (nLse - nMot)

B11 B13
B3 Hydraulic gearbox output speed sensor (nAb)
A11 S4

A10 S6 PEDALE
FRIZIONE
K1 B4 Transmission input speed sensor (nLsa)
B9 Clutch speed sensor (nHk)

B3 B9
TRASMISSIONE
6 VELOCITA' B4
B10 Clutch pedal position sensor
MOTORE
ENDOTERMICO
FRIZIONE
B11 Temperature sensor
A3 A4
B1 B13 Clutch proximity sensor
F1 Fuse (8A)
F2 Fuse (8A)
H3 Low oil pressure indicator lamp
H5 Audible alarm
1 F1 2 KL.30
(+)

(+)
1 F2 2 KL.15
K1 Interlock starter relay 70A
1
S7
1 1
S6
S4 Mechanical gearbox neutral sensor
B13 H3 P
B9 3 B4 3 B3 3 B1 3 2 2 2
A5 1
2 2 2 2 44 45 23 68 5 21 30 29 S6 Transmission oil low pressure sensor (18 bar)
ED8 VP1 VPE1 VPE2 ADM4 ED10 ED12 ED11
4 15 2
1 1 1 1 VMG2 SDDK
17
3
EF7
36 A6 X2:D H5 S7 Interlock button
40
VMG1 SD4 A9
EF6
62 3 X2:A
EF4 14 X1:B
16 SD1
EF5 57 B
38 ADM5 Y1(GV1)
EU1 11 C
37 ADM6 Y2(GV2)
2 AU 34 D
ADM7 Y3(HV1) X2:C
A1 33 E A3
B10 H
3
ADM8
50 A
Y4(HV2) A12
T AIP7
24 Y5(MVR)
1 VMGA1 8 F
VPS2 (+) OPTION
H
T
B11 32 1
39 AIP3 Y6(MVV)
ER1 55 2
VP 67 AIP4 Y7(MVR) A4
A2.1 TIPP + 22
ED6 12 3
(+)
TIPP - ED7
56 1
63 AIP1 FK
V - AUTOM. 65
ED1
VPS1
13 2
(+) A11
VP N - AUTOM. ED2
20
R - AUTOM. ED3
EDM1 VM1 VM2 SD2
A2.2
KL.30 31 01 02 59
87 85
1
K1 S4 OPTION
30 86 A10
2

KL.50a KL.50
Mot. avv. Blocco. avv.

D0017260

10-16
1. TRANSMISSION 1.2 REAR AXLE

1. TRANSMISSION
1.2 REAR AXLE
DESCRIPTION
The rear axle receives drive from the pinion (4) and transmits drive through the differential (5) and epicyclic reduction units
(2) to the rear wheels (1).
The rear axle is equipped with an electro-hydraulically controlled differential lock (6) and two hydraulically operated brakes
(3

4
2 2
3 3
1 1

6 5

D0004450

COMPONENTS
1. Wheels
2. Epicyclic reduction unit
3. Brake
4. Pinion
5. Differential
6. Differential lock

10-17
1. TRANSMISSION 1.2 REAR AXLE

COMPONENTS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D0022570

12 11 10 9

1. Differential lock 7. Hub

2. Central axle housing 8. Axle casing
3. Differential 9. Planet carrier
4. Brake control device 10. Ring gear
5. Brake 11. Planet pinion
6. Half-shaft 12. Crown wheel

10-18
1. TRANSMISSION 1.3 REAR PTO

1.3 REAR PTO

DESCRIPTION
The rear PTO provides drive for external implements at a preselected rotation speed.
The rotary drive is taken directly from the engine and then reduced through a 2 -or 4-speed gearbox with manual speed se-
lection.
The PTO is engaged by way of an electro-hydraulically controlled clutch.

a b

3 3
1 1

4 4

6 5 6 5

562 1046 c d
D0004460

1. Clutch Speed of PTO output shaft - 4-speed version

2. Synchronizer 1 Synchronizer 2
3. Intermediate shaft Synchronizer 1
c d
4. Intermediate shaft
5. PTO shaft a 562 1046
6. Synchronizer 2 b 772 1437

10-19
1. TRANSMISSION 1.3 REAR PTO

COMPONENTS

2 SPEED VERSION 4 SPEED VERSION

a b
1 2 1 2

3 3

4 4
8

5 5

6 6

7 7

D0005340
c d c d

1. PTO engagement clutch 5. Synchronizer (speeds a/b)

2. PTO input shaft 6. PTO end shaft
3. Intermediate shaft 7. PTO output shaft
4. Intermediate shaft 8. Synchronizer (speeds c/d).

10-20
2. BRAKING SYSTEM

2. BRAKING SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION
The braking system is comprised of 2 braking devices (one for each rear wheel) operated by two hydraulic pumps by way
of mechanical controls.
Each pump supplies fluid to the brake on one side (left or right) thereby allowing the operator to brake on one side only and
thus reduce the steering radius.

3
2
5

4
6

8
7

D0022580

1. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Rear axle

2. Right master cylinder 6 Right brake
3. Brake microswitches (n° 2) 7. Left brake
4. Brake pedal 8 Left master cylinder

10-21
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

1
2
3

D0004520

1. Bleed screw TECHNICAL DATA

2. Barrel Piston diameter: 23.81 mm (0.938 in.)
3. Push-rod Piston stroke: 30 mm (1.182 in.)
Maximum operating pressure: 120 bar (1740 psi)

10-22
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.2 BRAKE

2.2 BRAKE

5
1

A-A

A A

7
D0004530

1. Piston 5. Support
2. Plunger 6. Rod
3. Adjustment nuts 7. Parking brake control lever
4. Lever

10-23
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

The tractor may be equipped with one of the four following trailer braking systems:
1. hydraulic trailer braking (Italy version)
2. hydraulic trailer braking (Export version)
3. air trailer braking (Italy version)
4. air trailer braking (Export version)

2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)

Hand
Freno brake
a mano

1
3

P
Y

E
B N 2
2

D0012720

1. Valve activation lever in position “1”

• When the lever (1) is in position “1” (valve activated) and the brake pedals are not pressed, a pressure of 12.5 bar
(181.3 psi) is available at port B.
• This pressure is supplied constantly to the trailer to release the parking brake.
• When the operator engages the parking brake, the solenoid valve (2) is energised; this nullifies the pressure at
port B.
• The pressure at port B is directly proportional to the pressure present in the tractor braking circuits Y.

2. Valve activation lever in position “O”

• When the lever (1) is in position “O” (valve deactivated), there is no pressure at port B.
In this condition, the pressure at port B is always null independently of the pressure in the tractor braking circuits.

10-24
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

1
N

E B

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P

E
B T
D0012730

FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA

Port P - Valve feed • Maximum pressure at port N:
Port N - To lubrication line 210 bar (3046 psi)
Port B - To trailer brake • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Drain 12.5±2 bar (181.3±29 psi)
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Maximum pressure at port B:
135 --0 5 bar (1957.5 --0 72.5 psi)
Port LS - Load Sensing signal
• Feed flow rate:
20 -- 80 ᐉ/min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)

10-25
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)

N
LS
B

D0004560

• When the brakes are not operated the pressure at port B is null.
• When the operator applies the tractor brakes, the pressure in the circuit pilots the braking valve and the pressure at
port B increases proportionally to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.

10-26
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P T

D0004570
N B

Port P - Valve feed TECHNICAL DATA

Port N - To lubrication line • Maximum pressure at port N:
Port B - To trailer brake 210 bar (3046 psi)
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Drain 0 bar (0 psi)
• Maximum pressure at port B:
142 +0 8 bar (2059 +0 116 psi)
• Feed flow rate:
20÷80 ᐉ/min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)

10-27
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)

3
E
2 4 5
1

G
10
11
9 8

STANDARD SYSTEM BRAKING

D0004600

COMPONENTS
1. Compressed air reservoir 7. Trailer braking valve
2. Air compressor 8. Circuit pressure sensor
3. Engine 9. Circuit pressure indicator
4. Pressure limiting valve 10. Brake master cylinder
(7.8 bar (113 psi)) 11. Brake
5. Quick-action coupler for trailer
6. Feed valve for cab air suspension

10-28
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)

3
E
2 4

1 5

Red

5
6

Yellow 5

7 Black

8
G

10 9

11 12

STANDARD SYSTEM BRAKING

D0004591

1. Compressed air reservoir 7. Trailer braking valve (2-way)

2. Air compressor 8. Trailer braking valve (1-way)
3. Engine 9. Circuit pressure sensor.
4. Pressure limiting valve 10. Circuit pressure indicator
(7.8 bar (113 psi)) 11. Brake master cylinder
5. Quick-action coupler for trailer 12. Brake
6. Feed valve for cab air suspension

10-29
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

COMPRESSOR

4
a

D0004620

a. Port 0.1 - Compressor lubrication TECHNICAL DATA

b. Port 0 Bore: 90 mm (3.546 in.)
c. Port 2 - Compressed air delivery Stroke: 36 mm (1.418 in.)
1. Cylinder head Displacement: 229 cm³
2. Cylinder Max. pressure.: 10 bar (145 psi)
Crankshaft end float: 0.08 -- 0.38 mm
3. Flange
(0.003 – 0.015 in.)
4. Crankshaft

10-30
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE

1 21

1-2

DIAGRAM

7,8±0,2 bar

1 21
0
12 + 2 bar

22 3 1-2

D0004690

Port 1 - From compressor TECHNICAL DATA

Port 3 - Excess pressure vent Cut-out pressure: 7,8±0,2 bar (113±2.9 psi)
Port 21 - To compressed air reservoir Cut-in pressure: 0.6 -- 1 bar (8.7 – 14.5 psi)
Relief valve setting: 12 +0 2 bar (174 +0 29 psi)

10-31
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

CAB SUSPENSION FEED VALVE

FUNCTION
Supplies compressed air to the pneumatic cab suspension system only when the pressure in the trailer braking circuit ex-
ceeds 6 --0 0.3 bar (87 --0 4.35 psi)

D0004700

TECHNICAL DATA
Opening pressure: 6 --0 0.3 bar (87 --0 4.35 psi)
Maximum operating pressure: 13 bar (188 psi)

10-32
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY)

41 42 1

DIAGRAM 3

1
41
42

P2 (bar)
9
Pressione di mandata

7
2
)
,42

6
41
f (P

)
5 42
f(
1
2=

2=
P4

4 P4
1)
3 P4
f(
2=
2 P4

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
P41/P42 (bar) D0004760
Pressione idraulico di comando

1. Parking brake actuating lever Port 1 - From compressed air reservoir

2. Bleed screw Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 41 - From left brake
Port 42 - From right brake

10-33
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1-WAY)

4
2
1

D0004710

Port 1 - From compressed air reservoir

Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 4 - Pilot from delivery line to trailer
(2-way braking)

10-34
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

DESCRIPTION
The function of the hydraulic front suspension system is to absorb impacts when travelling over rough terrain and to keep
the tractor body on an even keel on the road.
The system comprises:
• swinging axle support arm (1)
• position sensor (2)
• 2 suspension cylinders (3)
• front suspension control valve (4)
• electronic control unit (5)

4
5

2
1 D0004720

10-35
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE

3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE

FUNCTION
In addition to the primary function of enabling front axle suspension by charging the hydraulic-pneumatic accumulators
that constitute the elastic elements of the system, the front suspension control valve also serves to control the raising and
lowering of the front axle.

1 ASP

A
SV1

BL2 RV3

DBV2 LS-V
LS 6
5 BL3 AV2

SV2
2
B

ZSP1
ASP
RV1
BL1 3

DIAGRAM
5
A LS
LS DBV1
LS-V P T
BL3

BL2
ASP1 ASP2 T AV1
S
RV2
AV1 DBV1 DBV2
SV1

250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar RV3

A
AV2
RV2

H
ZSP1 SV2
BL1
RV1
B P
D0004750

1. Cylinder retraction control solenoid valve 5. Pressure discharge valve

2. LS signal control solenoid valve 6. Accumulator (setting: 140 bar)
3. Cylinder extension control solenoid valve 7. Use A relief valve (setting: 250 bar)
4. Accumulator (setting: 65 bar) 8. Use B relief valve (setting: 250 bar)

10-36
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE

OPERATION

1. When the suspension is deactivated

LS
LS
A
1
LS-V

BL3
P T 7

6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2
4 S

DBV1 DBV2
SV1
AV1
RV3
A AV2

3 ZSP1
RV2
5 2
H

b
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P

a D0004640

• When the suspension is deactivated, the electronic control unit energises the solenoid (1) by sending an LS signal to
the priority valve (in the case of the gear pump version) or to the variable displacement pump.
• This allows the pressurised oil from the pump (2) to flow to line a and compress the membrane of the accumulator (3)
up to the maximum circuit pressure.
• The oil is discharged from the piston side through passage B and through the solenoid valve (7) which is energised.
• The piston (4) is consequently pushed upwards to its stroke-end position, thereby returning the system to fixed axle
condition.
• The suspension is deactivated by the operator pressing a switch.

10-37
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE

2. When the operator activates the system

A
LS
LS
LS-V
P T
BL3

6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2 S
4
DBV1 DBV2
SV1
AV1
RV3
5
A AV2

RV2
ZSP1
2
b H
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P

a D0004650

• When the operator presses the switch to activate the suspension, the electronic control unit energises the solenoids
(1) and (5).
• This allows the pressurised oil from the pump (2) to flow to line b and thus start to push the piston (4) downwards.
• At the same time, the oil compresses the membranes of the accumulators and the oil in lines a and b increases.
• When the pressure in line a reaches the opening pressure of the relief valve (8), the valve opens and discharges some
of the oil to the drain circuit.
• When the position sensor detects that the suspension has attained the levelling position, the electronic control unit
de-activates the solenoids (1) and (5) and the part of the system containing the precharged accumulators is isolated
from the rest of the system.

10-38
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE

3. When the system is active

• When the tractor is in motion and the wheels encounter an obstacle, the front axle is pushed upwards.
• This causes the pressure P2 to increase (the accumulators 6 are compressed) while the pressure P1 decreases (ac-
cumulator 3 is decompressed).
• The pressure balance is thus altered and the system (which is closed) acts to restore the original condition.
1

A
LS
LS
LS-V
P T
BL3

6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2 S

DBV1 DBV2
SV1
P2 AV1
RV3
5
A AV2

3 ZSP1 RV2
2
P1 H
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P

4 D0004660
S

S max
P2 max
S,P2

S min
t
P1

P1 min

t shock t damping t
D0002411

10-39
4. FRONT AXLE

4. FRONT AXLE

B B

1710
=

A A
=

52º –0 2

1710

D0004780

10-40
4. FRONT AXLE 4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT

4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT

VERSION WITHOUT SBA

4 5 6 7
8
1 2 3
9
10 11

12
18 17

16 15 14 13 D0004790

A-A

1. Planet carrier 10. Oil seal

2. Planet pinion 11. Plain bearing
3. Ring gear 12. Half-shaft
4. Bearing 13. Lower kingpin
5. Flange 14. Oil seal
6. Oil seal 15. Bearing
7. Upper kingpin 16. Oil seal
8. Hub carrier 17. Bearing
9. Front axle 18. Sun wheel

10-41
4. FRONT AXLE 4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT

VERSION WITH SBA

4 5 6 7
8
1 2 3 C
9
10 11

12
18 17
16 15 14 13
B-B

19

19 20
C-C 21 22
D0004800

1. Planet carrier 12. Half-shaft

2. Planet pinion 13. Lower kingpin
3. Ring gear 14. Oil seal
4. Bearing 15. Bearing
5. Flange 16. Oil seal
6. Oil seal 17. Bearing
7. Upper kingpin 18. Sun wheel
8. Hub carrier 19. Steering sensor (n° 2)
9. Front axle 20. Shim
10. Oil seal 21. Disc
11. Plain bearing 22. Lock ring

10-42
4. FRONT AXLE 4.2 DIFFERENTIAL

4.2 DIFFERENTIAL

VERSION WITH 100% HYDRAULIC LOCKING

3 4 5 6 7 8
2 9
1 10
11

21 12
20
19
18

17
13
16

14
15

D0004810

1. Roller cage 12. Spacer

2. Belleville springs 13. Bearing
3. Bearing 14. Oil seal
4. Cover 15. Hub
5. Clutch plates 16. Pinion shaft
6. Differential cage 17. Bearing
7. Planet pinion 18. Crown wheel
8. Differential cage 19. Thrust plate
9. Sun gear 20. Thrust levers
10. Bearing 21. Piston
11. Half-shaft

10-43
4. FRONT AXLE 4.2 DIFFERENTIAL

45% SELF-LOCKING VERSION

2 3 4 5 6

1 7
8

14

13

9
12

10
11

D0005350

1. Bearing 8. Half-shaft
2. Clutch plates 9. Bearing
3. Differential cage 10. Oil seal
4. Planet pinion 11. Hub
5. Differential cage 12. Pinion shaft
6. Sun gear 13. Bearing
7. Bearing 14. Crown wheel

10-44
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION
This series of tractors may be equipped with two different types of hydraulic system:
1- CCLS hydraulic system, with fixed displacement pump.
2- LS hydraulic system, with variable displacement pump.
The CCLS system has fixed displacement gear pump that supplies oil to the various hydraulic functions at a flow rate that
is proportional to the engine speed.
When the engine is running at maximum speed and none of the hydraulic actuators are in operation (e.g. during road use),
oil is pumped through the system at around 80 litres per minute (with a consequent increase in temperature and fuel con-
sumption).
Furthermore, if two or more actuators are operated when the engine is running at low speed, the pump will be unable to
meet the demand and consequently the actuators will operate at a lower speed in accordance with the available oil flow.
The LS system has a variable displacement piston pump which sends oil to the hydraulic functions only according to need.
In this system, when the engine is running at maximum speed and no hydraulic actuators are in operation, the pump ef-
fectively only circulates the oil that is dispersed through internal leakage in the devices connected to the system (just a few
litres per minute), thus saving energy and fuel.
Furthermore, the variable displacement pump has a higher capacity than the gear pump (120 litres/min.) and can thus pro-
vide a sufficient flow rate to operate all the hydraulic functions simultaneously.

10-45
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CC version)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CC version)

6 A
LS
LS
LS-V P T

27
BL3
10
T
ASP1 ASP2
p =65bar BL2 N B
9
p =65bar 0
0

7 DBV1 DBV2

25
S
AV1

250 +10 bar

250 +10 bar

SV1 Y
28 23 24 3
RV3

3 bar
A 3

T
P
12
ZSP1

26
RV2 AV2
p =140bar
0

21 H
SV2
8 LS 11
22 B RV1
BL1
P CF
M4
P
P
L
EF

31 30 29 T R
PP

17 16 LS

18

15 E

14 Y A B A B A B A B

5 EP WV1 WV2 EHR WV3 WV4 AP

p=8.4 bar in pos. 1 or 2

F F F F

p= 3 bar in pos. 0
H
2 2 2 2

0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1

P
S

R
M7 R
P R1 A
13

M6 M3
2 4

1 3
1- Suction line filter 14 - Suction line filter 25 - Pressure control valve
2- Hydraulic pump (16 cc/rev) (β10=1,5 - β30=20; secondary filter 200 200 µn) (20 --0 2 bar)
3- Suction line filter (25 µn) 15 - Hydraulic pump (36 cc/rev) 26 - Oil cooler
4- Hydraulic pump (32 cc/rev) 16 - Temperature sensor 27 - Lubrication circuit pressure relief
5- Auxiliary services control valve 17 - Pressure sensor valve (4 bar)
D0022660
6- Front suspension control valve 18 - Safety valve (for cold starting) 28 - Gearbox lubrication
7- Front axle suspension cylinders 19 - Proportional solenoid valve 29 - Differential lock actuator solenoid
20 - Main clutch valve
8- Priority valve
21 - Gearbox control distribution valve 30 - PTO control solenoid valve
9- Hydraulic trailer braking valve
22 - Rear axle lubrication 31 - Four-wheel drive control solenoid
10 - Quick-action trailer brake coupler
valve
11 - Power steering 23 - Rear differential lubrication
12 - Steering cylinder 24 - Lubrication of rear PTO drive shaft
13 - Lift cylinder

10-46
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (LS version)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (LS version)

6 A
LS 10
28 LS N B
9 12
LS-V P T
BL3
M4
Y
T
11
26
ASP1 ASP2
p =65bar p =65bar BL2
0 0
P L
29 24 25 7 AV1
DBV1 DBV2 S
P T

250 +10 bar

250 +10 bar

SV1

RV3

27
3
A 3
T R
22 ZSP1
p =140bar
RV2 AV2

23
0

H 8
SV2 LS LS
BL1
B RV1
P CF
P
32 31 30 EF

18 17 21
PP

19 20 0.3

16 E

15
A B A B A B A B Y
5 EP WV1 WV2 EHR WV3 WV4 EP
F F F F
H
2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1

M7 S

M3
P R R1 A

13

0.5 bar
B M5 Ls
M6 G

filter FO 14
M2 235 bar

2 FI
5 bar

57

4
1 S L1.L M1

1- Suction line filter

2- Hydraulic pump (16 cc/rev) 3
3- Suction line filter (25 µn)
4- Hydraulic pump (32 cc/giro)
5- Auxiliary services control valve D0022670

6- Front suspension control valve 12 - Steering cylinder 17 - Temperature sensor 23 - Rear axle lubrication 29 - Gearbox lubrication
7- Front axle suspension cylinders 13 - Lift cylinders 18 - Pressure sensor 24 - Rear differential lubrication 30 - Differential lock control solenoid valve
8- Priority valve 14 - Power beyond 19 - Safety valve (for cold starting) 25 - Lubrication of rear PTO drive shaft 31 - PTO control solenoid valve
9- Hydraulic trailer braking valve 15 - Suction line filter 20 - Proportional solenoid valve 26 - Pressure control valve (20 --0 2 bar) 32 - Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve
10 - Quick-action trailer brake coupler (β10=1,5 - β30=20; secondary filter 200 µn) 21 - Main clutch 27 - Oil cooler
11 - Power steering 16 - Hydraulic pump (36 cc/rev) 22 - Gearbox control distribution valve 28 - Lubrication circuit pressure relief valve (4 bar)

10-47
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

L1 A
M1

M2
C C
B A
X
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
2 3
S
X

FO
M1
B

235 bar L
L1
G 1
S
5 bar
FI

FO FI M2 4
D0004900

FUNCTION COMPONENTS
Port L: drain 1. Antishock valve
Port X: LS signal 2. Load Sensing valve
Port S: suction 3. Pressure cut-off valve
Port B: delivery 4. By-pass valve
Port G: transmission lubrication
Port FI: filter inlet
Port FO: filter outlet

10-48
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

6
5
4 7 8
3

10
2
1

19

18
17
16 15 14 13 12 11
A-A
D0004960

COMPONENTS
1. Input shaft 11. Boost pump
2. Oil seal 12. Boost pump housing
3. Swash plate return spring 13. Bearing
4. Swash plate 14. Valve plate
5. Control rod 15. Pistons (n° 9)
6. Control piston 16. Piston retainer ring
7. Cylinder barrel 17. Piston shoe
8. Spacer 18. Taper roller bearing
9. End cover 19. Pump housing
10. Roller bearings

10-49
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

COMPONENTS
1. Pressure limiting valve
2. Filter by-pass valve
3. Filter by-pass valve spring D0005110 B-B 3 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

12 11 10 9 8 7
D0004910
C-C

COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing spool valve 7. Adjustment nuts
2. Restrictor 8. Spring cover
3. Collar 9. Pressure cut-off valve spring
4. Load Sensing valve spring 10. Collar
5. Spring cover 11. Restrictor (Ø 0.6 mm) (0.024 in.)
6. Adjustment nuts 12. Pressure cut-off valve spool

10-50
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5.1.1 BOOST PUMP

FUNCTION
• Rotary drive and torque is transmitted to the pump from the shaft and converted into hydraulic energy. The pressurised
oil flow from the boost pump is directed to the variable displacement pump and the transmission lubrication circuit.

3
2

45cc

1 57cc 5 6
4

D0004820

OPERATION
• The boost pump (1) draws oil from the rear gearbox and directs it under pressure to the filter (2) and the variable dis-
placement pump (3).
• The pressurised oil from the boost pump is also used for lubrication of the transmission (4).
• The pressure generated by the boost pump is regulated by the pressure limiting valve (5) (setting: 5 bar (72.3 psi)) that
prevents excessive pressure from building in the lubrication circuit on cold-starting and during cold weather
conditions.
• The pressure-boosting circuit also includes a low boost pressure sensor (6) (set to 5 bar) that detects clogging of the
filter (2) and alerts the operator by illuminating a warning light

10-51
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5.1.2 HYDRAULIC PUMP

FUNCTION
• The rotary drive and torque transmitted from the
shaft to the pump is converted into hydraulic energy;
the pressurised flow from the pump varies according
to the demand from the hydraulic loads.
• The flow rate can be varied by altering the angle of
the swash plate.

5
3 A 4
2

6 B 7
D0005010

STRUCTURE
• The cylinder block (4) is fixed to the shaft (1) by a • The pistons (5) stroke axially within their bores in the
broached fitting B and the shaft (1) is supported by cylinder block (4).
the front and rear bearings.
• The rotation of the cylinder block (4) causes the oil in
• The pistons (5) have ball ends; the piston shoes (6) fit the bores to be pressurised; the positions of the inlet
around the ball ends of the pistons to form a single and outlet ports are determined by slots in the valve
assembly. The pistons (5) and the shoes (6) together plate (7).
form a ball joint. The oil is drawn into the bores and forced out
through the slots in the valve plate (7).
• The swash plate (3) has a flat surface A against which
the piston shoes slide (6) with a circular motion.

10-52
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

OPERATION
1. Pump operation
1 - The cylinder block (4) rotates with the shaft (1)
and the piston shoes (6) slide on the flat surface
«A». 3 A 6 S 4 C
The swash plate (3) can swing within the arc «B»;
the stroke of the pistons varies according to the
angle «α» between the shaft axis (1) and the X
1
x
axis of the swash plate (3).
Angle «α» is known as the «swash plate angle». ␣
2 - When the axis X of the swash plate (3) is at an an-
gle «α» to the shaft (1) and consequently to the
cylinder block (4), the surface «A» acts as a cam
for the piston shoes (6). Consequently, as the
shaft rotates, the pistons (5) stroke within their
bores in the cylinder block (4), thereby a creating
a difference between the volumes C and D which
causes oil to be drawn in and forced out in quan- B Fig. 1
D
tities equal to this difference (D – C=delivery).
In other terms, as the cylinder block (4) rotates,
the volume of chamber D is reduced while the
volume of chamber C is increased, thereby
causing oil to be drawn in.
(Fig. 1 shows the condition of the pump on com-
pletion of the suction stage in chamber D and the
delivery stage in chamber C ).
3 - When the axis X of the swash plate (3) is parallel
to the axis of the cylinder block (4) (swash plate 3 4 C
angle «α»=0), the difference between the vol-
umes C and D inside the cylinder block (6) is zero
and no oil is pumped (Fig. 2).
(In reality, the swash plate angle «α» is never truly
equal to 0).
4 - The pump delivery is therefore directly propor- x
tional to the swash plate angle «α».

2. Controlling the requirement of oil

• At a given rotation speed input, the required oil
flow is controlled by the angle «α» between the
swash plate (3) and the shaft (1).
The swash plate (3) is inclined by the springs (10). Fig. 2 D
D0000530
Against the spring works the control piston (8).
The position of the control piston (8) defines the
angle «α». 8
• Below the max. pressure «α» is adjusted in this 2 3 C
way, that between the pressure of the pump and
the pressure of LS-signal is a certain difference 10
(control pressure difference).
• Work the pump at the max. pressure, «α» is ad-
justed to that position which guaranteed not to
exceed this pressure. ␣
That means «α» is set to a smaller value than
from LS-signal whished.

Fig. 3 D D0005020

10-53
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5.1.3 LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE

1 2

PLS=PA

⌬PR 7 8 PA
4 6 PP
3

D0004830

COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing valve spool
2. Load sensing valve spring
3. Pressure cut-off valve spool
4. Pressure cut-off valve spring
5. Swash plate return spring
6. Control piston
7. Directional control valve
8. Load

10-54
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Swash-plate angle control
• The swash-plate angle of the pump (and consequently the pump displacement), is controlled in such a way that the
pressure difference ∆PR between the pump delivery pressure PP and the delivery pressure PLS to the load at the
work port of the control valve is maintained at a constant value. (∆PR = Pump delivery pressure PP -- PLS delivery
pressure to load).
• If the pressure difference ∆PR falls relative to the pressure setting of the LS valve, the swash plate angle will increase.
If the pressure difference ∆PR rises, the swash plate angle will decrease.
★ For details of this mechanism, see the description of the «HYDRAULIC PUMP».

Directional
control valve

T PLS
Delivery pump
PP

Control piston

TP Valve

LS Valve

D0004841

10-55
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

LOAD SENSING (LS) VALVE

FUNCTION
• The LS valve regulates the pump delivery in accordance with the position of the control lever of the directional control
valve i.e. in accordance with the demand from the loads.
• The LS valve senses the demand from the loads by way of the pressure difference ∆PR between the pump delivery
pressure PP and the pressure at the outlet port of the directional control valve PLS ; this enables the valve to regulate
the delivery Q of the main pump.
(PP, PLS and ∆PR, are respectively: the pump delivery pressure, the pressure of the Load Sensing signal and dif-
ference between these two pressures).
• In other terms, the LS valve detects the pressure difference ∆PR, generated by the the flow of oil passing through the
passages uncovered by the spool and regulates the pump delivery Q so as to maintain a constant pressure drop.
This means that the pump delivery is proportional to the demand from the directional control valve.

OPERATION
Pump operation can be divided into four stages:
a. When the directional control valve is in neutral position
b. When a control lever is operated
c. When the flow rate stabilises
d. When the system enters “saturation” condition

10-56
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

a. When the directional control valve is in «NEUTRAL» position

b 1 d e a 2

PP T PLS

PEN
PP Min Max
7

X
M 5 6
D0004850

• The pressure PLS of the LS signal from the control valve outlet port, enters the chamber a of the LS valve; the pump
delivery pressure PP enters the chamber b on the opposite side.
• The shift in the position of the spool (1) is determined by the combination of the force exerted by the pressure PLS plus
the force of the spring (2) and the force exerted on the opposite side of the spool by the pressure PP.
• Before the engine is started, the control piston (6) is pushed to the right by the spring (5) (position corresponding to
the maximum swash plate angle).
• When the engine is started, if all the control valve spools are in «NEUTRAL» position, the pressure PLS of the LS sig-
nal remains at 0 bar (0 psi) because there is no flow through the control valves and the signal is connected to drain.
At the same time, the pump delivery pressure PP increases because the hydraulic actuators are stationary.
When the force exerted by the pressure PP in chamber b overcomes the force of the spring (2), the spool (1) shifts to
the right thereby allowing the pressure PP to flow to the chamber X of the piston (6) as the connection is made be-
tween the passages c and d.
• The force exerted by the oil pressure on the piston (6) overcomes the force exerted by the spring (5). This causes the
piston to shift to the left i.e. in the direction of the minimum swash plate angle.
• The pump delivery pressure PP stabilises around 22 bar (319 psi), which corresponds to the standby pressure.

10-57
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

b. When a control lever is operated

b 1 d e a 2

PP T PLS

7 8

PEN
PP Min Max
f

X
M 5 6
D0004860

• When a control lever is moved from the NEUTRAL position, this generates an LS signal corresponding to the load
delivery pressure PLS.
• The LS signal pressure in chamber a causes the spool to shift to the left, thereby connecting the passages d and e.
The chamber X is depressurised and the spring (5) causes the swash plate to move to the maximum displacement an-
gle.
• System balance is restored when the pressure ∆PR exerts on the spool (1) a force equal to the difference in force due
to the spring (2) thus restoring the connection between the passages c and d.

10-58
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

c. When the flow rate stabilises

d 1 2

c
d

PP T PLS
g

PEN
PP

X
M 5 6
D0004870

• When the pump delivery reaches the demand from the auxiliary control valve, the pump delivery pressure PP present
in the chamber b of the LS valve balances the combined force of the pressure PLS of the LS in chamber a and the
force exerted by the spring (6).
On reaching this state of equilibrium, the piston (1) comes to a stop in an intermediate position.
• In this condition, the passage connecting chamber c to chamber d remains partially open, thereby maintaining the
pressure in chamber d.
An oil flow enters the control piston (6) at a sufficient pressure to balance the force exerted by the spring (5).
• The stability of this equilibrium is ensured by a stabilised flow from the restrictor g.
• The force of the spring (2) is regulated so that the piston (1) is balanced when
PP -- PLS = ∆PR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• In practical terms, pump delivery is made proportional to the aperture of the auxiliary control valve, maintaining the pressure
difference ∆PR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• This condition remains unaltered until there is a change in the operating conditions (e.g. a change in engine speed, reduction
or increase in the demand for flow or pressure, etc.).

10-59
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

d. When the system enters “saturation” condition

b 1 d e a 2

PP T PLS

7 8

PEN
PP Min Max
f

X
M 5 6
D0004880

• If the engine speed is reduced during the operation of one or more loads, there will be a corresponding reduction in
the flow from the pump. It follows that the pump will compensate for this by altering the swash plate angle.
• When the pump reaches its maximum displacement, and thus can no longer increase its delivery, the difference be-
tween the pump delivery pressure PP and the pressure PLS of the LS (pressure difference ∆PR) will become smaller
(“saturation” condition).
• The pressure PLS present in chamber a of the LS valve will be nearly equal to the pressure PP and the piston (1) will
be moved left by the combined force of the pressure PLS and the spring (2).
The piston thus closes the passage c and connects the passages d and e.
• The pressurised oil in chamber X of the control piston (6) flows through the passages d and e to reach the pump drain
chamber; in this way the pressure in chamber X of the control piston (6) becomes equal to the drain pressure.
• As a result, the control piston (6) is shifted to the right by the movement of the swash plate determined by the spring
(5) up to the maximum swash plate angle.

10-60
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE (TP)

FUNCTION
• The pressure cut-off valve regulates the pump delivery on reaching maximum pressure.

PP T PLS

PEN
PP
Min Max

D0004890

OPERATION
• The pressure cut-off valve senses the pump delivery pressure and, on reaching the maximum pressure setting, re-
duces the pump delivery to zero, by-passing the action of the LS valve.
• The pump delivery is thus returned to a minimum value sufficient for the internal lubrication of the pump of the main
auxiliary services and to maintain the hydraulic system at maximum pressure.

10-61
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.2 HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP

5.2 HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP

D0005280

FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA

Port L: suction Displacement: 32 cc/rev
Port P: delivery Maximum pressure: 200 bar (2900 psi)

10-62
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.3 STEERING GEAR PUMP

5.3 STEERING GEAR PUMP

D0005290

FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA

Port L: suction Displacement: 16 cc/rev.
Port P: delivery Maximum pressure: 180 bar (2610 psi)

10-63
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.4 PRIORITY VALVE

5.4 PRIORITY VALVE

CC VERSION

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P CF EF
PP
LS
LS PP

P
EF CF

D0005300

FUNCTION
Port P - Valve feed Port EF - Delivery to services
Port LS - Load Sensing signal Port PP - Valve pilot flow
Port CF - Delivery to power steering

LS VERSION

CF

LS

EF P

CF EF

LS

P
D0005310

FUNCTION Port EF - Delivery to services

Port CF - Delivery to the power steering Port LS - Load Sensing signal
Port P - Valve feed

10-64
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

VERSION WITH FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP

FUNCTION
• The function of the auxiliary services control valve is to control the flow of pressurised oil to the auxiliary services and
the rear lift.
• This control valve is a parallel circuit valve, which means that all the services receive oil flow simultaneously.

1 2

7 8 7 7 5 3
P R

F F 6
2 2

H
0 0
1
4
1

Y R1 A A B A B

REAR GEARBOX
9
D0022630

DESCRIPTION
• The pressurised oil from the pump (1) enters the inlet section (2); from here it is distributed to the spool sections
through internal passages.
• The terminal valve section (3) is fitted with a pressure compensating valve (4) and a safety valve (5) for the LS signal.
• The input gauge adjusts the pressure to supply the auxiliary valves (4) in this way, that it is always corresponding to
the spring force (6) higher than the pressure of the LS-signal.
• The pressure limitation is provided by limitation of the LS-signal pressure, done by valve (5).
• All the spools, when operated, generate a pressure signal (Load Sensing signal) that is equal to the pressure demand
from each load.
The highest of these pressure signals, selected by the bistable valves (7), is directed to the pressure relief valve (5).
• On the lift (8) spool section there is an antishock valve (9) (on the UP control side) that serves to prevent excessive
pressure caused by jolting of the implement.

10-65
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

VERSION WITH VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

FUNCTION
The function of the auxiliary services control valve is to control the flow of pressurised oil to the auxiliary services and the
rear lift.
This control valve is of the parallel circuit Load Sensing type.

2 3 6 3 5 3 5

P R Y

1 1
0 0
S 2 2
F F

R1 A A B A B

4
REAR GEARBOX

D0022640

DESCRIPTION
• The pressurised oil from the pump (1) enters the inlet section (2); from here it is distributed to the spool sections
through internal passages.
• All the spools, when operated, generate a pressure signal (Load Sensing signal) that is equal to the pressure demand
from each load.
The highest of these pressure signals, selected by the bistable valves (3), is sent to the variable displacement pump
through port Y of the control valve.
• On the lift spool section (6) there is an antishock valve (4) (on the UP control side) that serves to prevent excessive
pressure caused by jolting of the implement.

10-66
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.1 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP (CC)

4-WAY VERSION WITHOUT FURTHER EQUIPMENT (i.e. front axle suspension)

2 3 4 5 6 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
P R

P R1 S

A A
1 1
B B A 0 0
R 2 2
H
F F

A B A B R1 A

7 8 8 7
8
8
D0022590

1. End cover 5. Lift control section

2. Control valve section n° 1 6. Flow control section
3. Control valve section n° 2 7. Pressure relief valve
4- Inlet manifold 8. Check valve

4-WAY VERSION WITH FURTHER EQUIPMENT (i.e. front axle suspension)

1 2 3 4 5 6 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

1 2 3 4 5 6
P R

P R1
S

A A
1 1
B B A 0 0
R 2 2
H
F F
Y
Y A B A B R1 A

7 8 8 7
8
8
D0022600

1. End cover 5. Lift control section

2. Control valve section n° 1 6. Flow control section
3. Control valve section n° 2 7. Pressure relief valve
4. Inlet manifold 8. Check valve

10-67
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

8-WAY VERSION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P R1 P
A A A A
B B A B B
R
Y R

9
10 10 10

10

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S 9
P
1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
H
F F F F

Y A B A B P R R1 A A B A B

10 10 10 10
D0022610

1. End cover 6. Control valve section n° 3

2. Control valve section n° 1 7. Control valve section n° 4
3. Control valve section n° 2 8. Flow control section
4. Inlet manifold 9. Pressure relief valve
5. Lift control section 10. Check valve

10-68
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.2 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP (LS)

4-WAY VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

1 2 3 4 5

P R1 S

A A
B B A 1 1
R 0 0
2 2
H
Y F F

A B A B P R R1 A Y

6 6
6
6
D0022620

1. Cover plate 4. Control valve section n° 2

2. Control valve section n° 1 5. Inlet manifold
3. Lift control valve section 6. Check valve
8-WAY VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

P R1
A A A A
B B A B B
R
Y

8 8 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
H
F F F F

A B A B P R R1 A A B A B Y

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
8 8 8 8 D0022680

1. End cover 5. Lift control valve section

2. Control valve section n° 1 6. Control valve section n° 3
3. Control valve section n° 2 7. Control valve section n° 4
4. Inlet manifold 8. Check valve

10-69
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.3 SERVICES CONTROL SECTION

2
B
A
3

R R

Y
4

P
1

6 5 D0005100

1. Spool return device 4. Flow control

2. Check valve 5. Flow control spool
3. Spool 6. Check valve

10-70
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.4 DESCRIPTIONS OF COMPONENTS

SPOOL RETURN DEVICE

1
2

D0005040

1. Spool return spring

2. Spool

CHECK VALVE (NR)

3 B
4
1
R
2

D0005050

1. Slide 4. Valve seat

2. Ball 5. Spool
3. Check valve spring

10-71
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

FLOW CONTROL VALVE

1 2
3

D0005060

1. Spring
2. Flow control spool
3. Control shaft

10-72
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.5 FLOW CONTROL SECTION (CC version)

DESCRIPTION
The function of the flow control section is to send only the necessary quantity of oil to the work ports and to direct any ex-
cess oil supply from the pump to the exhaust port.
The flow control section also incorporates a pressure relief valve that serves to limit the operating pressure at the hydraulic
actuators.

3 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

4
1
4
P 3

2
R

2 1
D0005070

1. Pressure compensating valve spool

2. Compensating valve spring
3. Relief valve
4. Relief valve spring

10-73
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

OPERATION

1. When the actuators are not operated

b
a

1 CONTROL VALVE

D0005080

• When the engine is running and no hydraulic actuators are in operation, the oil flow from the pump is directed
to the flow control section (port P).
• As all the actuators are stationary, the oil pressure increases in chamber a and consequently also in chamber b.
• When the oil pressure in chambers a and b exceeds the force exerted by the spring (2), the spool (1) is shifted down-
wards, allowing the excess oil from the pump to flow to drain.

10-74
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

2. When an actuator is operated

b
CONTROL VALVE
a

P
y

5
c 2

D0005090

• When an actuator is operated, the pressure required for its operation is also directed to the channel y (Load
Sensing signal channel) and then sent to chamber c of the section.
• This causes the spool (1) to shift upwards and the oil required to operate the load is sent to the control valve.
• When the load pressure balances the force of the spring (4), poppet (5) is shifted to the left, allowing limitation of the
operating pressure.

10-75
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

5.5.6 LIFT CONTROL VALVE SECTION

DESCRIPTION
• The lift control section is a 1-way hydraulic control valve operated by two proportional solenoid valves.
• The control incorporates an antishock valve that protects the hydraulic circuit and against pressure surges caused by
jolting of the implement during work and transport.

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P Y R

A
P Y R

1 2 3 4 5 7

A R

D0004920

11 10 9 8 6

COMPONENTS 7. DOWN control solenoid valve

1. UP control solenoid valve 8. Flow control spring
2. Check valve 9. Flow control spool
3. Check valve spring 10. Spring
4. Antishock valve 11. UP control spool
5. Antishock valve spring
6. DOWN control spool

10-76
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

OPERATION
1. When the lift control is in neutral position
• The oil from the pump enters chamber a and from here flows into passage b.
• At the same time the oil flows into chamber c of the flow control (1) through passage d.
• This causes the spool to shift to the right until the connecting passage between chamber a and passage b is closed.
• The pressure in chamber e caused by the weight of the implement mounted on the linkage (e.g.: plough), keeps the
check valve (2) closed, thereby ensuring that the lift maintains its position.
• The chamber e is thus a closed chamber that prevents any uncontrolled movement of the lift.
• The pressure in chamber e also acts on the antishock valve (3) that eliminates any pressure surges caused by jolting
of the implement during work or transport.

e 3

A R

c b d a 1 D0004930

10-77
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

2. When the lift is raised

• When the lift is raised, the electronic lift control energises the solenoid (4) which move the spool (5) to the right.
• The oil in passage b can therefore flow through the check valve (2) into chamber e and from there to the lift cylinders.
• At the same time, the pressure present in passage b can flow into the chamber i and into the passage f and from there
through the channel g into chamber h of the flow control (1).
• As the oil pressure is the same on both sides of the spool, the spool is shifted by the force of the spring (6) and the oil
can flow from chamber a into the passage b.

e 2

4 5

A R

i D0004940

b 1 g a 6 h

10-78
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE

3. When the lift is lowered

• During lifting or when the lift is stationary, the spool (8) is pushed to the right by the spring (9).
• As a result, the passage between the chambers m and n is closed and the pressure in chamber p pushes the spool
(10) to the right.
• When the lift is lowered, the electronic lift control energises the solenoid (7) that moves the spool (8) to the left.
• The oil in chamber n can flow into chamber m and the pressure in chamber p is reduced.
• Now the force balance coming from the pressure in the chambers e and p influencing the spool (10), is disturbed and
moved to the left. Oil can flow now from e to m.
• As a result, the oil in the lift cylinders is directed to the drain circuit and the lift is lowered.
• As the solenoid is of the proportional type, the more current supplied, the more the spool (8) shifts to the left, thereby
allowing more oil to flow and the lift to descend more rapidly.
• The electronic control obtains float position by energising the solenoid valve (7) and holding it fully open.
• In this condition, the oil in the lift cylinders is sent to the drain circuit so that the lift is free to move up and down and
follow the contours of the terrain.

10 e n m 9 8

A R

p
7
A R

D0004950

10-79
 CONTENTS

SECTION 20

CONTENTS

1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS “ALL ROUND TESTER” .................. 1 • • 4.3.2 CALIBRATION OF THE CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION
• 1.1
ALL ROUND TESTER ......................................................... 1 SENSOR................................................................... 28
• •
1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT ....................................... 1 • • 4.3.3 CALIBRATION OF THE MAIN CLUTCH
• •
1.1.2 NOTES ON CORRECT USE ...................................... 2 PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVE....................... 30
• •
1.1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE TESTER ............................... 2 • 4.4 RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND
• •
1.1.4 GENERAL NOTES ON CONNECTING AND ASM CONTROL UNIT .......................................................32
POWERING UP THE TESTER ................................... 3 • • 4.4.1 PROGRAMMING THE TYPE OF TRACTOR............. 33
• • 1.1.5 SELECTION OF THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE ............. 3 • • 4.4.2 CONFIGURING NO RADAR STATUS ...................... 34
• • 1.1.6 SETTING THE SERIAL PORTS.................................. 5 • • 4.4.3 CALIBRATION OF THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR ... 35
• 1.2 “SERDIA 3.5 LEVEL III” SOFTWARE .................................. 7 • • 4.4.4 CHECKING AND CALIBRATING THE
• • 1.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT....................................... 7 LIFT CONTROL LEVER ............................................ 37

• 1.3 “EDS EST45” SOFTWARE ................................................. 8 • 4.5 RENEWAL OF THE INFOCENTER ....................................40
• • 1.3.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT ....................................... 8 • • 4.5.1 ENTERING CONSTANTS ......................................... 40
• 4.6 RENEWAL OF AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT ......42
2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE ELECTRONIC • • 4.6.1 CHECKING CALIBRATION OF THE
CONTROL UNITS .............................................................. 9 SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR ......................... 42
• 2.1 CONNECTING THE ART TO THE HYDRAULIC LIFT AND
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNITS ................ 9 5. ALARMS .......................................................................... 43
• 2.2 CONNECTING THE PORTABLE COMPUTER WITH • 5.1 LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS .......................43
“SERDIA 3.5” SOFTWARE TO THE ENGINE • • 5.1.1 LIST OF ALARMS BY EXTENDED CODE ................ 44
CONTROL UNIT ............................................................... 10 • • 5.1.2 LIST OF ALARMS BY STANDARD CODE................ 46
• • 5.1.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED ON ART .................. 48
• 2.3 CONNECTING THE PORTABLE COMPUTER WITH • • 5.1.4 ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS.................. 50
“EDS” SOFTWARE TO THE TRANSMISSION
CONTROL UNIT AND INFOCENTER ............................... 11 • 5.2 LIST OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS .......79
• • 2.3.1 CONNECTION TO THE TRANSMISSION • • 5.2.1 ABNORMALITIES NOT DETECTED BY
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 11 THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT.................... 79
• • 2.3.2 CONNECTION TO THE INFOCENTER .................... 11 • • 5.2.2 ALARMS INDICATED ON THE TRANSMISSION
DISPLAY AND BY THE EDS PROGRAM ................. 79
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM OF • • 5.5.3 DEFINITION OF TRANSMISSION OPERATING
THE TRACTOR ................................................................ 13 MODES..................................................................... 84
• • 5.2.3 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS ........................................... 85
• 3.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (DEUTZ EMR2) ........................ 13
• 5.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED BY SERDIA ....................149
• 3.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ................................... 15
• • 5.3.1 ALARMS DISPLAYED USING THE
• 3.3 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 16 SERDIA PROGRAM................................................ 149
• • 3.3.1 HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM ..................................... 16 • • 5.3.2 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS ......................................... 151
• • 3.3.2 ASM SYSTEM.......................................................... 17
• 5.4 LIST OF FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
• 3.4 INFOCENTER 2 or 3 ......................................................... 18 CONTROL VALVE ALARMS ............................................171
• 3.5 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT ................. 19 • • 5.4.1 LIST OF ALARMS BY TEXT CODE ........................ 171
• 3.6 FRONT AND REAR PTO CONTROL UNIT ....................... 20 • • 5.4.2 LIST OF ALARMS BY STANDARD CODE.............. 172
• • 5.4.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED BY ART................. 173
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE .................... 21 • • 5.4.4 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS ......................................... 174
• 4.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................... 21 6. OPERATOR’S MANUAL EDS
• 4.2 RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ................. 21 (Electronic Diagnosis System) .................................... 187
• • 4.2.1 READING AND SAVING DATA ................................ 21 • 1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION ............................................187
• • 4.2.2 PROGRAMMING THE CONTROL UNIT .................. 22 • • 1.1 FUNCTIONAL SCOPE............................................ 187
• • 4.2.3 CALIBRATION OF THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL .... 23 • • 1.2 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS .............................. 188
• • 4.2.4 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE ............. 24 • • 1.3 STARTING AND TERMINATING OF
• • 4.2.5 READING AND SAVING DATA ................................ 25 THE EDS PROGRAM ............................................. 190
• 4.3 RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT .... 26 • 2. TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS .........................................192
• • 4.3.1 SETTING THE TRACTOR VERSION AND • • 2.1 THE MAIN MENU ................................................... 192
SERIAL NUMBER .................................................... 26 • • 2.2 ONLINE HELP ........................................................ 194

20-i
 CONTENTS

• 3. POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45 .195 9. SERDIA (LEVEL III) ...................................................... 267

• • 3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION • 1.
SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 267
DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 45................................... 195 • •
1.1 MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIRED...................... 267
• • 3.2 DEST 45 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION ................... 196 • •
1.2 ORDERING............................................................. 268
• • 3.3 ERROR CODES POWER-SHUTTLE /DEST 45 ...... 211 • •
1.3 SWITCHING ON AND INSTALLING THE
• • 3.4 DISPLAY POWERSHUTTLE................................... 212 SOFTWARE............................................................ 269
• • 3.5 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION ............. 213 • • 1.4 USING THE PROGRAM ......................................... 273
• • 3.6 OTHER INFORMATIONS ....................................... 224 • • 1.5 CLOSING THE PROGRAM .................................... 276
• • 3.7 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT
THE TRANSMISSION T-7100 ................................ 225 • 2. ECU SELECTION ............................................................ 277
• • 3.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100 ....... 226 • • 2.1 SELECTING TWO CONTROL UNITS..................... 277
• • 3.9 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT • • 2.2 PRINTING............................................................... 278
THE TRANSMISSION T-7200 ................................ 227 • • 2.3 PROTOCOL............................................................ 279
• • 3.10 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC • • 2.4 IDENTIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT DATA..... 279
GEAR SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300................................ 228 • 3. MEASURED VALUES ...................................................... 281
• • 3.11 ERROR ANALYSIS................................................. 229 • • 3.1 ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES (GENERAL) .......... 281
• 4. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF • • 3.2 RAM-VALUES ........................................................ 286
THE INFOCENTER ..........................................................231 • • 3.3 DATA LOGGER (ONLY EMS2)............................... 290
• • 4.1 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION .................................... 232 • • 3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT............................ 290
• • 4.2 CONSTANT VALUES FOR INFOCENTER.............. 242 • • 3.5 CAN STATUS ......................................................... 290
• 4. PARAMETERS ................................................................ 293
7. ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND • • 4.1 CONFIGURATION (GENERAL) .............................. 293
ASM CONTROL UNIT ................................................... 247 • • 4.2 OVERALL PROGRAMMING................................... 294
• PRESENTATION SCREEN ....................................................247 • • 4.2 CALIBRATION........................................................ 295
• MAIN MENU ..........................................................................247 • 5. ERROR MEMORY ........................................................... 296
• • 5.1 GENERAL............................................................... 296
• 1. MONITOR ........................................................................248
• • 5.2 ERROR TABLE....................................................... 297
• • 1.1 LIFT ........................................................................ 248
• • 1.2 CONSOLE .............................................................. 250 • 6. EXTRAS .......................................................................... 307
• • 1.3 ASM........................................................................ 250 • • 6.1 MAXIMUM SPEED ................................................. 307
• • 1.4 POWER .................................................................. 251 • • 6.2 LOGISTIC DATA.................................................... 307
• • 1.5 SENSORS .............................................................. 252 • • 6.3 LOAD SPECTRUM................................................. 308
• • 6.4 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL EXCEEDED ................ 308
• 2. CONFIGURATION .............................................................252
• • 6.5 OVERRIDE MEMORY ............................................ 308
• • 2.1 SPEED CONSTANTS ............................................. 253
• • 6.6 MAINTENANCE DATA ........................................... 308
• • 2.2 OPTIONS................................................................ 253
• 7. TASKS ............................................................................. 309
• 3. CALIBRATIONS ..............................................................254
• • 7.1 EMR1 ..................................................................... 309
• • 3.1 MINIMUM HEIGHT................................................. 255
• • 3.2 MAXIMUM HEIGHT................................................ 255 • 8. WHAT TO DO IF...? ......................................................... 313
• • 3.3 LOCK SPEED ......................................................... 256 • • 8.1 SERDIA GENERAL................................................. 313
• • 3.5 TRANSPORT .......................................................... 257 • • 8.2 EMR1 ..................................................................... 315
• • 3.6 STOP ...................................................................... 257
• • 3.7 CONTROL .............................................................. 258
• • 3.8 FLOAT .................................................................... 258
• 4. ALARMS LIST .................................................................259

8. ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION

CONTROL UNIT ............................................................ 261
• PRESENTATION SCREEN ....................................................261
• MAIN MENU ..........................................................................261
• 1. MONITOR ........................................................................262
• • 1.1 SUSPENSION ........................................................ 262
• 2. PARAMETERS ................................................................263
• 3. ALARMS LIST .................................................................265
• 4. CONFIGURATIONS .........................................................265

20-ii
 ALL ROUND TESTER
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT

1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS “ALL ROUND TESTER”

1.1 ALL ROUND TESTER
To enable a correct analysis of faults, facilitate the procedure of putting the tractor into service and verify correct operation
of the electrical components used in the lift systems, front axle suspension and ASM, the service technician is provided
with an instrument dubbed the All Round Tester (abbreviated to ART throughout the manual).
Using the ART, the technician can:
- display errors (faults) that have occurred;
- carry out sensor calibration or setting procedures;
- display data monitored by the various electronic control units (e.g. status of sensors) by which systems are managed.
The exchange of data between the ART and the control units occurs by way of one or more diagnosis sockets incorporated
into the wiring harnesses of the tractor.
Accordingly, the ART comes with different types of interface cables for the different models and versions of tractor being
serviced, which must be used as indicated in the relative workshop manuals or on the CD supplied with the kit.
1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT
The ART is supplied to Authorised Workshops in a carrying case containing:

1
9 2
7 8

4
6 5 3
F0057690

Pos Code Description Qty

5.9030.730.6/30 Case, complete 1
1 5.9030.730.0 All Round Tester 1
Rear hydraulic lift diagnosis cable - BOSCH EHR4 1
2 5.9030.681.3 Engine electronic rpm control diagnosis and programming cable - type 1 1
SBA system diagnosis cable - type 1 1
3 5.9030.681.7 Adapter cable for radar connector 1
4 5.9030.681.5 Adapter cable for wheel speed sensor connector 1
5 5.9030.681.4 Cable for diagnostic socket 1
6 0.011.6178.4 Adapter cable for connection to armrest diagnosis socket 1
7 0.011.5445.4 Cable for connection to engine-transmission-lift control units diagnosis socket 1
8 0.010.2145.2 EPROM box 1
9 307.1056.8/60 CD ROM 1
CAUTION
To enable connection of the ART to the tractor electronics, a further adapter cable is required: code 0.012.6655.4
(not supplied with the kit). The cable can be purchased from the parts service.

20-1
 NOTES ON CORRECT USE
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS DESCRIPTION OF THE TESTER

1.1.2 NOTES ON CORRECT USE

The ART is protected against battery polarity inversion, and positive or negative overvoltages of momentary duration (1
msec).
Do not attempt to connect the ART to non-dedicated sockets, and do not use trailing connections or extension ca-
bles.
The display is permanently backlit to ensure readability in any ambient light conditions.
A knob on the side allows adjustment of the contrast. If the display appears blank, the contrast control knob may be in a po-
sition that renders the characters invisible.
The tester operates correctly at temperatures between 0 and 40 °C, and should be switched off every 30 minutes to max-
imise its service life.
Before disconnecting the ART from the diagnostic socket, turn the starter key to the “O” (OFF) position.

1.1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE TESTER

F0057700

The ART includes:

1 - A backlit liquid crystal display
2 - An alphanumeric keypad with 16 keys
3 - Display contrast control knob.
Used to adjust the contrast. If the display appears blank, the contrast control knob may be in a position that renders
the characters invisible.
4 - Parallel port (used to connect the ART to systems with electronic control units that do not have microprocessors).
5 - Serial port (used to connect the ART to systems with electronic control units incorporating microprocessors).

20-2
 GENERAL NOTES ON CONNECTING AND POWERING UP THE TESTER
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS SELECTION OF THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE

1.1.4 GENERAL NOTES ON CONNECTING AND POWERING UP THE TESTER

To connect the tester to the electronic system of the tractor, proceed as follows:
1 - switch off the engine and remove the starter key;
2 - connect the ART to a diagnosis socket;
3 - insert the starter key and position at “I” (ON).

When the ART powers up, a page appears showing an in- S + L + H T E S T E R

ternal test run by the instrument to check the battery = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
charge. If the voltage registers less than 10V, the ART does
not have sufficient power to connect to the control units,
V E R S I O N x x x
whereas if the value is higher than 15V the instrument
could be damaged.
After a few seconds, the tester attempts to connect to the B A T T E R Y T E S T
electronic system and displays a page (which may vary de- I N P R O G R E S S
pending on the tractor or the connector to which it is
plugged), from which the technician can choose to con- V O L T A G E x x . x V
nect to a given control unit and test the operation of the
components.
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 9 1
E L . E N . S A S
M I L A N O

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1.1.5 SELECTION OF THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE

The ART is able to display information in a number of different languages (factory setting: ITALIAN).
To change the display language, proceed as follows.
1 - Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
2 - Connect the ART to a diagnosis socket.
3 - Press and hold A on the keypad, while inserting and positioning the starter key at “I” (ON).

4 - Enter the password 1 2 3 F.

P A S S W O R D :

20-3
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS SELECTION OF THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE

5 - Press 1. C O N F I G U R A Z I O N E

M E N U

1 - S E L . L i n g u a

2 - P o r t e S e r i a l i

S C E L T A

E U S C I T A

6 - Press C and select the key corresponding to the S E L E Z I O N E L I N G U A

required language.
In the example illustrated, pressing 2 selects English D i s p o n i b i l i
language.
7 - Press E twice to exit
1 - I T A L I A N O
8 - Turn the starter key to the “O” (OFF) position and dis-
connect the ART from the diagnosis socket. 2 - E N G L I S H
3 - D E U T S C H
4 - F R A N C A I S
5 - P O R T U G U E S
6 - E S P A N O L
A T T U A L E : I t a l i a n o
N U O V A : E N G L I S H

C p e r c a m b i a r e
E U S C I T A

20-4
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS SETTING THE SERIAL PORTS

1.1.6 SETTING THE SERIAL PORTS

The tractor electronic systems to which the ART can be connected are different one from another and utilize different
pinouts at the diagnosis socket for interfacing purposes.
For this reason, the serial ports must first be configured so as to guarantee full compatibility of the ART with all SAME elec-
tronic systems.
To change the serial port settings, proceed as follows.
1 - Switch off the engine and remove the starter key
2 - Connect the ART to a diagnosis socket
3 - Press and hold A on the keypad, while inserting and positioning the starter key at “I” (ON)

4 - Enter the password 1 2 3 F.

P A S S W O R D :

5 - Press 2. C O N F I G U R A T I O N

M E N U

1 - L A N G U A G E S E L .

2 - S E R I A L P O R T S

S E L E C T

E T O E S C A P E

20-5
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS SETTING THE SERIAL PORTS

6 - Enable all serial ports by pressing 1 seven times. S E R I A L . C O N F I G .

7 - Press E twice to exit.
8 - Turn the starter key to the “O” (OFF) position and dis- P r e s e n t 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
connect the ART from the diagnosis socket. S e r i a l N r 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N e w c o n f i g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 - S e r i a l p o r t O N
0 - S e r i a l p o r t O F F

E T O E S C A P E

20-6
 SERDIA 3.5 LEVEL III SOFTWARE
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT

1.2 “SERDIA 3.5 LEVEL III” SOFTWARE

SERDIA is the name given to a software package (code 5.9030.740.4/10) for installation on a portable computer, designed
to assist the technician in making an accurate analysis of faults, setting up the tractor for service and verifying the correct
operation of electrical components associated with the engine.
With SERDIA, the technician can:
- display errors (faults) that have occurred;
- program the control unit;
- carry out sensor calibration or setting procedures.

1.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT

The SERDIA software is supplied to Authorised Workshops in a carrying case with all the basic items needed for operation.
The case contains:

3
2

F0059950

Pos. Code Description Qty

5.9030.740.4/10 Case, complete 1
1 5.9030.740.0 . Installation disk 1
2 5.9030.740.2 . Level III interface, General revision 1
3 5.9030.741.0 Adapter cable (not included in kit) 1

The exchange of data between the SERDIA software and the control units occurs by way of a diagnosis socket incor-
porated into a wiring harness of the tractor.
Accordingly, the SERDIA package is supplied with an interface cable that must be used on the particular model and version
of tractor being serviced.

20-7
 EDS EST45 SOFTWARE
DIAGNOSIS TOOLS DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT

1.3 “EDS EST45” SOFTWARE

EDS is the name given to a software package (code) for installation on a portable computer, designed to assist the tech-
nician in making an accurate analysis of faults, setting up the tractor for service and verifying the correct operation of trans-
mission and Infocenter components.
With EDS, the technician can:
- display errors (faults) that have occurred;
- configure the control unit;
- carry out sensor calibration or setting procedures.

1.3.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT

EDS is supplied to Authorised Workshops with the following basic items needed for operation.
The kit includes:

1
3
F0059400

Pos. Code Description Qty

5.9030.742.0 Complete English language kit 1
5.9030.742.1 Complete German language kit 1
1 5.9030.742.2 Installation disk (Ref. Wilbar 236162) 1
2 5.9030.742.3 Interface cable (Ref. Wilbar 0797-385) 1
3 5.9030.742.4 Interface cable (Ref. Wilbar KA 96-0526) 1

The exchange of data between the EDS software and the control units occurs by way of a diagnosis socket incorporated
into a wiring harness of the tractor.
Accordingly, the EDS software comes with different types of interface cables for the different models and versions of trac-
tor being serviced, which must be used as indicated in the relative workshop manuals.

20-8
CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE CONNECTING THE ART TO THE HYDRAULIC LIFT AND
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNITS

2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

This chapter describes how to connect the various diagnostics tools provided for the use of the technician.

2.1 CONNECTING THE ART TO THE HYDRAULIC LIFT AND

FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNITS
CAUTION
Before connecting the ART, switch off the engine and remove the starter key.

1
2

5 X18

4
3

F0059410

1 - Connect the cable (1) (code 5.9030.861.4) to the ART (2) (code 5.9030.730.0).
2 - Join the connector (3) of cable (2) to cable (4) (code 0.012.6655.4) and plug connector (5) into connector X18 located
internally of the right hand side console.
3 - Check that connectors (5) and X18 are securely connected.
4 - Insert the starter key and turn to the “I” (ON) position to power up the tester.

5 - Following power up, the ART performs the battery T E S T

level test. M E N U
6 - Press the key corresponding to the control unit being
tested. 1 - F r o n t s u s p e n
CAUTION 2 - R e a r L i f t
Avoid starting the engine unless required for the
purpose of diagnosis or calibrating sensors.

C H O O S E _

20-9
CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS CONNECTING TO THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

2.2 CONNECTING THE PORTABLE COMPUTER WITH “SERDIA 3.5” SOFTWARE

TO THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

3 X18
5
6

F0059420

1 - Connect the cable (1) (code 5.9030.740.4/10) to the serial port of the portable computer (2).
2 - Join the connector (3) of cable (4) (code 5.9030.741.0) to the connector X18 located internally of the right hand side
console.
3 - Plug in the connectors (5) and (6).
4 - With the portable computer switched on and the Serdia program running, insert the starter key and turn to the “I” (ON)
position.

20-10
CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE CONNECTING THE TRANSMISSION
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS CONTROL UNIT AND INFOCENTER

2.3 CONNECTING THE PORTABLE COMPUTER WITH “EDS” SOFTWARE TO THE

TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT AND INFOCENTER

5
1

F0059430

2.3.1 CONNECTION TO THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

1 - Connect the lead numbered “9141” of the interface cable (1) to the serial port of the portable computer (2).
2 - Join the connector marked “Powershift Agrotron 4.70 – 6.45” (3) of the Wilbar cable (4) (Wilbar KA 96-0529) to the
four-pin connector (5) of the interface cable (1).
3 - Join the connector (6) of cable (4) to the connector X18 located internally of the right hand side console.
4 - With the portable computer switched on and the EDS program running, insert the starter key and turn to the “I” (ON)
position.

2.3.2 CONNECTION TO THE INFOCENTER

1 - Connect the lead marked “EIC” of the interface cable (1) to the serial port of the portable computer (2).
2 - Join the connector marked “Infocenter” (3) of the Wilbar cable (4) (Wilbar KA 96-0529) to the two-pin connector (7) of
the interface cable (1).
3 - Join the connector (6) of cable (4) to the connector X18 located internally of the right hand side console.
4 - With the portable computer switched on and the EDS program running, insert the starter key and turn to the “I” (ON)
position.

20-11
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM OF THE TRACTOR

The electronic system of the Agrotron series includes control units by which the machine functions are managed. Each
control unit is dedicated to the management of one or more systems.
The tractor's electronic system incorporates a socket used for calibration, diagnosis and programming of the control units;
connecting the All Round Tester ® (ART) or a portable computer with SERDIA and EDS diagnostics software to the socket,
the technician can program the operating parameters of the tractor according to the options available (front PTO, etc.), test
the operation of the sensors and pushbutton controls, calibrate the sensors and carry out troubleshooting procedures.
The ART can also be used to access a list of the alarms detected, which are stored as brief descriptive messages.
Through these messages, the technician can locate faults and, using the dedicated Test and Monitor menus, check the op-
eration of system components.
Using the portable computer and the SERDIA and EDS software, the technician can analyse information and alarms (if any)
recorded by the engine, transmission and INFOCENTER control units and verify the correct operation of components and
sensors governed by these units.

3.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (DEUTZ EMR2)

The function of the engine control unit is to supervise the correct operation of the engine; it receives commands from the
operator by way of the hand throttle, the accelerator pedal or the MAX, MIN and MEM functions on the rpm control keypad,
or on the armrest if fitted, and, according to the signal returned by the engine speed pickup, the coolant temperature and
fuel temperature sensors and the turbo pressure sensor, will adjust the crankshaft speed by outputting a modulated volt-
age signal (PWM) to the actuator of the injection pumps.
The engine control unit also pilots the operation of the glowplugs, activating the relative relay in response to signals re-
ceived from the coolant and fuel temperature sensors to ensure easy starting even in extreme weather conditions.
The engine control unit informs the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, by way of a warning light
on the Infocenter. Faults are indicated by two types of signal:
• continuously flashing light: the control unit has detected a fault in one of the engine speed control components (ac-
celerator pedal, hand throttle or keypad), though not a fault that affects the operation of the engine;
• light permanently on: the control unit has detected a serious fault and responded by switching the engine off, disabling
the starter circuit.
Connecting the portable computer with the SERDIA software installed, the technician can display the alarms affecting the
engine.
The alarms management function of the engine control unit is based on two classes of alarms, defined active and passive.
All alarms are displayed in a single window that shows information on the type of alarm detected, and the possible cause,
indicating the number of recurrences and the status (active or passive).
Detected alarms are recorded in two separate memory locations:
- Error memory 1, erasable by the technician
- Error memory 2, which maintains a log of all alarms generated, indicating how many times an alarm has cut in and
when was the most recent

20-13
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

MX1

MX2

MX1 5 8 9 14 15 12 13 10 16 17 18 19 24 25 23 3 1 2 6 7 3 10 11 21 19 18 17 15 14 4 16 25 20 23 24 MX2
X30
6 4

2.2Kohm
5 1 1
4 2
3
1Kohm
2
1 X20
6
X8
18 1
3
4
2
2
5
7.5A

F34
X80
1
+15 2
3
RL40
+50 5
2

ST1
1
4
3
Wheel RPM output 11
RL42
1 2

ST2
Engine RPM input 12
Preheating light 19 RL42A
5
17 RL42B
F101
125A

X78
6
B37 B43 B40 Y3 B41 X4 X18 RL41 EMR +30B
2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 2 1 3 4 87 86 85 30 3 2 1

t° t° M
p +30C
7
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 +50

D0022750

1- Accelerator pedal position sensor 10 - Diagnostics connector

2- Engine speed keypad 11 - Creeper engagement switch
3- Start enable switch (Green) 12 - Turbo charge pressure sensor
4- Engine starting relay 13 - Actuator
5- Glowplugs relay 14 - Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup)
6- Preheating device 15 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
7- Starter motor 16 - Fuel temperature sensor
8- Lift and hand throttle console 17 - Infocenter
9- Glowplug warning light ON relay 18 - Engine ECU circuit board

20-14
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

3.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

The function of the transmission control unit is to supervise the correct operation of the transmission; it receives com-
mands from the operator by way of the the shuttle lever, the range selection buttons and the clutch pedal, and, according
to the signals returned by the engine speed and torque sensors, will shift between the ranges selected with the controls by
piloting the operation of the 8 solenoid valves of the clutch actuators.
Connected to the control unit is a display that provides the operator with information on the current status of the trans-
mission (direction of movement, range selected, etc.) and indicates any alarms detected by way of alphanumeric codes.
Connecting the portable computer with the EDS software installed, the technician can display the alarms affecting the
transmission.
The alarms management function of the transmission control unit is based on two classes of alarms, defined active and
passive.
The EDS program displays all alarms in two windows, showing information that includes the number of the detected alarm,
its status (active or passive), the number of recurrences and the hours operation clocked by the transmission when the
alarm first occurred.

E.C.U. (PS)
16 65 63 20 30 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 29 5 14 39 15 16 3 40 17 55 32 21 45 36 13 56 62 4 44 24 37 38 67 22 68 23
X37
3
3.9 Ohm 1
3.9 Ohm 4
2
7.5A
3.9 Ohm

F17
FW
N
RV

15 +30
X40

+12V 1
M 5
M 6
Sig 2
7.5A

X33 F35 F16

3A

1
14 2
3

X34
4
13 1
2
+15 +15

EV PRESS ADD. EV.

GROUP SWITCH TEMP. NHK NLSA NLSE EV V/R PROP LS/PS PS NAB X18 X12
F A E D C B 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 8 1 2 3
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1

Y7
Y6

fN fN f U
P
HK

lsa lse N Prop

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
D0017100

1- Transmission ECU 8 - Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 14 - Clutch pedal depressed proximity
2- Gearshift lever 9 - Transmission speed sensor sensor
3- Diagnostics connector 10 - Transmission oil temperature sensor 15 - Transmission display
4- Speed sensor for odometer 11 - Engine oil low pressure switch 16 - Shuttle control lever
5- Proportional solenoid valve coil 12 - Gearshift solenoid valves
6- Forward/reverse solenoid valves 13 - Clutch pedal position sensor
7- Engine speed sensor

20-15
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT

3.3 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT

The function of the lift control unit is to supervise the correct operation of the hydraulic lift and the ASM system.
3.3.1 HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM
The electronic system controls the movements of the lift according to the commands and the operating mode selected by
the operator using the control panel on the side console.
The operator can select six types of control:
- position control;
- draft control;
- depth control;
- wheelslip control;
- draft, wheelslip and depth control;
- transport lock.
Another function provided by the system is that of automatically activating pitch control when travelling on the highway at
speeds higher than 8 km/h with the lift control lever in the transport lock position. This operating mode reduces the pitching
motion of the tractor when running over uneven surfaces by allowing small compensating movements of the lift, using the
mounted implement as a “ballast weight”.
The transport lock can be engaged by the operator, but for reasons of safety it will be engaged automatically by the control
unit whenever the lift control is in the stop position and three minutes are allowed to elapse since the tractor was last in mo-
tion at less than 20 km/h, or whenever the ground speed of the tractor exceeds 20 km/h.
The control unit compares the command given by the operator with the signals received from the lift position sensor, the
draft sensors, the wheel speed sensor and the radar, and responds by operating a directional control valve equipped with
two proportional solenoid valves.
The control valve directs oil at high pressure to two hydraulic cylinders that raise or lower the implement mounted to the
three-point linkage.
The signals from the control console are transmitted to the lift control, and the signals from the sensors essential to the op-
eration of the system and the lift control pushbuttons on the rear fenders are connected directly to the control unit.

JX1

JX2

JX1 JX2
1 2 3 21 15 23 10 17 14 22 8 18 13 7 19 16 9 4 20 5 6 15 22

9
10 1
X18 1- Diagnostics connector
2- Rear lift Up pushbutton
1
2 3- Rear lift Down pushbutton
7.5A

2 F34
UPDX 4- Lift and hand throttle
console
+15
5- Lift control panel
6- 4WD switch
7- Differential lock switch
1
2 3 8- Lift Up solenoid valve
DWDX
9- Lift Down solenoid valve

3
2 4
EV EV 1
DW 2 1 UP
2 1 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 8 11 3 9 7 8 4 1 6 10 5 12 X14 EHR
U U U

F S F
9 8
7 6 D0017260
5

20-16
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT

3.3.2 ASM SYSTEM

The lift control unit also governs the ASM system which, when activated by the operator, manages the engagement and
disengagement of the four wheel drive clutch and differential lock mechanism automatically.
The parameters used to determine exclusion of the differential lock and disengagement of the four-wheel drive are:
- wheel speed;
- steering angle;
- type of braking action (one or two pedals).
The command which activates the system, and the signals from the brake pedal, wheel speed and steering angle sensors
are all routed directly to the control unit.
The control unit processes the data and, according to the status of the system and the parameter settings, activates or de-
activates the solenoid valves controlling engagement of four-wheel drive and of the differential locks.
The hydraulic lift control unit warns the operator of any malfunction in monitored components by way of a red Led (lift trans-
port lock indicator) located on the lift control console.
Faults are indicated using a system of coded flash sequences which, depending on how the control unit has been con-
figured, will either specify the precise nature of the fault (extended alarm) or simply identify the device affected (standard
alarm). Also, and likewise depending on the configuration, the unit can display only the alarm with the lowest code (rotation
of alarms deactivated), or it can display all the active alarms (rotation of alarms activated).
The ART shows the 10 most recent alarms generated, and if a further alarm is triggered, the first of the ten will be eliminated.
To verify, using the ART, whether or not an alarm detected is “active”, the technician must cancel all the alarms, turn the
starter key to the “O” (OFF) position, then make a fresh connection to the control unit.

JX1
ST2
DF 1
DT 14 JX2
+15 2
9 +30 9
GND 3
GND 12
8
1
JX2 JX1
8
1

18 23 10 16 20 11 2 13 8 20 4 5

7
1
1

7
7.5A

7.5A

F34 F34
6
5
6
1
+15 +15
7
2
8
6
1

6
5

X35 X32 X82 EV DF DT RL9 RL8

3 2 1 4 1 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 4 5 3 2 1 4 5
3 5 4 3 5 4
F11
20A

2 1 2 1

2 1 +15

5 4 D0017290

1- Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid valve 6- ASM switch

2- Differential lock solenoid valve 7- Differential lock switch
3- Steering angle sensor 8- 4WD switch
4- Right brake pedal switch 9- Instrument panel
5- Left brake pedal switch

20-17
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR INFOCENTER 2 OR 3

3.4 INFOCENTER 2 or 3
The Infocenter control unit is designed and programmed to manage and display the essential information needed by the
operator to control the machine under different conditions of use, to show performance data in real time, and to activate an
indicator light warning of faults detected by the engine control unit.
The Infocenter appears as a single module incorporating one or two displays (according to the type of Infocenter installed)
which provide digital information, and analog instruments indicating items such as engine revolutions, fuel level, etc.
The instrument panel also incorporates indicator lights showing the operating status of various tractor systems, or the
presence of faults (e.g. clogged oil filter, etc.). Some of these lights are replaced on the Infocenter 3 by a digital display
showing the same alarms or items of information in the form of text messages.
The display used in both types of Infocenter provides information relating to the operation of the machine (ground speed,
wheelslip, rear and front PTO shaft speeds) and hour meter reading.
Connecting a portable computer and using the EDS program, the technician can enter basic parameters for the Infocenter
(language, etc.), test the operation of the panel indicator lights and check the inputs and outputs.

20-18
 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR CONTROL UNIT

3.5 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT

The function of the suspension control unit is to supervise the correct operation of the hydraulic suspension supporting the
front axle.
When the operator activates the hydraulic suspension by pressing the pushbutton on the front console, the clearance of
the front end of the tractor relative to the road surface will be controlled automatically.
With the system activated, the control unit pilots the operation of the load sensing and the up and down solenoid valves,
which continue to adjust until the signal received from the position sensor corresponds to the programmed setting.
At this point, the control unit deactivates the solenoid valves and the system remains active. When the position of the axle
shifts due to the tractor bouncing as it moves along, the control unit responds by piloting the corrections needed to return
the axle to the programmed position.
The axle suspension, used when the tractor is on the move, provides further assistance in limiting the pitching motion of the
machine, increasing its stability and improving reaction in the event of emergency braking.
All the control components of the system (on/off pushbutton, position sensor and solenoid valves) are connected directly
to the axle suspension control unit.
The only item of data not read directly by a sensor but supplied by the Infocenter, is ground speed (wheel speed), which is
used to activate or deactivate the system according to the peripheral velocity of the wheels.
The suspension control unit warns the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, by way of an indicator
light in the pushbutton.
Faults are indicated using a system of coded flash sequences which, depending on how the control unit has been con-
figured, will either specify the precise nature of the fault (extended alarm) or simply identify the device affected (standard
alarm).
The ART shows the 10 most recent alarms generated, and if a further alarm is triggered, the first of the ten will be eliminated.
To verify, using the ART, whether or not an alarm detected is “active”, the technician must cancel all the alarms, turn the
starter key to the “O” (OFF) position, then make a fresh connection to the control unit.

JX3
JX4

JX4 12 8 19 13 11 2 15 22 9 14 17 JX3
5 4 20 2 1
F17
7.5A

+15

1 - Front axle suspension load sensing

solenoid valve coil
5 X18 X69 H S X68 2 - Axle Down control solenoid valve coil
1 10 9 5 14 13 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
U
3 - Axle Up control solenoid valve coil
4 - Front axle suspension position sensor
S 5 - Diagnostics connector
6 - Front suspension pushbutton
5 4 3 2 1 D0017090
6

20-19
 FRONT AND REAR PTO
INTRODUCTIONTOTHEELECTRONICSYSTEMOFTHETRACTOR CONTROL UNIT

3.6 FRONT AND REAR PTO CONTROL UNIT

The PTO control unit is incorporated into the relays and fuses control unit. The electronic system controls the front PTO (if
installed) and rear PTO in accordance with the commands given by the operator via the pushbuttons on the right hand con-
sole.
The PTOs can be activated or deactivated by the operator, and will in any event be inhibited automatically when the engine
is switched off.
The control unit receives the command given by the operator and responds by activating the rear PTO solenoid valve,
which in turn pilots the operation of the PTO clutch.

P3
7.5A
F29

+15

PTO MODULE

P3 FZW
1 24 12 13 8 10 11 23 25 9
2
1 2
EV
PTO
2
1
3

3
F16
3A

2
1
4
PTO +15
SENS

PTODX X9 D+ B+
PTO
ST2 JX1
5 5
X10 AUTO ISO7
3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 5 9 10 1 20 11 10 11 4 5 20
F10

F34

+
7.5A

7.5A

-
+15 +15
12 11 10 8 D0017270
9 7 6

1- Front and rear pto control unit 7 - Instrument panel

2- Front PTO solenoid valve 8 - PTO AUTO switch
3- Rear PTO solenoid valve 9 - Alternator
4- Rear PTO speed sensor 10 - Front PTO pushbutton (in cab)
5- ISO7 socket (implement connection) 11 - Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab)
6- Rear lift control unit 12 - Rear PTO Rx pushbutton (on fender)

20-20
 INTRODUCTION
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE

4.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains all the information required to establish or restore correct operation of the tractor's various electronic
systems.
Whenever an electronic control unit of the tractor is changed or a calibration-sensitive electronic component replaced, the
tractor must be put into service as if from new.
The necessary procedures must be carried out by a skilled technician, who in turn must follow the instructions in the man-
ual precisely.

4.2 RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

NOTE
If possible, before renewing the engine control unit, the technician should read the program of the old control unit
and save it to a file.
If the control unit is faulty and it is not possible to read the program, contact Technical Assistance and ask for the
engine configuration file (quoting the engine serial number, which appears on the nameplate of the control unit and
on the engine data plate) and proceed to program the new unit using this file.
The accelerator pedal and hand throttle can now be calibrated, and the maximum ground speed configured.

4.2.1 READING AND SAVING DATA

1 - Connect a portable computer with the SERDIA pro-
gram installed (for details see «Connection of portable
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine con-
trol unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position and start
the SERDIA program.
3 - From the “PARAMETER” menu, select the option
“OVERALL PROGRAMMING”.

4 - Click on “ECU -> file” and save the data to a floppy

disk or to the computer hard disk (c:\; d:\).

NOTE
Make certain that the file has been saved.
Files are named automatically in the following way:
0044444.hex
where the numbers “44444” correspond to the serial
number of the engine.

20-21
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

4.2.2 PROGRAMMING THE CONTROL UNIT

1 - Connect a portable computer with the SERDIA pro-
gram installed (for details see «Connection of portable
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine con-
trol unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position and start
the SERDIA program.
3 - From the “PARAMETER” menu, select the option
“OVERALL PROGRAMMING”.

4 - Click on “PROGRAMMING” and select the file saved

previously, or procured from Technical Assistance.

5 - When the message “DATA ACCEPTED BY ECU” ap-

pears, press Enter.

6 - Click on “SAVE IN ECU”, and when the message “DA-

TA ACCEPTED BY ECU” appears, press Enter and
exit the program.

20-22
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

4.2.3 CALIBRATION OF THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL

NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine off
and the parking brake applied.
1 - Connect a portable computer with the SERDIA pro-
gram installed (for details see «Connection of portable
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine con-
trol unit»), turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position
and start the SERDIA program.
2 - From the “PARAMETER” menu, select the option
“CALIBRATION”.

3 - Select the line containing the parameter “1510:

AnalogIn1_RefLow”, apply light pressure to the ac-
celerator and release, then click on “GET VALUE” so
that the software can read the value.
4 - Click “PC->ECU”, then click “SAVE IN ECU” to save
the new parameter.

5 - Select the line containing the parameter “1511:

AnalogIn1_RefHigh”, apply light pressure to the ac-
celerator and release, then click on “GET VALUE” so
that the software can read the value.
6 - Click “PC->ECU”, then click “SAVE IN ECU” to
save the new parameter.

20-23
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

4.2.4 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE

NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine off
and the parking brake applied.
1 - Connect a portable computer with the SERDIA pro-
gram installed (for details see «Connection of portable
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine con-
trol unit»), turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position
and start the SERDIA program.
2 - From the “PARAMETER” menu, select the option
“CALIBRATION”.

3 - Select the line containing the parameter “1530:

AnalogIn3_RefLow”, apply light pressure to the ac-
celerator and release,then click on “GET VALUE” so
that the software can read the value.
4 - Click “PC->ECU”, then click “SAVE IN ECU” to save
the new parameter.

5 - Select the line containing the parameter “1531:

AnalogIn3_RefHigh”, apply light pressure to the ac-
celerator and release, then click on “GET VALUE” so
that the software can read the value.
6 - Click “PC->ECU”, then click “SAVE IN ECU” to save
the new parameter.

20-24
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

4.2.5 READING AND SAVING DATA

CAUTION
Top speed is a parameter variable according to the market where the tractor is purchased and used.
It is therefore the RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AUTHORISED SERVICE CENTRE to configure the maximum ground
speed correctly, in accordance with local statutory regulations:
- statutory top speed for all countries except Germany is 40 km/h.
- statutory top speed for Germany is 50 km/h

1 - Connect a portable computer with the SERDIA pro-

gram installed (for details see «Connection of portable
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine con-
trol unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position and start
the SERDIA program.
3 - From the “EXTRAS” menu, select the option “Maxi-
mum speed”.

4 - Click “SG -> PC” to read the value programmed cur-

rently in the control unit.
5 - Should the programmed value not be correct, select
the proper value from those available, then click “PC-
>SG” and “Save in ECU” in sequence, and finally click
“Close” to exit.

20-25
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

4.3 RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the transmission control unit is renewed, the technician must carry out the following operations:
1 - program the version and serial number of the tractor
2 - calibrate the clutch pedal position sensor
3 - calibrate the main clutch proportional solenoid valve
The purpose of setting the type of tractor and making calibrations is to inform the components of the control unit as to the
parameters that must be used for the transmission to operate correctly.

4.3.1 SETTING THE TRACTOR VERSION AND SERIAL NUMBER

1 - Connect a portable computer with the EDS program installed (for details see «Connection of a portable computer
with “EDS” software to the transmission control unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the (ON) position and start the EDS program.
3 - From the introductory menu, start the transmission diagnosis program by pressing key “1” and selecting option “2”.

4 - From the main menu, select “DEST45” on the “CONTROL” menu.

20-26
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

5 - Select “END-OF-LINE PROGRAMMING” from the “CONTROL” menu.

6 - Select “CONFIG”.

7 - Use the “PAGE UP” or “PAGE DOWN” functions to find the identification number of the vehicle corresponding
to the first four digits of the serial number, then press Enter to confirm the value and type the remaining four num-
bers to complete the serial number of the machine (in the example illustrated, the version is 8092 and the serial
number 0807).
8 - Proceed to calibrate the clutch pedal position sensor and the main clutch as described in the following chap-
ters.

20-27
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

4.3.2 CALIBRATION OF THE CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1 - Connect a portable computer with the EDS program installed (for details see «Connection of a portable computer
with “EDS” software to the transmission control unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the (ON) position and start the EDS program.
3 - From the introductory menu, start the transmission diagnosis program by pressing key “1” and selecting option “2”.

4 - From the main menu, select “DEST45” on the “CONTROL” menu.

20-28
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

5 - Select “END-OF-LINE PROGRAMMING” from the “CONTROL” menu.

6 - Click on “1” to initiate the sensor calibration procedure.

7 - Click on “OK” and depress the clutch pedal slowly to full travel, then release slowly.

20-29
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

8 - At the end of the calibration procedure, a message will appear confirming calibration successfully completed; at this
point, exit the EDS program.

4.3.3 CALIBRATION OF THE MAIN CLUTCH PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVE

NOTE
To carry out the calibration of the main clutch, warm the transmission oil to about 40 °C and position the trac-
tor on a flat tarmac surface with at least 20 metres of free space ahead.
Put the transmission in neutral by positioning the shuttle lever at “NEUTRAL”, and make certain the hand-
brake is released.
1 - Connect a portable computer with the EDS program installed (for details see «Connection of a portable computer
with “EDS” software to the transmission control unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the (ON) position and start the EDS program.
3 - From the introductory menu, start the transmission diagnosis program by pressing key “1” and selecting option “2”.

20-30
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

4 - From the main menu, select “DEST45” on the “CONTROL” menu.

5 - Select “END-OF-LINE PROGRAMMING” from the “CONTROL” menu.

NOTE
Make certain that the transmission oil is at approximately 40 °C, using “DATA - PLAIN TEXT DISPLAY” from the DI-
AGNOSIS menu, and check that the shuttle lever is positioned at “NEUTRAL”.
6 - Throttle the engine to 1500 rev/min., select a ratio between 3rd M and 1st L, then click “2” to initiate the sensor cal-
ibration procedure.

20-31
 RENEWAL OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

7 - Select 3rd gear, shift the shuttle lever to the “FORWARD” position and wait for the automatic procedure to finish.
CAUTION
Do not depress the clutch pedal or move the shuttle lever during the automatic procedure, as this could cause the
program to abort and cancel.

8 - At the end of the calibration procedure, a message will appear confirming calibration successfully completed; at this
point, exit the EDS program.

4.4 RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the lift control unit is renewed, the technician must carry out the following operations:
1 - program the type of tractor;
2 - configure no radar status;
3 - calibrate the lift position sensor: up down;
4 - check and calibrate the lift control lever.
The purpose of identifying the type of tractor and calibrating the sensors is to inform the control unit of the parameters it
must use to pilot and monitor the operation of the lift correctly.
To perform the calibration, connect the ART to the connector in the control units compartment of the cab, then select EHR+
from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described.

20-32
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

4.4.1 PROGRAMMING THE TYPE OF TRACTOR

1 - From the main menu, press “2” to bring up the P A R A M E T E R S M E N U
“PARAMETERS MENU”. = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - S p e e d c o n s t a n t
2 - O p t i o n s

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

2 - Press “2”. O P T I O N S
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - A S M 1
2 - A U T O D R O P 0
3 - 4 W D - 3 0 D E G 0
4 - R O T A T E A L A R M 1
5 - E X T D A L A R M 0
6 - S E N S I T I V . 2 5 5

7 - T R A C T O R 1
8 - E X T S E N S O R 1
9 - M I X M O D E 0

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

3 - Press “7”. T R A C T O R T Y P E
4 - Press the key corresponding to the tractor being = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
serviced, and confirm by pressing “E” to memorize 1 - 8 0 - 1 0 5 H P
the information. 2 - 1 0 6 - 1 3 5 H P
5 - Press “E” twice in succession to return to the main 3 - 1 5 0 - 2 0 0 H P
menu. 4 - 2 3 0 - 2 6 0 H P

[ E ] E x i t

20-33
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

4.4.2 CONFIGURING NO RADAR STATUS

1 - From the main menu, press“2” to bring up the P A R A M E T E R S M E N U
“PARAMETERS MENU”. = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - S p e e d c o n s t a n t
2 - O p t i o n s

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

2 - Press “1”.
S P E E D C O N S T A N T .
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - R A D A R 6 5 0 0
2 - W H E E L 3 2 5 0

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “1”.
R A D A R
4 - Select value “0” to configure machine without radar,
or select “6500” for machine with radar. = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
5 - In the event that the parameter was not set correctly,
the technician can cancel the operation by pressing
“A” and restore the previous value, whereas press-
ing “C” will confirm the new setting and cause the
“PARAMETERS” menu to reappear. A c t u a l : 6 5 0 0
6 - Press “E” to return to the main menu.
N e w :

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-34
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

4.4.3 CALIBRATION OF THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR

NOTE S E T T I N G M E N U
This operation must be carried out with the en-
= = = = = = = = = =
= = = = = =
gine running on idle, the parking brake applied
and the shuttle lever in the neutral position. 1 - M i n H e i g t h 0 . 9 4
1 - From the main menu, press “3” to bring up the 2 - M a x H e i g t h 4 . 0 2
“CALIBRATIONS” menu. 3 - L o c k S p e d e 2 0
4 - S l i p a g e % 1 0
- - - M a i n L
e v e r - - -
5 - T r a n s p o
r t 5 . 3 6
6 - S t o p 3 . 6 6
7 - C o n t r o l 1 . 9 2
8 - F l o a t 1 . 4 5

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

2 - Unlock the hydraulic lift by setting the control lever to M i n . H e i g h t

the “STOP” position for around two seconds (after = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
which, the indicator Led will stop blinking).
NOTE
If the lift control lever is already in the “STOP” position,
move it away and then back again to the “STOP” po-
sition. A c t u a l : 0 . 9 4
3 - Press “1”.
N e w : 0 . 9 2

[ D ] D e l e t e
[ E ] E x i t

4 - Press the 'Down' button to lower the lift completely M i n . H e i g h t

(as the lift links descend, the “Actual” value should = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
decrease continuously).
5 - When the lift has reached its lower travel limit, press
“E” to memorize the value.

A c t u a l : 0 . 9 4

N e w : 0 . 9 2

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-35
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

6 - In the event that the operation was not carried out M a x . H e i g h t

correctly, the technician can cancel it by pressing = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
“A” and restore the previous value, whereas
pressing “C” will confirm the new setting and cause
the “CALIBRATIONS” menu to reappear.
7 - Unlock the lift again by shifting the control lever away
and then back again to the “STOP” position. A c t u a l : 4 . 0 2
8 - Press “2”.
N e w : 0 . 9 2

[ D ] D e l e t e
[ E ] E x i t

9 - Press the 'Up' button to raise the lift fully (as the lift M a x . H e i g h t
links ascend, the “Actual” value should increase = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
continuously).
10 - When the lift has reached its upper travel limit, press
the Down button until the voltage reads approxi-
mately 0.2V less than the value registering at the
travel limit, then press “E” to memorize the value. A c t u a l : 4 . 0 2

N e w : 4 . 0 4

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

11 - In the event that the operation was not carried out S E T T I N G M E N U

correctly, the technician can cancel it by pressing = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
“A” and restore the previous value, whereas press- 1 - M i n H e i g h t 0 . 9 4
ing “C” will confirm the new setting and cause the 2 - M a x H e i g h t 4 . 0 2
“CALIBRATIONS” menu to reappear.
3 - L o c k S p e e d 2 0
12 - Press “E” to return to the main menu.
4 - S l i p a g e % 1 0
- - - M a i n L e v e r - - -
5 - T r a n s p o r t 5 . 3 6
6 - S t o p 3 . 6 6
7 - C o n t r o l 1 . 9 2
8 - F l o a t 1 . 4 5

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-36
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

4.4.4 CHECKING AND CALIBRATING THE LIFT CONTROL LEVER

NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine off and the parking brake applied.

1 - From the main menu, press “1” to bring up the M o n i t o r s M e n u

“MONITOR MENU”. = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - L i f t
2 - C o n s o l l e
3 - A S M
4 - P o w e r S u p p l y
5 - S e n s o r s

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

2 - Press “2”. C o n s o l l e
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
C t r l L e v e r 3 . 7 0 v
S e t P o i n t 1 . 4 1 v
M a x H e i g h t 7 . 9 4 v
C t r l M o d e 7 . 7 8 v
D r o p S p e e d 7 . 5 7 v
S l i p a g e 0 . 0 3 v
B u t t . U P O F F
B u t t . D W O F F

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

3 - Verify that the voltage output signal from the lift con- Position of Minimum Maximum
trol lever in the four positions is within range, and lever value value
press “E” twice in succession to return to the “MAIN”
Transport 4,70 6,69
menu.
Stop 3,00 4,32
Control 1,61 2,59
Float 0,72 1,61

20-37
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

4 - In the event of one or more values being out-of- S E T T I N G M E N U

range, press “3” to bring up the “CALIBRATIONS” = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
menu. 1 - M i n H e i g h t 0 . 9 4
2 - M a x H e i g h t 4 . 0 2
3 - L o c k S p e e d 2 0
4 - S l i p a g e % 1 0
- - - M a i n L e v e r - - -
5 - T r a n s p o r t 5 . 3 6
6 - S t o p 3 . 6 6
7 - C o n t r o l 1 . 9 2
8 - F l o a t 1 . 4 5

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

5 - Select the number corresponding to the position of S T O P

the lever in which the value was not correct.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
This example simulates an incorrect value in the
“STOP” position, in which case the technician presses
“6”.
A c t u a l : 3 . 6 6
CAUTION!
When an out-of-range value is detected in any one po-
sition, calibrate the values in the other operating po- N e w : 2 . 8 2
sitions as well.

[ E ] E x i t

6 - Set the lift control lever to the “STOP” position, then S T O P

press “E” to memorize the value. = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

A c t u a l : 3 . 6 6

N e w : 2 . 8 2

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-38
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF HYDRAULIC LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

7 - In the event that the operation was not carried out S E T T I N G M E N U

correctly, the technician can cancel it by pressing = = = = = = = = = =
= = = = = =
“A” and restore the previous value, whereas 1 - M i n H e i g t h 0 . 9 4
pressing “C” will confirm the new setting and cause
2 - M a x H e i g t h 4 . 0 2
the “CALIBRATIONS” menu to reappear.
3 - L o c k S p e d e 2 0
8 - Repeat the operations described in points 5, 6 and 7
for each value found to be out of range, then press 4 - S l i p a g e % 1 0
“E” twice in succession to return to the main menu. - - - M a i n L
e v e r - - -
5 - T r a n s p o
r t 5 . 3 6
6 - S t o p 3 . 6 6
7 - C o n t r o l 1 . 9 2
8 - F l o a t 1 . 4 5

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

20-39
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE INFOCENTER

4.5 RENEWAL OF THE INFOCENTER

Whenever the INFOCENTER is renewed, the technician must configure the operating parameters (constants).
Configuration is needed in order to inform the Infocenter of the values that must be used for the purposes of displaying data
(units of measure, and language of choice for alarm messages).

4.5.1 ENTERING CONSTANTS

1 - Connect a portable computer with the EDS program installed (for details see «Connection of a portable computer
with "EDS" software to the transmission control unit»).
2 - Turn the starter key to the “I” (ON) position and start the EDS program.
3 - From the introductory menu, start the Infocenter diagnosis program by pressing key “4” or “5”, depending on which
port the cable is connected to.

4 - When the introductory page of the program appears, press “F1” to initiate the procedure of entering the operating
constants.

20-40
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF THE INFOCENTER

5 - Using the arrow keys, select constant K1, press Enter, insert the new value and confirm by pressing Enter again.
6 - Repeat the procedure until all the constants have been entered, then position the cursor on the “Ende Konstan-
tenmenü” line and press Enter.

List of values to enter

Serial Constants
Model number
root K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13
108 8110 2372 20 0 210 4400 1000 2372 1000 0 6 0
118 8111 2372 20 0 210 (1) 4400 1000 (2) 2372 1000 0 6 0
128 8112 2372 20 0 210 4400 1000 2372 1000 0 6 0
(1): Enter the number of hours clocked by the tractor
(2): Enter the value corresponding to the preferred language and units of measure, and specify whether or not radar is in-
stalled.

Table of constants K8
Unit of Unit of
Language Radar Constant Language Radar Constant
measure measure
Danish km/h None 75 Italian km/h Installed 109
Danish km/h Installed 107 Dutch km/h None 79
French km/h None 69 Dutch km/h Installed 111
French km/h Installed 101 Portuguese km/h None 73
English km/h None 67 Portuguese km/h Installed 105
English km/h Installed 99 Spanish km/h None 71
English mph None 66 Spanish km/h Installed 103
English mph Installed 98 German km/h None 65
Italian km/h None 77 German km/h Installed 97

20-41
PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE RENEWAL OF AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT

4.6 RENEWAL OF AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the front axle suspension control unit is renewed, the technician must verify that the axle suspension position
sensor is correctly deployed.
The purpose of this verification is to inform the control unit of the voltage values generated by the sensor when the sus-
pension is inactive, or at rest.
To perform the verification, connect the ART to the connector in the control units compartment of the cab, select axle sus-
pension from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described.

4.6.1 CHECKING CALIBRATION OF THE SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR

NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine running on idle, the parking brake applied, the shuttle lever in
neutral and the axle suspension deactivated.

1 - From the main menu, press “1” to bring up the M o n i t o r M e n u

“MONITORS MENU”. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - S U S P E N S I O N
2 - P o w e r S u p p l y

[ E ] E x i t

2 - Press “1”. S u s p e n s i o n
3 - Verify that the voltage output signal from the axle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
suspension position sensor (indicated under the
S t a t u s L O C K
item “POSI” is 1.9 V.
4 - -In the event of the value being incorrect, proceed
with calibration of the sensor as described in the M i n - - - P o s . - - - M a x
chapter “REMOVAL AND POSITIONING OF THE 2 . 0 V 1 . 9 V 6 . 0 V
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR”,
section 30. L S S V 0 m A O F F
5 - Activate the axle suspension and check that the U P S V 0 m A O F F
voltage output signal from the position sensor
D W S V 0 m A O F F
(indicated under the item “POSI” is approximately
3.8 V).
B r a k e O F F
4 W h e e l D r i v e O F F
W h e e l s K m / h 0 . 0

[ E ] E x i t

20-42
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

5. ALARMS
This chapter contains a list of all the alarms that can be detected by the tractor's electronic system.
To facilitate searches, the alarms are organized according to the control unit by which they are detected:
1 - List of alarms displayed by the hydraulic lift and ASM control unit.
For details of how the alarms are displayed, see the heading “Power lift control unit”.
2 - List of alarms displayed on EDS: list of alarms detected by transmission control unit.
For details of how the alarms are displayed, see the heading “Transmission control unit”.
3 - List of alarms displayed on SERDIA: list of alarms detected by engine control unit.
For details of how the alarms are displayed, see the heading “Engine control unit (DEUTZ EMR2)”.
4 - List of alarms displayed by the front axle suspension control unit.
For details of how the alarms are displayed, see the heading Front axle suspension control unit.

5.1 LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

The hydraulic lift control unit warns the operator of any malfunction in monitored components by way of a red Led (lift trans-
port lock indicator) located on the lift control console.
Faults are indicated using a system of coded flash sequences which, depending on how the control unit has been con-
figured, will either specify the precise nature of the fault (extended alarm) or simply identify the device affected (standard
alarm).
Also, and likewise depending on the configuration, the unit can display only the alarm with the lowest code (rotation of de-
activated alarms),or it can display all the active alarms (rotation of alarms activated), whereas the ART shows the 10 most
recent alarms generated, and if a further alarm is triggered, the first of the ten will be eliminated.
To verify, using the ART, whether or not an alarm detected is “active”, the technician must cancel all the alarms, turn the
starter key to the “O” (OFF) position, then make a fresh connection to the control unit.
CAUTION
In the event of it no longer being possible to operate the lift, and alarm 11 is indicated, check whether or not the ART
will connect to the control unit. If a connection cannot be made, the problem is identifiable as a fault affecting the
EPROM, which must therefore be replaced.

20-43
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

5.1.1 LIST OF ALARMS BY EXTENDED CODE

Example of flash for code 23 (times expressed in seconds).

ON
OFF 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3.0

Extended Standard
flash flash
Display on ART Description Page

The control unit detects that the power input to

12 26 Supply Pos. Sens. 20-50
the lift position sensor is not correct.
The control unit detects a short circuit on the
13 13 ShortCircuitPWM 20-51
control line to the lift directional control valve.
The control unit detects that either the differen-
14 53 ASM-ShortCircuit tial lock or four wheel drive solenoid valve is 20-52
short-circuiting.
The control unit detects incorrect data coming
16 18 HitchControlLev. 20-53
from the lift control lever.
The control unit detects that the lift position sen-
18 22 Pos.Sens.NotConn 20-54
sor is not connected.
The control unit detects that the lift Up control
21 11 ShortCircuitEVUP 20-55
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
23 11 EvUpNotConnect.L energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Up 20-56
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
24 11 EvUpNotConnect.D energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift Up 20-57
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects that the lift Down control
31 12 ShortCircuitEVDW 20-58
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
33 12 EvDwDeconnecteeL energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Down 20-59
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
34 12 EvDwDeconnect.D energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift 20-60
Down solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
41 51 ShortCircuit4WD 20-61
lenoid valve relay is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
43 51 4WD NotConnected 20-62
lenoid valve relay is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the differential lock
51 52 ShortCircuitDIF -OK - 20-63
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that thedifferential lock
53 52 EvDIFDeconnect. 20-64
actuator solenoid valve is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the right hand draft
62 31 NoRightDraftSens. 20-65
sensor is disconnected.

20-44
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Extended Standard
flash flash Display on ART Description Page

The control unit detects that the left hand draft

63 32 NoLeftDraftSens. 20-66
sensor is disconnected.
The engine control unit detects that the signal
64 42 WheelSensNotConn. from the wheel speed pickup is either non-ex- 20-67
istent or incorrect.
The control unit detects that the radar is discon-
65 41 Radar NotConnect. 20-68
nected.
The control unit detects that the 5V power input
67 26 5v Supply 20-69
is not correct.
The control unit detects that the 8V power input
68 16 8v Supply 20-69
is not correct.
The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop po-
71 34 DownSpeedPotent. 20-70
tentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the depth potenti-
72 23 SetPoint Potent. 20-71
ometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the MIX potentiom-
73 36 CtrlMode Potent. 20-72
eter is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the maximum lift
74 24 MaxHeightPotent. height potentiometer is disconnected or short- 20-73
circuiting.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
76 54 EEPROM :OPTION 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
77 54 EEPROM : SPEED 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
78 54 EEPROM : CALIB 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
81 55 EEPROM : CTRL 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
82 55 EEPROM : PWM 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
83 55 EEPROM : DRAFT 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
84 55 EEPROM : SLIP 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
85 55 EEPROM : POS 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
86 55 EEPROM : AB 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
87 55 EEPROM : SFCFG 20-77
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
88 55 EEPROM : SLCFG 20-77
from EEPROM.

20-45
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

5.1.2 LIST OF ALARMS BY STANDARD CODE

Example of flash for code 23 (times expressed in seconds).

ON
OFF 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 3.0

Standard Extended Display

flash flash on ART Description Page

The control unit detects that the lift Up control

21 ShortCircuitEVUP 20-55
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
11 23 EvUpNotConnect.L energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Up 20-56
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
24 EvUpNotConnect.D energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift Up 20-57
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects that the lift Down control
31 ShortCircuitEVDW 20-58
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
12 33 EvDwDeconnecteeL energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Down 20-59
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
34 EvDwDeconnect.D energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift 20-60
Down solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects a short circuit on the
13 13 ShortCircuitPWM 20-51
control line to the lift directional control valve.
The control unit detects that the 8V power input
16 68 8v Supply 20-69
is not correct.
The control unit detects incorrect data coming
18 16 HitchControlLev. 20-53
from the lift control lever.
The control unit detects that the lift position sen-
22 18 Pos.Sens.NotConn 20-54
sor is not connected.
The control unit detects that the depth potenti-
23 72 SetPoint Potent. 20-71
ometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the maximum lift
24 74 MaxHeightPotent. height potentiometer is disconnected or short- 20-73
circuiting.
The control unit detects that the power input to
12 Supply Pos. Sens. 20-50
the lift position sensor is not correct.
26
The control unit detects that the 5V power input
67 5v Supply is not correct. 20-69

The control unit detects that the right hand draft

31 62 NoRightDraftSens. 20-65
sensor is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the left hand draft
32 63 NoLeftDraftSens. 20-66
sensor is disconnected.

20-46
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Standard Extended Display

flash flash on ART Description Page

The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop po-

34 71 DownSpeedPotent. 20-70
tentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the MIX potentiom-
36 73 CtrlMode Potent. 20-72
eter is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the radar is discon-
41 65 Radar NotConnect. 20-68
nected.
The engine control unit detects that the signal
42 64 WheelSensNotConn. from the wheel speed pickup is either non-ex- 20-67
istent or incorrect.
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
41 ShortCircuit4WD 20-55
lenoid valve relay is short-circuiting.
51
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
43 4WD NotConnected 20-62
lenoid valve relay is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the differential lock
51 ShortCircuitDIF -OK - 20-63
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
52
The control unit detects that the differential lock
53 EvDIFDeconnect. 20-64
actuator solenoid valve is disconnected.
The control unit detects that either the differen-
53 14 ASM-ShortCircuit tial lock or four wheel drive solenoid valve is 20-52
short-circuiting.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
76 EEPROM :OPTION 20-74
from EEPROM.

54 The control unit detects a bad reading of data

77 EEPROM : SPEED 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
78 EEPROM : CALIB 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
81 EEPROM : CTRL 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
82 EEPROM : PWM 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
83 EEPROM : DRAFT 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
84 EEPROM : SLIP 20-76
from EEPROM.
55
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
85 EEPROM : POS 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
86 EEPROM : AB 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
87 EEPROM : SFCFG 20-77
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
88 EEPROM : SLCFG 20-77
from EEPROM.

20-47
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

5.1.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED ON ART

Display Extended Standard

Description Page
on ART flash flash
The control unit detects that the power input to
Supply Pos. Sens. 12 26 20-50
the lift position sensor is not correct.
The control unit detects that the 5V power input
5v Supply 67 26 20-69
is not correct.
The control unit detects that the 8V power input
8v Supply 68 16 20-69
is not correct.
The control unit detects that the lift Down control
ShortCircuitEVDW 31 12 20-58
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the lift Up control
ShortCircuitEVUP 21 11 20-55
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
ShortCircuit4WD 41 51 20-61
lenoid valve relay is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that either the differen-
ASM-ShortCircuit 14 53 tial lock or four wheel drive solenoid valve is 20-52
short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the differential lock
ShortCircuitDIF -OK - 51 52 20-63
solenoid valve is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects a short circuit on the
ShortCircuitPWM 13 13 20-51
control line to the lift directional control valve.
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch so-
4WD NotConnected 43 51 20-62
lenoid valve relay is disconnected.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : AB 86 55 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : CALIB 78 54 20-74
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : CTRL 81 55 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : DRAFT 83 55 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : POS 85 55 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : PWM 82 55 20-75
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : SFCFG 87 55 20-77
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : SLCFG 88 55 20-77
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : SLIP 84 55 20-76
from EEPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM : SPEED 77 54 20-74
from EPROM.
The control unit detects a bad reading of data
EEPROM :OPTION 76 54 20-74
from EEPROM.

20-48
ALARMS LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Display Extended Standard

Description Page
on ART flash flash
The control unit detects that the differential lock
EvDIFDeconnect. 53 52 20-64
actuator solenoid valve is disconnected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
EvDwDeconnect.D 34 12 energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift 20-60
Down solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
EvDwDeconnecteeL 33 12 energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Down 20-59
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the presence of an
EvUpNotConnect.D 24 11 energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift Up 20-57
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects, in the absence of any
EvUpNotConnect.L 23 11 energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Up 20-56
solenoid valve coil is not connected.
The control unit detects incorrect data coming
HitchControlLev. 16 18 20-53
from the lift control lever.
The control unit detects that the MIX potentiom-
CtrlMode Potent. 73 36 20-72
eter is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the depth potenti-
SetPoint Potent. 72 23 20-71
ometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the maximum lift
MaxHeightPotent. 74 24 height potentiometer is disconnected or short- 20-73
circuiting.
The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop po-
DownSpeedPotent. 71 34 20-70
tentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the radar is discon-
Radar NotConnect. 65 41 20-68
nected.
The engine control unit detects that the signal
WheelSensNotConn. 64 42 from the wheel speed pickup is either non-ex- 20-67
istent or incorrect.
The control unit detects that the lift position sen-
Pos.Sens.NotConn 18 22 20-54
sor is not connected.
The control unit detects that the right hand draft
NoRightDraftSens. 62 31 20-65
sensor is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the left hand draft
NoLeftDraftSens. 63 32 20-66
sensor is disconnected.

20-49
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

5.1.4 ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 12 Supply Pos. Sens.

Standard alarm: 26

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the lift position sensor is not correct.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “POS SEN” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift position sensor is correct (5 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “POS SEN”).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “POS SEN” and to chassis
earth, and measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “POS SEN” and to chassis
earth, and measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “POS SEN” and to chassis earth,
and check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4

15

23 21 20
4 5 20 21 15 23 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 21 22 23
7.5A

F34

+15 1 2 3 POS. SENS.

U

S
0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017550

20-50
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 13 ShortCircuitPWM

Standard alarm: 13

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit on the control line to the lift directional control valve.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connectors “EV UP” and “EV DW” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are
firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the Up and Down solenoids (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV UP” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to check for short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DW” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to check for short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2 1

20
4 5 20 2 1 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 19 20

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DW EV UP
2 1 2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017560

20-51
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 14 ASM-ShortCircuit

Standard alarm: 53

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that a solenoid valve operating the differential lock or four wheel drive, or the clutch relay, is short-
circuiting.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connectors “RL9” and “EVDF” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firm-
ly attached and not oxidised.
• Check that the resistance across the coil of relay RL9 is 70 Ohm approx.
• Test the internal resistance of the differential lock actuator solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of the relay socket, and measure
the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DF” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 8 2

20
4 5 20 8 2 JX2

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 8 13

GND4 GND2
7.5A

F34
D7
EV DF 1 2
3 5 4

+15 2 1

RL9
(DT/BRAKE)
0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017730

20-52
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 16 HitchControlLev.

Standard alarm: 18

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects incorrect data coming from the lift control lever.
NOTE
In the event of the "DownSpeedPotent.", "SetPoint Potent.", CtrlMode Potent.”, MaxHeightPotent.” and “Hitch-
ControlLev." alarms being displayed simultaneously, connect a test meter to pin 11 (positive) and pin 9 (negative)
of connector “X14” on the control console and check that the voltage is between 7.5 and 8.5 V.
If the value is within range, check the continuity of the wiring and make certain there are no short circuits to earth
or to a positive leg of the power harness between the lift control unit and the lift control console.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EHR” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift control lever is correct (8 V approx meas-
ured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EHR”)
• Verify the correct operation of the control lever (for details see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EHR” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EHR” and to chassis earth, and
check that there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “EHR” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4 6 5 4

22 20 18
4 5 20 22 18 6 JX1

GND4

J2
5 2

X14 11 3 9 7 1 2 3 EHR
7.5A

F34

+15
0441.9533
D0017720

20-53
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 18 Pos.Sens.NotConn

Standard alarm: 22

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is not connected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “POS SEN” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift position sensor is correct (5 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “POS SEN”)
• Verify the correct operation of the position sensor (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “POS SEN” and to pin 23 of con-
nector JX1, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “POS SEN” and to chassis
earth, and measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “POS SEN” and to chassis earth,
and check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4

15

23 21 20
4 5 20 21 15 23 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 21 22 23
7.5A

F34

+15 1 2 3 POS. SENS.

U

S
0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017550

20-54
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 21 ShortCircuitEVUP

Standard alarm: 11

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift Up solenoid valve is short-circuiting.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV UP” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Up control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV UP” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to check for short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed..

0.012.8732.4
5 4 1

20
4 5 20 1 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 20

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV UP
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017580

20-55
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 23 EvUpNotConnect.L

Standard alarm: 11

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects, in the absence of any energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Up solenoid valve coil is not con-
nected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV UP” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Up control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV UP” and to pin 1 o connector
“JX1”, and measure the resistance to check the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV UP” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 1

20
4 5 20 1 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 20

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV UP
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017580

20-56
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 24 EvUpNotConnect.D

Standard alarm: 11

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects, in the presence of an energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift Up solenoid valve coil is not
connected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV UP” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Up control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV UP” and to pin 1 of con-
nector “JX1”, and measure the resistance to check the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV UP” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 1

20
4 5 20 1 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 20

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV UP
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017580

20-57
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 31 ShortCircuitEVDW

Standard alarm: 12

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift Down solenoid valve is short-circuiting.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV DW” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Down control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DW” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to check for short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2

20
4 5 20 2 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 19

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DW
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017600

20-58
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 33 EvDwDeconnect.L

Standard alarm: 12

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects, in the absence of any energizing signal (static safety), that the lift Down solenoid valve coil is not
connected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV DW” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Up control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DW” and to pin 2 of con-
nector “JX1” , and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV DW” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2

20
4 5 20 2 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 19

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DW
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017600

20-59
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 34 EvDwDeconnect.D

Standard alarm: 12

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects, in the presence of an energizing signal (dynamic safety), that the lift Down solenoid valve coil is not
connected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV DW” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the lift Up control solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DW” and to pin 2 of con-
nector “JX1” , and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV DW” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2

20
4 5 20 2 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 19

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DW
2 1
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017600

20-60
 ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 41 ShortCircuit4WD

Standard alarm: 51

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch solenoid valve relay is short-circuiting.

NOTE
This alarm will be displayed only when ASM is active.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts of relay “RL9” and of the connectors on the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Deselect the four wheel drive, differential lock and ASM functions with the relative switches and, with the starter key in
the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of the relay socket and check the voltage, which should
measure 2.5 V approx.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of the relay socket and measure the
resistance to verify that there are no short circuits (meter reading: infinity).
• Replace the relay “RL9” with a new one, clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I”
(ON) position again, and if the alarm is still present, the control unit must be renewed..

0.012.8732.4
5 4 8

20
4 5 20 8 JX2

GND4

J2
5 2 8

GND4
7.5A

F34
D7

3 5 4

+15 2 1

RL9
(DT/BRAKE)
0441.9533
D0017740
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 43 4WD NotConnected

Standard alarm: 51

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 4WD clutch solenoid valve relay is disconnected.

NOTA
This alarm will be displayed only when ASM is active.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts of relay “RL9” and of the connectors on the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Deselect the four wheel drive, differential lock and ASM functions with the relative switches and, with the starter key in
the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of the relay socket and check the voltage, which should reg-
ister 2.5 V approx.
• Replace the relay “RL9” with a new one, clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I”
(ON) position again, and if the alarm is still present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 8

20
4 5 20 8 JX2

GND4

J2
5 2 8

GND4
7.5A

F34
D7

3 5 4

+15 2 1

RL9
(DT/BRAKE)
0441.9533
D0017740

20-62
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 51 ShortCircuitDIF -OK -

Standard alarm: 52

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the differential lock actuator solenoid valve is short-circuiting.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV DF” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the differential lock solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV DF” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2

20
JX1 4 5 20 2 JX2

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 13

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DF
1 2
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017620

20-63
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 53 EvDIFDeconnect.

Standard alarm: 52

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the differential lock actuator solenoid valve is disconnected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV DF” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the differential lock actuator solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV DF” and to pin 2 of con-
nector “JX2”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV DF” and to chassis earth,
and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 2

20
JX1 4 5 20 2 JX2

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 13

GND2
7.5A

F34

EV DF
1 2
+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017620

20-64
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 62 NoRightDraftSens.

Standard alarm: 31

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the right hand draft sensor is disconnected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “RIGHT DRAFT” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the draft sensor is correct (8 V approx meas-
ured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “RIGHT DRAFT”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “RIGHT DRAFT” and pin 17 of
connector “JX2”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
5 4 3

21 20 17
4 5 20 21 17 3 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 21 25 17
7.5A

F34
RIGHT
DRAFT
1 2 3
+15
U

F
0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017630

20-65
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 63 NoLeftDraftSens.

Standard alarm: 32

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the left hand draft sensor is disconnected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “LEFT DRAFT” and on those of the lift control unit, “JX1” and “JX2”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the draft sensor is correct (8 V approx meas-
ured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “LEFT DRAFT”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “LEFT DRAFT” and pin 10 of
connector “JX2”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed..

0.012.8732.4
5 4 3

21 20 10
4 5 20 21 10 3 JX1

GND4

J2 TKAB2
5 2 21 24 17
7.5A

F34
LEFT
DRAFT
1 2 3
+15
U

F
0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017640

20-66
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 64 WheelSensNotConn.

Standard alarm: 42

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the wheel speed pickup is either non-existent or incorrect.
NOTA
If, when this alarm is triggered, the Infocenter continues to indicate the ground speed, the fault will be on the line
between the Infocenter and the transmission control unit; conversely, if the speed is not indicated with the ma-
chine in motion, the problem is in the connection between the wheel sensors, the transmission control unit and the
Infocenter (for details on how to identify the fault, see transmission alarm N° 47).

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ST1” of the Infocenter, connector “X8” of the engine control unit circuit board,
connector “MX2” of the engine control unit and connectors “JX1” and “JX2” of the lift control unit, are all firmly attached
and not oxidised.
• Check with the SERDIA program that the engine control unit is receiving the ground speed signal. If the signal is being
acknowledged, renew the lift control unit.
• Connect a test meter to pin 11 of connector “ST1” and pin 19 of connector “JX2”, and measure the resistance to verify
the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 19 of connector “JX2” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 19 of connector “JX2” and to cab earth, and
check that there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed..

0.012.8732.4 5 4

20 19
JX1 4 5 20 19 JX2
X8
2.2Kohm
5
6

GND4

7
J2 AS3 MX2
5 2 4
7.5A

F34
3 12 9 2 11 ST1
GND

GND

WHEEL RPM OUTPUT

+30

+15

+15

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017650

20-67
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 65 Radar NotConnect.

Standard alarm: 41

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the radar is disconnected.
NOTE
If, when this alarm is triggered, the Infocenter indicates a wheelslip value within normal limits (on the road, wheel-
slip should be zero), the fault will be on the line between the Infocenter and the transmission control unit; con-
versely, if an abnormally high wheelslip value is indicated with the machine in motion (e.g. 100%), the problem is in
the connection between the radar and the Infocenter.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “RADAR”, on connectors “ST1” and “ST2” of the Infocenter and on connectors
“JX1” and “JX2” of the lift control unit, are all firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the radar is correct (12 V measured between
pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “RADAR”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “RADAR” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “RADAR” and pin 21 of con-
nector “ST2”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “ST1” and pin 3 of connector “JX2”, and measure the resistance to verify the
continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “JX2” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “JX2” and to chassis earth, and
check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

5 4 3 0.012.8732.4

20
JX1 4 5 20 3 JX2

AS3 ST1
21 5 RADAR OUTPUT

GND4
RADAR INPUT
2 21
AS2 ST2

J2 TKAB2 0.012.8894.4
5 2 1 10 1

GND2

RADAR
7.5A

F34 F27
3A

2 3 1

+15

0441.9533 0443.7848
20-68 D0017670
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 67 5v Supply

Standard alarm: 26

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 5V power input is not correct.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 68 8v Supply

Standard alarm: 16

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 8V power input is not correct.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-69
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 71 DownSpeedPotent.

Standard alarm: 34

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop potentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
NOTE
In the event of the "DownSpeedPotent.", "SetPoint Potent.", “CtrlMode Potent.”, “MaxHeightPotent.” and “Hitch-
ControlLev." alarms being displayed simultaneously, connect a test meter to pin 11 (positive) and pin 9 (negative)
of connector “X14” at the control console and check that the voltage is between 7.5 and 8.5 V.
If the value is within range, check the continuity of the wiring and make certain there are no short circuits to earth
or to a positive leg of the power harness between the lift control unit and the lift control console.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X14” of the lift control console and on connectors “JX1” and “JX2” of the lift con-
trol unit are all firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift control panel is correct (8 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EHR”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 10 of connector “X14” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 10 of connector “X14” and to chassis earth, and
check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 8 and pin 18 of connector “JX1”, and measure
the resistance: the reading should be between about 220 Ohm and about 1150 Ohm.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4 8 6 5 4

22 20 18
4 5 20 22 18 8 6 JX1

GND4

J2
5 2

11 3 9 7 10 X14 1 2 3 EHR
7.5A

F34
4K7
220R

+15
0441.9533
D0017680

20-70
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 72 SetPoint Potent.

Standard alarm: 23

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the depth potentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
NOTE
In the event of the "DownSpeedPotent.", "SetPoint Potent.", “CtrlMode Potent.”, “MaxHeightPotent.” and “Hitch-
ControlLev." alarms being displayed simultaneously, connect a test meter to pin 11 (positive) and pin 9 (negative)
of connector “X14” on the control unit, and check that the voltage is between 7.5 and 8.5 V.
If the value is within range, check the continuity of the wiring and make certain there are no short circuits to earth
or to a positive leg of the power harness between the lift control unit and the lift control console.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X14” of the lift control console and on connectors “JX1” and “JX2” of the lift con-
trol unit are all firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift control panel is correct (8 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EHR”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 6 of connector “X14” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 6 of connector “X14” and to chassis earth, and
check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 7 and pin 18 of connector “JX1”, and measure
the resistance: the reading should be between about 220 Ohm and about 1150 Ohm.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed..

0.012.8732.4 7 6 5 4

22 20 18

4 5 20 22 18 7 6 JX1

GND4

J2
5 2

11 3 9 7 6 X14 1 2 3 EHR
7.5A

F34
4K7
220R

+15
0441.9533
D0017690

20-71
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 73 CtrlMode Potent.

Standard alarm: 36

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the MIX potentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
NOTA
In the event of the "DownSpeedPotent.", "SetPoint Potent.", “CtrlMode Potent.”, “MaxHeightPotent.” and “Hitch-
ControlLev." alarms being displayed simultaneously, connect a test meter to pin 11 (positive) and pin 9 (negative)
of connector “X14” at the control console and check that the voltage is between 7.5 and 8.5 V.
If the value is within range, check the continuity of the wiring and make certain there are no short circuits to earth
or to a positive leg of the power harness between the lift control unit and the lift control console.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X14” of the lift control console and on connectors “JX1” and “JX2” of the lift con-
trol unit are all firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift control panel is correct (8 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EHR”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “X14” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “X14” and to chassis earth, and
check to ensure there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 19 and pin 18 of connector “JX1”, and measure
the resistance: the reading should be between about 220 Ohm and about 1150 Ohm.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4 6 5 4

22 20 19 18
4 5 20 22 18 19 6 JX1

GND4

J2
5 2

11 3 9 7 5 X14 1 2 3 EHR
7.5A

F34
4K7
220R

+15
0441.9533
D0017700

20-72
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 74 MaxHeightPotent.

Standard alarm: 24

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the maximum lift height potentiometer is disconnected or short-circuiting.
NOTE
In the event of the "DownSpeedPotent.", "SetPoint Potent.", “CtrlMode Potent.”, “MaxHeightPotent.” and “Hitch-
ControlLev." alarms being displayed simultaneously, connect a test meter to pin 11 (positive) and pin 9 (negative)
of connector “X14” on the control unit and check that the voltage is between 7.5 and 8.5 V.
If the value is within range, check the continuity of the wiring and make certain there are no short circuits to earth
or to a positive leg of the power harness between the lift control unit and the lift control console.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X14” of the lift control console and on connectors “JX1” and “JX2” of the lift con-
trol unit are all firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the lift control panel is correct (8 V approx
measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EHR”)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 12 of connector “X14” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 12 of connector “X14” and to chassis earth, and
check that there are no short circuits to positive (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 14 and pin 18 of connector “JX1”, and measure
the resistance: the reading should be between about 220 Ohm and about 1150 Ohm.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
6 5 4

14

22 20 18
4 5 20 22 18 14 6 JX1

GND4

J2
5 2

11 3 9 7 12 X14 1 2 3 EHR
7.5A

F34
4K7
220R

+15
0441.9533
D0017710

20-73
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 76 EEPROM :OPTION

Standard alarm: 54

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 77 EEPROM : SPEED

Standard alarm: 54

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 78 EEPROM : CALIB

Standard alarm: 54

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-74
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 81 EEPROM : CTRL

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 82 EEPROM : PWM

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 83 EEPROM : DRAFT

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-75
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 84 EEPROM : SLIP

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 85 EEPROM : POS

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 86 EEPROM : AB

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-76
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF LIFT AND ASM ALARMS

Extended alarm: 87 EEPROM : SFCFG

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

Extended alarm: 88 EEPROM : SLCFG

Standard alarm: 55

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a bad reading of data from EEPROM.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-77
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ALARMS TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

5.2 LIST OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

The transmission control unit warns the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, by way of audible
signals, and messages generated in the display on the right hand front upright of the cab.
A fault is indicated by the appearance of a symbol (key) in the display, accompanied by a code and in certain instances by
an acoustic signal.
In the event of two or more alarms being activated simultaneously, the display will show only the one with the higher code.
All alarms presented on the display correspond directly to the alarm conditions detected via EDS, apart from a certain
number associated with malfunction of the connection between the control unit and the display, which are shown on the
display with the “EE” alarm code.
In addition to coded alarms, there are also conditions in which the control unit is unable to diagnose the cause of the fault;
these are identifiable from abnormalities in operation of the transmission.
Depending on the severity of the fault by which it is triggered, a given alarm can have a limiting effect on the way the trans-
mission is managed.
In many instances, where the fault is not serious, a warning appears in the display and the operation of the transmission re-
mains substantially unaffected, whereas in other cases, the warning is displayed and operation will be totally inhibited, or
in less serious cases, simply limited.

5.2.1 ABNORMALITIES NOT DETECTED BY THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

Abnormality Page

EDS software unable to connect to the transmission control unit (GEN1) 20-149

Transmission slips unexpectedly from forward or reverse drive into neutral (GEN2) 20-147

Transmission continues to shift range automatically every 1 or 2 seconds (GEN3) 20-147

Momentary loss of traction with the tractor in motion (GEN4) 20-148

Transmission stays permanently in neutral (GEN5) 20-149

5.2.2 ALARMS INDICATED ON THE TRANSMISSION DISPLAY AND BY THE EDS PROGRAM

Alarm Operating
Alarm description Page
code mode

11 The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration values. 20-85

12 The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the trans-
mission oil temperature sensor. 20-86

13 The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the tem-
20-87
perature sensor.

The control unit detects a discrepancy between the speeds sensed

at the main clutch input and at the transmission output, indicated by
14 the status of the start enable sensor (which indicates whether the
20-88
transmission is in neutral or gears are engaged)

The control unit detects that the transmission oil low pressure in-
15 dicator light is disconnected
20-89

20-79
ALARMS TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Alarm Operating
Alarm description Page
code mode

The control unit detects a short circuit to earth on the control line of
16 the Infocenter light indicating low transmission oil pressure
20-90

The control unit detects a short circuit to positive on the control line
17 of the Infocenter light indicating low transmission oil pressure
20-91

The control unit detects a discrepancy between the oil pressure

18 reading and the operating status of the transmission
20-92

The control unit detects the transmission display control signal

19 short-circuiting to earth
20-93

The control unit detects the transmission display control signal

20 short-circuiting to positive
20-94

The control unit detects a ground speed higher than the permissible
21 limit
20-95

The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than

22 the permissible limit with the machine operating in “FIELD” mode
20-95

The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than

23 20-95
the permissible limit with the machine operating in “ROAD” mode.

24 The control unit detects the main clutch running overspeed. 20-96

The control unit detects that solenoid Y5 (controlling field/road

27 Stand-by strategy 20-97
mode selection) is either not connected or faulty.

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y5 (field/
28 Stand-by strategy 20-98
road mode selection) is short-circuiting to earth

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y5 (field/
29 Stand-by strategy 20-99
road mode selection) is short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that solenoid Y4 is either not connected or

30 Stand-by strategy 20-100
faulty.

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-
31 Stand-by strategy 20-101
circuiting to earth

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-
32 Stand-by strategy 20-102
circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that solenoid Y3 is either not connected or

33 Stand-by strategy 20-103
faulty.

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y3 is short-
34 Stand-by strategy 20-104
circuiting to earth

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y3 is short-
35 Stand-by strategy 20-105
circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that solenoid Y2 is either not connected or

36 faulty.
Stand-by strategy 20-106

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-
37 circuiting to earth
Stand-by strategy 20-107

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-
38 circuiting to positive
Stand-by strategy 20-108

20-80
ALARMS TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Alarm Operating
Alarm description Page
code mode

The control unit detects that solenoid Y1 is either not connected or

39 faulty.
Stand-by strategy 20-109

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y1 is

40 Stand-by strategy 20-110
short-circuiting to earth

The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y1

41 Stand-by strategy 20-111
is short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is disconnected or
47 Limp-Home 20-112
short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is short-circuiting
48 Limp-Home 20-113
to earth

The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the

49 Limp-Home 20-114
rpm sensor nAb

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is disconnected or
50 Limp-Home 20-115
short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is short-circuiting
51 Limp-Home 20-116
to earth

The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the

52 Limp-Home 20-117
rpm sensor nHk

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is disconnected or
53 Limp-Home 20-118
short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is short-circuiting
54 Limp-Home 20-119
to earth

The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the

55 Limp-Home 20-120
rpm sensor nLsa

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is disconnected or
56 Limp-Home 20-121
short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is short-circuiting
57 Limp-Home 20-122
to earth

The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm

58 Limp-Home 20-123
sensor nLse

The control detects a conflict in the information received from the

64 clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed sensor, Emergency drive 20-124
regarding the position of the pedal

The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is
65 disconnected or short-circuiting to earth
Emergency drive 20-125

Emergency drive
The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is
66 short-circuiting to positive
or 20-126
TC-Shutdown

Emergency drive
The control unit detects that the power input to the
67 or 20-127
clutch pedal position sensor is less than the prescribed value
TC-Shutdown

Emergency drive
The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal po-
68 or 20-128
sition sensor is higher than the correct value
TC-Shutdown

20-81
ALARMS TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Alarm Operating
Alarm description Page
code mode

Emergency drive
69 The control unit detects one or more threshold values of the clutch
or 20-129
pedal position sensor out of range.
TC-Shutdown

The control unit detects that the calibration values of the clutch ped- Emergency drive
al have not been saved correctly due to a defect in the EEPROM
70 memory locations, or that the clutch pedal has never been calibrat-
or 20-129
ed TC-Shutdown

The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve oper-
76 ating the main clutch is disconnected
TC-Shutdown 20-130

The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve oper-
77 ating the main clutch is short-circuiting to earth
TC-Shutdown 20-131

The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is
79 disconnected
TC-Shutdown 20-132

The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is
80 short-circuiting to earth
TC-Shutdown 20-133

The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is
82 disconnected
TC-Shutdown 20-134

The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is
83 short-circuiting to earth
TC-Shutdown 20-135

The control unit detects a problem affecting the shuttle control le-
85 ver.
Transmission shutdown 20-136

The control unit detects that the type of vehicle has not been pro-
87 grammed correctly
TC-Shutdown 20-137

The control unit detects an abnormal level of current drawn by the

89 main clutch and forward/reverse solenoid valves Y6 and Y7
TC-Shutdown 20-138

The control unit detects an abnormal level of current drawn by the

90 powershift solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 and Y5
TC-Shutdown 20-139

The control unit detects a conflict between values read by the nLsa
91 and nHk sensors, the position of the clutch pedal and the position of TC-Shutdown 20-140
the creeper control lever

Transmission shutdown
92 The control unit has detected an abnormally high input voltage or 20-141
TC-Shutdown

Transmission shutdown
93 The control unit has detected an abnormally low input voltage or 20-141
TC-Shutdown

The control unit detects that the main clutch solenoid valve is short-
94 TC-Shutdown 20-142
circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is
95 TC-Shutdown 20-143
short-circuiting to positive

The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is
96 TC-Shutdown 20-144
short-circuiting to positive

20-82
ALARMS TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

Alarm Operating
Alarm description Page
cod. mode

The control unit detects that the transmission ECU software has not
97 been programmed correctly
TC-Shutdown 20-145

The control unit detects that transmission configuration data have

98 TC-Shutdown 20-145
not been programmed correctly.

The control unit detects that machine configuration data have not
99 TC-Shutdown 20-145
been saved correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)

The display detects a problem of communication with the trans-

EE 20-146
mission control unit.

20-83
ALARMS DEFINITION OF TRANSMISSION OPERATING MODES

5.5.3 DEFINITION OF TRANSMISSION OPERATING MODES

When a fault occurs, depending on the severity, the transmission control will respond by selecting one of the following
modes:
1 - Limp-Home
2 - Stand-by strategy
3 - Emergency drive
4 - Transmission shutdown
5 - TC-Shutdown

Limp-Home
In this mode, the operation of the transmission is limited.
Whenever Limp-Home mode cuts in, the transmission reverts automatically to neutral and the powershift can no longer be
used; the gears must be shifted with the mechanical linkage only.
Forward/reverse direction can be changed only with the tractor at a complete standstill and when the shuttle control lever
has been in the neutral position for more than 1 second (or if alarm code 47 is the only one active, simply by depressing the
clutch pedal).
To bring the transmission out of this mode, the fault must be rectified and the shuttle control lever returned to the “NEU-
TRAL” position, or the clutch pedal fully depressed.

Stand-by strategy
In this operating mode, the transmission management system locks up and the powershift can no longer be used; the
gears must be shifted with the mechanical linkage only.
To bring the transmission out of this mode, the fault must be rectified and the shuttle control lever returned to the “NEU-
TRAL” position, or the clutch pedal fully depressed.

Emergency drive
In this mode, the operation of the transmission is limited.
Whenever Emergency Drive cuts in, the powershift can no longer be used; the gears must be shifted with the mechanical
linkage only.
The engagement curve of the main clutch reverts automatically to default parameters.
The main clutch can no longer be modulated by way of the clutch pedal (any pressure applied to the pedal will cause the
main clutch to engage or disengage completely).
The power supply to the solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 and Y5 is cut off.
Any variation in the signal from the clutch pedal position sensor or the clutch pedal depressed sensor will cause the trans-
mission to revert to neutral.
The tractor can move off only from a completely motionless standing start, when the shuttle control lever has been in neu-
tral position for more than 1 second.
To bring the transmission out of this mode, the fault must be rectified and the shuttle control lever returned to the “NEU-
TRAL” position.

Transmission shutdown
In this mode, the operation of the transmission is completely inhibited.
When this shutdown occurs, the transmission locks up completely and reverts to neutral; the power supply to solenoid
valves Y6, Y7 and Y8 is cut off.
To bring the transmission out of this mode, the fault must be rectified and the shuttle control lever returned to the “NEU-
TRAL” position.

TC-Shutdown
In this mode, the operation of the transmission is completely inhibited.
When this shutdown occurs, the transmission locks up completely and reverts to neutral; the power supply to all the pow-
ershift solenoid valves is cut off.
To bring the transmission out of this mode, the fault must be rectified.

20-84
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

5.2.3 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 11

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration values.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sets the contact pressure on the main clutch pedal to
the default value (99.99, corresponding to the value registering at the end of the engagement ramp).

CHECK
• Perform the main clutch calibration procedure.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-85
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 12

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the transmission oil temperature sensor.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarms 66 and 68 being activated.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sets the transmission temperature to the “Trans-
mission cold” default value (HK pedal holding time, splitter holding time, slip times).

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “TEMP” and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly attached and not
oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “TEMP” and pin 24 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “TEMP” and pin 39 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With connector “ECU PS” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect
a test meter to pin 1 of connector “TEMP” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (me-
ter reading 0V).
• With connector “ECU PS” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect
a test meter to pin 2 of connector “TEMP” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (me-
ter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 39 68
21 45 23 68 1 2 39 24 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 10 20
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 TEMP

2 1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017120

20-86
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 13

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the temperature sensor.

ECU RESPONSE.
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sets the transmission temperature to the “Trans-
mission cold” default value (HK pedal holding time, splitter holding time, slip times).

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “TEMP” and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly attached and not
oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “TEMP” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “TEMP” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 39 68
21 45 23 68 1 2 39 24 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 10 20
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 TEMP

2 1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017120

20-87
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 14

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a discrepancy between the speeds sensed at the main clutch input and at the transmission output,
indicated by the status of the start enable sensor (which indicates whether the transmission is in neutral or gears are en-
gaged).

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.

CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the main clutch speed sensor (nHk) and the engine speed
sensor (nAb), verify the cause as described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the contacts on connector “X80” of the start enable switch and on the lift control unit “ECU PS” are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of relay “RL40” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit with the mechanical shift in neutral (meter reading 0 Ohm)
and a break in continuity when a gear is engaged (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4

1 2 31 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 31 ECU PS

0 1 2

GND4

50 15 X 30 X17

J2 MS1
3 6 31 20

GND2
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 +30 +50

3 1 2 5 RL40 2 1 X80

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.013.5916.4
D0022690

20-88
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 15

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the transmission oil low pressure indicator light is disconnected

ECU RESPONSE.
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ST1” of the Infocenter and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 7 of connector “ST1” and pin 5 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the Infocenter installed is a type 2, check that the lamp of the transmission oil low pressure indicator is not burnt out.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4

1 2 5 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 5 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6
3 6 6
31

ST1
2 7 9 3 12
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
GND

GND
+30
GEAR BOX PRESSURE
+15

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017060

20-89
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 16

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit to earth on the control line of the Infocenter light indicating low transmission oil pres-
sure.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ST1” of the Infocenter and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ST1” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector
“ECU PS” and to cab earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
• If no short circuit to earth is discovered, fit a new Infocenter.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4

1 2 5 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 5 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6
3 6 6
31

ST1
2 7 9 3 12
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
GND

GND
+30
GEAR BOX PRESSURE
+15

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017060

20-90
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 17

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit to positive on the control line of the Infocenter light indicating low transmission oil
pressure

ECU RESPONSE.
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ST1” of the Infocenter and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the “ST1” connector unplugged from the Infocenter and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test me-
ter to pin 5 of connector “ECU PS” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• If there is no voltage, fit a new Infocenter.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4

1 2 5 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 5 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6
3 6 6
31

ST1
2 7 9 3 12
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
GND

GND
+30
GEAR BOX PRESSURE
+15

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017060

20-91
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 18

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a discrepancy between the oil pressure reading and the operating status of the transmission

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but indicates the problem via the Infocenter.

CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the engine rpm sensors (nLse), verify the cause as de-
scribed under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the contacts on the “PRESS. SWITCH” transmission oil pressure sensor and connector “ECU PS” of the lift
control unit are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON), position, check that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct
(12V measured between pin 1 (positive) of connector “PRESS. SWITCH” and transmission earth)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “PRESS. SWITCH” and pin 29
of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the transmission system.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4

1 2 29 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 29 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 7 11
31

PS
1 2
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 2
LS/PS

2 1 PRESS.
+15 +30 SWITCH
P
HK

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017070

20-92
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 19

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects the transmission display control signal short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but displays an error message “EE” and sounds a con-
tinuous beep.

NOTE
Alarm code 19, detectable only by way of the EDS program.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X40” of the display and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “X40” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 14 of con-
nector “ECU PS” and to cab earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth
(meter reading: infinity).
• If no short circuit to earth is discovered, fit a new display.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 14 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 14 ECU PS

GND4

J2 J3 AS5
3 6 6 3 1 5
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3A

F16

X40
1 5 6 2
+12V

Sig

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0443.7875
D0017080

20-93
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 20

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects the transmission display control signal short-circuiting to positive.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but displays an error message “EE” and sounds a con-
tinuous beep.
NOTE
Alarm code 20, detectable only by way of the EDS program.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X40” of the display and on that of the lift control unit, “ECU PS”, are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “X40” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 14 of connector
“ECU PS” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• If there is no voltage, fit a new display.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 14 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 14 ECU PS

GND4

J2 J3 AS5
3 6 6 3 1 5
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3A

F16

X40
1 5 6 2
+12V

Sig

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0443.7875
D0017080

20-94
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 21

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a ground speed higher than the permissible limit

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sounds a continuous beep until ground speed returns
within the permissible limits.

CHECK
• Reduce ground speed.

ALARM N° 22

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than the permissible limit with the machine operating in
“FIELD” mode.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but when the alarm is activated, five beeps will be sounded
in succession, and a single beep every two minutes thereafter.

CHECK
• Reduce the load on the transmission.
• Switch off the engine.

ALARM N° 23

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than the permissible limit with the machine operating in
“ROAD” mode.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, and does not display any alarm message.

CHECK
• Reduce ground speed
• fault code is not shown on the display
• temperature monitoring only if configured
• counter increments, if over temperature is pending (mark for duration)
• fault code erasable only with a special diagnostic service tool (security fault memory)

20-95
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 24

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects the main clutch running overspeed.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.

CHECK
• Reduce ground speed immediately.

20-96
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 27

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y5 (controlling field/road mode selection) is either not connected or faulty.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin A and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin A of connector “EV GROUP” and pin 50 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-97
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 28

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y5 (field/road mode selection) is short-circuiting to earth.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin A and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin A of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 50 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 8 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a tester to pin A and pin F of connector “EV GROUP”, and meas-
ure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-98
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 29

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y5 (field/road mode selection) is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin A of connector “EV GROUP” and to transmission
earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-99
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 30

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y4 is either not connected or faulty.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin E and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin E of connector “EV GROUP” and pin 33 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-100
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 31

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin E and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin E of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 33 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 8 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin E and pin F of connector “EV GROUP”, and
measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-101
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 32

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin E of connector “EV GROUP” and to transmission
earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-102
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 33

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y3 is either not connected or faulty.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin D and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin D of connector “EV GROUP” and pin 34 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-103
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 34

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y3 is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin D and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin D of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 34 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 8 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin D and pin F of connector “EV GROUP”, and
measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-104
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 35

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y3 is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin D of connector “EV GROUP” and to transmission
earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-105
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 36

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y2 is either not connected or faulty.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin C and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin C of connector “EV GROUP” and pin 11 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-106
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 37

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin C and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin C of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 11 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 8 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin C and pin F of connector “EV GROUP”, and
measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-107
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 38

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.
NOTE
His alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin C of connector “EV GROUP” and to transmission
earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-108
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 39

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y1 is either not connected or faulty

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin B and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin B of connector “EV GROUP” and pin 57 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-109
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 40

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y1 is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin B and pin F of connector “EV GROUP” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin B of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 57 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and to pin 8 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin B and pin F of connector “EV GROUP”, and
measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-110
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 41

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y1 is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "STAND-BY STRATEGY” mode.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV GROUP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin B of connector “EV GROUP” and to transmission
earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-111
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 47

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is disconnected or short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NAB” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NAB”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “NAB” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NAB” and to pin 62 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 21 23

45

62 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB2
3 6 1 1 2 6
7.5A

7.5A

3A

F35 F27 F16

3 2 1 NAB

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017340

20-112
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 48

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NAB” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NAB” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 21 23

45

62 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB2
3 6 1 1 2 6
7.5A

7.5A

3A

F35 F27 F16

3 2 1 NAB

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017340

20-113
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 49

DESCRIPTION
The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nAb

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NAB” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NAB”).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 21 23

45

62 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB2
3 6 1 1 2 6
7.5A

7.5A

3A

F35 F27 F16

3 2 1 NAB

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017340

20-114
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 50

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is disconnected or short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NHK” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NHK”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of
the“NHK” connector and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NHK” and to pin 16 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 16 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 16 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 12 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NHK
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017360

20-115
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 51

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is short-circuiting to earth.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NHK” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NHK” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 16 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 16 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 12 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NHK
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017360

20-116
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 52

DESCRIPTION
The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nHk

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NHK” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NHK”).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 16 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 16 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 12 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NHK
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017360

20-117
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 53

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is disconnected or short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSA” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSA”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “NLSA” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSA” and to pin 40 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 40 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 40 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 14 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NLSA
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30
ISE

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017380

20-118
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 54

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSA” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSA” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 40 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 40 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 14 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NLSA
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30
ISE

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017380

20-119
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 55

DESCRIPTION
The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nLsa

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSA” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is correc
(12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSA”).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 40 21 23

45

68
21 45 23 68 1 2 40 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 14 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
NLSA
3 2 1
fN

+15 +30
ISE

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017380

20-120
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 56

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is disconnected or short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSE” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSE”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “NLSE” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSE” and to pin 17 of con-
nector “ECU PS” , and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 17 21 23

45

68

21 45 23 68 1 2 17 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 15 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3 2 1 NLSE
f

N
+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017540

20-121
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 57

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSE” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSE” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 17 21 23

45

68

21 45 23 68 1 2 17 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 15 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3 2 1 NLSE
f

N
+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017540

20-122
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 58

DESCRIPTION
The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nLse

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the trans-
mission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “NLSE” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the transmission output speed sensor is cor-
rect (12V measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSE”).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 3 17 21 23

45

68

21 45 23 68 1 2 17 3 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 11 15 13
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3 2 1 NLSE
f

N
+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017540

20-123
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 64

DESCRIPTION
The control detects a conflict in the information received from the clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed
sensor, regarding the position of the pedal

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded.

CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the clutch pedal position sensor, verify the cause as de-
scribed under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the contacts on connector “X33” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Perform the clutch pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
• Verify the correct operation of the clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor (for details see section 40)
• Verify the correct positioning of the clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor.
• Verify the correct operation of the clutch pedal position sensor (for details see section 40)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 4 21 23

45

44 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 4 44 ECU PS

GND4

J2 J3 AS6 AS3
3 6 6 8 4 9
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
3A

F16 X33
1 2 3

+15 +30 +15

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017400

20-124
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 65

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is disconnected or short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X34” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct (5V
measured between pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative) of connector “X34”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “X34” and to transmission earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “X34” and to pin 38 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 37 38 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 38 37 24 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6
3 6 3 2 1
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 X34

4 1 2

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017430

20-125
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 66

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched
to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarms 12 and 68 being activated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X34” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct (5V
measured between pin 2 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X34”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “X34” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “X34” and to pin 38 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 37 38 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 38 37 24 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6
3 6 3 2 1
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 X34

4 1 2

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017430

20-126
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 67

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is lower than the correct value

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be
switched to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 69 being activated.

CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the clutch pedal position sensor or the transmission oil tem-
perature sensor, verify the cause as described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the contacts on connector “X34” of the clutch pedal position sensor, connector “TEMP” of the transmission
oil temperature sensor, and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit, are all firmly attached and not ox-
idised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct (5V
measured between pin 2 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X34”).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 37 38 39 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 38 37 24 39 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6 TKAB1
3 6 3 2 1 10 20
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 X34 TEMP

4 1 2 2 1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4 0443.7848

D0017440

20-127
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 68

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is higher than the correct value

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be
switched to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 12 or 68 being activated.

CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the clutch pedal position sensor or the transmission oil tem-
perature sensor, verify the cause as described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the contacts on connector “X34” of the clutch pedal position sensor, connector “TEMP” of the transmission
oil temperature sensor, and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit, are all firmly attached and not ox-
idised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct (5V
measured between pin 2 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X34”).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 21 23

45

24 37 38 39 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 38 37 24 39 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS6 TKAB1
3 6 3 2 1 10 20
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 X34 TEMP

4 1 2 2 1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4 0443.7848

D0017440

20-128
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 69

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects one or more threshold values of the clutch pedal position sensor out of range.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be
switched to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

CHECK
• Perform the clutch pedal sensor calibration procedure.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM N° 70

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the calibration values of the clutch pedal have not been saved correctly due to a defect in the
EEPROM memory locations, or that the clutch pedal has never been calibrated

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched
to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 64 being activated.

CHECK
• Perform the clutch pedal sensor calibration procedure.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-129
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 76

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve operating the main clutch is disconnected

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV PROP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• Test the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EV PROP” and to pin 56 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EV PROP” and to pin 13 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 2 (positive) of connector “EV PROP” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-130
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 77

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve operating the main clutch is short-circuiting to earth

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “EV PROP” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• Test the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “EV PROP” and to transmission earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits
to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 2 (positive) of connector “EV PROP” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-131
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 79

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is disconnectedECU RESPONSE

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ADD EV V/R” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 3 of connector “ADD EV V/R” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “ADD EV V/R” and pin 32 of con-
nector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “ADD EV V/R” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-132
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 80

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ADD EV V/R” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 and pin 3 of connector “ADD EV V/R” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and to pin 32 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there
are short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 3 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and to transmission earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short cir-
cuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 and pin
3 of connector “ADD EV V/R”, and measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another
(meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “ADD EV V/R” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-133
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 82

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is disconnected

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ADD EV V/R” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of connector “ADD EV V/R” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “ADD EV V/R” and to pin 55 of
connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “ADD EV V/R” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-134
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 83

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “ADD EV V/R” and connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly
attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 3 of connector “ADD EV V/R” on the
transmission, and measure the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and pin 55 of connector “ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 3 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and to transmission earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short cir-
cuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin
3 of connector “ADD EV V/R”, and measure the resistance to verify that the wires are not short-circuiting one to another
(meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “ADD EV V/R” and transmission earth)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-135
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 85

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem affecting the shuttle control lever.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X37” and on connector “ECU PS” of the transmission control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• Verify the correct operation of the shuttle lever (for details see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the shuttle control lever is correct (12V meas-
ured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “X37” and cab earth)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter in alternation
to pin 1, pin 2, pin 3 and pin 4 of connector “X37“ and to cab earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not
there are short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “X37” and in alternation to pin 2, pin 3 and pin 4, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are
short circuits (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “X37” and in alternation to pin 3 and pin 4, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short cir-
cuits (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 3 of con-
nector “X37” and to pin 4, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits (meter reading: in-
finity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter in alternation to pin 1, pin 2 and pin 4 of connector “X37“
and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 20 21 23

45

63 65 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 63 65 20 ECU PS

GND4

J2 AS4
3 6 20 18 21 19

X37
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 3 1 4 2
3.9 Ohm

3.9 Ohm

3.9 Ohm

FW

RV
N

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.8656
D0017500

20-136
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 87

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the type of vehicle has not been programmed correctly

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-137
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 89

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an abnormal level of current drawn by the main clutch solenoid valves and the forward and reverse
solenoid valves Y6 and Y7
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarms 94, 95 and 96 being activated.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth (meter read-
ing: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R”, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the proportional solenoid valve is correct (12V
measured between pin 3 (positive) of connector “ADD EV V/R” and transmission earth)
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pins 23 and 68 and measure the voltage (meter read-
ing: 12V)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-138
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 90

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an abnormal level of current drawn by the powershift solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, and Y5

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarms 29, 32, 35, 38 and 41 being activated.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 8 of con-
nector “EV GROUP” and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the solenoid valves is correct (12V measured
between pin F (positive) of connector “EV GROUP” and transmission earth)
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pins 23 and 68 and measure the voltage (meter read-
ing: 12V)
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 21 23

45

50 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EV
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 GROUP

F A E D C B
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017280

20-139
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 91

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a conflict between values read by the nLsa and nHk sensors, the position of the clutch pedal and
the position of the creeper engagement lever

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral.

CHECK
• Check that the creeper engagement lever is in the correct position and the sensor correctly placed.
• Verify the correct operation of the creeper engagement sensor (for details, see section 40).
• Make certain that connectors “NHK” and “NAB” have not been switched.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin F of con-
nector “EV GROUP”, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “EV PROP” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• Check the transmission hydraulic system
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 8 33 11 34 13 21 23

45

50 56 57 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 22
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27 EV EV.

GROUP PROP.
F A E D C B 2 1
Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

+15 +30
Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017510

20-140
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 92

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected an abnormally high input voltage
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral. In the event that one
or more of alarms 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 or 70 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched to “TC-SHUT-
DOWN” mode.
NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the alternator charging voltage is irregular, and can be tripped only by a fault
affecting the alternator itself.

CHECK
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is within the prescribed range (normal voltage 12V - 13.5V).
• Check, with the engine running, that the battery voltage is within the prescribed range. In this instance the problem may
be attributable to a fault in the ECU, which must therefore be replaced with a new unit, otherwise the trouble is being
caused by incorrect operation of the alternator voltage regulator.

ALARM N° 93

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected an abnormally low input voltage
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TRANSMISSION-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral. In the
event that one or more of alarms 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 or 70 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched to
“TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.
NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the battery voltage is less than 10V and can be tripped by an excessive cur-
rent draw when the engine is started, or if the battery is damaged or cannot be recharged by the alternator.
Accordingly, this alarm can be displayed only as a passive alarm, using the EDS program. Should the alarm be dis-
played among the active alarms, the ECU must be renewed.

CHECK
• See if the alarm is indicated as an active alarm; if so, the ECU must be renewed.
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is as prescribed (higher than 12V); if not, install a new battery.
NOTE
Lower voltages can register after the tractor has been standing idle for an extended period; this does mean nec-
essarily that the battery needs replacing.
• Check first whether or not the battery voltage returns to normal with the engine running. In this instance the problem
may be attributable to the battery being discharged or damaged; if not, and the voltage remains lower than the pre-
scribed minimum, the trouble is being caused by incorrect operation of the alternator.
NOTE
In extreme cases, when the battery is seriously damaged (short-circuiting), the alternator may not be able to re-
charge the cells or generate sufficient voltage. Before changing the alternator, verify its correct or incorrect op-
eration by connecting a new battery.

20-141
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 94

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the main clutch solenoid valve is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 89 being activated.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “EV PROP” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “EV PROP” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V)).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-142
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 95

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6 is short-circuiting to positive.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 89 being activated.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 1 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 3 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-143
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 96

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid valve Y7 is short-circuiting to positive

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.

NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 89 being activated.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 2 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V)).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 3 of con-
nector “ADD EV V/R” and the transmission earth and check that there is no voltage (meter reading: 0V)).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

0.012.8732.4
1 2 13 21 23

45

32 55 56 68

21 45 23 68 1 2 55 32 13 56 ECU PS

GND4

J2 TKAB1
3 6 16 17 21 22

PS LS/PS
7.5A

7.5A

F35 F27
1 1
2 2

3 2 1 2 1
ADD. EV.
Y7

Y6

U
EV V/R PROP
+15 +30

Prop

0441.9533 0443.7848
D0017610

20-144
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 97

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the transmission ECU software has not been programmed correctly

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

CHECK
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM N° 98

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that transmission configuration data have not been programmed correctly.

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM N° 99

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that machine configuration data have not been saved correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)

ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-145
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° EE

DESCRIPTION
The display detects a problem of communication with the transmission control unit.

CHECK
• Connecting a portable computer to the transmission control unit and using the EDS program, check whether or not
alarms 19 and/or 20 have been logged, and if so, follow the procedures described for these alarms.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM GEN1

DESCRIPTION
EDS software unable to connect to the transmission control unit.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position, and try connecting to the transmission con-
trol unit.
• Check the integrity of the transmission ECU power supply fuses F27 and F35
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, check that the power input to the control unit is correct (starter key in the
“I” (ON) position, 12V measured between pin 23 and pin 68 (positive) and pin 1 and pin 2 (negative) of connector “ECU
PS”).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the control unit is correct (starter key in the “I”
(ON) position, 12V measured between pin 21 and pin 45 (positive) and pin 1 and pin 2 (negative) of connector “ECU PS”).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 8 of con-
nector “X18” and to cab earth, and measure the resistance to verify whether or not there are short circuits to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “ECU PS” unplugged, connect a test meter to pin 8 of con-
nector “X18” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 8 of connector “X18” and pin 15 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the fault cannot be traced and rectified through this procedure, fit a new control unit.

20-146
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM GEN2

DESCRIPTION
Transmission slips unexpectedly from forward or reverse drive into neutral.

ECU RESPONSE
The display indicates forward drive, reverse drive and neutral status simultaneously, and a continuous beep is sounded.

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 53, 54, 55, B56, B57 and B58.
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the transmission system.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM GEN3

DESCRIPTION
The transmission continues to shift range automatically every 1 or 2 seconds

ECU RESPONSE
None

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41.
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 53, 54, 55, B56, B57 and B58.
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the transmission system.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

20-147
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM GEN4

DESCRIPTION
Momentary loss of traction with the tractor in motion

ECU RESPONSE
None

CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch and the clutch pedal.
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 53, 54, 55, B56, B57 and B58.
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the transmission system.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.

ALARM GEN5

DESCRIPTION
The transmission stays in neutral

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X80” of the start enable switch and on connector “ECU PS” of the lift control unit
are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of relay “RL40” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit with the mechanical shift in neutral (meter reading 0 Ohm)
and a break in continuity when a gear is engaged (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of relay “RL40 and to pin 31 of connector
“ECU PS”, and measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.

20-148
ALARMS ALARMS DISPLAYED BY SERDIA

5.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED BY SERDIA

The engine control unit informs the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, both audibly and visually
(fault warning light) by way of the Infocenter.
Faults are indicated by the light using two types of visual warning:
1 - fault warning light flashing: this type of indication informs the operator that one of the components in the engine sys-
tem is faulty, but normal operation of the engine remains unaffected. The engine continues to operate normally.
2 - fault warning light permanently on: this type of indication informs the operator that one of the components in the en-
gine system is faulty, and continuing to work under these conditions could result in serious damage to the engine.
When this type of alarm occurs, the engine generally switches off and it will not be possible to operate the starter until
the fault has been rectified.

5.3.1 ALARMS DISPLAYED USING THE SERDIA PROGRAM

Alarm
Alarm description Page
code
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the engine
1 20-151
pickup is either non-existent or incorrect
2 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the wheel speed
3 20-152
pickup is either non-existent or incorrect.
4 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The control unit detects that the connection to the accelerator pedal position sensor is either
5 20-153
non-existent or short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the connection to the hand throttle position sensor is either
6 non-existent or short-circuiting.
20-154

The engine control unit has detected that the engine turbo charge pressure signal is either
7 20-155
non-existent or unreliable.
8 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit has detected that the coolant temperature signal is either
9 20-156
non-existent or unreliable.
10 Alarm code available but not utilised –

The engine control unit has detected that the fuel temperature signal is either
11 20-157
non-existent or unreliable.
30 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than
31 20-158
the alarm threshold.
32 Alarm code available but not utilised –
34 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit detects that the engine is or has been running overspeed (above 3100
35 20-159
rpm).
The engine control unit has detected a fuel temperature higher than
36 20-160
the alarm threshold.
40 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than
41 20-161
the alarm threshold.

20-149
ALARMS ALARMS DISPLAYED BY SERDIA

Alarm
Alarm description Page
code
42 Alarm code available but not utilised –
44 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit has detected that the actuator position signal does not match
50 the requirement.
20-162

The engine control unit has detected that the reference signal for the position of the actuator
52 20-163
does not match the requirement.
The engine control unit has detected that the difference between the command and the
53 20-164
response of the actuator is greater than 10%.
59 Alarm code available but not utilised –
60 Alarm code available but not utilised –
62 Alarm code available but not utilised –
63 Alarm code available but not utilised –
The engine control unit has detected the absence of a connection to the accelerator pedal po-
67 20-165
sition sensor or a signal out of range.
68 Alarm code available but not utilised –

70 Alarm code available but not utilised –

71 Alarm code available but not utilised –

74 Alarm code available but not utilised –

76 The engine control unit has detected an error in writing the parameters. 20-166
The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the program memory during the
77 normal control cycle.
20-166

The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the work memory during the
78 20-166
normal control cycle.
The engine control unit detects an actuator power input outside the
80 20-166
specified parameters.
The control unit detects that the power input to the accelerator pedal or
83 hand throttle position sensor is either non-existent or incorrect.
20-167

The control unit detects that the power input to the turbo charge pressure sensor
84 20-168
is non-existent or incorrect.
85 Alarm code available but not utilised –
86 The engine control unit detects that its internal temperature is too high. 20-169
87 The engine control unit detects that atmospheric pressure is outside the permitted limits. 20-169
The engine control unit has detected a discrepancy between the parameters written in
90 20-169
EEPROM.
The engine control unit has detected a “Stack Overflow” error during execution of the
93 program.
20-170

94 The engine control unit has detected an internal error. 20-170

20-150
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

5.3.2 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 1

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the engine pickup is either non-existent or incorrect.

CHECK
• Check that the engine speed pickup is installed correctly and at the specified distance from the pulse wheel
• Check that the internal resistance of the sensor is correct (for details, see section 40)
• Check that the contacts on connector “B40” and on connector “MX1” of the engine control unit are firmly attached and
not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 1 of connector “B40” and pin 12 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “B40” and pin 13 of connector “MX1”.

0.012.8732.4
13
12
10

2
14
1

10 12 13 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4

MS1 J1
16 28 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
12 13

+15

B40 1 2

0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022700

20-151
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 3

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the wheel speed pickup is either non-existent or incorrect.

CHECK
• Using the ART, check that the lift control unit is receiving the wheel speed signal, or if it has detected the “WheelSen-
sorDisc” alarm corresponding to flash code 42 (standard) or 64 (text).
If the lift control unit detects the alarm, check out the system following the procedure described for “WheelSensorDisc”.
• If the control unit is receiving and acknowledging the signal correctly, check for electrical continuity between pin 3 of
connector “ISO7” and pin 6 of connector “X8”.
• Check that the circuit board attached to connector “X8” is not damaged (for details, see section 40).
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 5 of connector “X8” and pin 7 of connector “MX2”.
• Connect a test meter to pin 5 and pin 6 of the circuit board attached to connector “X8” and, using the diode test, check
that the diode is operational (negative prod on pin 6, positive prod on pin 5).
• Connect a test meter to pin 5 and pin 6 of the circuit board attached to connector “X8” and+ measure the resistance,
which should read 2200 Ohm approx (negative prod on pin 6, positive prod on pin 5).
• Check on page 24 of the “Configuration” menu that the value of “1301:VelocityFactor” is 130.
• If the fault persists, reprogram or renew the control unit.

20-152
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 5

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the connection to the accelerator pedal position sensor is either non-existent or short-
circuiting.

NOTE
The wiring and the sensor can be checked using connector “X31” located under the floor mat at the front of the cab,
on the right hand side.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “MX2” of the control unit and connector “X30” are firmly attached and not ox-
idised.
• Check that the power input to the accelerator pedal position sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 1
(positive) and pin 2 (negative) of connector “X30”).
• With connector “MX2” unplugged from the engine control unit, check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of con-
nector “X30” and pin 24 of connector “MX2”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “X30” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With connector “MX2” plugged into the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test me-
ter to pin 4 of connector “X30” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Check that the resistance characteristics of the accelerator pedal position sensor are correct (for technical details see
section 40).

0.012.8732.4
1 2

14 23 24 25

14 1 2 23 25 24 MX2

GND4

J1 AS6
7 11 9 10
7.5A

F30

X30 2 1 4
+15

0441.9533 0.012.8894
D0017160

20-153
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 6

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the connection to the hand throttle position sensor is either non-existent or short-circuiting.
NOTE
This procedure is described for versions without armrest. If an armrest control is installed, carry out the procedure
starting from the connector of the hand throttle position sensor located internally of the armrest.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “MX2” of the control unit and connector “EMR” are firmly attached and not ox-
idised.
• Check that the power input to the accelerator pedal position sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 3
(positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “EMR”).
• With connector “MX2” unplugged from the engine control unit, check for electrical continuity between pin 2 ofcon-
nector “EMR” and pin 20 of connector “MX2”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EMR” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With connector “MX2” plugged into the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test me-
ter to pin 2 of connector “EMR” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• Check that the resistance characteristics of the hand throttle position sensor are correct (for technical details see sec-
tion 40).

0.012.8732.4
1 2

14 20 23 25

14 1 2 23 20 25 MX2

GND4

EMR
1 2 3

J1
7
7.5A

F30

+15

0441.9533
D0017170

20-154
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 7

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the engine turbo charge pressure signal is either non-existent or unreliable.

CHECK
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 1 of connector “B41” and pin 23 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “B41” and pin 24 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 3 of connector “B41” and pin 25 of connector “MX1”.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• Check that the power input to the sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative)
of connector “B41”).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “B41” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “B41” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

25
10 24

23
2
14
1

10 23 24 25 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
17 29 27 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
23 24 25

+15

B41 1 2 3

p
0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022730

20-155
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 9

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the coolant temperature signal is either non-existent or unreliable.

CHECK
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 1 of connector “B43” and pin 9 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “B43” and pin 8 of connector “MX1”.
• Check that the temperature sensor functions correctly and does not give a false reading; use an infrared thermometer
and compare the reading with the value received from the sensor by the engine control unit.
• Check that the coolant level is within normal limits.
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameters “510 CoolantTempWarn” (normal value: 122 °C) and “514 Cool-
antTempEcy” (normal value: 130 °C) are correct.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

10
9
8 2
14
1

10 9 8 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4

MS1 J1
24 22 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
9 8

+15
B43 1 2

0419.9869 t° 0441.9533
D0022720

20-156
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 11

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the fuel temperature signal is either non-existent or unreliable.

CHECK
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 1 of connector “B37” and pin 5 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “B37” and pin 8 of connector “MX1”.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 1 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

10
8
5 2
14
1

10 5 8 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
15 22 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
15 8

+15

B37 1 2

t°
0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022710

20-157
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 31

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than the alarm threshold.

CHECK
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameter “510 CoolantTempWarn” is correct (normal value: 122 °C).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

10
9
8 2
14
1

10 9 8 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4

MS1 J1
24 22 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
9 8

+15
B43 1 2

0419.9869 t° 0441.9533
D0022720

20-158
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 35

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the engine is or has been running overspeed (above 3100 rpm).

NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when, with the tractor on a down gradient, the engine is made to operate as a
brake and forced to run at higher speed.
Generally, this alarm will disappear automatically when the tractor returns to level ground.
In this case, there is no need to make any checks.

CHECK
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameter “21 Speed over” is correct (normal value: 3100 rpm).
• Check that the engine speed pickup sensor functions correctly and does not give a false reading; use an external sen-
sor and compare the reading obtained with the value received from the pickup by the engine control unit.
• Check that the injection pumps control rod slides freely.
• Check that the internal resistance values for the actuator are correct (for details see section 40).
• Check that the parameter “1 TeethPickUp1” is correct (normal value=48).

20-159
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 36

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a fuel temperature higher than the alarm threshold.

CHECK
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

10
9
8 2
14
1

10 9 8 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4

MS1 J1
24 22 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
9 8

+15
B43 1 2

0419.9869 t° 0441.9533
D0022720

20-160
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 41

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than the alarm threshold.

CHECK
• Check that the coolant level is within normal limits.
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameter “514 CoolantTempEcy” (normal value: 130 °C) is correct.
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).

0.012.8732.4

10
9
8 2
14
1

10 9 8 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4

MS1 J1
24 22 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
9 8

+15
B43 1 2

0419.9869 t° 0441.9533
D0022720

20-161
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 50

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the actuator position signal does not match the requirement.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “Y3” and on the control unit “MX1” are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of connector “Y3” and pin 19 of connector “MX1”.
• Check that the internal resistance values for the actuator are correct (for details see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and the engine 'off', connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “Y3” and to
engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “Y3” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the actuator.

0.012.8732.4

10 19
18
17
2
16
1
15
14

10 14 15 17 19 18 16 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
4 6 10 11 19 7
0.013.5916.4

GND2
G18
14 15 17 19 18
7.5A

F30

+15
1 2 3 4 5 Y3

0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022740

20-162
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 52

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the reference signal for the position of the actuator does not match the re-
quirement.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “Y3” and on the control unit “MX1” are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 5 of connector “Y3” and pin 18 of connector “MX1”.
• Check that the internal resistance values for the actuator are correct (for details see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and the engine 'off', connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “Y3” and to
engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “Y3” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the actuator.

0.012.8732.4

10 19
18
17
2
16
1
15
14

10 14 15 17 19 18 16 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
4 6 10 11 19 7
0.013.5916.4

GND2
G18
14 15 17 19 18
7.5A

F30

+15
1 2 3 4 5 Y3

0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022740

20-163
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 53

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the difference between the command and the response of the actuator is greater
than 10%.

CHECK
• Check that the internal resistance values for the actuator are correct (for details see section 40).
• Check that the injection pumps control rod slides freely.
• Check that the fuel injection pumps have not seized.
• Check that the contacts on connector “Y3” and on the control unit “MX1” are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of connector “Y3” and pin 19 of connector “MX1”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 5 of connector “Y3” and pin 18 of connector “MX1”.

0.012.8732.4

10 19
18
17
2
16
1
15
14

10 14 15 17 19 18 16 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
4 6 10 11 19 7
0.013.5916.4

GND2
G18
14 15 17 19 18
7.5A

F30

+15
1 2 3 4 5 Y3

0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022740

20-164
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 67

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected the absence of a connection to the accelerator pedal position sensor or a signal out
of range.

NOTE
The wiring and the sensor can be checked using connector “X31” located under the floor mat at the front of the cab,
on the right hand side.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “MX2” of the control unit and connector “X30” are firmly attached and not ox-
idised.
• Check that the resistance characteristics of the accelerator pedal position sensor are correct (for technical details see
section 40).
• Check that the power input to the accelerator pedal position sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 1
(positive) and pin 2 (negative) of connector “X30”).
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of connector “X30” and pin 24 of connector “MX2”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “X30” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With connector “MX2” plugged into the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test me-
ter to pin 4 of connector “X30” and to cab earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).

0.012.8732.4
1 2

14 23 24 25

14 1 2 23 25 24 MX2

GND4

J1 AS6
7 11 9 10
7.5A

F30

X30 2 1 4
+15

0441.9533 0.012.8894
D0017160

20-165
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 76

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in writing the parameters.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• Repeat the data entry procedure, and if the problem persists, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 77

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the program memory during the normal control cycle.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• If the problem persists, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 78

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the work memory during the normal control cycle.

CHECK
• Note down the values of the parameters “3895 RAMTestAddr” and “3896 RAMTestPattern”
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• If the problem persists, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 80

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects an actuator power input outside the specified parameters.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• See if the alarm is still indicated; if so, contact Technical Assistance.

20-166
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 83

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the accelerator pedal or hand throttle position sensor is either non-existent
or incorrect.

NOTE
The wiring and the sensor can be checked using connector “X31” located under the floor mat at the front of the cab,
on the right hand side.
If an armrest control is installed, check the hand throttle power input starting from the connector located internally
of the armrest.

CHECK
• Check that the power input to the accelerator pedal and hand throttle position sensors is correct (5 Vdc approx meas-
ured between pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative) of connector “X30” or pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of connector
“EMR”).
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• See if the alarm is still indicated; if so, contact Technical Assistance.

0.012.8732.4
1 2

14 20 23 24 25

14 1 2 23 25 24 20 MX2

GND4 EMR
1 2 3

J1 AS6
7 11 9 10
7.5A

F30

+15
X30 2 1 4

0441.9533 0.012.8894
D0017200

20-167
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 84

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the turbo charge pressure sensor is non-existent or incorrect.

CHECK
• Check that the power input to the turbo charge pressure sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 25
(positive) and pin 23 (negative) of connector “B41”).
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• See if the alarm is still indicated; if so, contact Technical Assistance.

0.012.8732.4

25
10 24

23
2
14
1

10 23 24 25 MX1 1 2 14 MX2

GND4
MS1 J1
17 29 27 7
0.013.5916.4
7.5A

F30
G18
23 24 25

+15

B41 1 2 3

p
0419.9869 0441.9533
D0022730

20-168
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 86

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that its internal temperature is too high.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and wait a few minutes for the engine to cool down.
Turn the key back to “I” (ON) and check that the alarm does not reoccur.
• If the alarm reoccurs, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 87

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that atmospheric pressure is outside the permissible limits.

CHECK
• Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and wait a few minutes.
Turn the key back to “I” (ON) and check that the alarm does not reoccur.
• If the alarm reoccurs, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 90

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a discrepancy between the parameters written in EEPROM.

CHECK
• Check that the parameter values to be written in the control unit EEPROM are correct and consistent with one another.
• Send the parameters to the control unit again.
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• If the problem persists, contact Technical Assistance.

20-169
ALARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

SERDIA ALARM N° 93

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a “Stack Overflow” error during the execution of the program.

CHECK
• Note down the values of the parameters “3897 CStackTestFreeBytes” and “3898 IStackTestFreeBytes”
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• If the problem persists, contact Technical Assistance.

SERDIA ALARM N° 94

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an internal error.

CHECK
• Contact Technical Assistance.

20-170
ALLARMS FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ALARMS

5.4 LIST OF FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ALARMS

The suspension control unit warns the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, by way of an indicator
light in the pushbutton.
Faults are indicated using a system of coded flash sequences which, depending on how the control unit has been con-
figured, will either specify the precise nature of the fault (extended alarm) or simply identify the device affected (standard
alarm).
To verify, using the ART, whether or not an alarm detected is “active”, the technician must cancel all the alarms, turn the
starter key to the “O” (OFF) position, then make a fresh connection to the control unit.
All alarms with the exception of those indicated by the light incorporated into the pushbutton (Alarms 21 and 22) have the
effect of deactivating and inhibiting the system completely.

5.4.1 LIST OF ALARMS BY TEXT CODE

Extended Standard Display

Description Page
flash flash on ART
The control unit detects that the front axle 'up'
11 11 As. SV Fa. or NC 20-174
valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front axle 'down'
12 12 De. SV Fa. or NC 20-175
valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front axle load
13 13 LS. SV Fa. or NC 20-176
sensing valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front suspen-
15 15 PO. SE. Fa. or NC 20-177
sion position sensor is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the power input to
16 16 PW. S. Fa. or NC the front suspension position sensor is not cor- 20-178
rect.
The control unit has detected that the battery
17 17 Battery V. High 20-179
voltage is too high.
The control unit has detected that the battery
19 19 Battery V. Low 20-180
voltage is too low (less than10V).
The control unit has detected that the activation
21 21 SC LAMP Ind. 20-181
and faults indicator light is short-circuiting.
The control unit has detected that the activation
22 22 LAMP Ind. Disc. and faults indicator light is burnt out or discon- 20-182
nected.
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
24 11 ALL. CC EV UP 20-183
trol line of the front axle 'up' solenoid.
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
25 12 ALL. CC EV DW 20-184
trol line of the front axle 'down' solenoid.
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
26 13 ALL. CC EV LS 20-185
trol line of the front axle load sensing solenoid.

20-171
ALLARMS FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ALARMS

5.4.2 LIST OF ALARMS BY STANDARD CODE

Standard Extended Display

Description Page
flash flash on ART
The control unit detects that the front axle 'up'
11 As. SV Fa. or NC 20-174
valve solenoid is not connected.
11
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
24 ALL. CC EV UP 20-183
trol line of the front axle 'up' solenoid.
The control unit detects that the front axle 'down'
12 De. SV Fa. or NC 20-175
valve solenoid is not connected.
12
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
25 ALL. CC EV DW 20-184
trol line of the front axle 'down' solenoid.
The control unit detects that the front axle load
13 LS. SV Fa. or NC 20-176
sensing valve solenoid is not connected.
13
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
26 ALL. CC EV LS 20-185
trol line of the front axle load sensing solenoid.
The control unit detects that the front suspen-
15 15 PO. SE. Fa. or NC 20-177
sion position sensor is disconnected.
The control unit detects that the power input to
16 16 PW. S. Fa. or NC the front suspension position sensor is not cor- 20-178
rect.
The control unit has detected that the battery
17 17 Battery V. High 20-179
voltage is too high.
The control unit has detected that the battery
19 19 Battery V. Low 20-180
voltage is too low (less than10V).
The control unit has detected that the activation
21 21 SC LAMP Ind. 20-181
and faults indicator light is short-circuiting.
The control unit has detected that the activation
22 22 LAMP Ind. Disc. and faults indicator light is burnt out or discon- 20-182
nected.

20-172
ALLARMS FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ALARMS

5.4.3 LIST OF ALARMS DISPLAYED BY ART

Display Standard Extended

Description Page
on ART flash flash
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
ALL. CC EV DW 12 25 20-184
trol line of the front axle 'down' solenoid.
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
ALL. CC EV LS 13 26 20-185
trol line of the front axle load sensing solenoid.
The control unit detects a short circuit in the con-
ALL. CC EV UP 11 24 20-183
trol line of the front axle 'up' solenoid.
The control unit detects that the front axle 'down'
De. SV Fa. or NC 12 12 20-175
valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front axle load
LS. SV Fa. or NC 13 13 20-176
sensing valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front axle 'up'
As. SV Fa. or NC 11 11 20-174
valve solenoid is not connected
The control unit detects that the front suspen-
PO. SE. Fa. or NC 15 15 20-177
sion position sensor is disconnected.
The control unit has detected that the activation
LAMP Ind. Disc. 22 22 and faults indicator light is burnt out or discon- 20-182
nected.
The control unit has detected that the activation
SC LAMP Ind. 21 21 20-181
and faults indicator light is short-circuiting.
The control unit detects that the power input to
PW. S. Fa. or NC 16 16 the front suspension position sensor is not cor- 20-178
rect.
The control unit has detected that the battery
Battery V. High 17 17 20-179
voltage is too high.
The control unit has detected that the battery
Battery V. Low 19 19 20-180
voltage is too low (less than10V).

20-173
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

5.4.4 ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 11 As. SV Fa. or NC

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle 'up' valve solenoid is not connected.

CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than infinity).
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “H” of the front axle up valve solenoid are
firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “H” and pin 1 of connector “JX3”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “H” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
20 5 4 1

JX3 1 20 4 5
FE1
8 GND4
3

FE2 J2
1 7 7

H
7.5A

2 1
F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017210

20-174
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 12 De. SV Fa. or NC

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle 'down' valve solenoid is not connected.

CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than infinity).
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “S” of the front axle down valve solenoid
are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “S” and pin 2 of connector “JX3”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 to connector “S” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
20 5 4 2

JX3 2 20 4 5
FE1
8 GND4
3

FE2 J2
2 7 7

S
7.5A

2 1
F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017220

20-175
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 13 LS. SV Fa. or NC

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle load sensing valve solenoid is not connected.

CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than infinity).
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “X68” of the front axle load sensing valve
solenoid are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of connector “X68” and pin 2 of connector “JX3”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “X68” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to verify the continuity of the circuit (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
2 20 5 4

2 JX4 20 4 5 JX3

FE1
3
8 GND4

FE2 J2
3 7 7

X68
7.5A

2 1 F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017230

20-176
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 15 PO. SE. Fa. or NC

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front suspension position sensor is disconnected.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X69” of the front axle suspension position sensor and connector “JX4” of the
control unit are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the front suspension position sensor is correct
(8 Vdc approx measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X69”).
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 14 of connector “JX4” and pin 2 of connector “X69”.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X69” and to transmission earth,
and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
14 17 9 20 5 4

17 14 9 JX4 20 4 5 JX3

FE1
3
8 GND4

FE2 J2
4 5 6 7
7.5A

1 2 3 X69 F17
U

+15
S

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017240

20-177
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 16 PW. S. Fa. or NC

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the front suspension position sensor is not correct.

CHECK
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power input to the front suspension position sensor is correct
(8 Vdc approx measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X69”).
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position.
• See if the alarm is still indicated; if so, the ECU must be renewed.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
14 17 9 20 5 4

17 14 9 JX4 20 4 5 JX3

FE1
3
8 GND4

FE2 J2
4 5 6 7
7.5A

1 2 3 X69 F17
U

+15
S

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017240

20-178
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 17 Battery V. High

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the battery voltage is too high.

NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the alternator charging voltage is irregular, and can be tripped only by a fault
affecting the alternator itself.

CAUTION
Never connect the ART with the engine running when this alarm is indicated, as the instrument could be
damaged.

CHECK
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is within the prescribed range (normal voltage 12V - 13.5V).
• Check, with the engine running, that the battery voltage is within the prescribed range. In this instance the problem may
be attributable to a fault in the ECU, which must therefore be replaced with a new unit, otherwise the trouble is being
caused by incorrect operation of the alternator voltage regulator.

20-179
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 19 Battery V. Low

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the battery voltage is too low (less than 10V).

NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the battery voltage is less than 10V and can be tripped by an excessive cur-
rent draw when the engine is started, or if the battery is damaged or cannot be recharged by the alternator.
Accordingly, this alarm can be displayed only as a passive alarm by the ART. Should the alarm be displayed among
the active alarms, the ECU must be renewed.

CHECK
• See if the alarm is indicated as an active alarm; if so, the ECU must be renewed.
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is as prescribed (higher than 12V); if not, install a new battery.
NOTE
Lower voltages can register after the tractor has been standing idle for an extended period; this does mean nec-
essarily that the battery needs replacing.
• Check first whether or not the battery voltage returns to normal with the engine running. In this instance the problem
may be attributable to the battery being discharged or damaged; if not, and the voltage remains lower than the pre-
scribed minimum, the trouble is being caused by incorrect operation of the alternator.
NOTE
In extreme cases, when the battery is seriously damaged (short-circuiting), the alternator may not be able to re-
charge the cells or generate sufficient voltage. Before changing the alternator, verify its correct or incorrect op-
eration by connecting a new battery.

20-180
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 21 SC LAMP Ind.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the activation and faults indicator light is short-circuiting.

NOTE
This alarm is displayed only by the ART. The operator or technician may become aware of the problem simply due
to the fact that the lamp does not light up when the front axle suspension is activated or deactivated.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “5” of the activating switch and connector “JX4” of the control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 10 of connector “5” and to cab earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850
20 5 4 8 12

5 4 20 JX3 12 8 JX4

FE1
3 8 10 9
0.012.8732.4

GND4

J2 AS1 AS3
7 3 21 12 3
7.5A

F17

5 9 10 1 5
+15

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017250

20-181
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 22 LAMP Ind. Disc.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the activation and faults indicator light is burnt out or disconnected.
NOTE
This alarm is displayed only by the ART. The operator or technician may become aware of the problem simply due
to the fact that the lamp does not light up when the front axle suspension is activated.

CHECK
• Check the condition of the indicator lamp.
• Check that the contacts on connector “5” of the activating switch and connector “JX4” of the control unit are firmly at-
tached and not oxidised.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, activate the axle suspension and check that the control unit is supplying
power to the indicator light, connecting a test meter to pin 9 and pin 10 of connector “5” (voltage 12V).
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 10 of connector “5” and pin 8 of connector “JX4”.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 9 of connector “5” and the cab earth.
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850
20 5 4 8 12

5 4 20 JX3 12 8 JX4

FE1
3 8 10 9
0.012.8732.4

GND4

J2 AS1 AS3
7 3 21 12 3
7.5A

F17

5 9 10 1 5
+15

0441.9533 0.012.8894.4
D0017250

20-182
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 24 ALL. CC EV UP

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in the control line of the front axle 'up' solenoid.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “H” of the front axle up valve solenoid are
firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “H” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
20 5 4 1

JX3 1 20 4 5
FE1
8 GND4
3

FE2 J2
1 7 7

H
7.5A

2 1
F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017210

20-183
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 25 ALL. CC EV DW

DESCRIPTION
• The control unit detects a short circuit in the control line of the front axle 'down' solenoid.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “S” of the front axle down valve solenoid
are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “S” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
20 5 4 2

JX3 2 20 4 5
FE1
8 GND4
3

FE2 J2
2 7 7

S
7.5A

2 1
F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017220

20-184
ALLARMS ANALYSIS OF ALARMS

ALARM N° 26 ALL. CC EV LS

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in the control line of the front axle load sensing solenoid.

CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “JX3” of the control unit and connector “X68” of the front axle load sensing valve
solenoid are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (the resistance value must be other than 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X68” and to chassis earth, and
measure the resistance to ensure there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• If the fault persists, renew the control unit.

0443.7850 0.012.8732.4
2 20 5 4

2 JX4 20 4 5 JX3

FE1
3
8 GND4

FE2 J2
3 7 7

X68
7.5A

2 1 F17

+15

0443.7849 0441.9533
D0017230

20-185
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION

6. OPERATOR’S MANUAL EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
The electronic components in the AGROTRON are tested and programmed by means of the Electronic Diagnosis System
(EDS) from DEUTZ-FAHR.
The existing version of the EDS consists of an interface cable and an adapter cable as well as of an installation disk with the
corresponding programs.
The PC program and the cables are distributed via:

SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.

Viale F. CASSANI, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALIA

1.1 FUNCTIONAL SCOPE

The EDS software includes the following subprograms:
• POWERSHIFT (not used for this tractor) and POWERSHUTTLE transmission
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the gear box error memory
- Programming of the gear box, e.g. upon replacement of the box (end-of-line programming)
- Calibration of the sensor at the clutch pedal (end-of-line programming)
- Evaluation of the contact pressure of the main clutch (only for power shuttle)
• Agrotronic-hD (not used for this tractor)
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the AGROTRONIC-hD box error memory
- Calibrate valves
• Infocenter
- Diagnosis
- Programming of the constant values
• Spring-suspended front axle (not used for this tractor)
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the control box error memory
- Reading resp. loading of the control box standard data (parameters) converter

20-187
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION

1.2 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

Converter
Serial K-line
line
Control box

Hardware Setup

1.2.1 INTERFACE CABLE (SERIAL)

The depicted interface cable is plugged into the serial interface (COM 1 or COM 2) of the computer and connected with the
corresponding connectors of the adapter cable.
1 - Plug (designation ”EIC”) for connection to the serial interface (RS 232) at the computer for diagnosis INFOCENTER.
2 - Plug (designation ”9141”) for connection to the serial interface (RS 232) at the computer for diagnosis POWERSHIFT-
and POWERSHUTTLE-transmission, AGROTRONIC-hD and spring-suspended front axle.
3 - Plug for 12 V supply of the interface cable for connection to the cigar lighter.
4 - Diagnosis plug for AGROTRONIC-hD, gear box control and spring-suspended front axle, 4-pole.
5 - Diagnosis plug for INFOCENTER, 2-pole.
6 - Adapter for diagnosis POWERSHIFT transmission, old version.

20-188
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION

1.2.2 ADAPTER CABLE FOR CENTRAL DIAGNOSIS INTERFACE

The depicted adapter cable is plugged into the diagnosis interface in the fuse box and connected with the corresponding
connectors of the PC interface cable.
8 - Central plug 14-pole for connection in the fuse box
9 - Diagnosis plug for ”Agrotronic-hD”, 4-pole
10 - Diagnosis plug for ”Infocenter”, 2-pole
11 - Diagnosis plug ”Powershift Agrotron 4.70 – 6.45”, 4-pole
12 - Diagnosis plug ”Spring-suspended front axle”, 4-pole
13 - Diagnosis plug ”Electronic motor control”, 4-pole
14 - Diagnosis plug for ”Full powershift Agrotron 160-200”, 3-pole
15 - Diagnosis connection for ”MOBI-DIG (ZF)”, 4-pole
NOTE. Both free cable ends are not used.

1.2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The applied computer (notebook, laptop or portable system) needs to fulfill the following requirements in order to install
and execute EDS:
• IBM compatible personal computer with at least a 80486 processor.

CAUTION!
For the use of SERDIA – SERvice DIAgnosis program for the electronic motor control from DEUTZ AG – a Pen-
tium‘-processor is recommended.
• Main memory (RAM) at least 640 kB
• Disk drive 3,5” for 1,44 MB floppy disks (HD)
• Hard disk with at least 2,5 MB of free memory space
• at least one serial interface COM 1 (RS 232)
• Operating system MS-DOS from version 6.xx on
• An additional serial/k-line converter is required for the communication with the diagnosis interface (included in the
scope of supply of the company Wilbär).

20-189
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION

1.2.4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT!
The EDS program needs to be installed and executed in the DOS mode of the computer in order to prevent mal-
functions! The installation has to be carried out according to the installation instructions included in the scope of
supply.
The installation procedure valid according to the current release is shown step by step in the subsequent description:
• Start computer in DOS mode (C:\_)
• Insert floppy disk in drive A
• Change to drive A (A:\_) by means of entering A: and pressing of the ENTER-key
• The automatic installation procedure is launched by means of entering install
Hereby a new subdirectory (C:\EDS) is created on the hard disk in which the EDS program will be installed. During the
installation process the user is assisted by instructions on the screen.
• After succesful installation the EDS program is launched automatically.
• The program is terminated by selecting Option 8 (C:\EDS_)
• The subdirectory EDS is quit (C:\_) by means of entering cd. (resp. cd\).

1.3 STARTING AND TERMINATING OF THE EDS PROGRAM

IMPORTANT!
If Windows 95/Windows 3.1 is installed as operating system the EDS program needs to be launched
in DOS mode (in case of Win’95 via the MS-DOS input prompt icon). Otherwise malfunctions may
occur during the diagnosis!

1.3.1 STARTING OF THE EDS PROGRAM

• Start computer in DOS mode (C:\_)
• Change into the subdirectory EDS (C:\EDS:>_) by means of entering CD EDS.
• The program is launched by entering EDS; the initial menu appears with the following select options:

Fig. 1 - Initial Menu

Within the initial menu, pressing one of the numerical keys (1 to 7) determines which component (e.g. Agrotronic-hD+ASM)
is supposed to be checked and on which computer interface (COM 1 or COM 2) the signals arrive.

20-190
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION

1.3.2 Terminating of the EDS program

• The initial menu (see figure) appears again after terminating the selected subprogram (e.g. Agrotronic-hD+ASM)
• The EDS program is quit by means of selecting Option 8.
• The display C:\EDS:>_ shows that the operating system is still located in the subdirectory EDS which is quit by entering
cd.., causing DOS to return to the root directory.
• If EDS was launched in DOS mode under Windows 95 (via the MS-DOS input prompt), entering EXIT causes Windows
to close the DOS window and return to the Windows desktop.

20-191
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS

2. TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS
DEST is a program for diagnosis and end-of-line programming of the transmission control units DEST 38 and DEST 45. It
consists of a main menu in which the corresponding control unit is selected and the actual diagnosis programs.
The user interface of this program is realized according to the SAA standard. This means for the user:
• a uniform menu prompting system
• an online help available at any time
• mouse-support
• operation via hotkeys (designated by highlighted characters)

2.1 THE MAIN MENU

On start-up of DEST (compare part 1.1.3: ”Starting and terminating of the EDS program”) the last selected diagnosis con-
trol is started automatically. The corresponding diagnosis program must be quit in order to return to the main menu (DEST
38 – menu item File > End; DEST 39/45 – menu item File > main menu). From the DEST 38 diagnosis it is always possible
to return to the main menu.

2.1.1 SCREEN AND MENU STRUCTURE

Fig. 2 - Menu structure

The screen setup with the main menu is identical for the transmission diagnosis programs; in the diagnosis programs DEST
38, 39/45 the menu line is merely supplemented by the menu item Diagnosis. Left at the top in the menu line the current pro-
gram level is indicated, e.g. MAIN MENU. The rotating dash left beside it signalizes to the user that the program is working
correctly on the lowest level. If this dash stands still an error has occured and the program must be restarted.
The user activates the menu by means of pressing the ALT key or the F10 key and may select a submenu by means of the
cursor keys. The same goal is accomplished by means of pressing the ALT key and one of the hotkeys assigned to every
menu item simultaneously.
This hotkey is a highlighted character for every menu item (e.g. the ”F” for the menu item File, invoked with the combination
ALT + F).
The menu may be quit by means of the ESC key (resp. the ALT key).

2.1.2 FILE
• File >End
Terminates the program; altered settings (language, colour palette and interface in use) are stored. If the program is ter-
minated directly after quitting DEST 38 the start menu of DEST 38 is invoked automatically on the next start-up; oth-
erwise the main menu reappears.

20-192
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS

2.1.3 CONTROL

Fig. 3 - Control
• Control > DEST38
Launches the diagnosis program DEST 38 after a confirmation.

CAUTION!
Colour, language and interface settings cannot be taken over!

• Control > DEST39

Launches the diagnosis program DEST 39 after a confirmation.

CAUTION!
This program cannot be started if there is no file dest39.ini existing!

• Control > DEST45

Launches the diagnosis program DEST 45 after a confirmation and takes over the current settings.

2.1.4 OPTIONS
• Options > Colour palette
Selection of various colour palettes for the screen display.

Fig. 4 - Menu Colour

20-193
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS

• Options > Language (Lingua)

Changes the communication language between user and program.

Fig. 5 - Menu Change language

• Selection of the serial interface COM1 for the communication between control device and PC.

• Options >Interface COM 2)

Selection of the serial interface COM2 for the communication between control device and PC.

• Options > Simulated communication

This menu item is disabled due to safety reasons; the selection Simulation is not stored.

2.2 ONLINE HELP

The diagnosis program DEST offers the user help at any time about the current environment (context help) as well as help
about the current key assignment. All help texts are stored as text files to be displayed at any time during the running pro-
gram. Future supplements or changes of these texts can be carried out without problems by means of a text editor.
The user of the diagnosis program DEST has the opportunity to invoke an online help within the program context at any
time:
• by means of pressing the F1 key
• by means of pressing ALT + H
• by means of clicking on the << HELP >> button with the mouse
The online help basically describes the operation of the currently active window. Further texts (e.g. a detailed description
of specific control device data) can also be included.
The possible key combinations in the context are shown by means of pressing the F9 key.

20-194
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3. POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 45

As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor and computer needs to be established so as to check the trans-
mission control by means of DEST 45 resp. to be able to carry out the end-of-line programming.

Fig. 23 - Interface cable and adapter cable

The interface cable and the adapter cable are serving for this purpose (see figure).
1 - Connect plug (2) of the interface cable with the designation ”9141” to the computer (COM interface)
2 - Connect plug (3) of the interface cable for the 12 V supply to the cigar lighter
3 - Connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (11) – designation ”powershift Agrotron 4.70-6.45” – of
the adapter cable
4 - Insert the central plug (8) of the adapter cable into the central diagnosis interface in the fuse box
5 - Switch ON ignition
6 - Start the computer and call the EDS program (compare item A 1.3 – Launching and terminating of the EDS program)
7 - Call Option 1 in the initial menu
8 - Make sure that the right diagnosis program (DEST 345) is invoked. On the right side in the upper frame of the screen
DEST 45 needs to be displayed, and below e.g. DEST 45 – V 2.2 – 16.12.97. If necessary change to the main menu and
launch DEST 45 via the menu item Control > DEST 45.

CAUTION!
Before starting the diagnosis verify that the proper interface (COM 1 or COM 2) is selected in the menu item Op-
tions!

20-195
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.2 DEST 45 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

3.2.1 FILE >MAIN MENU

Fig. 24 - File >Main menu

• File > Main menu

Selecting this menu item quits the active control and calls the main menu in which the user can select the next control
to be diagnosed or quit the program. All current settings are saved and upon the next start-up the main menu reap-
pears.
• File > End
The menu item ”End” saves the settings selected under the menu item ”options” (colour palette, language and selected
interface) and terminates the diagnosis program.
Upon the next start-up of the diagnosis program the settings are automatically taken over and the diagnosis program
DEST 45 is called.

20-196
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.2.2 MENU DIAGNOSIS

• Diagnosis > Read error memory
The menu item ”Read error memory ” opens a window divided into two parts in which the contents of the error memory
are displayed in chronological order.

Fig. 25 - Read error memory

The double frame and the highlighted lines ”Read error memory” resp. ”Error description” show which part of the win-
dow is currently active.
In the left part of the window the current operating-hours of the transmission-E-box (not to be compared with the op-
erating hours of the infocenter!) and the number of the various errors detected by the transmission-E-box are displayed.
Below the errors stored in the E-box are indicated. In the column ”Errors” the respective error codes are listed. The col-
umn ”active” indicates the corresponding error status. ”Y” stands for yes; i.e. the error is currently active – resp. ”N” for
no; i.e. the error is currently not active. The third column ”Number” indicates how many times the respective error has
occured. The information under ”Operating-hours” indicates when the respective error has occured.
The user can select an error with the cursor keys and cause a detailed error description to be displayed on the right side
of the screen by means of clicking on OK or pressing ENTER. The error text can be scrolled by means of the cursor keys
if it exceeds the size of the right window.
Pressing of ESC or C reactivates the left screen window.
If the left window is active, all errors can be saved in a text file with their detailed description by means of pressing F2.
In addition to the error descriptions the current operating-hours counter, the identification data, the current date as well
as the vehicle identification number and the number of the electronic box are saved. However, vehicle identification
number and number of the electronic box can only be saved if the corresponding entry in the EEPROM is valid.

20-197
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Diagnosis > Delete error memory (Cancellazione memoria errori)

“Delete error memory” opens a window which prompts the user to confirm the deletion of the error memory.

Fig. 26 - Delete error memory

• Diagnosis > HEX data display

This menu item is not relevant for diagnosis, as only internal data in hexadecimal notation are displayed here.
On selection of the menu item HEX data display a window appears, in which the user can enter up to four hexadecimal
addresses (see figure). In addition to the address data the user has to enter the number of bytes (maximum 12) he wants
to read at this start address. On confirmation with OK their contents are dumped on the screen..

Fig. 27 - HEX data display

With << + >> / << - >> the start addresses are incremented resp. decremented by one.
With << ++ >> / << — >> the start addresses are increased resp. decreased by 12 (decimal).
With << CONT >> the contents are read continually (default). Selection of this button causes the label to change to ”<<
STAT >>”. Reselection toggles again.
Pressing the key ESC (or ALT + C) quits this menu item.

20-198
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Diagnosis > Plaintext data display

CAUTION!
After selecting the menu item ”End-of-line programming” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off
and on again in order to update all data in the window ”Plaintext data display”!
Plain text data display opens a window in which the data are converted and displayed in their corresponding physical
units. The structure and contents of the window are shown in the figure below.
By pressing the key ”T” it is possible to toggle between continuous display and static display.
The current status is indicated left at the top of the window as CONT (for continuous display) resp. STAT (for static dis-
play).

Fig. 28 - Plaintext data display

It is possible to switch between the individual windows for digital inputs, digital outputs, sensor errors and internal var-
iables by means of the select fields (buttons) << DIG_IN >>, << DIG_OUT >>, << ERRORS >> and << INTERNAL >> (al-
so compare ”DEST 38 program description”). The window for speeds/drive information is always visible.
Possible errors are indicated in each individual window.
In case of continuous display a rotating dot indicates which variable resp. which value is currently being refreshed.
Charts with descriptions about matching internal pin assignments and for the contacts of the E-box for the respective
windows can be called by means of pressing the keys F3 and F4.
Pressing the key ESC (or C) quits this menu item.
• << DIG_IN >> Digital inputs
Upon selecting << DIG_IN >> a list of the digital inputs appears on the right side of the screen together with their cor-
responding addresses and values. So in the continuous display mode (CONT) it is possible to check whether the re-
spective signal is being transferred in to the E-box.
Tip plus Powershift plus at the gear lever
Tip minus Powershift minus at the gear lever
FS neutral Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in neutral position
FS forward Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in forward position
FS reverse Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in reverse position
System pressure 18 bar system pressure switch
HK pedal switch Proximity switch at main clutch pedal
Pin code 1 Set to value 1 if type of transmission is T7100
Pin code 2 Set to value 1 if type of transmission is T7200
Gear sync transm Starter inhibit switch at control console
Starter inhibit Push-button switch at drive switch (POWER-SHUTTLE lever)

20-199
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• << DIG_OUT >> Digital outputs

Upon selecting << DIG_OUT >> a list of the ”digital outputs” appears on the right side of the screen together with their
corresponding addresses and values. So in the continuous display mode (CONT) it is possible to display the output sig-
nals of the E-box.

Fig. 29 - Digital outputs

• << ERRORS >> Sensor errors)

Upon selecting << ERRORS >> a list of the sensor errors appears on the right side of the screen.

Fig. 30 - Sensor errors

20-200
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• << INTERNAL >> Internal variables

Upon selecting << INTERNAL >> a list of the ”internal variables” appears on the right side of the screen together with
their values and physical units. All displayed values are calculated by the E-box.
•

Fig. 31 - Internal variables

HK pressure Pressure at the main clutch (calculated by means of measuring the current which flows to the pro-
portional valve)
HK contact pres Contact pressure of the main clutch evaluated during end-of-line programming
HK pedal position Position of the clutch pedal (calculated from the voltage level of the angle sensor at the clutch pedal)

• Diagnosis > Set output ports

CAUTION!
• Due to safety reasons this menu item can only be selected when the engine has stopped!
• If the menu item ”End-of-line programming” has been previously executed the ignition on the vehicle needs
to be switched off and on again once. Otherwise the digital outputs cannot be activated!

Fig. 32 - Select output ports

20-201
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

Via the menu item ”Select output ports” it is possible to set or reset the individual digital outputs. After calling the menu item
”Select output ports” a window appears in which the data of the individual outputs of the transmission-E-box are dis-
played. The outputs are indicated line by line.
Column 1: In this column the components activated by the respective output are indicated.
Column 2: In this column the internal addresses (pins) of the digital outputs are indicated.
Column 3: This column indicates the current status of the output: Hereby the indication ”1” signifies that the output is set
and therefore a signal (voltage) is existing at the corresponding pin of the E-box. The indication ”0” signifies that the output
is not set and therefore no signal is existing. Highlighted fields in different colours show to the user those outputs which are
connected to the E-box and therefore are ready to be activated.
Column 4: In this column the user can select one of the connected outputs by means of the cursor keys, i.e. the desired
field is highlighted in a different colour. This output status can be toggled (activated resp. deactivated) by pressing the EN-
TER key. The output will be set in the E-box and subsequently be read in again by the DEST program. Due to safety reasons
the changes which have been carried out will be reset to the normal state after the menu item ”Activate outputs” has been
quit.
Column 5: In this column the errors of the digital outputs are shown. Thereby the letters”KM”signify a short circuit to
ground and ”LU” stands for a line interruption.

• Diagnosis > EEPROM read/write

This menu item allows the user to read and edit the customer area contents of the EEPROM. On selection a window ap-
pears in which the contents are shown (see figure). The user can alter individual characters with the help of the cursor
keys and confirm these changes with <<OK>> (ALT + O or ENTER). Subsequent to every writing process into the EEP-
ROM customer area an identification (date) is saved which can be read later on via the menu item Control > Information.
This menu item can be quit by means of pressing the ESC key (or ALT + C).

Fig. 33 - EEPROM read/write

The first nine characters of the customer area are highlighted in a different colour. The menu item ”End-of-line program-
ming” fills in the vehicle identification number into this area.
In case of storing the contents of the error memory into a file DEST 45 checks whether the first four characters of the EEP-
ROM customer area correspond to a valid vehicle identification prenumber. If this is the case the vehicle identification
number and the corresponding number of the electronic box will also be stored into the file. Otherwise both values cannot
be stored.
Due to the aforementioned reasons this area should not be edited by the user himself. Therefore, upon opening the window
the cursor is located at the position on the right beside it.

20-202
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Diagnosis > Operating-hours counter

This menu item enables the user to read and edit the contents of the electronic operating-hours counter. Subsequent
to the initial input a window is opened in order to confirm the data. The input itself is to be carried out with decimal values
in hours.

Fig. 34 - Operating-hours counter

20-203
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.2.3 CONTROL
The submenu ”Control” contains the menu items ”Information” and ”End-of-line programming”

Fig. 35 - Control

• Control > Information

The menu item ”Information” indicates in a window the operating-hours, the EEProm login data, the control unit login
data as well as the control unit identification data. These data cannot be edited.

Fig. 36 - Information

20-204
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Control > End of line programming

CAUTION!
After terminating the menu item ”Activate outputs” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off and on
again before the menu item ”End-of-line programming” can be selected. Otherwise the call is aborted by
prompting the error message ”Select transmission version not possible!”.
The menu item ”End-of-line programming” opens a divided window for the purpose of configuration of the trans-
mission box and for adjustment of the clutch. In the upper window area the configuration data is displayed. In the lower
area the user can find instructions for the end-of- line programming.

Fig. 37 - End-of-line programming

First the program reads the 8 digit vehicle identification number from the EEPROM. If the first four digits correspond to
a valid vehicle identification prenumber the configuration data are read directly from the box. If the configuration data
of the box are consistent to the corresponding data of the vehicle identification prenumber all data (transmission ver-
sion, type of transmission, vehicle configuration, electronic box and vehicle identification number) will be displayed. If
they are not consistent only the read out data from the control unit will be displayed. In addition, a warning will appear
with instructions to reconfigure the box. The same applies if the vehicle identification prenumber read from the EEP-
ROM is invalid.
The vehicle configuration can be changed by means of selecting the button << CONFIG >> or the letter ”F”. At first the
vehicle identification prenumber (the first four digits of the vehicle identification number) is highlighted in a different col-
our. The vehicle identification number defined for the corresponding type of vehicle can be selected from a table stored
in the program by means of the cursor keys. The configuration data belonging to the respective type of tractor are al-
tered simultaneously.
Before these data are stored by pressing the ENTER key it is obligatory to compare the pre-set speed version (30 / 40
km/h or 50 km/h) with the actual speed version of the tractor. If these do not match the proper speed version has to be
set by means of pressing the cursor keys again.

20-205
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

Fig. 38 - Select vehicle identification number

After pressing the ENTER key the last four digits of the vehicle identification number will be highlighted in a different col-
our. Here the user has to fill in the serial number of the tractor which is stored in the EEPROM by pressing the ENTER
key.

Fig. 39 - Clutch adjustment

Subsequently the transmission box will be configured with the corresponding data by activating << OK >> or pressing
ENTER. In addition, the entire vehicle identification number will be written into the first nine bytes of the EEPROM cus-
tomer area. If the configuration is completed the clutch can be adjusted by means of << 1 >>. If the instructions are ex-
ecuted the clutch adjustment is terminated with << OK >> (or ENTER) causing a message to appear whether the clutch
adjustment was carried out succesfully or not.

20-206
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

Determination of the contact pressure of the main clutch

In order to insure engaging without a jerk upon automatical reversing, the components transmission control unit (E-box),
proportional valve and main clutch are to be coordinated by means of determining the contact pressure.

Fig. 40 - Determination of contact pressure

CAUTION!
As the vehicle starts moving on its own during the process, take care that there is sufficiently free space in front of
the tractor!

Fig. 41 - Safety note

The determination of the contact pressure is started by means of << 2 >>. For this purpose the followinf works need to be
carried out:
• Remedy all pending errors at the power-shuttle system
• Warm up the tractor (transmission oil temperature at least 40 ×C).
• Place the tractor on a solid leveled surface and move the drive switch into the neutral position. Let the engine run.
• Create a safety area with a size of at least 5 meters in front of the tractor which nobody is allowed to enter!
• Engage the gear (T7100 = 2. Gear; T7200 = 3. Gear).
• Connect the computer, boot the system and call ”Control > End-of-line programming”. The determination of the con-
tact pressure is started by means of << 2 >>.

20-207
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Further instructions can be directly taken from the <<HELP>> file stored in the computer. After quitting the help file the
determination of the contact pressure is carried on according to the instruction.
• During the calibration process the pressure in the main clutch upon which frictional connection occurs is determined.
Hereby the tractor moves about 0,5 m forward on ist own. Simultaneously the E-box detects the ”speed at the output
of the main clutch” and terminates the determination of the contact pressure.
> Contact pressure T 7200 5,0 – 8,0 bar
> Contact pressure T 7100 6,0 – 9,0 bar
• The determined value is stored in the transmission control unit (E-box) by means of switching the ignition off and on
again and can be looked up in the plain text display under << INTERNAL >>.

Leaving end-of-line programming:

The end-of-line mode is quit by pressing C (or ESC). The determined values are stored in the EEPROM by means of switch-
ing the ignition off and on again.

20-208
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.2.4 OPTIONS
The option menu offers the user the possibility to alter the program environment. All settings executed under this menu
item are saved when the program is terminated.

Fig. 42 - Options

• Options > Colour palette

In this menu item settings for the appropriate screen colours can be selected. All possible palettes can be selected by
means of the cursor keys and be shown in a preview. The selected colour palette is retained by means of pressing EN-
TER.

Fig. 43 - Change colours

20-209
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

• Options > Language

In the submenu ”Options – Language” another language can be selected. After confirming with ENTER (resp. ALT + O)
all screen texts are displayed in the selected language.

Fig. 44 - Change language

• Options > Interface COM 1

By selecting one of the two menu items the communication with the box is carried out via the corresponding interface.
The selected interface is marked.
Only an interface actually available on the computer can be selected!

• Options > Simulated communication

Selecting this menu item causes allows most of the program functions to be called without a connection to a trans-
mission control unit. For this purpose the program EDS simulates the communication between computer and trans-
mission box. However not all the functions are currently executable with simulated control.

20-210
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.3 ERROR CODES POWER-SHUTTLE /DEST 45

Legend error code list T7x00 V/R-auto EST 45
Validity: V410 (IV) version

General
In case of a multiple error only the error code with the highest external error number will be displayed on the screen. Si-
multaneously the error symbol ”wrench” appears on the display. The external error numbers are sorted according to the
severity of the required reaction upon an error.

Rough sub-division of the external error number

0 ...9 reserved for operation indications
10 ...99 Operation mode normal, operation mode stand-by strategy, operation mode limp home, operation mode emer-
gency operation, operation mode vehicle shut-down (except for EE), operation mode permanent neutral

Abbreviations
• LU Line interruption
• KM Short circuit to ground
• K+ Short circuit to vehicle electrical system plus general
• Nmot Speed at powershift gear input (=nLSE)
• nLSA Speed at powershift gear output
• nHK Speed at main clutch output
• nAB Speed at output, ground speed
• HK Main clutch
• HKPed Main clutch pedal
• ED Digital input
• EU Analog input voltage (U)
• ER Analog input resistance (R)
• EF Frequency input (F)
• AU Voltage output (U) (plus supply sensor system)
• VMG Ground supply transmitter (sensor system)
• VMGA Ground supply transmitter analog (sensor system)
• ADM Digital output ground
• AIP Current output (I) proportional
• VPS Plus supply (actuator system)

20-211
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.4 DISPLAY POWERSHUTTLE

Error code Drive program Significance/function

Non-critical error, tractor can be operated normally.

10-20 Normal driving Start-up / change of directions possibly delayed or only by jerks.

Ground speed too high.

21 Normal driving Reduce ground speed until error code disappears.
If the error code is not disappearing contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.

Transmission oil temperature too high.

22 Normal driving Reduce tractor load until error code disappears.
If the error code is not disappearing contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.

27-41 Limited driving Powershift bloccato.

Powershifts are blocked.

Stand-by program Conditions for starting upon change of directions:
47-58 (Limp home) Commutator switch at least 1 second in neutral position upon standstill of
tractor.

Powershifts are blocked.

Driving clutch is not working – driving only possible by means of change of di-
rections switch.
64-70 Emergency program Commutator switch at least 1 second in neutral position upon standstill of
tractor.
Contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop immediately and have the error be elim-
inated.

76-99 No driving possible Contact the DEUTZ-FAHR after-sales service.

20-212
 3.5 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION

Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks

• Generally upon
”new” electronic system
Operation mode NORMAL Carry out/repeat • Self-preservation
11 EEPROM end-of-line data invalid HK adjustment • Reserve value
(contact pressure)
Default contact pressure • Checks or plausibility invalid
• Both EEPROM blocks defective no
automatic restoration possible
Check cabling
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Default value: cold (HK pedal holding

time, splitter holding time, slip times) • Possible sequence error from:
Check temperature sensor
12 Temperature sensor LU, K+ • K+ HK sensor
Check sensor supply
• K+ sensor supply AU1
No change of operation mode Check vehicle electr. system voltage
Default value: cold (HK pedal holding Check cabling
time, splitter holding time, slip times) • Possible sequence error from:
Check temperature sensor
13 Temperature sensor KM • K+ HK sensor
Check sensor supply
No change of operation mode • K+ sensor supply AU1
Check vehicle electr. system voltage
Check cabling
Synchronous neutral switch Check neutral switch • Self-preservation
14 plausibility No change of operation mode (Start interlock switch) • Plausibility circuit
(Start interlock switch) Check speed sensor/cabling • Nhk-SyncN-Nab
Nab, Nhk

Check cabling • Diagnosis only if

Warning light LU
15 (Oil pressure/HK overspeed) No change of operation mode configured
Check lamp in disconnected state LU can only be diagnosed

Check cabling • Diagnosis only if configured

Warning light KM
16 (Oil pressure/HK overspeed) No change of operation mode • KM can only be diagnosed in
Check supply warning light disconnected state
•Diagnosis only if configured
Warning light K+ Check cabling
17 No change of operation mode • KM can only bediagnosed in
(Oil pressure/HK overspeed) Check supply warning light connected state
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-213
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
Check oil pressure switch
• Is only diagnosed if Nmot > Nmot

20-214
Warning light is lighting Check cabling threshold
18 System pressure plausibility
No change of operation mode Check system pressure • Switch closed if pressure Is existing
Check speed sensor Nmot
On display ”EE”, permanent beep Check cabling
19 Signal line display KM • Error code is not used
No change of operation mode Check display
On display ”EE”, permanent beep Check cabling
20 Signal line display K+ • Error code is not used
No change of operation mode Check display
Permanent beep as long as
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

21 Speed limit exceeded overspeed is existing Reduce driving speed • Diagnosis only if configured
No change of operation mode
• Temperature monitoring only if con-
figured
Upon exceeding 5x beep, Reduce load • Error code upon exceeding of max.
22 Temperature exceeded
subsequently 1x beep every 2 min. Shut down engine permissible upper limit temperature
• Indication ”temperature warning” is
independent of EC priority
Operation mode STAND-BY Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
27 Characteristic line valve LU STRATEGY Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • Only for T7200

Operation mode Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from LU

28 Characteristic line valve KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • Only for T7200
• Possibly sequence error from LU
VPS2
Operation mode Check cabling
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
29 Characteristic line valve K+ Check valve
• Can also lead to error ”VPS2-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) Plausi” (Int. EC:47)
• Only for T7200
• Only for T7200
Operation mode Check cabling
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Possibly sequence error from
30 Retaining valve 2 LU Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2)
• LU can only be diagnosed in
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Only for T7200
Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode LU VPS2
31 Retaining valve 2 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
• KM can only be diagnosed in dis-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state
• Self preservation
• Only for T7200
• Possibly sequence error from
LU VPS2
Operation mode Check cabling
32 Retaining valve 2 K+ STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
Check valve
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

(Powershift blocked) • Can also lead to error

Check valve supply (VPS2) ”VPS2-Plausi” (Int. EC:47)
• K+ can only be diagnosed in con-
nected state
• Only for T7200
Operation mode Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
33 Retaining valve 1 LU STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • LU can only be diagnosed in dis-
connected state
• Only for T7200
Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode
LU VPS2
34 Retaining valve 1 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
(Powershift blocked) • KM can only be diagnosed in dis-
Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state
• Self preservation
• Only for T7200
• Possibly sequence error from
LU VPS2
Operation mode Check cabling
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
35 Retaining valve 1 K+ Check valve
(Powershift blocked) • Can also lead to error ”VPS2- Plau-
Check valve supply (VPS2)
si” (Int. EC:47)
• K+ can only be diagnosed in con-
nected state
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-215
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode Check cabling LU VPS2

20-216
36 Transfer valve 2 LU STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in dis-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state (toggling only upon
defined peed ratio)
• Possibly sequence error from LU
Check cabling
Operation mode VPS2
37 Transfer valve 2 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply disconnected state
(VPS2) • Self preservation
• Possibly sequence error from LU
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Check cabling VPS2

Operation mode
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
38 Transfer valve 2 K+ • Can also lead to error
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply “VPS2-Plausi” (CE int.: 47)
(VPS2)
• Self preservation

Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from LU

Operation mode VPS2
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
39 Transfer valve 1 LU • LU can only be diagnosed in
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply disconnected state (toggling only
(VPS2) upon defined speed ratio)
• Possibly sequence error from LU
Check cabling VPS2
Operation mode
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in
40 Transfer valve 1 KM
Check valve supply disconnected state (toggling only
(Powershift blocked) upon defined speed ratio) Self pres-
(VPS2)
ervation
• Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode Check cabling LU VPS2
41 Transfer valve 2 K+ STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • Can also lead to error
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) “VPS2-Plausi” (CE int.: 47)
• Self preservation
• Upon reversing demand neutral
Check cabling shifting, permanent beep
47 nAB speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing standstill is not ab-
solutely required!
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Upon reversing demand neutral
Check cabling shifting, permanent beep
48 nAB speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing standstill is not ab-
solutely required!
• Inadmissible speed discontinuity
from transmitter failure threshold to
Operation mode LIMP-HOME
nAB speed transmitter gradient Ignition off/on • Upon reversing demand neutral
49 Check cabling
(Plausibility) standstill threshold shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing standstill is not ab-
solutely required!
Check cabling
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

• Upon reversing demand neutral

50 nHK speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
51 nHK speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor shifting, permanent beep
• Inadmissible speed discontinuity
Ignition off/on from transmitter failure threshold to
nHK speed transmitter standstill threshold
52 gradient (Plausibility) Operation mode LIMP-HOME Check cabling
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing demand neutral
shifting, permanent beep
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
53 nLSA speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
54 nLSA speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor shifting, permanent beep
• Inadmissible speed discontinuity
Ignition off/on from transmitter failure threshold to
nLSA speed transmitter standstill threshold
55 Operation mode LIMP-HOME Check cabling
gradient (Plausibility)
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing demand neutral
shifting, permanent beep
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
56 nMOT speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
57 nMOT speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor shifting, permanent beep
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-217
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Inadmissible speed discontinuity
Ignition off/on from transmitter failure threshold to

20-218
58 nMOT speed transmitter Operation mode LIMP-HOME standstill threshold
gradient (Plausibility) Check cabling
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing demand neutral
shifting, permanent beep
Ignition off/on
End-of-line programming • Switch point out of tolerance range
Carry out/repeat
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting permanent beep
• Upon neutral shifting
Clutch pedal sensory Check/adjust mechanical tolerance,
64 system plausibility Operation mode EMERGENCY OP- • HK pedal switch is closed with
ERATION Of the HK pedal sensory system
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Sensor/switch HK pedal in idle position

HK pedal adjustment Check cabling
• HK pedal sensor signal:
Check HK switch Idle: LOW
Check sensor supply stepped: HIGH
Check sensor/switch LU, KM, K+
• Upon neutral shifting
Check cabling permanent beep
Neutral shifting Check sensor mounting • Possibly sequence error from:
65 Clutch pedal sensoryl LU sensor supply (AU1)
system LU, KM Operation mode
EMERGENCY OPERATION Check sensor
• Limit values:
Check sensor supply Umin approx. 0,5V
Umax approx. 4,5V

Neutral shifting • Possibly sequence error from:

Clutch pedal sensory Check cabling • EMERGENCY K+ temperature sen-
66
system K+ Operation mode EMERGENCY OPER- Check sensor mounting sor or OPERATION K+ sensor sup-
ATION
ply AU1
• Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Check sensor
66 • Limit values:
Check sensor supply
Umin approx. 0,5V
Umax approx. 4,5V
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Check cabling
• Possibly sequence error from:
Neutral shifting Check cabling del sensore temperatura Vehicle electrical system
67 Sensor supply undervoltage Operation mode / sensore frizione undervoltage
EMERGENCY OPERATION Check cabling at temperature sensor/ • Can also lead to sequence errors
clutch sensor
• Temperature sensor
Clutch sensory system
• Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Neutral shifting
• Possibly sequence error from:
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Operation mode Check cabling

K+ HK sensor
68 Sensor supply overvoltage EMERGENCY OPERATION Check cabling at temperature K+ temperature sensor
Check cabling at temperature sensor/clutch sensor
• Can also lead to sequence errors
sensor/clutch sensor
• Temperature sensor
Clutch sensory system
Ignition off/on • Self preservation
Clutch pedal sensory system Neutral shifting
End-of-line programming • Programmed thresholds not logical
69 plausibility Operation mode
End-of-line data Carry out/repeat HK pedal (Idle position, switch point,
EMERGENCY OPERATION disengaged)
adjustment
• Self preservation
• Generally upon ”new” electronic
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on system
70 EEPROM end-of-line Operation mode End-of-line programming • Both EEPROM blocks are defective
EMERGENCY OPERATION Carry out/repeat HK pedal adjust- (invalid checksum), no automatic
ment restoration possible
Can also lead to errors ”HK sensor/
switch plausibility” (int. code 6)
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Possibly sequence error of LU
76 Proportional valve LU Operation mode Check valve VPS1!
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) • Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Self preservation
77 Proportional valve KM Operation mode Check valve • Upon neutral shifting permanent
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) beep
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-219
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting Check cabling

20-220
79 Forward valve LU • Possibly sequence error of LU VPS1!
Operation mode Check valve
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE • Upon neutral shifting
Check valve supply (VPS1)
permanent beep
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Self preservation
80 Forward valve KM Operation mode Check valve • Upon neutral shifting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) permanent beep
Check cabling • Self preservation
Neutral shifting
Check valve • Possibly sequence error of LU VPS1
82 Reverse valve LU Operation mode
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply • Upon neutral shifting

(VPS1) permanent beep
Check cabling • Self preservation
83 Reverse valve KM Operation mode
Check valve • Upon neutral shifting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE
Check valve supply (VPS1) permanent beep
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Self preservation
85 Combining error drive switch
(LU, KM, K+) Operation mode • Upon neutral shifting
Check drive switch
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE permanent beep
Check pin code • Self preservation
Ignition off/on • Pin code is evaluated only
Pin code not corresponding
87 to type of vehicle Operation mode Check end-of-line data, carry out upon initialisation
PERMANENT NEUTRAL end-of-line programming (type of • Defectice pin code.
(T7100/T7200)
vehicle, vehicle version) Wrong type of vehicle/version pro-
Check cabling grammed
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Self preservation
• Upon neutral shifting
permanent beep
• EC also defective with term30
Check cabling (KM, K+)
• LU VPS can also lead to sequence
Neutral shifting Check voltage at VPS 1 errors F-/R-/prop.-SV)
89 VPS1 plausibility (KM, K+) Operation mode Check voltage at term30 • Possibly sequence error resulting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling delle valvole from counter supply (K+) at F/R
F/R (K+) valve upon power on
• Possibly sequence error from LU
proportional valve
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

• Possibly sequence error from:

Safety processor not programmed
• Self preservation
• Upon neutral shifting
permanent beep
Check cabling (KM, K+) • EC also defective with term30
Neutral shifting Check voltage at VPS 2 • LU VPS2 can only be detected via
90 VPS2 plausibility (KM, K+) Operation mode Check voltage at term30 sequence errors
PERMANENT NEUTRAL Check cabling di • Possibly sequence error resulting
GV/HV/MVKI (K+) from counter supply (K+) at GV/HV/
MVKl upon power on
• Possibly sequence error from:
Safety processor not programmed
Engage/disengage creep
speed lever
Check cabling at •HK plausibility only if configured
Neutral shifting proportional valve (K+) •Self preservation
91 HK plausibility circuit Operation mode Check proportional valve •Plausibility circuit: Nisa-HK-Nhk
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check HK •For T72 creep speed lever
Check speed sensory system Position”N” is possible!
Nlsa, Nhk
Check hydraulic system
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on
Vehicle electrical system
92 Operation mode Check vehicle electrical system
overvoltage
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-221
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on
Vehicle electrical system

20-222
93 undervoltage Operation mode Check vehicle electrical system
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting • Upon neutral shifting
Check cabling
94 Proportional valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve
• Can also lead to error ”VPS1-
plausibility” (int. EC 46)
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting • Upon neutral shifting
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Check cabling
95 Forward valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
Check valve
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE • Can also lead to error ”VPS1-
plausibility” (int. EC 46)
• Self preservation
Neutral shifting • Upon neutral shifting
Check cabling
96 Reverse valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve
• Can also lead to error ”VPS1-
plausibility” (int. EC 46)
• Error can only occur upon wrongly
programmed application controls
(not upon standard controls)
• Wrong parameterization of:
• Slip_configuration
• _LS_Plausi_Konfig
• _PC_Konfig
• _Diag_Disable
Operation mode
97 Application error Check application data • _Syncn_Plausi_Disable
PERMANENT NEUTRAL
• _Kplp_Plausi_Disable
• GP-ID invalid
• KD-ID invalid
• FD-ID invalid
• KUNDE_KD_FD invalid
• GP-KD-vers. Invalid
• GP-FD-vers. invalid
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks
• Customer programming (customer,
Ignition off/on
Operation mode version) invalid, not existing
98 Configuration error Check/carry out end-of-line pro-
PERMANENT NEUTRAL • Basic program not suitable for end-
gramming (customer, version)
of-line programming - by customer
• Self preservation
EEPROM end-of-line data Operation mode Ignition off/on • Checksum of the EEPROM config-
99
defective (vehicle configuration) PERMANENT NEUTRAL Repeat end-of-line programming uration data defective. No vehicle
version can be selected.
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-223
 3.6 OTHER INFORMATIONS
Error consequence/System reaction possible error cause possible remedy

20-224
EST45 is not running up Check supply paths LU, KM
no display activation resp. display ”EE” Communication line defective Check fuse (term15, term30)
Power supply defective Check communication line (LU)
Ignition off/on, repeat
EST45 is not running up
Check supply paths LU, KM
Diagnosis tool cannot establish connection Communication line defective
Check fuse (term15, term30)
Power supply defective
Check communication line (LU)
Wrong vehicle version selected upon Check/correct end-of-line programmed
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Upon starting/reversing powershift end-of-line programming vehicle version in programmazione fine linea
gear shifts over to neutral (jerk can be observed). Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective Check cabling speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa
display: ”N”, FR-arrows flashing, no error
code, permanent beep Fault in hydraulic system Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
(neutral by reversing monitoring) Check hydraulic system
Wrong vehicle version selected upon end-of- Check/correct end-of-line programmed
line programming vehicle version
Automatic shifting upward/downward in Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective, Check cabling speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
interchanged
the splitter, shifting noise every 1-2 sec. Check cabling transfer valves GV1/GV2
Transfer valves GV1/GV2 interchanged
Fault in hydraulic system (pressure Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
modulation by GV toggling) Check hydraulic system

Wrong vehicle version selected upo Check/correct end-of-line programmed

end-of-line programming vehicle version
Short traction force interruption during
driving with Closed drive train Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective Check cabling speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
(LS pressure modulation) Fault in hydraulic system (pressure modulation Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
by GV toggling) Check hydraulic system
Check starting block signal
Automatic starting not possible, vehicle remains in neutral Starting block signal not existing
(LU, KM, K+)
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 3.7 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE TRANSMISSION T-7100

ram switches:
neutral switch (outside)
starting block switch
(inside/only with powershift)
switches for
street/field display proportional valve
(only with power shuttle)
locking magnet
for street/field
shifting 18 bar system pressure switch
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

solenoid valves for:

power take off (outside)
differential lock (inside)

speed output
power take off

speed output
electro-hydraulic powershift gear
gear shift output n Lsa
speed output
output/ground speet solenoid valve temperature speed output
n Ab all-wheel drive transmission powershift gear
oil input/engine speed
n Mot; n Lse
speed output
driving clutch (gear shift input)
n HK (only with power shuttle)
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-225
 3.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100

20-226
Cannon Bayonet
Hydraulic pressure plug-socket
retaining valve Main pressure valve
18 bar
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Pressure-reducing valve
10 bar Pressure
control valve

Release valve

Pilot valve

Two-way valve
forward/neutral/reverse
Pilot valve

Solenoid valves Y1 – Y4:

Y1 = MVR; solenoid valve reverse
Y2 = GV1; transfer valve 1
Y3 = MVV; solenoid valve forward
Y4 = GV2; transfer valve 2
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
 3.9 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE TRANSMISSION T-7200

speed output ram switches:

powershift gear input/engine speed neutral switch (outside)
n Mot; n Lse starting block switch electro-hydraulic
(inside/only with powershift) gear shift
electrical connection
proportional valve forward/reverse
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

(only with power shuttle) control block

18 bar system
pressure switch
solenoid valves for:
power take off (outside)
differential lock (inside)

speed output
power take off

speed output temperature

driving clutch (gear shift input)
n HK (only with power shuttle) solenoid valve transmission electrical connection
all-wheel drive oil
speed output speed output
output/ground powershift gear output
speed n Ab N Lsa
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

20-227
 3.10 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300

20-228
Gear shift
valve A/B; F/G Safety valve Retaining valve C/D
Magnet Y6 Magnet Y7
Retaining valve A/B; F/G forward; MVV reverse
Bleed Valve
Safety valve
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)

Magnet Y3 Reversing piston

Clutch C/D
Retaining valve 2; HV2

Release Valve Magnet Y4

Clutch A/B; F/G
Retaining valve 1; HV1
Pressure
control valve Magnet Y1
Clutch A/B; F/G
Retaining valve 1; GV1

Two-step valve Magnet Y5

Field/street characteristik MVK
Two-way valve
field or street Magnet Y2
characteristic Clutch C/D Release valve for
Transfer valve 2; GV2 neutral position
Shift pressure
valve 18 Bar
Transfers valve C/D pilot
Pressure valve 10 bar

4-GEAR POWERSHIFT CONTROL UNIT FORWARD-REVERSE CONTROL BLOCK

POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

3.11 ERROR ANALYSIS

Interchanging of electrical connectors at the transmission T-7100 L and T-7200 L
Various sensors/solenoid valves/switches at the transmission are located very close to each other and are equipped with
the same type of connector. At these locations the electrical mating connectors at the cable harness cannot be layed in a
way which ensures that accidental interchanging may be absolutely excluded.
The following consideration shows the consequences if electrical connectors are interchanged:

3.11.1 VA SOLENOID VALVE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L AND T-7200 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 75 mm with T-7100 and 55 mm with T-7200.
VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”OFF”
• All-wheel ”OFF” ‡ 12V voltage at temperature sensor
• Error code on display
• Electronic system shifts gear to permanent neutral
Vehicle cannot be moved any more!

VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”ON”

• All-wheel ”ON” ‡ 0V voltage at temperature sensor
• Error code on display; temperature sensor defective
• Hard gear shifts (5V supply in electronic system is overloaded, but short circuit proof)

Temperature sensor plug on VA – SV

• Error code on display; temperature sensor defective
• Hard gear shifts

3.11.2 SV DIFFERENTIAL LOCK AND SV POWER TAKE OFF CLUTCH T-7100 L AND T-7200 L
Both valves are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 40 mm

Plug differential lock on SV power take off valve

• Interchanged functions upon switch actuation in cabin
• Power take off stub is running upon diff. ”ON”
Upon ZW clutch ”ON” and differential lock ”OFF” the differential lock is engaged. Critical driving state with regard to safety,
e.g. when driving in a curve, etc.

3.11.3 SPEED SENSORS INPUT/OUTPUT WITH T-7100 L

AMP superseal 3-pole connectors at both sensors, distance approx. 80 mm

Plug output on input sensor and vice versa

(both plugs are connected!)

Upon powershift step L and H

• Error is not detected
• LS transmission in neutral

Upon powershift step M

• Error is not detected
No consequences

20-229
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45

Only one plug is connected

OUTPUT not connected
• Error code on display
Standby driving possible
INPUT not connected
• Error code on display
• Plausibility
Standby driving possible

3.11.4 LOCKING MAGNET FIELD/STREET AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 115 mm
Locking magnet plug on temperature sensor

3.11.5 PLUG DRIVING CLUTCH NHK ON OUTPUT/GROUND SPEED NAB AND VICE VERSA
WITH T-7200 L (both plugs are connected)
• Tractor is starting for a short time
• Error message ”91” on display: Powershift gear in neutral

20-230
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

4. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor (infocenter) and computer needs to be established so as to
check the infocenter by means of the EDS program resp. to change the constant values. The interface cable and the adapt-
er cable are serving for this purpose (see figure).

Fig. 51 - Interface cable and adapter cable

1 - Connect plug (1) of the interface cable with the designation ”EIC” to the computer (COM interface).
2 - Connect plug (3) of the interface cable for the 12 V supply to the cigar lighter
3 - Connect the 2-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (10) – designation ”Info center” – of the adapter cable
4 - Insert the central plug (8) of the adapter cable into the central diagnosis interface in the fuse box
5 - Switch on ignition
6 - Start the computer and call the EDS program (compare item A 1.3 – Launching and terminating of the EDS program)
7 - Make sure that the right option is called in the initial menu:
Option 4 -> plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 1
Option 5 -> plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 2

NOTE. Agrotron tractors with the vehicle identification numbers up to 80xx 1999 (i.e. green cabin) usually are not
equipped with a central diagnosis interface.

To be able to check the Infocenter however, with these tractors it is necessary to connect the 2-pole plug of the interface
cable directly with the diagnosis terminal of the Infocenter. The diagnosis terminal is located in the cable harness at the
backside of the Infocenter.

20-231
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

4.1 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

4.1.1 MAIN MENU
After selecting Option 4 resp. Option 5 (depending on the computer interface) the main menu appears:

Fig. 52 - Main menu

In the upper part of the window information about the selected interface (COM 1, COM 2) as well as information about the
hardware version (Infocenter) and the software can be found.
The lower part of the window contains the select menu for the subprograms of the Infocenter diagnosis. The cursor is flash-
ing behind “function”.
The respective subprograms can be called by means of pressing the specified key:
• F1 launches the subprogram “Change constant values”
• F2 launches the subprogram “Diagnosis printout”
• F3 launches the subprogram “Test mode”
• END terminates the Infocenter diagnosis program and calls the EDS initial menu.

20-232
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

4.1.2 F1 – CONSTANTS CHANGE

By pressing the key F1 an additional window headlined “display and program constants” appears:

Fig. 53 - Display and program constants

It is possible to compare the stored constants in the Infocenter with the help of the constant list (see item 3, resp. vehicle
workshop manual).
• Procedure for changing constant values:
Select the desired constant value by means of the cursor keys (the corresponding line is highlighted)
- Press the ENTER key. By doing so, another window appears in which the new value can be entered.
- Press the ENTER key again to confirm the change and return to the constant values menu.
When the proper values are assigned to all constants, the main menu is called again by selecting the bottom line “End
constant values menu” (and pressing ENTER).

CAUTION!
The realized changes are only saved after terminating the diagnosis program and subsequently switching the ig-
nition off and on again.

20-233
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

4.1.3 F2 – DIAGNOSIS PRINT

Upon pressing the key F2 the diagnosis printout menu appears:
• Printer ready?
• ESC = No, abort
• Return = Yes, printout
Press the ESC key (keyboard top left) to abort the procedure and to return to the main menu.
Press the ENTER key (Return) to start the diagnosis printout:

Fig. 54 - Diagnosis printout

The data from “production date” are only valid for the supplier of the INFOCENTER.

20-234
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

4.1.4 F3 – TEST MODE

Upon pressing the key F3 the test mode appears. At the lower screen edge the test mode menu is displayed:

It is possible to do the following by pressing the key:

• F1 Check the inputs into the INFOCENTER.
• F2 Set (activate) the outputs of the INFOCENTER.
• F3 Check the LCDs (upon INFOCENTER 2 and 3).
• F5 Check the analog inputs into the INFOCENTER.
• F6 Check the pointer instruments.
• END Leave the test mode; subsequently the main menu appears.

TEST MODE > F1 CHECK INPUTS

Upon pressing the key F1 the following window appears:
(The representation shows the example of an INFOCENTER 2 in the AGROTRON 150. The ignition is switched ON.)

Fig. 56 - Check inputs

• Check inputs > parking brake

The signal input of the hand brake control switch at plug X 130, pin 8 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is
tested.
- Locking brake actuated: Indication hand brake ON
- Locking brake released: Indication hand brake OFF
• Check inputs > Air filter
The signal input of the negative pressure switch air filter at plug X 131, pin 8 of the INFO-CENTER (only for INFOCENTER
3) is tested.
- Ignition on, indication air filter OFF
- Start engine, connect cable of negative pressure switch, indication air filter ON

20-235
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

• Check inputs > Transm.fl.press.

The signal input of the system pressure switch at plug X 130, pin 7 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is test-
ed.
- Engine off, ignition on: Indication transmission oil pressure ON
- Start engine: Indication transmission oil pressureOFF

• Check inputs > air pressure

The signal input of the pressure transducer at plug X 131, pin 17 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is tested.
Engine off, ignition on, indication pressurized air gauge > 7 bar:
- Indication pressurized air off
Ignition on, reduce boiler pressure to < 5 bar by repeated braking:
- Indication pressurized air ON

• Check inputs > eng. oil level

This function cannot be tested as it is not realized (transmitter not existing).

• Check inputs > Preheat

The signal input of the preheating time control unit at plug X 131, pin 19 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3)
is tested.
- Ignition ON, during preheating process indication ON, subsequently indication OFF.

• Check inputs > Front PTO

The signal input of the switch front power take-off at plug X 131, pin 10 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition ON, indication FRONT power take-off OFF
- Start engine, front power take-off ON, indication front power take-off ON

• Check inputs > Rear PTO

The signal input of the switch rear power take-off at plug X 131, pin 11 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition ON, indication rear power take-off OFF
- Start engine, rear power take-off ON, indication rear power take-off ON

• Check inputs > road lights

The signal input of the switch dipped beam at plug X 130, pin 4 of the INFOCENTER is tested .
- Ignition ON, switch dipped beam OFF, indication dipped beam OFF
- Ignition ON, switch dipped beam ON, indication dipped beam ON

• Check inputs > turn signal 2

The signal input of the multifunctional switch at plug X 131, pin 2 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
With connected trailer the indication changes between flashing indicator 2 on and flashing indicator 2 off in the rhythm
of the flashing.

• Check inputs > turn signal

The signal input of the multifunctional switch at plug X 131, pin 4 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition on, flashing indicator not actuated indication flashing indicator off
- Ignition on, actuate flashing indicator indication changes between flashing indicator on and off.

• Check inputs > high beam

The signal input of the multifunctional switch at plug X 131, pin 16 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition ON, Indication: Main beam OFF
- Switch ON main beam (flash light) Indication: Main beam ON

Press the ENTER key to return to the TEST MODE.

TEST MODE > F2 SET OUTPUTS
Upon pressing the key F2 the following window appears:

20-236
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

Fig. 57 - Set outputs

The last line “End output menu” is marked by a bar. Press the cursor keys to move the bar to the desired function and start
the function by pressing ENTER.

• Set outputs > Lamp test

All LEDs (light emitting diodes) in the INFOCENTER are tested.
- Indication: All LEDs are lighting up.
For terminating the test step select “Reset outputs” and press the RETURN key.
- Indication: All LEDs are extinguishing.

• Set outputs > Warning lamp

The central warning light in the INFOCENTER 3 is tested.
- Indication: The warning light is lighting up.
For terminating the test step select “Reset outputs” and press the RETURN key.
- Indication: The warning light is extinguishing.

• Set outputs > Beep

The acoustic alarm - beep - in the INFOCENTER 3 is tested.
- Indication: The acoustic alarm - beep – is sounding.
For terminating the test step select “Reset outputs” and press the RETURN key.
- Indication: Beep stops.

• Set outputs > true ground speed

With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the true ground speed (plug X130 pin 5) to pin 1 of the signal
socket.
- Indication: Ground frequency on.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 1 (true ground speed sig-
nal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints with ground frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with ground frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)

20-237
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

• Set outputs > theor. ground speed

With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the theoretical ground speed (plug X130 pin 11) to pin 2 of
the signal socket.
- Indication: Wheel frequency ON.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 2 (theoretical ground
speed signal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints:with wheel frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with wheel frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)
• Set outputs > rear P.T.O.
With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the power take-off speed (plug X130 pin 6) to pin 3 of the sig-
nal socket.
- Indication: RPTO frequency on.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 3 (power take-off speed
signal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints: with RPTO frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with RPTO frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)

• Set outputs > Reset outputs

All set outputs are reset and replaced by the original values.
Select “End output menu” and press the ENTER key to reset all outputs automatically and change into the test mode.

TEST MODE > F3 CHECK LCD

Upon pressing the key F3 the following window appears:

Fig. 58 - Check LCD displays

The last line “End LCD menu” is marked by a bar. Press the cursor keys to move the bar to the desired function and start
the function by pressing ENTER.

20-238
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

•Check LCD > 7 segment all segments off

All segments are cleared in the indication fields for operating-
hours, speed, etc.
• Check LCD > 7 segment horizontal segments
All horizontal segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > 7 segment vertical segments
All vertical segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > 7 segment all segments on
All segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > Checkctl – all dots off
All indications are deleted in the warning and maintenance display
(only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > Checkctl – chess board pattern
In the warning and maintenance display every field is filled with a
weak grid (only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > Checkctl – all dots on
In the warning and maintenance display every field is filled with a
slightly stronger grid than in the test step “chess board pattern”
(only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > End LCD menu
Select this item to return to the test mode menu.

TEST MODE > F5 ANALOG INPUTS

Upon pressing the key F5 when the ignition is switched on the following window appears:

Fig. 59 - Check analog inputs

20-239
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

The values of charge control and terminal 15 reference will change when the engine is running:

Check analog inputs:

0 Tank 11,4% analog value
1 Temperature 100% analog value
2 Charge control 100% analog value
3 Terminal 15 reference 13,7 Volt terminal 15 voltage

• Analog inputs > Tank

The signal of the tank transducer at plug X 131, pin 13 of the INFOCENTER is tested: The indicated % value corre-
sponds to the actual tank level. It is the percentage of the existing terminal 15 reference. When the plug is pulled off from
the tank transducer 100% will be indicated.

• Analog inputs > Temperature

The signal of the temperature sensor (engine coolant) at plug X 131, pin 15 of the INFO-CENTER is tested. The relation
between the input signal and the reference voltage terminal 15 is indicated in %.

• Analog inputs > Charge control

The signal of the charge control for the electric generator at plug X 131, pin 7 of the INFO-CENTER is tested. When the
engine is running a display of 100% indicates proper charging by the electric generator.

• Analog inputs > Terminal 15 reference

The power supply on terminal 15 at plug X 130, pin 2 of the INFOCENTER is tested. The indication 13,7 V is the actual
operating voltage.

Press the ENTER key to return to the TEST MODE.

TEST MODE > F6 POINTER

Upon pressing the key F6 the following window appears: The cursor is flashing behind “engine speed angle”. Engine speed
angle signifies Revolution Counter Angle.

Fig. 60 - Move pointer to position

• Pointer > Engine speed angle

Enter an angle, e.g. 180.
- Display: DZM angle 180 <<
After pressing the ENTER key the pointer of the engine speed indication will move from its 0 position by 180 (to about
1900 rpm).

20-240
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

• Pointer > Tank angle

After having performed the previous test step the following window appears:
- The cursor is flashing behind “Tank angle”.

Enter an angle, e.g. 45.

- Display: Tank angle 45 <<
Dopo aver premuto il tasto INVIO il puntatore del serbatoio si sposterà dalla posizione 0 di 45° verso il centro dello stru-
mento indicatore (il quale dispone di un angolo di indicazione generale di 90° ù
• Pointer > Temperature angle
After pressing the ENTER key the tank pointer will move from its 0 position by 45 towards the center of the indicating in-
strument. (The indicating instrument has an overall indication angle of 90.)

Enter an angle, e.g. 45.

- Display: Temp angle 45 <<
After pressing the ENTER key the temperature pointer will move from its 0 position by 45 o towards the center of the in-
dicating instrument. (The indicating instrument has an overall indication angle of 90 o .) Simultaneously the pointer win-
dow is quit and the main menue reappears.

4.1.5 END =QUIT THE INFOCENTER PROGRAM

Upon pressing the “End” key the following window appears:

In case of INFOCENTER 3 a gong is sounding now and all LEDs are lighting up. Subsequently, for about three seconds the
message “Read EProm from multipurpose instrument” appears.

20-241
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

The realized changes from the item “F1=change constant values” are saved. Changes like “Move pointer to position” etc.
are rejected and a self-test of the INFOCENTER will be performed.
Subsequently the EDS initial menu reappears (compare part A 1.3 “Launching and terminating of the EDS program”).

4.2 CONSTANT VALUES FOR INFOCENTER

Every INFOCENTER is programmed with 14 constant values in order to take into account the design features of the tractor,
which can be, e.g.
• Indication of the ground speed in km/h or mph
• Indication of the power take-off speed
• Radar sensor: existing or not existing
The central unit needs to be programmed with a specific progression of constant values which determines the type of trac-
tor and the design features. Every progression of constant values has a running number (K...) which is unique.
NOTE. Upon calibration (traveling the 100 m distance) the constant values 9 and 10 will be newly determined.

The constant values are displayed by the central unit upon the following conditions:
• Ignition OFF; dipped beam OFF
• Pull the main beam switch and hold it
• Switch ON the ignition
• After approx. 10 sec the constant values are flashing and can thus be read; Release the main beam switch
• Return to normal indication by means off ignition OFF-ON

The number of the constant value is indicated in the “speed” display and the value is indicated in the “Operating-hours” dis-
play.
• K1 - Theoretical ground speed above 15 km/h
• K2 - Rear power take-off
• K3 - not occupied
• K4 - Front power take-off 100 rpm
Upon later up-grading of the front power take-off K4 does not need to be programmed.
• K5 - Operating-hours
• K6 - (Gear ratio engine – electric generator) engine speed
• K7 - Constant value for the true ground speed (radar sensor) above 15 km/h
• K8 - Determination of km/h or mph, language, radar sensor existing/not existing
• K9 - Theoretical ground speed below 15 km/h. Determined by calibration (traveling the 100 m distance)
• K10 - True ground speed (radar sensor) below 15 km/h. Determined by calibration (traveling the 100 m distance)
• K11 - not occupied
• K12 - Rear power take-off
• K13 - not occupied
• K14 - not occupied

20-242
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

Table 1: Constant values K1 – K14

Agrotron

80-100 105 106 - 135 150

Constant 160 - 200 230 - 260
4.70 - 4095 6.01 6.00 - 6.30 6.45

K11) 3809 3675 2438 2826 1660/14402) 2220/20783)

K2 20 29/64) 70

K3 0

K4 210

K5 Operating hours

4800
1800
K6 (mechanical engine speed controller)
(electronic engine
speed controller)

K7 1000

K8 see Table 2
K91) 3809 3675 2438 2826 1660/14402) 2220/20783)

K10 1000

K11 0

K12 6

K13 0

K14 0

NOTA
1) In case of the Agrotron tractors 80 – 150 the data of K1 and K9 refer to the 30 / 40 km/h version. For the 50 km/h version
these values need to be taken from table 3 and are to be entered accordingly.
2) Until month of construction 01/99: 1660, from month of construction 01/99 on: 1440
3) The constant values K1 and K9 for Agrotron 230/260 need to be chosen according to the tyre size (group 1; group 2)
as stated in table 4.
4) 29: with factory mounted sensor
6: with upgraded sensor (assembly set 04426723)

20-243
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

Table 2: Values of constant K8

Value of Radar sensor Flashing light -

Language Speed display
constant K8 existing? beep

75 danish km/h NO ON
107 danish km/h SI ON
11 danish km/h NO OFF
43 danish km/h SI OFF

65 german km/h NO ON
97 german km/h SI ON
1 german km/h NO OFF
33 german km/h SI OFF

66 english km/h NO ON
67 english km/h NO ON
98 english km/h YES ON
99 english km/h YES ON
2 english km/h NO OFF
3 english km/h NO OFF
34 english km/h YES OFF
35 english km/h YES OFF

69 french km/h NO ON
101 french km/h YES ON
5 french km/h NO OFF
37 french km/h YES OFF

77 italian km/h NO ON
109 italian km/h YES ON
13 italian km/h NO OFF
45 italian km/h YES OFF

79 dutch km/h NO ON
111 dutch km/h YES ON
15 dutch km/h NO OFF
47 dutch km/h YES OFF

73 portugese km/h NO ON
105 portugese km/h YES ON
10 portugese km/h NO OFF
41 portugese km/h YES OFF

71 spanish km/h NO ON
103 spanish km/h YES ON
7 spanish km/h NO OFF
39 spanish km/h YES OFF

20-244
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

Table 3: Constants K1; K9 for 30/40 km/h version, resp. 50 km/h version, and constant K6 depending on the engine con-
troller
K1 = K9 K1 = K9 Engine version, K6
Typ Vehicle ID no. EMR✽✽
30/40 50 km/h mech. controller
8001/8002 4.70 3809 – 1800 4400
8003/8004 4.80/80 3809 – 1800 4400
8005/8006 4.85/85 3809 – 1800 4400
8007/8008 4.90/90 3809 – 1800 4400
8009/8010 4.95/100 3809 – 1800 4400
8011 6.00/106 2438 – 1800 4800
8012 6.00/106 2438 2372 1800 4800
8013 6.05/110 2438 – 1800 4800
8014 6.05/110 2438 2372 1800 4800
8015 6.15 2438 – 1800 4800
8016 6.15 2438 2372 1800 4800
8017 6.20/120 2438 – 1800 4800
8018 6.20/120 2438 2267 1800 4800
8019 6.30/135 2438 2267 1800 4800
8020 6.45/150 2826 2411 1800 4800
8028 6.01/105 3675 – 1800 4400
8029 160 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8030 175 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8031 200 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8058 230 – 2220 – 4800
8058 230 – 2078 – 4800
8059 260 – 2220 – 4800
8059 260 – 2078 – 4800
8063 115 2438 2372 1800 4800
8092/8093 120/135 – 2326 – 4800

✽ 1660: until month of construction 01/99, 1440 from month of construction 01/99
✽✽ EMR= electronic motor controller

Table 4: Constants K1; K9 for Agrotron 230 and 260 depending on the rear wheel tyres.
Group 1 Group 2
K1 = K9 =2220 K1 = K9 =2220
Designation Circumferential line (mm) Designation Circumferential line (mm)
20.8 R 42 5783 710 / 70 R 42 6180
650 / 65 R 42 5744 650 / 65 R 46 6060
620 / 70 R 42 5810 650 / 85 R 38 6084
710 / 75 R 34 5761 620 / 70 R 46 6120
710 / 70 R 38 5780 – –
580 / 70 R 42 5700 – –

20-245
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT MAIN MENU

7. ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT

- - - R E A R L I F T - - - - PRESENTATION SCREEN
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
E H D +

S o f t w a r e 0 . 0 0 A
➔ Software version.
1 8 - 0 5 - 1 9 9 8
➔ Release date.
H W - # #
K I N D O F T R A C T O R ➔
2 3 0 - 2 6 0 H P If the control unit has not been programmed or is damaged,
the following message is displayed:
C O N F . E R R O R

A S M i n s t a l l e d
➔ If ASM has not been installed, the following message is dis-
played:
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A S M N o t I n s t a l l e d
[ E ] E x i t
Press E to continue.

M A I N M E N U MAIN MENU
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1- Monitor session:
used to display information processed by the vehicle
control units from input signals returned by sensors
1 - M o n i t o r (display of processed data).
2 - C o n f i g u r a t i o n 2- Configuration session:
3 - S e t t i n g s for configuration of the tractor.
4 - A l a r m L i s t 3- Calibration session:
indicates procedures for putting the tractor into service
(calibration of sensors, routine maintenance check) and
tractor configuration information (optional devices).
4- Alarms session:
list of active and passive alarms logged by the control
units.
Active alarm: error or fault detected and still present.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Passive alarm: error or fault detected but no longer ac-
[ E ] E x i t tive.
Press E to quit this menu.

20-247
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 1. MONITOR

1.MONITOR
M O N I T O R S
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = This menu is used to show the status of input signals for each
function.
Press E to quit this menu.
1 - L I F T
2 - C O N S O L L E
3 - A S M
4 - P O W E R S U P P L Y
5 - S E N S O R S

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

1.1 LIFT
• Status....: Lift status
Possible values:
L I F T
LOCK lift locked
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
STOPlift in 'stop' status
S t a t u s . . . X X X X X X
CTRLlift in control mode (e.g. when ploughing)
M i n P o s i t . M a x
TO UPlift being raised
X % X . X % X %
SAFE lift in safety condition
L t D r a f t R t
X . X X X . X % X . X X • Min Posit. Max: Lift position
Three columns are displayed
S l i p a g e
Min: setting selected with the minimum height
R e f : X X X X X X %
potentiometer (values from 0 to max setting).
R a d a r K m h X . X
Posit.: indicates current position of the lift (values from 0
W h e e l K m h X . X to 100).
M o d e -> X X X X X Max.: setting selected with the maximum height
E V u p X X X potentiometer (values from 0 to 100).
E V d w X X X • Lt Draft Rt: Draft monitor, left, right
P w m X X X X X X m A Three columns are displayed:
[ E ] E x i t Lt: signal (in volts) generated by the left side draft
sensor.
Draft: the value computed as a percentage of the draft
generated through the lift.
With the tractor stationary and no implement,
draft must be 50% approx.
Rt: signal (in volts) generated by the right side draft
sensor.

20-248
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 1. MONITOR

• Slipage: Wheelslip status

L I F T
Ref: setting selected with the wheelslip potentiometer
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
(settings: ON = active - OFF = inactive)
S t a t u s . . . X X X X X X The value displayed after the setting indicates
M i n P o s i t . M a x actual wheelslip (0-100).
X % X . X % X % With the tractor stationary this must be 0%.
L t D r a f t R t Radar: Ground speed detected by the radar.
X . X X X . X % X . X X Values displayed:
S l i p a g e - - - - : radar not active
R e f : X X X X X X %
X X . X : speed (0-50 km/h)
R a d a r K m h X . X
W h e e l K m h X . X • Wheel: Wheel speed detected by sensor
Values displayed:
M o d e -> X X X X X
E V u p X X X X X . X : speed (0-50 km/h)
E V d w X X X • Mode ->: Lift control mode selected by way of “MIX”
P w m X X X X X X m A potentiometer.
[ E ] E x i t Values displayed:
DRAFT: lift in draft control mode
POS: lift in position control mode
MIX: draft and position control intermixed.
• EV up: Status of linkage Up solenoid valve
• EV dw: Status of linkage Down solenoid valve
NOTE
“Up SV” and “Dw SV" must not register “ON” status at the
same time.
• Pwm: Control signal sent to “Up” or “Down” solenoid
valve currently active.
Two columns are displayed:
0-1000 value of control signal
0-5000 mA current

Press E to quit this menu.

20-249
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 1. MONITOR

1.2 CONSOLE
C o n s o l l e
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = • CtrlLever: Output voltage of control lever
Possible values:
- transport position: 4,70÷6,69
C t r l L e v e r X . X X V
- stop position: 3,00÷4,32
S e t P o i n t X . X X V
- control position: 1,61÷2,59
M a x H e i g h t X . X X V
- float position: 0,72÷1,61
C t r l M o d e X . X X V
• SetPoint: output voltage from the control
D r o p S p e e d X . X X V
potentiometer (value 0 - 8V)
S l i p a g e X . X X V
• MaxHeight: output voltage from maximum height
B u t t o n U P
potentiometer (valu 0 - 8V)
B u t t o n D W
• CtrlMode: output voltage from operating mode
potentiometer (value 0 - 8V)
• DropSpeed: output voltage from rate-of-drop
potentiometer (value 0 - 8V)
• Slipage: output voltage from wheelslip switch
[ E ] E x i t (value 0 - 8V)
• ButtonUP: fender pushbutton - linkage Up
(Values: ON=depressed - OFF= released)
• ButtonDW: fender pushbutton - linkage Down
(Values: ON=depressed - OFF= released)

Press E to quit this menu.

1.3 ASM
A S M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = • Mode: transmission operating mode
(values AUTO - MAN)
M o d e X X X X
W h e e l k m h X X . X • Wheel: Ground speed
S l i p a g e X X X . X % • Slipage: wheelslip percentage value
S t e e r • Steer: steering control is effected by way of two sensors
S 1 = X S 2 = X | - 0 0 - | relaying a sequence of signals from which it can be
determined whether the tractor is steering left, right or
straight ahead.
B r a k e s X The control sequence is indicated in the following table:
A U T O B u t t o n X
Steering angle S1 S2 Symbol
D I F F B u t t o n X
D I F F X X X X m A α≥30 0 1 \ - 30 - \
25 ≤α < 30
Steer
4 W D X X X X m A 1 1 \ - 25 - \
left
15 ≤α < 25 1 0 \ - 15 - \
Straight
ahead
0 ≤α < 15 0 0 | - 00 - |
[ E ] E x i t
15 ≤α < 25 0 1 / - 15 - /
Steer 25 ≤α < 30 1 1 / - 25 - /
right
α≥30 1 0 / - 30 - /

20-250
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 1. MONITOR

A S M • Brakes: when one of the brake pedals is depressed, the

letter P is displayed; when the pedal is released or both
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
pedals are depressed, the letter R is displayed.
M o d e X X X X
• AUTO Button - DIFF Button: these pushbuttons are
W h e e l k m h X X . X used to control the ASM system as indicated by the
S l i p a g e X X X . X % following table:
S t e e r Console switches Status on test meter
S 1 = X S 2 = X | - 0 0 - | ASM DT DIFF Puls.AUTO Puls.DIFF
OFF OFF OFF R R
B r a k e s X OFF OFF ON R P
A U T O B u t t o n X OFF ON OFF R R
D I F F B u t t o n X OFF ON ON R P
D I F F X X X X m A ON OFF OFF R R
4 W D X X X X m A ON OFF ON P P
ON ON OFF P R
ON ON ON P P
[ E ] E x i t
• DIFF: current input to differential lock solenoid valve.
• 4WD: current input to 4WD solenoid valve.
Press E to quit this menu.

1.4 POWER
P O W E R S U P P L Y
This menu displays the input voltages of the ECU and com-
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ponents connected to it.

Press E to quit this menu.

+ 5 V O U T V X X . X
+ 8 V O U T V X X . X
B a t t e r y V X X . X

[ E ] E x i t

20-251
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 2. CONFIGURATION

1.5 SENSORS
S E N S O R S
This menu displays the input voltages (V) to the position sen-
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = sors, the right and left draft sensors and the external sensor.
P O S I T I O N Also displayed are the lift position (%) and the signals from
X . X X V X X X . X % the draft sensors and the external sensor.
R I G H T D R A F T The values displayed are:
X . X X V X X X . X % POSITION: 0–5 V - 0–100%
L E F T D R A F T RIGHT DRAFT - LEFT DRAFT - EXTERNAL:
X . X X V X X X . X % 0–8 V - 0–100%
E X T E R N A L
NOTE
X . X X V X X X . X %
With no implement attached, the percentage values for the
left and right draft sensors should be approximately 50%.

Press E to quit this menu.

[ E ] E x i t

P A R A M E T E R M E N U 2. CONFIGURATION
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1 - Speed constant: using this menu, the technician can
configure radar and tyre parameters
2 - Options: this menu can be used to enable or disable
optional functions and devices on the tractor
Press E to quit this menu.
1 - S p e e d C o n s t a n t
2 - O p t i o n s

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

20-252
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 2. OPTIONS

2.1 SPEED CONSTANTS

S P E E D C O N S T A N T
1 - Radar:
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
• If the radar is installed, the value displayed will be
6500.
• If the radar is not installed, the value displayed will be 0.
2 - Wheel: the value is 3250 and must not be changed.
Press E to quit this menu.
1 - R A D A R 6 5 0 0
2 - W H E E L 3 2 5 0

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

O P T I O N S 2.2 OPTIONS
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = The screen shows factory-set values for the various options.
NOTE
1 - A S M 1 The ART can only display the screen pages of this menu in
English.
2 - A U T O D R O P 0
3 - 4 W D - 3 0 D E G 0 1- ASM: selecting this option, the ASM can be enabled or
4 - R O T A T E A L A R M 1 disabled.
(1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)
5 - E X T D A L A R M 0
2- AUTODROP: selecting this option, it becomes
6 - S E N S I T I V . 2 5 5
possible to enable or disable automatic lowering of the
implement at the selected rate of drop, down to the
7 - T R A C T O R 1 working position.
8 - E X T S E N S O R 1 (1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)
9 - M I X M O D E 0 3- 4WD - 30 DEG: selecting this option, when ASM is
activated, 4WD is disengaged automatically when the
steering angle becomes equal to or greater than 30°.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
(1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)
[ E ] E x i t
4- ROTATEALARM: if this option is enabled, active
alarms can be displayed in rotation via the diagnostic
LED. If the option is disabled, only the alarm with the
lowest code will be displayed.
(1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)

20-253
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 3. CALIBRATIONS

O P T I O N S 5- EXTDALARM: enabling this option, alarm codes will be

displayed in the extended format, i.e. with a different
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
code for each alarm type.
Disabling the option, different alarms may be grouped
1 - A S M 1 together under a single standard code.
2 - A U T O D R O P 0 (1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)
3 - 4 W D - 3 0 D E G 0 6- SENSITIV.: this options allows the technician to
change the response of the draft and wheelslip control
4 - R O T A T E A L A R M 1
functions. Decreasing the value reduces the response
5 - E X T D A L A R M 1 speed, whereas if the value is set to 0, the response can
6 - S E N S I T I V . 2 5 5 be adjusted by way of the rate-of-drop potentiometer.
7- TRACTOR: this option is used to select the type of
7 - T R A C T O R 4 tractor.
8 - E X T S E N S O R 1 8- EXTSENSOR: this option tells the ECU whether the
signal from the external sensor is to be used in the
9 - M I X M O D E 0
control cycle or to limit the opening of the linkage Up
valve.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = (1 - ON: enables Up valve limiter function /
[ E ] E x i t 0 - OFF: enables control by way of external sensor
9- MIX MODE: allows selection of the MIX potentiometer
operating mode. If the function is enabled, the MIX po-
tentiometer is used to set the draft/position or draft/po-
sition/wheelslip mix. (1 - ON: enabled / 0 - OFF: disabled)
Press E to quit this menu.

S E T T I N G M E N U 3.CALIBRATIONS
= = = = = = = = = =
= = = = = = This menu contains all the calibration operations that can be
1 - M i n H e i g t h
0 . 9 4 performed when the lift ECU or position sensor is replaced.
2 - M a x H e i g t h
4 . 0 2 1 - MinHeight: calibration of the minimum lift height.
3 - L o c k S p e d e 2 0 2 - MaxHeight: calibration of maximum lift height.
4 - S l i p a g e % 1 0 3 - LockSpeed: ground speed at which the lift lock is
applied
- - - M a i n L
e v e r - - -
4 - Slipage: percentage threshold used to control
5 - T r a n s p o
r t 5 . 3 6
wheelslip.
6 - S t o p 3 . 6 6
5 - Transport: output current from the lift control lever in
7 - C o n t r o l 1 . 9 2 TRANSPORT position.
8 - F l o a t 1 . 4 5 6 - Stop: output current from the lift control lever in STOP
position.
7 - Control: output current from the lift control lever in
CONTROL position.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 8 - Float: output current from the lift control lever in FLOAT
[ E ] E x i t position.
Press E to quit this menu.

20-254
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 3. CALIBRATIONS

3.1 MINIMUM HEIGHT

M i n . H e i g h t
This menu can be used to set the minimum lift height.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
PROCEDURE
1- Start the engine and run on idle
2- Unlock the lift.
A c t u a l : # . # # 3- Lower the lift completely using the fender pushbuttons.
4- Press E to confirm the value.
N e w : # . # #
5- Press C to confirm again, or press A to clear.

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

M a x . H e i g h t 3.2 MAXIMUM HEIGHT

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = This menu can be used to set the maximum lift height.
PROCEDURE
1- Start the engine and run on idle
2- Unlock the lift
A c t u a l : # . # #
3- Raise the lift completely using the fender pushbuttons.
CAUTION!
N e w : # . # #
Carry out these manoeuvres with the engine idling
to avoid mechanical damage to the lift.
4- When the lift has reached maximum height, lower it by
2-3 degrees (approx. 0.2 V).
5- Press E to confirm the value.

6- Press C to confirm again, or press A to clear.

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-255
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 3. CALIBRATIONS

3.3 LOCK SPEED

L O C K S P E E D
The value in this menu must not be changed.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - A C T U A L 2 0
2 - N E W

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

3.4 WHEELSLIP
S L I P A G E
The value in this menu must not be changed.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

1 - A C T U A L 1 0
2 - N E W

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-256
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 3. CALIBRATIONS

3.5 TRANSPORT
T R A N S P O R T
The voltage value relative to the TRANSPORT position of the
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = lift control lever is programmed and stored in the ECU mem-
ory.
The value can be changed by putting the lift lever in the
1 - A C T U A L # # # # TRANSPORT position and confirming the new value by
2 - N E W # # # # pressing C .
The permissible range is 4.70V to 6.69V.

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

3.6 STOP
S T O P The voltage value relative to the STOP position of the lift con-
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = trol lever is programmed and stored in the ECU memory.
The value can be changed by putting the lift lever in the STOP
position and confirming the new value by pressing C .
1 - A C T U A L # # # # The permissible range is 3.00V to 4.32V.
2 - N E W # # # #

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-257
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 3. CALIBRATIONS

3.7 CONTROL
C O N T R O L
The voltage value relative to the CONTROL position of the lift
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = control lever is programmed and stored in the ECU memory.
The value can be changed by putting the lift lever in the CON-
TROL position and confirming the new value by pressing
1 - A C T U A L # # # # C .
2 - N E W # # # # The permissible range is 4.70V to 6.69V.

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

3.8 FLOAT
F L O A T
The voltage value relative to the FLOAT position of the lift
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = control lever is programmed and stored in the ECU memory.
The value can be changed by putting the lift lever in the
FLOAT position and confirming the new value by pressing
1 - A C T U A L # # # # C .
2 - N E W # # # # The permissible range is 3.00V to 4.32V.

[ A ] C a n c e l
[ C ] C o n f i r m

20-258
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR LIFT AND ASM CONTROL UNIT 4. ALARMS

4.ALARMS LIST
A L A R M L I S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ➔ Most recent alarm
This page displays the last 10 alarm signals to be generated.
All the active alarms are displayed on the last line against a
dark background.
Press D to cancel, or press E to quit.

[ D ] E R A S E L I S T
[ E ] E X I T

20-259
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL MAIN MENU

8. ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL

UNIT

F R O N T S U S P E N S I O N PRESENTATION SCREEN
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

S o f t w a r e 0 . 0 0 A
➔ Software version..
g g - m m - a a a a
➔ Release date.

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] C o n t d . Press E to continue.

MAIN MENU
M A I N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1- Monitor session:
used to display information processed by the sensors
and by the actuators connected to the control unit.

1 - M o n i t o r 2- Parameters session:
used to configure the speed for automatic system en-
2 - P a r a m e t e r
able and disable..
3 - L i s t o f a l a r m
3- Alarms list session:
4 - C o n f i g u r a t i o n
list of alarms logged by the control units.
4- Configuration session:
for configuration of the tractor.

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Press E to quit this menu.
[ E ] E x i t

20-261
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL 1. MONITOR

1.MONITOR
M O N I T O R M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = This menu is used to show the status of input signals for each
function.
Press E to quit this menu..
1 - S U S P E N S I O N
2 - P O W E R S U P P L Y

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

S U S P E N S I O N 1.1 SUSPENSION
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = • Status....: status of the suspension position
S t a t u s . . . . x x x x x x Possible values:
CTRL automatic position control
M i n - - - P o s . - - - M a x LOCK suspension locked in lowered position
x x x V x x x V x x x V STOP control disabled, position lowered
• Min Pos. Max: position sensor reading in Volts
L S S V x x x x m A x x x Three columns are displayed:
U P S V x x x x m A x x x Min: minimum position.
D W S V x x x x m A x x x Pos.: current position.
Max.: maximum position.
B r a k e x x x • LSSV: LOAD SENSING solenoid valve
UPSV: UP solenoid valve
4 W h e e l D r i v e x x x
DWSV: DOWN solenoid valve
W h e e l s k m / h x x x x Data will indicate output current in mA and in (ON-OFF)
status.
[ E ] E x i t • Brake: indicates brake pedal status (ON depressed - OFF
released).
• 4Wheel Drive: indicates four wheel drive status (ON en-
gaged - OFF disengaged).
• Wheels: indicates ground speed (km/h) of the tractor
sensed by the wheels pickup.

20-262
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL 2. PARAMETERS

1.2 POWER
P O W E R S U P P L Y
This menu displays the input voltages of the ECU and com-
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ponents connected to it.

➔ • Reading of input voltages to sensors (nominal value 8V).

+ 8 V O u t V x x x x
➔ • Reading of battery voltage
B a t t e r y V x x x x nominal value 12 V).

Press E to quit this menu.

[ E ] E x i t

P A R A M E T E R 2. PARAMETERS
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1 - Minimum speed for automatic control: used to
configure the minimum speed at which automatic
system enable and disable occurs.
Press 1 to continue

Press E to quit this menu.

1 - M i n i m u m s p e e d .
f o r a u t o m a t i c
c o n t r o l

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

20-263
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL 2. PARAMETERS

1 - Speed: parameter determining the speed at which

P A R A M E T E R
position control is activated with the system in operation.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - Speed1: parameter determining the speed at which po-
sition control is activated with the system not in opera-
tion (axle suspension locked).

Press 1 or 2 to change factory settings.

1 - S p e e d k m / h x
2 - S p e e d 1 k m / h x Press E to quit this menu.

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t

Example of how the “speed” parameter is changed

S p e e d 1- Enter the value to be set.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 2- Press E to confirm the value.
3- Press C to confirm again or press A to clear.

A c t u a l : x
N e w : x

[ D ] D e l e t e
[ E ] E x i t

20-264
ALL ROUND TESTER FOR AXLE SUSPENSION CONTROL 3. ALARMS LIST - 4. CONFIGURATIONS

3. ALARMS LIST
L I S T O F A L A R M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = This screen displays the last 10 alarm signals to be gener-
ated.
Press D to cancel, or press E to quit.

[ D ] D E L E T E
[ E ] E X I T

S E L E C T I O N S 4.CONFIGURATIONS
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
The menu is used to enable the display of solenoid valve
alarms in extended format, using differentiated flashes.
1 - E x t e n d e d
s h o w o f Press 1 to change the type of selection:
A L A R M S x x x ON: indication of extended alarms active
OFF: indication of extended alarms not active

[ D ] D E L E T E
[ E ] E X I T

20-265
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

9. SERDIA (LEVEL III)

1. SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

SERDIA is a software program. Together with the notebook and the interface, it constitutes a tool which serves as an aid
to communication with the engine ECUs.
SERDIA supports DEUTZ ECUs EMR, EMS and MVS. You can also communicate with three different ECUs using just one
software product.
Any changes you wish to make to the ECUs as far as settings, parametrizations, error deletion and calibra-tion are con-
cerned are only possible with SERDIA.
SERDIA runs under the MS Windows®3.11 and Windows95 (98) user surface.
You can choose English or German as the user language when carrying out program installation.
The user surface enables the user to call up the functions required simply by clicking on the appropriate buttons.
The menu points listed below are available:
• ECU selection
• Measured values
• Parameters
• Error memory
• Function test
• Extras

1.1 MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

To run SERDIA, the following minimum equipment configuration is required:

1.1.1 CONTROL UNITS

• EMR1, Electronic engine controller System description TN 0297 7432
• EMR2, electronic engine controller System description TN 0297 9885
• MVS, solenoid valve system System description TN 0297 7488
• EMS2, engine monitoring system System description TN 0297 7930

1.1.2 DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR

Serial diagnostic connector TN 0419 9615 as specified in ISO 9141 and SAE J1587

1.1.3 INTERFACE
Link from control module (engine) to PC
• Level adaptation for ISO 9141, SAE J1708 and RS 485
• Security system with dongle, copy protection
• 12-24 V voltage supply range
• Supply source: engine
• Safety switching for protection against overvoltage and incorrect pole connection
• Galvanic isolation

1.1.4 PC/ NOTEBOOK

Minimum equipment required:
• Notebook or PC with 1 RS 232 serial interface PC (IBM-AT compatible) (should not be otherwise occupied, for example,
mouse or IR interface).
• Parallel interface for printer
• Graphics card VGA/SVGA

20-267
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

• Processor 80486 (or higher)

• Clock speed >= 100 MHz
• Installed memory >= 8 MB RAM
• Hard disk >= 15 MB (free disk space)
• Disk drive 3.5“ 1.44 MB
• Software: Operating system MS Windows 3.11, 95 or 98
Installation is also possible under Windows 3.1. However, because of a Windows problem, this can cause access conflicts
with the COM1 serial interface (see Chapter, "What to do if ...". For more details, please see the "Readme" file supplied with
SERDIA.).
With Windows 3.11, the standard (VGA) screen driver should be installed for correct display of SERDIA screens.

1.2 ORDERING
SERDIA can be ordered, like the DEUTZ special tools, through:

SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.

Viale F. CASSANI, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALIA

1.2.1 FIRST-TIME USERS

For first-time users, we recommend the SERDIA package Re-order No. 5.9030.740.4/10.
Scope of supply:
• SERDIA software (1 x 3.5' installation diskette)
• Diagnostics interface with implemented user level
• Brief instructions on installation
• A list of tools and modifications usefui when troubleshooting, is included
• Carrying case

1.2.2 ORDERING SINGLE PARTS

Part Competence level Re-order No.
Installation diskette 5.9030.740.0
Adapter 5.9030.741.0
Interface level III Major overhaul 5.9030.740.2

1.2.3 ADAPTER
Some OEMs have different diagnostics plugs for certain versions. An adapter is therefore required for the interface from the
12 pole DE UTZ plug to the appropriate OEM plug.
The DEUTZ 12 pole counterpart is available as a genuine DEUTZ part.
A ready-made adapter is available, for diagnostics on engines in DE UTZ Fahr tractors (DEUTZ 12 pole -> DFA 14 pole):

DEUTZ Part No. 5.9030.741.0

1.2.4 SERDIA UPDATES

You will be informed of software updates by our service information department, as they occur.
There is no automatic exchange against older versions of the software.
When installing the update the target directory should contain the SERDIA version number.

20-268
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

1.3 SWITCHING ON AND INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

1.3.1 INSTALLING MS WINDOWS

If MS Windows is not already installed on your hard disk, it must first be installed following the installation instructions sup-
plied with MS Windows 3.1, 95, 98 o 2000.

1.3.2 INSTALLING SERDIA FROM DISKETTES

To run the SERDIA software, an interface with a connection to an engine control module is required. If this interface is not
present, SERDIA can still be installed, but will only run in Off-line mode. The software limitations imposed by off-line mode
are described in Chapter "Off-line mode".
Installation with Windows 3.1, 3.11:
• Start Windows.
• Insert SERDIA Installation diskette 1 in the disk drive (Drive A).
• Open "File Manager".
• Select disk drive A.
• Double-click on the "install.exe“ file to start installation.
• Follow the instructions appearing on the screen.
• When finished, remove Installation diskette 2 from the disk drive and store in a safe place together with diskette 1.
• After the computer is re-started, the SERDIA program group window opens.
• Double-click on the "Service diagnosis“ program group to start.
Installation bei Windows 95, 98:
• Start Windows.
• Insert SERDIA Installation diskette 1 in the disk drive (Drive A) einlegen.
• Open "Windows Explorer".
• Select disk drive A.
• Double-click on the "install.exe“ file to start installation.
• The Installation window opens:

•The name of the target directory should indicate the SERDIA Version number, for example "serdia35“.
• Follow the instructions appearing on the screen.
(If installing with Windows 98, select Windows 95 as the operating system)
• When finished, remove Installation diskette 2 from the disk drive and store in a safe place together with diskette 1.
• After the computer is re-started, the SERDIA program group window opens.
• Double-click on the "Service diagnosis“ program group to start.

20-269
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

Special characteristic of Notebooks with Windows 98:

The ACPI entry (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) may not appear under "Start\Settings\Control Panel\Sys-
tem\Device Manager\System components.
In this case, follow the instructions in the "Readme.txt" file ("Windows 98" section) included on the SERDIA
Installation disk.
Proceed as follows:
• Check whether ACPI is enabled.
• If there are ACPI entries, switch off ACPI using the "disacpi.reg“ file.
These files are in the SERDIA working directory.
(ACPI can be switched on again using the "enacpi.reg“ file).
• Run the new hardware recognition program:
Start\Settings\Control Panel\Add New Hardware\Next\ Search for new hardware.
(The Installation CD may be required for Windows 98).
• Re-start the computer.
Installation with Windows 2000:
To install under Windows 2000, the 32Bit Version of SERDIA is required. This should be available from May 2002, and will
be indicated in the service announcements.

1.3.3 INSTALLING SERDIA FROM THE SERPIC CD

• Start Windows.
• Insert the SERPIC CD in the CD drive.
• Open "Windows Explorer".
• Select the CD drive.
• Open the SERDIA directory.
• Open the "Disk1“ directory
• Double-click on the "install.exe“ file to start installation.

The Installation window opens:

The name of the target directory should indicate the SERDIA Version number, for example "serdia35“.
Follow the instructions appearing on the screen.
(If installing with Windows 98, select Windows 95 as the operating system)
• Remove the CD from the drive and store in a safe place.
• After the computer is re-started, the SERDIA program group window opens.
• Double-click on the "Service diagnosis“ program group to start.

1.3.4 USER LEVEL, ACCESS RIGHTS

DEUTZ Service has defined four different user levels for the SERDIA software (I, II, III, IIIa), which are pre-set in the interface.
The reason for the four different levels is to prevent unauthorised persons from accessing particular parameter settings (in
the same way as the seals at injector pumps).
The use of access rights means access is only allowed to those parameters and fields authorised for a particular user level.

20-270
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

1.3.5 SETTING UP THE LINK BETWEEN CONTROL MODULE (ENGINE) AND NOTEBOOK
Communication characteristics:
• Serial communication
• BaudRate = 9600
• Serialport = COM1
The SERDIA interface (supplied) is used to connect the control module to a Notebook. Despite the numerous safety pre-
cautions in the interface and control module (such as protection against wrong pole connection and overvoltage, and gal-
vanic isolation), mistakes can still happen, and the following procedure should always be applied when connecting the
Notebook to the control module.
The connection is set up in the following order:
1) Switch off the engine, ignition switch (Circuit 15) is Off. Do not switch on the Notebook yet.
2) Connect the diagnostic connector to the vehicle / installation diagnostic socket.
The diagnostic connector must be provided by the customer, and can be supplied by DEUTZ on request.
3) Connect the other side (interface side) to the RS 232/COM1 serial interface. (9-pin connector on the back of your
Notebook).
Note: On PCs, the COM1 interface may already be occupied by the mouse. In this case, the interface must be connected
to the PC's serial interface (COM2). This must then be configured (see Chapter, "What to do if ...).
4) The ignition switch (Ct.15) and Notebook can now be switched on. The engine remains off at first.
5) The SERDIA can now be started as describe in Chapter 1.8, "Starting the Program".

1.3.6 STARTING THE PROGRAM

In the Windows environment, the SERDIA program is started by clicking twice on its icon.
Starting for the first time:
When the program is started forthe first time, the control module is interrogated. SERDIA does this to find out which control
modules are connected and can therefore be addressed. This process can last for about 30 seconds, as the program in-
terrogates all the possible control modules one after the other. While this is taking place, the message "Startup routine for
connected ECUs“ is displayed. The "ECU selection“ subscreen then appears, in which unidentified control units are
greyed out.

• Select the desired control unit and click OK.

• The message "Initialisation is active!“ appears (and remains for about 7 seconds). Communications are then set up with
the control unit.

20-271
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

Starting the next time:

SERDIA registers the control units identified the last time the program was started (for example the EMR2).
If this control unit is connected the second time the program is started, SERDIA skips the interrogation stage and im-
mediately initialises the control unit. This substantially reduces the program startup time. The message "Initialisation is ac-
tive!“ appears (and remains for about 7 seconds). Communications are then set up with the control unit.
If another control unit is connected the next time the program is started, the interrogation process is performed again (and
lasts about 30 seconds).
In engines with two control units (for example an EMR with EMS2), the desired control unit can be selected through another
interrogation (see paragraph 2.1).

1.3.7 SETTING UP COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE CONTROL UNIT (ECU)

Communications possible:
After communications have been successfully set up, the main "Service diagnosis“ screen appears, with the fields "ECU“,
"ECU identification“ and "Measured values“ (see Chapter 2, "ECU selection").
This screen contains a menu, and a "Tasks“ switch (see Chapter 8 , " Tasks").
EMR1 EMR2

The communication status between the PC/Notebook and the control unit is indicated by plain text messages, and by a
colour code on the status bar:
Yellow (flashing): ISO block processing, i.e. useful data (for example measurements) are being exchanged between
SERDIA and the control unit.
Green (flashing): ISO connection OK, i.e. only data blocks needed for maintaining communications between SER-
DIA and the control unit are exchanged.
Red: Communications stopped.
Communications not possible:
It may not be possible to establish communications for the following reasons:
• No control unit connected.
• There is a communication error; see Chapter 9.1.1, "Communication errors". Setting up communications
In both cases an error message is displayed, and SERDIA offers to go into Off-line mode; see Chapter, Off-line mode.

1.3.8 OFF-LINE MODE

If no control unit/engine and/or interface is available, SERDIA can be run in password-protected mode or Demo mode for
training purposes.

20-272
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

SERDIA always offers to go into password-protected mode or Demo mode when it has not been possible to establish com-
munications successfully.

Click on "Ignore". The desired mode can be selected in the "Confirm" box.

1.3.9 PASSWORD-PROTECTED MODE

If "Yes" is selected to confirm, and there is no control unit, authorised users can enter a password (check with head office)
and read and print configuration files, but not modify them.

1.3.10 DEMO MODE (TRAINING WITH NO CONTROL UNIT)

If "No" is selected in the Confirm box, the program goes into Demo mode.
1) In this mode, the user can practice working with SERDIA, without changing any values.
2) Graphic files can be read and printed. However, the graphic files must have been stored in digital form (filename ex-
tension *.egr).
Also, functional tests cannot be performed on the control units.

1.4 USING THE PROGRAM

Quick start:
1) In Windows, start the SERDIA program
2) In the main SERDIA screen, click on "ECU selection"
3) In the "ECU selection“ screen, select the desired control unit
4) In the main SERDIA screen, select the desired menu

20-273
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.1 MAIN SCREEN, MENU SELECTION

Menu Control units Explanation
ECU selection
Selecting a control unit
ECU selection all
(only one can be selected at a time)
Print measurements or control unit identification data on a printer or
Print all
to a file
Protocol all Interface configuration (Level IIIa only)
Restart all Interrogates control unit again
Program ECU EMR2 only Loads operating software into the EMR2 (Level IIIa only)
Engine off EMR2 only Remote engine switch-off
Reset ECU EMR2 only Resets control unit
Measured values
Shows current actual values (also with engine off, but with battery
actual measured values all
voltage))
RAM-Values all EMR1: Level IIIa only, EMR2: Level III, IIIa only
Data logger EMS2 only Shows content of data logger
Input/output assignment all Control unit pin/signal assignments
CAN Status all Simple CAN Monitor
MVS Measured values MVS only cylinder-specific measurement display
Parameters
Configuration all To view or modify configuration data
Overall programming EMR1, EMR2, EMS2 Level III, IIIa only
Calibration Calibration of transducers, for example pedal travel sensors
MVS pump class MVS only pump class assignments
Error memory
Error memory all Reads, displays, and clears the error memory
Error memory 2 EMR2 only Reads, displays, and clears the error memory (Level III, IIIa only)
MVS error memory MVS only Cylinder-specific error display
Function test EMR1, EMR2 To use the actuator control (Level III, IIIa only)
Extras
Maximum speed EMR1, EMR2 Selection of three different maximum speeds
Logistic data al all
Load spectrum EMR2, EMS2
Maintenance interval
EMS2 only
exceeded
Override memory EMS2 only
Maintenance data
Help all General help for main screen and screen buttons.
Tasks EMR1, EMR2 for certain service operations

20-274
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.2 "ECU SELECTION“ MENU

DEUTZ engines may be equipped with one or more control units (for example, an MVS/ EMS2 combination). However,
SERDIA can only communicate with one control unit.
Exception: error lists and measured values can also be read from the MVS control unit through an EMS2.
The desired control unit must therefore be selected first in the "ECU selection“ menu.
For more details, see Chapter 2, "ECU selection".

1.4.3 MEASURED VALUES" ("ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES“) MENU

A number of measured values (including inputs/outputs) can be selected from a list of values and displayed.
Displayed values falling outside the maximum or minimum limit (if present) are shown on a coloured background.
Only measuring points that match the control unit are shown, with different display options:
• Read measured values
• Read measurement electronics
• Read logger data (special EMS2 menu)
arranged by
• designation
• value
• unit
Measured values are refreshed at a pre-set scan rate and can be displayed both with engine stopped and with engine run-
ning.
• For more details, see Chapter, "Measured values".

1.4.4 "PARAMETERS" MENU

The wide-ranging possibilities of DEUTZ control units require special programming to adapt them to their particular en-
vironment. Changes to parameters are necessary when access is required,
• due to customer request
• to adapt to local conditions
• to fit a replacement.
Parameters can only be changed through SERDIA!
This menu option can be used to replace the screwdriver setting (necessary with analog control units).
Some of the parameters (for example, dynamic control response) can be modified within certain pre-set limits.
Parameters are set through two screens, one for configuration and one for calibration. Access to the fields in the related
screens depends on user authorisation. Unauthorised fields are not shown.
For more details, see Chapter 4, "Parameters".

1.4.5 "ERROR MEMORY" MENU

This menu is used to read any error messages stored in the control units.
Error messages are related exclusively to electrical parts of the engine, such as cable harness and transducer.
For example, one error message could be "General fault or cable cut/short-circuit“.
Only passive error messages can be deleted; active messages are saved.
Active error messages become passive messages when they have been cleared.
Error messages are saved even when the battery/voltage supply is disconnected.
Error messages contain the following information:
• Fault location
• Fault type
• Environmental data at time of fault
• Total error count (per fault location)
• Frequency
• Emergency mode (yes / no)
For fault clearing, the user can refer to the SERDIA Help screens; it may also be helpful to refer to the "Measured values“ and
"Function test“ menus. For more details, see Chapter 5, "Error memory".

20-275
SERDIA SETUP AND COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.6 "FUNCTION TEST" MENU

SERDIA supports wide-ranging function tests, differentiating between the control units installed (for example, testing the
actuator for the EMR1).
The function test option also provides valuable help, especially for troubleshooting and maintenance work.
Individual control unit outputs can be activated and checked separately. This is done by switching to Test mode.
The engine must be switched off first!
In the Function test, the control unit transmission program is bypassed and actuators are controlled by the test program.
Actuators are switched on and off by clicking on the little control box in the Actual Value column, beside the actuator's des-
ignation reference. "Actual Value" shows the response for the actuator status set by the control unit.
The actuator status test always takes place in the control unit, and can only be transferred to the SERDIA by the control unit
itself. This means that if the desired actual value does not appear, there may be a wiring fault. The "Error memory“ and
"Function test“ menu combination can be of help in determining the source of a fault.
Indirect indications about engine condition can also be obtained using the "Function test" menu in combination with the
MVS control unit.
For more details about the function test, see Chapter, "Function test".

1.4.7 "EXTRAS" MENU

SERDIA supports wide-ranging options specific to the control unit.
These are accessed through the related submenus, which have their own screens:
• Maximum speed
• Logistic data
• Load spectrum (EMR2 and EMS2)
• Maintenance interval exceeded
• Override memory
• Maintenance data
For more details, see Chapter, "Extras".

1.4.8 HELP
The SERDIA Help function can be used in conjunction with these user instructions. In Windows, the Help function is
opened by clicking on the "Help“ button.

1.5 CLOSING THE PROGRAM

Before disconnecting the cables between the Notebook and the engine control unit, go back to the main screen and click
on the "Close“ button.
If parameters have been changed, in many cases it is worthwhile checking the current parameter settings.
To do this, follow the steps below:
1. Close SERDIA
2. Switch off the engine supply voltage, then switch on again
3. Re-start SERDIA
4. Activate the control unit again
5. Open the "Parameters“ menu
6. In the configuration screen, click on the "ECU->PC“ button
7. Print out the configuration data by clicking on the "Print“ button
8. Keep the printed data with the engine documentation.

20-276
SERDIA ECU SELECTION

2. ECU SELECTION
2.1 SELECTING TWO CONTROL UNITS
DEUTZ engines can be equipped with two control units (for example, MVS in combination with EMS2).
However, SERDIA can only communicate with one control unit. Exception: Error lists and measured values can also be
read from the MVS control unit through an EMS2.
SERDIA tries to set up a connection automatically to the last control unit identified. If another control unit is to be selected,
the control unit recognition process must be repeated by opening the "ECU selection/Restart“ menu (this takes about 30
seconds).

After they have been successfully recognised, the control unit selection screen is opened. Only identified control units are
presented for selection. Non-selectable control units are greyed out.

Possible control units are:

• EMR1, EMR2 (Electronic engine controller)
• MVS (Solenoid valve system)
• EMS2 (Engine Monitoring System)

20-277
SERDIA ECU SELECTION

2.2 PRINTING
Like the data in other windows, the identification data for the selected control unit can be printed in two ways.

1) Printing to a printer.
In this case, the correct printer driver should be selected under Windows.
At the top of all printouts are the logistics data:
• Type of control unit
• Date
• Time (as set in the Notebook system clock)
• Interface serial number
These are followed by the control unit identification data and measurement data.

2) Control unit data can also be printed to a file.

This file can then be further processed with another program, such as Excel.
The following table provides a summary of the data from the different screens, which can be saved:
• as printable files for further processing in other programs such as Excel.
• as configuration files for reporting modifications.
• as graphics files (*.egr), for viewing in SERDIA Demo mode.

Filename
From screen Button Comment
extension
Service diagnosis Print (file) *.ecu for further processing in other
actual measured values File *.msv programs, such as Excel.

for further processing in other programs, such

RAM Values File *.msv as Excel.
(EMR1: Level IIIa only, EMR2: Level III, IIIa only)
for further processing in other programs,
(AscII) *.agr such as Excel.
Graphics
(Binary) *.egr viewable in SERDIA Demo mode.
Input/Output assignment Print (file) *.ino for further processing in other programs,
Print (file) *.kfg such as Excel

Configuration *.hex Configuration file

Save in file
*.tds Partial data set, Level IIIa only
Configuration file
Overall programming ECU -> file *.hex
(Complete data set, Level III and IIIa)
Error memory Print (file) *.err for further processing in other
Logistic data Print (file) *.dat programs, such as Excel.

20-278
SERDIA ECU SELECTION

2.3 PROTOCOL
This menu is for DEUTZ only, and is used for configuring the interface.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT DATA

2.4.1 EMR1

IDENTIFICATION DATA MEASUREMENT DATA

Meaning of identification data:

• DEUTZ part number: Part number of selected control unit.
• Business partner number: Product number
• Type of control unit selected:
1 = EMR1
2 = MVS
3 = EMS2
• Hardware version number: Version number of the control unit.
• Software version number: Number of the EEPROM contained in the control unit. If the number before the point has
changed (for example, 2.1 to 3.1), the data set will no longer match the control unit. In this case, company head office
should be contacted.
• Day, Month, Year: Date at which the control unit parameters were last configured.
• Service ID: Serial number of interface used for previous access. The first digit indicates the authorised access level.
• OperHourCount:Engine[h]: numero delle ore di funzionamento del motore.
• Number of engine start
• Interface serial number: serial number of interface now being used.

Measured values:
The "Measured values“ field shows some of the measured values directly. This selection is not configurable.

20-279
SERDIA ECU SELECTION

2.4.2 EMR2
IDENTIFICATION DATA MEASUREMENT DATA

Meaning of identification data:

• DEUTZ partNo: Part number of selected control unit.
• SupplierNo
• ProductNo:
Type of control unit selected:
1 = EMR1
2 = MVS
3 = EMS2
• Hardware Rev: Version number of the control unit.
• Software Rev: numero versione software
Number of EEPROM contained in the control unit. If the number before the point has changed (for example, 2.1 to 3.1),
the data set will no longer match the control unit. In this case, company head office should be contacted.
• Binary code checksum
• ISO Access control
• Identification data Measurement data
• Deutz SW-PN: Part number of EMR2 operating software
• ECU SerialNo Year ECU SerialNo Month
• ECU SerialNo
• Engine number
• Day, Month, Year of last change: Date at which the control unit parameters were last configured.
• Lats Service ID: Serial number of interface used for previous access. The first digit indicates authorised access level.
• Interface serial number: Serial number of interface now being used.

Measured values:
The "Measured values“ field shows some of the measured values directly. This selection is not configurable.

20-280
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3. MEASURED VALUES
3.1 ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES (GENERAL)
The measured values are read out cyclically and displayed on the "Actual measured values" screen.

Values outside the sensor's measuring range have coloured backgrounds:

• Yellow: Measuring range is exceeded,
• Blue: Below measuring range.

EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION BUTTONS:

• Meas. values: The "Measured value selection" window containing all the available measured values is displayed. The
measured values that are to be displayed can be selected from here. In general, the repeat rate of the display is in-
creased if there are not many measured values to be displayed. The number of available measured values varies, de-
pending on the type of control unit.
• Graphics: The button "Graphics" displays, in the form of a graphic, the progress over time of the selected measured
values (maximum of 5). If more than 5 measured values are selected, an error message will appear.
• Collect. time: The recording period is displayed in the Measurement duration field in seconds. The minimum value for
the recording period is one second. A few hours (expressed in seconds) can be entered for the upper measuring time.
The default setting is 10 s. The shortest scanning rate is 40 ms for RAM values and 60 ms for other values.
For a measuring period of 10s, therefore, the total number of measuring points for RAM values is: 10000 ms/40 ms = 250
and for other values: 10000 ms/60 ms = 166.
Since the program records an approximate maximum of 2000 measuring points, the scanning rate is automatically ad-
justed - accordingly before the beginning of the data recording phase.
The minimum possible scanning rate is determined by the duration of data transmission from the control unit to the PC.
The more measured values that are to be displayed simultaneously, the longer the data transmission period and there-
fore the lower the scanning rate will be.
• File: The current measured values can be stored in a file and reloaded at a later date, for example for further processing
in Excel.
• Print: The displayed measured values are printed out.
• Close: Return to the main window "Service diagnosis".

20-281
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3.1.1 MEASURED VALUE SELECTION

The list of available measured values is displayed.

The measured values to be displayed can be selected from this list. An individual measured value is selected by clicking on
the associated check box. If a graphical display is required, not more than 5 measured values can be selected (see 3.1.2
Graphics). The four buttons on the right of the list can be used to activate and de-activate a collection of measured values.
These have the following functions:
• Save: The displayed selection of measured values is saved to a file.
• Load: The selected measured values are loaded from a file.
• Delete selection: All measured values are de-activated for display.
• Select all: All measured values are activated for display.
• OK: Return to the display of the current measured values. The changes made to the selection of measured values are
saved.
• Cancel: Return to the display of the current measured values. The changes made to the selection of measured values
are cancelled.

The following tables give an overview of the measured values which can be displayed. For some parameters, a config-
uration operation is also required (see Chapter 4 Parameters); this enables specific measuring points to be assigned to the
inputs and outputs of the EMR1/EMR2 ("Configuration", "Page 11: assignment inputs/measured values“ and "Page 13:
assignment outputs/measured values"). The values required for parameter configuration are shown in the tables. The as-
signment can be subsequently checked in the "Measured values" menu, with the window "Display of inputs and outputs"
(see 3.4 Input/output assignment).

3.1.1.1 MEASUED VALUES EMR1

MEASURED VALUE SELECTION

Associated
Name of measuring point Description
RAM value
Battery voltage Battery voltage –
Speed 1 (camshaft)
Engine speed 2000 2002
Speed 2 (crankshaft)
Control rod position Control rod position
(M9)Coolant temperature Coolant temperature 3551
Fuel injection quantity Fuel injection quantity

20-282
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

Associated
Name of measuring point Description
RAM value
Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
(F24)Accelerator pedal=SWG1 Voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 3551
Rel.Accelerator pedal=SWG1 Pick-off point for accelerator pedal potentiometer 3551
(M24)Boost pressure Charge air pressure 3531
(M21)Oil pressure Oil pressure 3541
Torque 2701
Oil pressure warning signal 3011
Reserve
Speed 1 - Speed 2 2000 2002
(F20)Hand throttle=SWG2 Hand throttle 3521
Summary of outputs
Selector switch Gear selector switch
Vehicle speed Driving speed

3.1.1.2 MEASURED VALUES EMR2

MEASURED VALUE SELECTION

Corresponding
Name of measuring point Description
RAM value
Battery voltage
Speed 1 (camshaft) 2000
Speed 1 (camshaft)) 2031
Speed 2 (crankshaft) 2002
Control rod position 2300
Control rod position 2330
Coolant temperature 2904
Fuel temperature 2906
Charge air temperature 2905
Voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 2900
Pick-off point for accelerator pedal potentiometer
Hand throttle 2901
Charge air pressure 2902
Oil pressure Oil pressure 2903
Atmospheric pressura Atmospheric pressur 2930
Coolant level Coolant level 2820
Engine brake status Engine brake status 2826
Status of gear selector switch Status of gear selector switch 2827
Error lamp Status of error indicating lamp Error lamp Status of error indicating lamp 2868

20-283
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

Associated
Name of measuring point Description
RAM value
SourceOfEngineStop
VehicleVelocity state
Vehicle-Velocity Driving speed
calc. FuelConsumption Fuel consumption 2360
Fuel injection quantity Fuel injection quantity 2350
FuelQtyLimitation Fuel quantity limitation 2701
ActFuelQtyLimitng Active fuel quantity limitation
ActualSetpoint
ActPowerReduction
ActTopCurve 3145
ActSpeedLimiting
Oil pressure warning signal (optional)
Torque (optional)
Outp:(F16)/Freq Speed 1 - Speed 2 2000 2001 2002
Outp:(F16) Digital 7 2857
Outp:(M2) Digital 3 2853
Inp:(F6)Digital 3 3 Input 2854
Inp:(F18) Dig/PWM 1 Input 2856
Inp:(F18)Digital/PWM 1 Input
Inp:(F19)Digital 4 Input
Inp:(F20)Digital/Analog 3 Input
Inp:(F21)Digital/PWM 2 Input
Input
Input
Charge air temperature 2905
Fuel temperature 2906
Input
Coolant temperature 2904
Oil pressure sensor input
Sensor input Charge air temperature

20-284
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3.1.2 GRAPHICS
If up to any 5 measured values have been selected, the "Graphic display" window can be opened by clicking on "Graph-
ics".

The measured values are displayed within the display range (minimum to maximum). The scaling divisions for the axes are
set in the column called "Delta".
It is possible to let the program carry out automatic scaling by activating the control field called "Auto".
Because the program does this scaling based on the minimum and maximum values of the respective measured values,
it is not possible to have automatic scaling for time-constant measured values.
A maximum of two axes, one on the left and one on the right side of the graph will be drawn. A measured value can be as-
signed to a left or right axis in the columns marked L (left) and R (right).

EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION BUTTONS:

• Start: The data recording operation is started using this function button.
• Update: This function button is used to update the information displayed. This is required if a change has been made
to the minimum, maximum or delta values. The update takes account of the new values.
• Print : Clicking on this button will commence output to a printer. The printer selection screen is displayed first, then the
user has the option of entering any comments before the graph is finally printed out.
• Save : The information displayed can be saved to a file in two different ways:
1) As an ASCII file (*.agr) for further processing, e.g. in Excel.
2) As a binary file (*.egr) for display of measurement graphics in offline mode, see 1.9 Offline mode.

• Apri: Load : The graphics information stored in a file is loaded and displayed.

20-285
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3.2 RAM-VALUES
RAM values are calculated from the measured values with the aid of the microprocessors in the control units and are made
available by SERDIA as additional data.

The following tables provide an overview of the possible RAM values which are used in the EMR2 control unit.

2000Speed 2130IMFuelSetp 2300ActPos

2001SpeedPickUp1 2131IMFuelSetpSelect 2330ActPosSetpoint
2002SpeedPickUp2 2132IMOrAllSpeedGov 2350FuelQuantity
2003SpeedPickUp1Value 2133IMGovAtMaxOrIdle 2353FuelQuantityCorr
2004SpeedPickUp2Value 2134IMFuelSetOrGovernor 2360FuelConsumption
2005ActivePickUp 2135IMSetpoint 2361FuelEconomy
2025SpeedGradient 2140TorqueSetpoint 2400Can:Online
2031SpeedSetp 2141TorqueReserveMax 2401Can:RxTelActive
2032SpeedSetpRamp 2142TorqueReserveCurve 2402Can:RxTelTimeOut
2033SpeedSetpSelect 2143TorqueLimitMax 2403Can:RxTelVoltTimOut
2041DigitalPotOffset 2144TorqueLimitCurve 2404Can:RxIRCount
2100P_CorrFactor 2145TorqueLimitCurveAct 2405Can:TxIRCount
2101I_CorrFactor 2150EngineBrakeActive 2406Can:BusOffCount
2102D_CorrFactor 2251LimitsDelay 2407Can:RxBufOverflow
2110FuelSpeedGovernor 2280GlowPlugActive 2408Can:Tx0BufOverflow
2111SpeedGov:P-Part 2281FlameGlowPlugActive 2409Can:Tx1BufOverflow
2112SpeedGov:I-Part 2282FlameValveActive 2410Can:FragBufOverflow
2113SpeedGov:D-Part 2283PreheatActive 2411Can:SetpointPhase
2115StaticCorrActive 2284PostheatActive 2412Can:SetpointError
2120DroopPresent 2285StartReadActive 2533FuelTempFuelCorr

20-286
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

2600EngineNo:Low 2730SetpLimitCan 2852DigitalOut2

2601EngineNo:High 2731SetpLimitVelocity 2853DigitalOut3
2602FunctionSetNo:Low 2740Setp1Source:Analog 2854DigitalOut4
2603FunctionSetNo:High 2741Setp1Source:PWM 2855DigitalOut5
2604CanSetNo:Low 2742Setp1Source:Subst 2856DigitalOut6
2605CanSetNo:High 2743Setp1Source:Can 2857DigitalOut7
2606ASAP2SetNo 2750CurrSetp:Setpoint1 2861DigitalOut1State
2607SerdiaID:Low 2751CurrSetp:Setpoint2 2862DigitalOut2State
2608SerdiaID:High 2752CurrSetp:SpeedFix1 2863DigitalOut3State
2609SerdiaDate:Day 2753CurrSetp:SpeedFix2 2864DigitalOut4State
2610SerdiaDate:Month 2754CurrSetp:Freeze 2865DigitalOut5State
2611SerdiaDate:Year 2755CurrSetp:FreezeSetp 2866DigitalOut6State
2612EOLDate:Day 2756CurrSetp:HoldButton 2867DigitalOut7State
2613EOLDate:Month 2757CurrSetp:MinButton 2868StatusErrorLamp
2614EOLDate:Year 2758CurrSetp:MaxButton 2900Setpoint1Extern
2701FuelLimitMax 2759CurrSetp:CalIdle 2901Setpoint2Extern
2702FuelLimitStart 2761CurrSetp:VeloIdle 2902BoostPressure
2703FuelLimitSpeed 2810SwitchDroop2 2903OilPressure
2704FuelLimitBoost 2811SwitchDroopCurve 2904CoolantTemp
2705FuelLimitSimBoost 2812SwitchSpeedFix1 2905CharAirTemp
2706FuelLimitVelocity 2813SwitchSpeedFix2 2906FuelTemp
2707FuelLimitCan 2814SwitchSpeedLimit2 2920BoostPressureCorr
2710FuelLimitMinActive 2815SwitchSpeedLimit3 2921FuelTempCorr
2711FuelLimitMaxActive 2816SwitchGovernIMOrAll 2930AmbientPressure
2712StartLimitActive 2817SwitchFreezeSpeed 2931AmbientPressActive
2713SpeedLimitActive 2818SwitchFreezeSetp 3000ConfigurationError
2714BoostLimitActive 2819SwitchOilLevel 3001ErrPickUp1
2715SimBoostLimitActive 2820SwitchCoolantLevel 3002ErrPickUp2
2716VelocityLimitActive 2821SwitchSpeedInc 3003ErrVelocity
2717CanLimitActive 2822SwitchSpeedDec 3004ErrOverSpeed
2720SpeedLimit1Active 2823SwitchMinButton 3005ErrSetp1Extern
2721SpeedLimit2Active 2824SwitchMaxButton 3006ErrSetp2Extern
2722SpeedLimit3Active 2825SwitchHoldButton 3007ErrBoostPressure
2723ReduceCan 2826SwitchBrake 3008ErrOilPressure
2724ReduceOilPressure 2827SwitchNeutral 3009ErrCoolantTemp
2725ReduceCharAirTemp 2828SwitchGlowPlug 3010ErrCharAirTemp
2726ReduceCoolantTemp 2829SwitchEngineStop 3011ErrFuelTemp
2727ReduceAmbientPress 2851DigitalOut1 3030ErrOilPressWarn

20-287
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3031ErrCoolantTempWarn 3099EEPROMErrorCode 3178S1ErrRAMTest

3032ErrCharAirTempWarn 3101S1ErrPickUp1 3180S1ErrPowerCurrent
3033ErrOilLevelWarn 3102S1ErrPickUp2 3183S1ErrRef1
3034ErrCoolantLevelWarn 3103S1ErrVelocity 3184S1ErrRef2
3035ErrWarnSpeed 3104S1ErrOverSpeed 3185S1ErrRef4
3036ErrFuelTempWarn 3105S1ErrSetp1Extern 3186S1ErrIntTemp
3040ErrOilPressEcy 3106S1ErrSetp2Extern 3187S1ErrAmbPressure
3041ErrCoolantTempEcy 3107S1ErrBoostPressure 3190S1ErrData
3042ErrChargeAirTempEcy 3108S1ErrOilPressure 3193S1ErrStack
3043ErrOilLevel 3109S1ErrCoolantTemp 3194S1ErrIntern
3044ErrCoolantLevel 3110S1ErrChargeAirTemp 3201S2ErrPickUp1
3050ErrFeedback 3111S1ErrFuelTemp 3202S2ErrPickUp2
3052ErrRefFeedback 3130S1ErrOilPressWarn 3203S2ErrVelocity
3053ErrActuatorDiff 3131S1ErrCoolTempWarn 3204S2ErrOverSpeed
3059ErrFeedbackAdjust 3132S1ErrChAirTempWarn 3205S2ErrSetp1Extern
3060ErrDigitalOutput3 3133S1ErrOilLevelWarn 3206S2ErrSetp2Extern
3062ErrDigitalOutput7 3134S1ErrCoolLevelWarn 3207S2ErrBoostPressure
3063ErrOverCurrentOD3 3135S1ErrWarnSpeed 3208S2ErrOilPressure
3067ErrHardwSetp1 3136S1ErrFuelTempWarn 3209S2ErrCoolantTemp
3068ErrCanSetp1 3140S1ErrOilPressEcy 3210S2ErrChargeAirTemp
3070ErrCanBus 3141S1ErrCoolantTempEcy 3211S2ErrFuelTemp
3071ErrCanComm 3142S1ErrCharAirTempEcy 3230S2ErrOilPressWarn
3076ErrParamStore 3143S1ErrOilLevel 3231S2ErrCoolTempWarn
3077ErrProgramTest 3144S1ErrCoolantLevel 3232S2ErrChAirTempWarn
3078ErrRAMTest 3150S1ErrFeedback 3233S2ErrOilLevelWarn
3080ErrPowerCurrent 3152S1ErrRefFeedback 3234S2ErrCoolLevelWarn
3083ErrRef1 3153S1ErrActuatorDiff 3235S2ErrWarnSpeed
3084ErrRef2 3159S1ErrFeedbackAdjust 3236S2ErrFuelTempWarn
3085ErrRef4 3160S1ErrDigitalOut3 3240S2ErrOilPressEcy
3086ErrIntTemp 3162S1ErrDigitalOut6 3241S2ErrCoolantTempEcy
3087ErrAmbPressure 3163S1ErrOverCurrentOD3 3242S2ErrCharAirTempEcy
3090ErrData 3167S1ErrHardwSetp1 3243S2ErrOilLevel
3093ErrStack 3168S1ErrCanSetp1 3244S2ErrCoolantLevel
3094ExceptionNumber 3170S1ErrCanBus 3250S2ErrFeedback
3095ExceptionAddrLow 3171S1ErrCanComm 3252S2ErrRefFeedback
3096ExceptionAddrHigh 3174S1ErrCanPassive 3253S2ErrActuatorDiff
3097ExceptionFlag 3176S1ErrParamStore 3259S2ErrFeedbackAdjust
3098ErrorActive 3177S1ErrProgramTest 3260S2ErrDigitalOut3

20-288
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3262S2ErrDigitalOut6 3541AnalogIn4_Value 3844SerialDate

3263S2ErrOverCurrentOD3 3550TempIn1 3845SerialNumber
3267S2ErrHardwSetp1 3551TempIn1_Value 3847BootDevelopmVersion
3268S2ErrCanSetp1 3560TempIn2 3850Identifier
3270S2ErrCanBus 3561TempIn2_Value 3851LastIdentifier
3271S2ErrCanComm 3570TempIn3 3865CalculationTime
3274S2ErrCanPassive 3571TempIn3_Value 3870Timer
3276S2ErrParamStore 3600ServoCurrrent 3895RAMTestAddr
3277S2ErrProgramTest 3601PowerSupply 3896RAMTestPattern
3278S2ErrRAMTest 3603Reference1+5V 3897CStackTestFreeBytes
3280S2ErrPowerCurrent 3604Reference2+5V 3898IStackTestFreeBytes
3283S2ErrRef1 3605Reference4+5V 3905ServoPIDCorr
3284S2ErrRef2 3606IntTemp 3906ServoStateStatic
3285S2ErrRef4 3700StartCounter 3916ServoCurrentSetp
3286S2ErrIntTemp 3701WorkingHours 3917ServoCurrentCorr
3287S2ErrAmbPressure 3702WorkingSeconds 3944EMR1ActuatorActive
3290S2ErrData 3720LoadWorkMap:h 3950Feedback
3293S2ErrStack 3730LoadWorkMap:s 3955FeedbackReference
3294S2ErrIntern 3740ElectronicTemp:T 3960FeedbackCorrection
3300Velocity 3745ElectronicTemp:h
3350EGRValveActive 3750ElectronicTemp:s
3351EGRFuelFilter 3800EmergencyAlarm
3352EGRBoostLimitActive 3801CommonAlarm
3353EGRFuelActive 3802EngineStop
3354EGRCoolantActive 3803EngineStopped
3355EGRAmbientActive 3804EngineStarting
3356EGRMapActive 3805EngineRunning
3500PWMIn1 3806EngineReleased
3501FrequencyIn1 3810ButtonActive
3502PWMIn2 3821EEPROMAccess:ISO
3503FrequencyIn2 3823EEPROMAccess:Button
3510AnalogIn1 3827EEPROMAccess:Memory
3511AnalogIn1_Value 3828EEPROMAccess:Work
3520AnalogIn2 3830Phase
3521AnalogIn2_Value 3840HardwareVersion
3530AnalogIn3 3841AddHardwareVersion
3531AnalogIn3_Value 3842SoftwareVersion
3540AnalogIn4 3843BootSoftwareVersion

20-289
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

3.3 DATA LOGGER (ONLY EMS2)

The screen for this menu item can only be selected if an EMS2 has been selected as the control unit.

3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT

The inputs and outputs can be configured. This menu item displays the current input and output assignment.
Limitation:
EMR1 and EMS2 control units only.

3.5 CAN STATUS

This window displays the CAN bus activities of the EMR1 or EMR2.

EMR1 EMR2

• Sent: Contains the information Can:TxCounter (0 to 65535, word). The value is increased with every CAN send mes-
sage and displays the sending activity of the EMR1.
• Received: Contains the information Can:RxIrCounter (0 to 65535, word). The value is increased with every CAN send
message and displays the sending activity of the EMR1.
• Bus off: Counter indicating how often the EMR1 has disconnected from the CAN bus because of continuous errors
(CanBusOffCounter 0 to 255, bytes).
• Status: CanOnline indicates whether the EMR1 is active on the CAN bus. A value 1, for online and a value 0, for offline,
is sent via the ISO 9141 interface. The SERDIA program displays the text "online" (for value 1) or "offline" (for value 0).

20-290
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

• Phase: The variable CanSetPointPhase (0 to 255, bytes) is sent via the ISO 9141 interface. This variable displays the
time sequence of the setpoint value specification:
Code Text
0 0:Engine standstill, initialization
1 1:Engine standstill, phase 1, no CAN error
2 2:Engine standstill, phase 2, no CAN timeout error
3 3:Engibe start, ... until idling speed is recognized
4 4:Engine runs, wait for CAN setpoint
5 5:Engine runs, setpoint preset via CAN is allright
6 6:Engine runs, emergency op., setpoint preset via CAN failed
7 7:This phase doesn't exist

ERROR INFORMATION/EVENT COUNTER:

The EMR1 sends an error number CanErrorNumber (0 to 255, bytes) via the ISO 9141 interface specially for CAN bus errors.
In SERDIA, these numbers are assigned a text, which is displayed in the window of the -CAN interface.
Cod. Testo
0 0: No fault existing
1 1: Message request not received at controller object 15
2 2: Invalid controller object
3 3:Engine start, ... until idling speed is recognized
4 4: CAN active, but no message activated
5 5: Diagnosis object not activated
6 6: Scan rate 0 in diagnosis message
7 7: Scan rate 0 in measure value telegram
8 8: preset engine speed config.6 does not match TSC2 activation
9 9: TSC1 activated, but ´Setpoint eng. speed´ not set to ´6´
10 10: ´GovernConf=6´,neither TSC1 nor function shift is activated
11 11: ´GovernConf=6 & Setp.eng.speed=6´, but TSC1 is not activated
12 12: TSC1 activated, but ´Governor config!=6´
13 13:TSC1NotAct&FunctShiftAct&´GovernConf.!=6´=>´ShiftMGovernMode!=0´
14 14:TSC1Act&FunctShiftAct&´GovernConf.=6´=>´ShiftMaskGovernMode!=0´
100 100 Receipt message failed
101 101 Setpoint telegram failed w.eng.idle (repl. value)
102 102 Setpoint telegram missing w.eng.idle due to low battery voltage
103 103 Setpoint telegram missing after eng.start due to low battery
104 104 Setpoint telegram missing after eng.start, repl.value used
105 105 Setpoint telegram missing during eng.oper., repl.value used

TimeOut errors for receipt messages require special treatment. They are all reported with an error number of 100.
To identify which message is causing a time-out error, SERDIA proceeds as follows:
• CanRxObjActive displays, in bit mode, the active messages, i.e. the messages that have actually been received.
• CanConf_bits contains the configured receipt messages, in bit mode.

20-291
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES

SERDIA rejects CabRxObjActive in bit mode (inactive message) and then carries out a bit-mode AND logic operation with
CanConf_bits. The receipt messages which are configured and inactive (CanRxTimeOutBits) are received in bit mode as
a result.
A text is assigned to each bit of CanRxTimeOutBits; this text contains the name of the respective receipt messages. Be-
cause not all bits have to be used, entering "dc", for "don't care" into the text specifies that the text output for this bit is sup-
pressed.
If the text "100 receipt message failed" appears, a list of the missing receipt messages will also be output.

Example of displayed error information:

100 Receipt message failed
Engine Temperature
Engine Fluid Level /Pressure
Function shift
Inlet / Exhaust Conditions

VanRxTimeOutBit Text
0 Engine Temperature
1 Inlet / Exhaust Conditions
2 Engine Fluid Level /Pressure
3 TSC1
4 Engine protection
5 Function shift

20-292
SERDIA PARAMETERS

4. PARAMETERS
4.1 CONFIGURATION (GENERAL)
IMPORTANT:
1 - For safety reasons, the original data set should be saved before making any changes.
2 - Engine running tests are allowed for PID parts only, and should only be carried out by suitably qualified personnel.
3 - Incorrect settings may cause damage to the engine!

CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
Select the "Parameters" menu on the menu bar to go into the "Configuration" screen. A configuration is carried out in the
following steps:
• On the top line, click on the tab for the desired page or
• Using the "Next" and "Previous" buttons, browse to the page that contains the parameter to be set (For example: ’Ac-
cPedal (SWG1)up. ref’ on page 10: Setpoint gen. calibration values).
• Click in the "New value" field, and enter the required value. This should be between the indicated minimum and max-
imum values.
• Click on the "PC->ECU" button. All configuration data are transferred to the control unit. The data are now in the control
unit and can be used for testing the engine setting. When the supply voltage is switched off, this data is lost.
Next step
• using the "Save in ECU" button, save the data set in the control unit (the old data are overwritten).
• For checking, the data can be read and displayed by clicking the "ECU->PC" button.
• When the engine is running satisfactorily, click on the "Save in file" button to save the data on hard disk or diskette.

DESCRIPTION OF SCREEN BUTTON:

• CENTR.->PC: Configuration data are read from the control unit and displayed.
• PC->CENTR.: Modified configuration data are transferred into the control unit. In the case of the EMR1, the "Save in
ECU" button must be used to store the data permanently.
• Open file: Configuration data are read from a file (*.hex) and displayed.
• Save in file:
All configuration data are stored in a file (*.hex). When saving, the engine number is prompted as the file name - this is
only a suggestion.
Any other name can be entered. Finally, click OK to confirm.
The file (i.e. the engine data set) is then saved under the name <Engine number>.hex.

20-293
SERDIA PARAMETERS

• Save in ECU (EMR1 only): The configuration data are stored in the control unit.
ATTENTION!
• All modifications must be reported back!
• The reporting procedure is described in Service Announcement 0199-99-9287.
• Previous: The data on the previous screen are displayed.
• Next: The data on the next screen are displayed.
• Print: Print the displayed configuration data on the printer. The configuration window can be printed page by page, or
in sets (from Page ... to Page ...), or in full.

4.2 OVERALL PROGRAMMING

Saving data from the control unit:
• By clicking "ECU->file“ menu, read the data from the control unit. The "Save as" window opens.
• Save the data under any name, in the form <Filename>.hex.
The default name <Engine number>.hex is suggested; this can be replaced by any other name.
Confirm by clicking OK. The file (i.e. engine data set) is saved under the selected filename.

Overall control unit programming.

• Click on the "Programming" button; the "Open" window appears.
• Select the desired file and open it.
• Click on the "Save in ECU" button.

Of the configuration data, only the operating data read from the control unit (Column 2) or file (Column 3) are displayed. Be-
fore the configuration data are transferred to the control unit, the operating data can be edited in Column 4. This data is also
transferred to the control unit along with the configuration data.
Overall programming is not allowed at user Level I or II.
EMR1 EMR2

DESCRIPTION OF SCREEN BUTTON:

• ECU->file: Configuration data are read from the control unit, displayed, and saved as a HEX file.

PROGRAMMING:
The modified configuration data, or the configuration data HEX file, is transferred to the control unit. In the case of the
EMR1, the "Save in ECU" button must be used to store the data permanently.
• Save in ECU: Configuration data are permanently stored in the control unit.

20-294
SERDIA PARAMETERS

4.2 CALIBRATION
System components can only be calibrated through the diagnostic interface. The SERDIA diagnosis software is required
for the calibration. Along with the EMR1, the accelerator pedal and hand throttle potentiometer (if present) must also be cal-
ibrated (does not apply to large assemblies).
Important conditions:
• Engine off
• Supply voltage (Ignition/Circuit 15) on
• Integrated accelerator pedal

EXPLANATION OF CONCEPTS (EXAMPLES):

• Acceler(SWG1) = Acc. pedal sensor (position sensor 1), Input 24 FS
• Hand throttle(SWG2) = Hand throttle pot. (position sensor 2), Input 20 FS

GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:

• Select calibration value in the upper window.
• Place accelerator pedal/Manual throttle potentiometer in the desired position.
• "Get value“ button enabled: Click the button. The calibration value assigned to the position appears in the Edit field.
• "Get value“ button disabled: Enter the calibration value in the Edit field.
• By clicking "PC->ECU", transfer the calibration value to the control unit.
• By clicking "Save in ECU", save the calibration value in the control unit.
• Switch the ignition on and off.

SCREEN BUTTON DESCRIPTION:

• Get value: If the "Get value" button is enabled, it can be used to read the calibration value for a pedal position.
• PC->ECU: The displayed calibration value is transferred to the control unit.
• Save in ECU: The calibration data are permanently stored in the control unit.

20-295
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY

5. ERROR MEMORY
5.1 GENERAL
The error memory lists the diagnosable errors that have occurred since the last deletion. The current contents of the error
memory can be displayed by selecting the menu item "Error memory".

If errors have been eliminated, the corresponding error messages can be deleted from the "Error memory" window :
• Display the error memory's error messages by clicking on the button "Read EM".
• In the "Error location" window, mark the displayed error location with the mouse.
(Example: "8112:(M17)Rack travel sensor"). The background of the error location text becomes blue.
• Click on "Clear EM". The error location will be deleted, the message will disappear.
• Exit the "Error memory" by clicking on "Close".

20-296
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY

DESCRIPTION OF THE FIELDS:

• Error location: List of error locations from which an individual error location can be selected for detailed information.
Because there can be several causes of error for some components, this list may list some error locations several times.
For example, oil pressure monitoring: Power rating and switch-off limit.
• Type of error: All the information contained in this field refers to the error location selected in the top field.
• Environment data: Additional details (e.g. measured values) which contain more information on the selected error lo-
cation.
• Total no. of errors: Sum of all recorded error locations.
• Frequency: Frequency at which the selected error location occurs.
• Error status: Selected error active or passive.

EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION BUTTONS:

• Read EM: This function button is used to read out the error memory again from the control unit and the display is up-
dated.
• Clear EM: This function button sends a request to the control unit to delete the error memory

5.2 ERROR TABLE

5.2.1 EMR1 ERROR TABLE
8002:(F18)Signal monitoring PWM-Inp1
8012:(F21)Signal monitoring PWM-Inp2
8020:ECU (positioner actuation)
8030:shutoff magnet
8112:(M17)Rack travel sensor
8120:(F24)AccelerPedal(SWG1)
8130:(F20)HandThrottle(SWG2)
8140:(M9)CoolantTempSensor
8150:(M24)BoostPressureSensor
8160:(M21)OilPressureSensor
8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft
8180:(M11)Speed 2, terminal W
8190:(intern)ElectronicsTemperature
81A0:(M11)Engine speed sensor
8210:Data loss EEPROM
8220:Data loss coil data
8230:EDC calibration error
8305:Speed monitoring
8343:Coolant temp. monitoring
8345:Eng.OFF->CoolantTempMonit
8363:Oil pressure monitoring
8365:Eng.OFF->OilPressMonit
8405:Actuator (positioner, travel meter, fuel rack)
8500:ISO-Bus-Error
8600:CAN-Bus-Error
The possible types of error are:
(0) Broken cable or short-circuit
(1) Broken cable or short-circuit
(2) Measuring point defective
(3) Power reduced
(4) Limit exceeded, power reduction activated
(5) Shutoff limit exceeded/ fallen below

20-297
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY

The following table can be used to assist in the elimination of possible causes of errors which have occurred. When doing
this, the status of the fault indicator must be noted:
• Permanent light: Error statuses permitting limited engine operation. The error must be eliminated as quickly as possible
to avoid further damage.
• Flashing light: Error statuses resulting in the engine being shut off or preventing the engine from being started. The error
must be eliminated so that the engine can be put back into operation.

ERROR MESSAGES, CAUSES AND REMEDIES

Error messages (only readable with Serdia) Possible causes Remedy
Error pilot lamp Type n.
of Error location
error O.K.
Plug-in connection inter-
8120:(F24)AccelerPedal(SWG1)1 rupted Restore plug-in connection

8130:(F20)HandThrottle(SWG2)2 OK

8140:(M9)CoolantTempSensor3 Plug-in contacts contam- Clean connector and replace

inated or corroded if necessary
8150:(M24)BoostPressureSensor OK
(0)
8160:(M21)OilPressureSensor Sensor defective Replace sensor
8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft4 OK
Check cable harness and re-
8180:(M11)Speed 2, terminal W Cable harness defective place if necessary
8190:
Permanent light (intern)ElectronicsTemperature
(Engine opera- 8002: PWM signal cannot be
tion restricted) Check signal
(F18)Signal monitoring PWMInp1 evaluated
(2)
8012:
(F21)Signal monitoring PWMInp2

Temperature warning limit

exceeded too long. Fallen Check coolant
below oil pres-sure alarm Check oil level
(3)5 8343:Coolant temp. monitoring limit for too long.
8363:Oil pressure monitoring
Check data in SERDIA menu
Faulty configuration. Check ”configuration” and
change if necessary

(5)6 8305:Speed monitoring Overrun cond. activated.

Plug-in connection Restore plug-in connection

interrupted
OK
Plug-in contacts Clean connector and replace
contaminated or corroded if necessary
Flashing 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft7
(Engine off) (0) OK
Sensor defective Replace sensor
OK
Check cable harness and
Cable harness defective replace if necessary

20-298
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY

Plug-in connection Restore plug-in connection

interrupted
OK
Plug-in contacts Clean connector and replace
contaminated or corroded if necessary
(2) 8112:(M17)Rack travel sensor OK
Actuator defective Replace actuator
OK
Check cable harness and
Cable harness defective
Flashing replace if necessary
(Engine off) 8305:Speed monitoring Overspeed reached

Temperature alarm limit

exceeded for too long. Check coolant
8345: Fallen below oil pres-sure Check oil level
Eng.OFF->CoolantTempMonit. alarm limit for too long.
(5) 8365:
Eng.OFF->OilPressMonit Check data in SERDIA menu
Faulty configuration ”Configuration” and change
(e.g. overrun cond. OFF). if necessary
8405:Actuator (positioner, travel Actuator defective Replace actuator
meter, fuel rack)
(Engine start not
possible) 8210:Data loss EEPROM Check battery
Battery or cable harness
(0) 8220:Data loss coil data defective, ECU failure Check cable harness
8020:ECU (positioner actuation) Replace ECU

Error in central electron-

a) Flashing ics, pro-gram in EMR was Replace ECU
not executed

b) Flashing or Plug-in connection inter- Restore plug-in connection

Permanent light rupted

c)Off OK
Plug-in contacts Clean connector
(0) 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft7 contaminated or corroded and replace if necessary
OK
Actuator defective Replace actuator
OK
Check cable harness and re-
Cable harness defective place if necessary

8405: Actuator (positioner, travel Actuator defective

(5) meter, fuel rack) Replace actuator

1
Switch to SWG 2 (if SWG 2 available). Fixed speed with 2% speed droop is set.
2 Switch to SWG 1 (if SWG 1 available). Fixed speed with 2% speed droop is set..
3
Electronics temperature is evaluated.
4 Continued running with reduced rated speed, if speed sensor 2 is available.
5
Injected fuel limitation (if activated).
6
The measured value exceeds maximum speed.
7 Speed sensor 2 not available or defective.

It is recommended to use a multimeter as measurement aid.

20-299
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
 5.1.2 EMR2 ERROR TABLE

SERDIA
Ricon.
Fault no. Blink codee
Fault locality/ EMR
Fault group (in Cause Remarks Help
Fault description short long horts
SERDIA)
0,4 s 0,8 s 0,4 s
Zero error - No faults 2 - - No active faults present
display
Governor in emergency operation Check distance.
(if sensor 2 available). Check cable connection.
01 Speed sensor 1 2 1 1
Emergency switchoff (if sensor 2 Check sensor and replace if re-
Sensor failure. quired.
Distance from gear too far. not available or failed).
Additional fault impulses. Governor in emergency operation
Cable joint interrupted.
(with sensor 1)
Speed sensor 2 2 1 2
Emergency switchoff (if sensor 1
not available or failed).
Tacho failed. Governor in emergency operation. Check cable connection
Revolutions 03 Speed sensor 2 1 3 Additional fault impulses. and tacho.
/ speed (see Chapter 4.15).
Cable connection interrupted. Replace if required.
acquisition
Check parameter (21).
Check speed settings.
Check PID setting.
Check rods.
Check actuator and replace if
04 Excess speed switch 2 1 4 Speed was/is in excess of limit. e. Engine stop. (see Chapter 4.3.3) required.
Check cable to actuator (
impulse on incorrect speed).
Check no. of teeth.
For vehicles check for possible
thrust mode.
Set point sensor 1
05 2 2 1
accelerator pedal)
Set point sensor 2
06 2 2 2
(hand throttle)
See Chapter 4.15 influencing fault Check sensor cable.
07 Charge air pressure 2 2 3 Fault at corresponding reaction. Check sensor and replace if
Sensors 08 Oil pressure 2 2 4 sensor entry With failure of the sensor, the required.
(e.g. short circuit or cable break). associated monitoring function is

EMR2 ERROR TABLE

Check fault limits for sensor.
09 Coolant temperature 2 2 5 de-activated.
Charge air
10 2 2 6
temperature
11 Fuel temperature 2 2 7
20-301
20-302

SERDIA
After a delay time - fill limitation.
Check engine (oil level, oil pump).
Oil pressure below Fault message (disappears Check oil pressure sensor
30 Oil pressure warning 2 3 1 speed-dependent when oil pressure is again and cable.
warning line characteristic above recovery limit). Check oil pressure warning line
characteristic.
Fault message (disappears when Check coolant.
Functional Coolant temperature Coolant temperature has coolant temperature again drops Check coolant
31 2 3 2
fault warning exceeded warning level. below recovery level). temperature sensor
warning After a delay time - fill limitation. and cable.
Fault message (disappears when Check charge air.
Charge air Charge air temperature charge air temperature again drops Check charge air temperature
32 temperature 2 3 3 has exceeded warning level. below recovery level). After a delay sensor and cable.
warning time - fill limitation.
Check coolant level.
Switch input “Low coolant level” is Fault message.
34 Coolant level warning 2 3 5 Check coolant level sensor and
active. cable.
Check parameters.
Check speed settings (21).
Check PID setting.
Check rods.
Check actuator and replace if
Speed warning (with Revolution was/is above (top) See Chapter 4.3.3 required.
35 thrust mode 2 3 6 revolution speed limit. Excess speed protection. Check cable to actuator.
operation). “Thrust mode” function is active. Check speed sensor (impulses
on incorrect speed).
Check no. of teeth.
For vehicles check for possible
thrust mode.
Guasti
funzionali,
avvertenza

Fault message (disappears when Check fuel.

Fuel temperature Fuel temperature has exceeded
36 2 3 7 fuel temperature again drops Check fuel temperature
warning warning level. below recovery level). sensor and cable.

EMR2 ERROR TABLE

 SERDIA
Emergency stop
Check engine (oil level, oil pump).
Oil pressure switch Check oil pressure sensor
40 2 3 1 Oil pressure below switch-off limit
off and cable.
Check oil pressure switch-off
limit.

Emergency stop. Check coolant level.

Functional Coolant temperature Coolant temperature has Check coolant level sensor and
41 2 3 2
fault, switch-off exceeded switch-off limit. cable.
switch-off Check switch-off limit.
Check charge air.
Charge air tempera- Charge air temperature has Check charge airtemperature
42 2 3 3
ture switch-off exceeded switch-off limit. sensor and cable.
Check switch-off limit.
Check coolant level.
Coolant level Switch input “Low coolant level Emergency stop.
44 2 3 5 Check coolant level sensor and
switch off is active. Start lock. cable.
Check actuator, replace if
required.
50 Feedback Check cable, check
Actuator not connected. Emergency switchoff. “Confirmation”.
Fault in actuator confirmation. Actuator cannot be operated. Check actuator, replace if
required.
52 Reference feedback 2 5 1 Check cable, check fault limits
for “Rifeness confirmation”.
Injection pump/actuator jammed Check actuator/
or not connected. actuator rods /
Control travel Difference between nominal/actual Fault message (disappears when
53 injection pump,
difference control travel is > 10 % of the overall difference is < 10 %). replace if required
Actuator control path. Check actuator cable.
Check actuator and replaced
if required.
Check feedback cable.
Check voltage supply/cables.
Check fault limits and reference
No automatic actuator equalization Engine stop / start lock.
Auto calibration Governor cannot be taken into use. values of the feedback.
possible.
59 BOSCH-EDC pumps 2 5 2 EDC actuator calibration required Program the fault limits for
Incorrect input of the actuator
faulty operation feedback, save values.
reference values. (see Chapter 8.4). Switch ignition off and on again.

EMR2 ERROR TABLE

Check again.«If faulty, inform
DEUTZ-Service and carry out
automatic equalization again.
Set fault limits again.
20-303
20-304

SERDIA
Digital output 3
60 (Switch-off solenoid, 2 6 1 Driver level is switched off.
pin M 2) Fault (short circuit /cable break) Check cable of digital output
at digital output. (cable break or short circuit).
Digital output 6,
62 2 6 2 Fault message.
pin M 7
Hardware
inputs/outputs Excess voltage
63 2 6 1
switch-off solenoid

67 Error Hand Setp 1 2 6 2

68 Error CAN Setp 1 2 6 2

CAN-controller for CAN-bus
is faulty.
70 CAN-Bus controller 2 7 1 Check CAN connection,
Fault removal despite reinitialising
continuously not possible terminating resistor
Communication Applicationdependent. (see Chapter 12.4).
Overflow nel buffer di ricezione Check control unit.
CAN interface
71 oppure non è possibile un invio
SAE J 1939 tramite bus.
Parameter Fault in parameter programming in
76 programming the governor fixed value memory. Switch ignition off and on again.
(write EEPROM)
Check again. If faulty inform
Constant monitoring of program DEUTZ Service
77 Cyclic program test 2 8 1 memory shows error Emergency switchoff. engine
(socalled “Flash-test”).
Memory cannot be started.
Note values of parameters
(3895 and 3896).
Constant monitoring of working
78 Cyclic RAM test memory shows error. Switch ignition off and on again.
Check again.
If faulty inform DEUTZ Service.

Fault message (disappears when Switch ignition off and on again.

Power supply Power supply for actuator not
80 2 9 1 power again in the normal range). Check again. If faulty inform
(Actuator) in the permissible range. DEUTZ Service.
83 Reference voltage 1 Check voltage supply.
Reference voltage for actuator not Fault message (disappears when Switch ignition off and on again.
84 Reference voltage 2 2 8 2 power again in the normal range).
in the permissible range. Check again.
Control unit Auxiliary value 5 V
85 Reference voltage 4 If faulty inform DEUTZ Service
hardware
Internal temperature for control unit Fault message (disappears when
86 Internal temperature

EMR2 ERROR TABLE

not in permissible range. power again in the normal range).
Switch ignition off and on again.
Fault message (disappears when Check again. If faulty inform
Atmospheric Atmospheric pressure not in power again in normal range). DEUTZ Service.
87 2 9 2
pressure permissible range. Atmospheric pressure monitoring
function de-activated.
 SERDIA
Check data for correct settings.
No data found or checksum of data
Parameter fault Save parameters.
is faulty (note: fault only occurs dur- Engine cannot be started.
90 (EEPROM retrieval or 2 10 1 Switch ignition off and on again.
ing setting of parameter / saving or
checksum faulty). Check again. If faulty inform
reset.). DEUTZ Service.

Program logic

Note parameters (3897 and

3898).
Internal calculation fault (so-called Emergency switchoff.
93 Stack overflow 2 10 1 Switch ignition off and on again.
“Stack overflow” fault). Engine cannot be started. Check again. If faulty inform
DEUTZ Service.

94 Internal fault

EMR2 ERROR TABLE

20-305
SERDIA EMR2 ERROR TABLE
5.1.3 ERROR MEMORY 2
This error memory has the same functions as the error memory described previously, however errors can only be read out,
displayed and deleted here with EMR2 and the interface for Level IIIa.
20-306
SERDIA EXTRA

6. EXTRAS

6.1 MAXIMUM SPEED

This screen can be used to select from three different maximum vehicle speeds (30, 40, 50 km/h) (not implemented yet in
EMR2)..

6.2 LOGISTIC DATA

The screen is used to read and print the logistic data stored in the control unit.
EMR1/EMR2:
• Engine Serial Number
• Part number, EMR function data set
• Part number, ASAP2 data set
• Date, month and year of manufacture
• EMR2 only:
• Part number, CAN function data set
• Hours of operation
• Number of engine starts

20-307
SERDIA EXTRA

Data can only be written and protected in the control unit by DEUTZ AG..

EMR2

6.3 LOAD SPECTRUM

This screen provides an overview of the engine speed and load ranges over which the engine has been operating.
Users with the higher authorisation levels may delete entries in the control unit.
Limitation: EMR2, EMS2 only

6.4 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL EXCEEDED

This screen shows maintenance intervals that have been exceeded. Users with higher authorisation levels can delete the
exceeded maintenance intervals.
Limitation: EMS2 only

6.5 OVERRIDE MEMORY

This screen shows, for certain measured quantities, any periods during which the engine was running in the alarm or shut-
off range. Users with higher authorisation levels can delete the entries in the control unit.
Limitation: EMS2 only

6.6 MAINTENANCE DATA

Limitation: EMS2 only

20-308
SERDIA TASKS

7. TASKS
7.1 EMR1
During service operations, this button on the SERDIA main screen is used to show the screens for the individual con-
figuration tasks:
Diagnosis and Testing
• Meas. governor performance
• Meas. start manoev.
• Meas. monitoring functions
• Meas. boost pressure
• Meas. sensors
• Meas. veh. speed
• Meas. setpoint value input
• Meas. dig. inputs/outputs
Adjusting
• Set max. veh. speed
• Set idle speed
• Governor setting
• Set droop
• Define inputs and outputs
• Monitoring
Error memory
• Read/delete error memory

7.1.1 EXAMPLE GOVERNOR SETTING

Proceed as follows:
• Click on the "Tasks" button.
• Click on the "Adjusting:Governor setting" menu option. The "Governor setting" menu opens.

20-309
SERDIA TASKS

Screen button functions:

• ECU->PC: Configuration data are read from the control unit and displayed.
• PC->ECU: Modified configuration data are transferred into the control unit. To store the data permanently, use the
"Save in ECU" button.
• Save in ECU: Configuration data are permanently stored in the control unit.

All modifications must be reported back!

The reporting procedure is described in Service Announcement 0199-99-9287.

• Graphics: The "Graphics" button can be used to see a graphical representation of the selected measurement quan-
tities over time (5 maximum). If more than 5 quantities are selected, an error message is displayed.
• Collect. time: The measurement collecting time is indicated in the "Collect. time" box, in seconds. The smallest unit of
collecting time is one second. The highest time may be several hours (specified in seconds). The basic setting is 10 s.
The shortest scan rate is
40 ms for RAM values
60 ms for other values.
A measurement time of 10 s gives
10000 ms/40 ms = 250 measurement points for RAM values
10000 ms/60 ms = 166 measurement points for other values.
Since the program takes around 2000 measurement points maximum, the scan rate is adapted automatically before
data collection begins.
The lowest possible scan is determined by the duration of data transfer from the control unit to the PC. The higher the
number of measured quantities to be displayed at the same time, the longer the data transfer time, and the narrower the
scan frequency.
• Print: Prints the measured values appearing on the screen.
• Close: Return to the "Tasks" menu.

20-310
SERDIA TASKS

7.1.2 EXAMPLE SPEED DROOP SETTING

Proceed as follows:
• Click on the "Tasks" button.
• Click on the "Adjusting: Set droop" menu option. The "Droop setting" menu opens.

Screen button functions:

• ECU->PC: Configuration data are read from the control unit and displayed.
• PC->ECU: Modified configuration data are transferred into the control unit. To store the data permanently, use the
"Save in ECU" button.
• Save in ECU: Configuration data are permanently stored in the control unit.

All modifications must be reported back!

The reporting procedure is described in Service Announcement 0199-99-9287.

• Print: Prints the measured values appearing on the screen.

• Close: Return to the "Tasks" menu.

20-311
SERDIA TASKS

7.1.3 DEFINE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Using the "Tasks" button, the possible assignments

1. are displayed with the right mouse button
2. allocated with the left mouse button
This screen also shows functions that can be inverted, and the measured values for all inputs and outputs (to view these,
click on the "Measurement" button).
This configuration feature is only present with Access Level III.

20-312
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8. WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.1 SERDIA GENERAL

8.1.1 ERROR WHILESETTING UP COMMUNICATIONS
If communications cannot be set up although the interface and control unit have been connected, an error message is dis-
played:

Possible reasons for the error message:

• No supply voltage to the control unit or interface.
• Voltage supply was cut when the engine was switched off.
• Incorrect assignment of serial interface on PC (see 9.1.2).
• Wrong pole connection on voltage supply from engine to interface.
• Not all of the 4 wires (+, -, k, l) are connected.
• Wrong control unit, or control unit faulty.
Remedy, quick checks:
• Yellow interface LED should light up when SERDIA is started.
• Measure the diagnostic connector supply voltage (the interface requires 8 - 28 V DC).
• In Windows, check the assignment of the serial interface (usually COM1).
• Connect another control unit.
Further information on operating voltages for control units, interface and PC:
• EMR control units require an operating voltage from 10 V to 30 V (typically 12-24 V).
Power consumption: 5 A at 12 V, 7 A at 24 V
• The MVS control unit takes a voltage of 24 V only.
• The interface is supplied by the engine and takes a voltage from 12 V to 24 V.
• The control units and interface are protected against wrong pole connection and overvoltage. However, an accidental
incorrect connection, to a 230 V source for example, can still cause damage.
• Using an interface with an integrated optical link, the PC (Notebook, and printer) can be connected to the vehicle battery
and ground with no risk for the control unit and interface, and no risk of loss of data.

20-313
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.1.2 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION WITH ISETUP

On PCs, the COM1 interface may already be occupied by the mouse. In this case, the interface must be connected to the
other serial interface (COM2). This port can then be configured with ISETUP to allow it to communicate with the interface.
Proceed as follows:
• Start the ISETUP.EXE program.
• Select the other COM port and click OK.
The initialisation file ISODRV.INI is modified automatically.
• Re-start Windows.
Note: On many PCs, the second serial interface is the 25-pin type. In this case, a hardware adapter (25-pin to 9-
pin) must be inserted to allow connection of the 9-pin diagnostic interface.

8.1.3 ACCESS CONFLICTS IN WINDOWS 3.1

The ISODRV.386 interface driver can only be loaded statically. In the Windows SYSTEM.INI file, the ISODRV.386 driver is
entered in the [386Enh] section (with the working directory path). This may cause problems with other programs that ac-
cess the same serial interface.
Remedy:
• Start the ISETUP.EXE program.
• Delete the driver entry from the SYSTEM.INI file.
• Re-start Windows 3.11.

8.1.4 ERROR MESSAGE IN WINDOWS 3.11 WHEN STARTING SERDIA

When starting SERDIA in Windows 3.11, the following error message may appear:

This is because the VXDLDR.386 driver is not activated.

Remedy:
• Start the ISETUP.EXE program.
• Check the "Device VXDLDR.386 enabled“ checkbox and click OK to confirm.The appropriate driver entry is made au-
tomatically in the SYSTEM.INI file.
• Re-start Windows 3.11.

20-314
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.2 EMR1

8.2.1 ENGINE SURGES

Fault finding:
Troubleshooting with the EMR1 is done in the same way as for engines with mechanical regulators, i.e. the engine com-
ponents and functions such as pump, control rod movement, fuel supply, etc, are examined. In most cases, especially if
the engine was running correctly before engine surges begin to occur, the fault does not lie in the EMR1.
Controller setting:
Controller setting is performed mainly for new operation modes, and should be thoroughly tested and documented with
the system (engine and installation) in all operating conditions.
If the new application is connected and enabled, the user-specific controller parameters must be confirmed with company
headquarters. Follower engines with the same operation mode do not usually require any additional adjustments.
Opening the menus:
SERDIA main menu -> Tasks menu -> Governor setting -> Execute

General rules for setting correction:

• Setting correction is carried out with the engine running.
• Raising the P/I/D parts increases the control tolerance range.
• Enter the value to be corrected in the "new value“ field. One way of doing this is
•select the old value with the mouse, then simply type in the new value (the old value is deleted automatically).
• Click on the "PC->ECU" button to send the new value to the control unit. The governor applies the new setting, and the
result will be detectable in the engine behaviour.
• After setting correction has been carried out successfully and before disconnecting the voltage supply (circuit 15), the
new parameters must be stored in the EMR1.
To do this, click on the "Save in ECU" button.

20-315
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

Governor basic setting:

The control unit is programmed at the end of the band with the following standard values.

Standard value
Parameter (Variable) Comment
Assembly Vehicle
SpeedGvnr: P part 18-20 4,0 Basic setting gain factors for P/I/D parts.
SpeedGvnr: I part 10,0 10,0 These parameters are independent of engine
status (speed, load still active) and show the main
SpeedGvnr: D part 5-12 2,5 instruments for governor setting.

Lowering the governor parameter for the static

SpeedGvnr: damping 90,0 65,0
range.
Speed band around nominal value. Within this
SpeedGvnr: damping speed band, the engine runs smoothly and with
15,0 80,0
range precision, and does not respond strongly to speed
variations.
PosGvnr: P part 10,0 10,0
PosGvnr: I part 10-15 5,0
PosGvnr: D part 5-10 5,0 Setting corrections should only be made after con-
PosGvnr: DT2 part 8,0 8,0 firming

SpeedGvnr: damping 160-180 180,0

SpeedGvnr: damping 0,25 0,25

Standard values may vary according to engine model and application

Standard values, speed and load dependent parameters:

3 performance maps for the P, I, and D part = fkt (speed, quantity injected)..

Parameter (Variable) Standard value Comment

X: Engine speed position values (r.p.m.) 60…2500 7 speed values
Y: Quantity position values (cmm/str) 0, 20 …100 4 injection quantity values
Total 3 x 28 entries. A 100 % entry causes the speed gov-
Map (%) 100 ernor PID parts to be accepted (Page 4). Corrections must
be made at the related measurement point. EMR1

Making a setting correction:

Before modifying any parameters, we recommend saving the current configuration using the "Save in file" menu option,
and/or printing configuration pages 4, 5 and 17.
The setting procedure consists of 3 stages:
1. PID governor basic parameters For the most part, the correction is made with the basic parameters.
• If a new governor basic setting is required, set all performance maps (Page 17) to 100%.
• The P part is the most important parameter and must be set first. Raise the parameter value for "SpeedGvnr: P part" by
10 % to begin with, until the engine accelerates under the the sudden load variation and vibration dips to f > 1 Hz. Then
reduce the P part again by 25 %.
Example: P part with vibration dip (unstable) = 12. 12-25 % of 12 = 9 (new setting value).
The setting depends heavily on weight moment of inertia (engine + generator). For weight moments of inertia up to
8kgm2 the value range for the P part is between 10 and 45 %.
At higher moments of inertia, the P part can be raised by up to 90 %.
Note regarding major engine assemblies:The optimum governor values are determined at operating speed with dif-
ferent loads. Note the P part determined for each, and enter the average in "SpeedGvnr: P part".
For double-frequency installations, the second frequency must be included in the average value calculation.
Note regarding vehicle engines:The optimum governor values are determined at several engine speed and load points.

20-316
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

Note the P part determined for each, and enter the average in "SpeedGvnr: P part".
The different P parts given by the various load and speed points must be corrected in the PID performance map.
• The D and I parts (Page 4) are now set applying the same procedure, i.e. raising the values by 5 % first till unstable, then
reduce again by 25 %.
2. Parameters for static and dynamic operation.
Setting the "SpeedGvnr: damping“ and "SpeedGvnr: damping range“ parameters (Page 4).
The "SpeedGvnr: damping range“ parameter determines the speed band in which speed is in the static range. For ex-
ample, entering a value of 15 r.p.m. sets a +/-15 r.p.m. band around the nominal speed .
The "SpeedGvnr: damping" parameter determines the lowering of the governor parameter (PID parts) for the static
range, i.e. if the speed is within the speed band around nominal value, the governor parameter (PID parts) falls to the
value for the damping factor.
For example, SpeedGvr: P part =10 %
SpeedGvr: damping =65 %
This has the effect that, in the static engine condition of nominal speed range +/- damping range, the P part falls to 6.5
%. The aim of this step is that the engine will run smoothly and precisely within the speed band, without responding
strongly to slight speed changes. If the engine runs outside of the speed band due to a fault, the set governor pa-
rameters become effectively 100 % again and the governor will quickly correct the speed error as far as possible.
Standard settings - see "Governor basic setting". Setting corrections can only be made through the engine running
test.
3. Speed and load dependent parameters.
For the P, I, D basic parameters there are corresponding performance maps that depend on speed and injected
quantity (load) (Page 17). The effective parameters are determined by multiplying the basic parameter by the content
of the performance map.
For example, SpeedGvr: P part =10 %
Map P part =200 % at 2000 r.p.m. and 50 cmm/stroke
Result: For the given operating point, the P part becomes effectively 20 %.

8.2.2 ACCELERATOR PEDAL CALIBRATION

An accelerator pedal is usually designed as a foot pedal, operated by the driver of a vehicle. However, the input provided
for the accelerator pedal (vehicle connector Pin 24) can also be used as a remote input, like those used in locomotives and
ships. In all cases, calibration is required.
Calibration must be carried out both at initial startup (either by the customer or by service engineers), and whenever a re-
placement is made.
The accelerator pedal is not always supplied by DEUTZ AG. However, we recommend the pedal value sensor (DEUTZ Part
No. 0419 9457. Other accelerator pedals can also be installed by the customer, subject to confirmation with company head
office.
The following are then required:
• Connection as in EMR1 System overview:
Signal input (Pin 24/vehice connector) to GND (Pin 23/vehicle connector)
• Analog signal:
> 0.5 V (accelerator pedal in 'parked' position), for example 1 V
< 4.5 V (accelerator pedal at 'full throttle'), for example 4V
• The EMR1 provides a reference voltage at the vehicle connector (Pin 25, +5 V).
This reference voltage is also intended for the manual throttle potentiometer.
Therefore the total load current should not go over 25 mA if the pedal value sensor and manual throttle potentiometer
are arranged in parallel, (i.e. total resistance > 200 Ω .)
Calibrazione acceleratore per mezzo del menu "Calibrazione":
Accelerator pedal calibration using the "Calibration" menu:
Calibration is menu-driven. Both end stops "parked position" and "full throttle" are calibrated as limit values. See "General
procedure for calibration", Chapter ,"Calibration".
Accelerator pedal calibration using the "Measured values" and "Configuration" menus:
The aim of calibration is to inform the control unit of the limit values for the two end stops: "parked position" as the lower
and "full throttle" as the upper reference point. Also, the "upper fault value" (+5 % from upper reference point) and "lower
fault value" (-5 % from upper reference point) must be entered, relative to the two reference points.

20-317
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

Parameter designations
Configuration screen Calibration screen Value
Acceler(SWG1)upper fault limit
AccPedal(SWG1)up. err val. max. setpoint x 1.05+
[full throttle...5V]
Acceler(SWG1)full throttle
AccPedal(SWG1)up. ref max. setpoint
[pressed down, upper limit]
Acceler(SWG1)parked position
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. ref Pedal at rest = Idle
[lower limit]
Acceler(SWG1)lower fault limit
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. err val. Pedal at rest - 0.05 x max. setpoint
[0V...parked pos.]

Measuring the limit values:

• Open the "Measured values" menu, "Actual measured values".
• Measured value "(F24)Accelerator pedal=SWG1“: with pedal in parked position (lower reference) and pedal pressed
(lower reference), "Get value", transfer to the control unit and save.
Configuration:
• Open the "Parameters“ menu, "Configuration" option.
• Enter values, referring to the following example table ("Acc. pedal input configuration", see below).
Conversion: 5 V=1023 digits.

Example: Acc. pedal input configuration

Actual value/
Factory setting Calibration Configuration
Parameter measured value
mV digits mV mV digits
1
AccPedal(SWG1)up.err val. 4750 973 4357 893
AccPedal(SWG1)up. ref 4500 921 4150 4150 850
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. ref 500 102 670 670 137
2
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. err val. 250 51 463 95

1) Measured value "upper reference point" + 5 % (v. upper reference point)

2) Measured value "lower reference point" -5 % (v.lower reference point)

8.2.3 MANUAL THROTTLE CALIBRATION

The manual throttle (Pin 20 FS) is intended for vehicles such as agricultural machines. When ploughing, for example, a driv-
er can make the appropriate engine speed setting and then take his/her foot off the accelerator pedal. As with the me-
chanical adjusting levers, the manual throttle position must be set to zero (lowest engine speed) before starting the engine.
The manual throttle positioning is combined with the accelerator pedal and determines minimum speed. In proportion to
the preset nominal value, engine speed can be set between lower idle speed (for example 650 r.p.m.) and nominal engine
speed (for example 2300 r.p.m.). Depending on the manual throttle setting, the engine responds in the same way as to an
accelerator pedal. For example, if the speed is set with the hand throttle to 1500 r.p.m., accelerator pedal operation only
becomes effective at higher speeds than this.
Manual throttle positioning is not supplied by DEUTZ, but it still has to be programmed at the factory.
A potentiometer can be used as the adjusting link, and installed by the customer.
Requirements for manual throttle nominal value setting (potentiometer) when installed by customer:
• Input Pin 20 vehicle connector
• Potentiometer supply as pedal value sensor, 5V reference voltage Pin 25, and GND Pin 23.
• Loading reference voltage together with pedal value sensor < 25 mA.
• Protection system IP65
• End stops adjusted to between 10 % and 90 % of the potentiometer value.
For example, if potentiometer resistance = 1 k., the setting range between mechanical stops must then be between 100 Ω
and 900 Ω . This setting range can be achieved by
a) Narrowing the turning angle

20-318
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

b) Series resistors in the supply lines.

Manual throttle calibration:

The two potentiometer end stops must be calibrated.
The aim of calibration is to inform the control unit of the limit values for the two end stops: "Potentiometer stop LI speed"
as the lower and "Potentiometer rated speed" as the upper reference point. Also, the "upper fault value" (+5 % from upper
reference point) and "lower fault value" (-5 % from upper reference point) must be entered relative to the two reference
points.

Parameter designations
Configuration screen Calibration screen Value
Hand throttle(SWG2)
Hand thr.(SWG2)up. err val. Rated engine speed x 1.05+
upper fault limit(upper limit...5V)
Hand throttle(SWG2)
Hand thr.(SWG2)up. ref Rated engine speed
max.eng. speed (upper limit)
Hand throttle(SWG2)
Hand thr.(SWG2)lo. ref Low idling engine speed
min. eng.speed (lower limit)
Hand throttle(SWG2)
Hand thr.(SWG2)lo. err val. LI engine speed - 0.05 x rated eng. speed
lower fault limit (0V...lower limit)

8.2.4 EXAMPLE OF FAULT FINDING

Fault finding:
Connection broken? not OK Restore the connection.
OK
Plug contacts dirty
or corroded? not OK Clean plug, replace if necessary.
OK
Sensor faulty? not OK Replace sensor.
OK
Cable harness faulty? not OK Check the harness, replace if necessary.

20-319
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.2.5 ENGINE DOES NOT START

Indication Possible cause Remedy

Check using multimeter:

Starter speed > 160 r.p.m. Replace battery.
terminal voltage at starter
not reached. Clean earth wire connections.
< 7V (12V system).

Starter speed ok, fuel rack tra-vels

to start position. Faulty fuel supply. Restore fuel supply.

Remove vehicle connector and check

No power supply, connected to for correct connections:
Pin 14F=+Ubatt
wrong pins or incorrect polarity.
Pin 1F=-Ubatt
Pin 2F=-Ubatt
Shutoff solenoid defective or not
connected.
Locate site causing stiffness and remedy as
Starter speed ok, fuel rack stays at Fuel rack stiff. appropriate.
zero position.
Replace sensor, check plug connection and
Speed sensor faulty.
line.

Starting fuel charge limitation is set Usin g SERDIA c heck m eas ured val ue
too low or coolant temperature is “(M9)coolant temperature” in the menu
too high for the EMR. “current measured values”.

There is a serious fault in the EMR

system. You should remedy the
Flashing pilot light. fault before attempting any further Locate error using SERDIA.
starts.

Identification of fuel rack travel

SERDIA error message: deviation, measured value in Replace actuator, see service example,
”8405: Actuator (positioner, travel shutdown range. actuator replacement.
meter, fuel rack)”. Shutoff solenoid defective or not Additional setting is not necessary.
connected.

Short circuit or interruption on the Replace sensor, check plug connection for
SERDIA error message:
speed sensor (camshaft sensor) or contamination or corrosion, check lines be-
”8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft”.
supply line or plug connection. tween vehicle plug and sensor for damage.

SERDIA error message:

Memory error in the EMR
”8210:Data loss EEPROM” Replace ECU. Transfer data from old ECU to
Memory error in the EMR
”8220:Data loss coil data” the new one “1:1”.
”8020:ECU (positioner actuation)” ECU Failure

SERDIA error message: Oil pressure measured value (M21) Replace sensor, check plug connection for
lies outside permitted range, also contamination or corrosion, check lines be-
”8160:(M21)OilPressure Sensor”
with engine switched off. tween vehicle plug and sensor for damage.
Coolant temperature measured
SERDIA error message: value (M9) lies outside the
Replace sensor, plug and line control
”8140:(M9)CoolantTemp Sensor” permitted range, also with
engine switched off.
SERDIA error message: Accelerator pedal sensor Check calibration values in the menu
”8120:(F24)Acceler Pedal(SWG1)” incorrectly calibrated. “Calibration” and change if necessary.

20-320
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.2.6 ENGINE STOPS FOR NO KNOWN REASON

Indication Possible cause Remedy

Shutdown not initiated by error

message in the EMR.
Other possibilities:
Following shutdown:
(Key switch not yet actuated, Fuel supply ! Restore fuel system.
off/on)
Error pilot light off ! Speed monitoring independent of Check whether additional speed monitoring
(e.g. solenoid) is available and make relevant
EMR.
system check.

Interruption of supply voltage. Check EMR vehicle connector, fuse, key

switch etc. for loose contact.

Trace error location and error

Carry out systematic check depending on er-
environment with SERDIA.
ror message:
Error message:
Following shutdown:
(Key switch not yet actuated, Overspeed (is reached for instance Guide value: rated speed+15% to be correct-
off/on) upon sudden load change) ed if necessary.
Error pilot light Permanent light
Check connector on oil pressure sensor for
!e.g. ”Oil pressure” additonal loose contact and replace sensor if neces-
remark: “inactive”.
sary.

Following shutdown: Take action according to the indicated error

There is a serious error in the EMR location. This may involve replacing the ECU,
(Key switch not yet actuated,
off/on) system. Prior to engine start, trace actuator or sensor. The additional remark “in-
error location with SERDIA. active” indicates a loose contact at the indi-
Error pilot light flashing cated error location.

8.2.7 REPLACING THE EMR1 ACTUATOR

The actuator is a purely mechanical component of the EMR1, fixed to the engine. It contains a solenoid controlled by the
EMR1, which positions the control rod and thus regulates the fuel feed to the engine. A fuel rack position sensor fitted into
the actuator indicates the control rod position to the EMR1.
The following error messages may make it necessary to replace the actuator:
• 8113:(M17)Rack travel sensor
• 8405:Actuator (positioner, travel meter, fuel rack)

Replacement instruction:
• Switch off the voltage supply to the EMR1 and detach the connection cable from the actuator.
For safety reasons, the positive terminal of the battery must be disconnected.
• Remove the actuator and clean the mounting surface on the engine.
IMPORTANT: With the actuator removed, the control rod is at maximum filling position, i.e. the engine must not be
started in any circumstances!

• Attach the new actuator with sealant (DEUTZ Part No. 0101 6102) to the engine.
When fitting a new actuator, check that it is compatible with the control unit.
At the moment, there are 3 possible combinations for replacement:

20-321
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

Actuator/control unit compatibility

Software Related
Control unit,
Version actuator, Part Procedure for replacing the actuator
Part no.
No. EMR1 No.

This combination must be completely replaced by combi-

0211 1846 0211 1841 nation 0211 1911 / 0211 1910.
Confirmation from company head office is required.
0211 1910 0211 1911
0211 2017 1.08 0211 1926
0211 2017 1.11 0211 1926 The actuator content is the same as 0211 1911.
Only the attachment method for the housing is different.
0211 2686 1.10 0211 1926
0211 2690

EDC actuator and pump are associated with each other.

0211 6178 EDC actuator replacement: additional settings required.
1.31 Bosch EDC
0419 9995 1) Self-calibration (Level 4)
2) Transfer EDC Data to the control unit (Level 3)

IMPORTANT: Special feature of the 1015. Note the pump with EDC actuator.
• Restore the connection to the control unit and start the engine.
• In SERDIA, select the "Parameters" menu ->"Configuration" and, with the "PC->ECU" button, transfer the parameters
to the EMR1, and start the engine.
• When the engine is running satisfactorily, save the parameters in the control unit.
• When the tests with SERDIA are completed, clear the error memory.
• On the SERDIA main menu, print the control unit identification list, and in the "Extras" menu, print the logistics data for
the documentation record.
• The document must be sent along with the old actuator to company head office.

20-322
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

8.2.8 CONTROL UNIT REPLACEMENT

The control unit can be replaced in two ways:
1. When the control unit is damaged, but the data are still readable (communications with SERDIA are possible).
2. A new control unit is installed with engine data set programmed at the factory.

General overview of EMR1 control units

1012/1013/2013 1015 1012/1013 for Deutz-Fahr only
- With MN label - Without MN label - With MN label - Without MN label - With MN label - Without MN label
- Programmed - Not programmed - Programmed - Not programmed - Programmed - Not programmed
-Part No. on control -Part No. on control -Part No. on control
-SERPIC Part No. -SERPIC Part No. -SERPIC Part No.
unit unit unit
0211 2016 0211 2017 0211 2016 0211 2017 0211 2451 0211 2088
See also:
SM 130-99-9305
Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by
0211 2581 0211 2570 0422 6179 0422 6178 0211 2580 0211 2571
See also: See also:
SM 130-27-9308 SM 130-27-9308
Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by Replaced by
0211 26911 1) 0211 2686 1) 0419 4043 1) 0419 9995 1) 0211 2692 1) 0211 2690 1)

1) Current Part No., supplied if ordered.

General overview of EM2 control units

All model series

- With MN label - Without MN label
- Programmed - Not programmed
- SERPIC Part No - Part No.on control unit
0211 2704 0211 2850

Notes on the entries above:

The completed control unit.

- With MN label To be able to operate with the engine, each control unit must be programmed with the specific
data set for the engine (it has a label with the engine number attached). In this way, the engine
- Programmed
- SERPIC Part No. and control unit together form an integrated unit.
Therefore, when ordering a new control unit, the engine number (MN) is indicated along with
the engine model. Control units are completed by DEUTZ.
Unprogrammed control unit.
The engine cannot be started with this control unit.
For reconditioning operations, this control unit can be completed by transferring the specific
- Without MN label engine data set from the 'old' control unit, using SERDIA Level III. See also SERDIA Manual
- Not programmed "Complete programming".
- Part No.on control unit For reconditioning purposes, this means that unprogrammed control units can also be or-
dered from DEUTZ Service partners (Competence Class II). They are then completed (with the
MN label) by the service partner.
If the data set cannot be read from the 'old' control unit, this can be requested by Email in the
same way, as described in SM 0199-99-9287 ‚ "Confirming modifications to EMR data".

20-323
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

METHOD 1.
1. Step: Read engine data set from old control unit:
• Switch on ignition/supply voltage.
• Open the SERDIA program.
• In SERDIA, select the "Parameters“ menu ->"Overall programming".
• Click on the "ECU -> file" button. The configuration data files are read. The "Save as " window then opens.
• Give the file a name, and save.

When saving, the engine number is prompted as the file name - this is only a suggestion. Any other name can be entered.
Finally, click OK to confirm. The file (i.e. the engine data set) is then saved under the name <Engine number>.hex.
The data transferred from the old control unit includes, among other things, indications of the number of operating hours
and number of engine starts.
• Close the program. Switch off the ignition/supply voltage.

2. Step: Replacing the control unit:

Control unit compatibility must be considered, and checked against the above table (Part Numbers should be the same.).
Compatibility of the control unit with the actuator must also be checked and verified.
• Switch on ignition/supply voltage.
• Open the SERDIA program.
• In SERDIA, select the "Parameters“ menu ->"Overall programming".
• Click on the "Programming" button. The "Open" window is displayed.
• Select the saved engine data set (<Engine number>.hex) by double-clicking on it.
• Transfer the engine data set to the EMR1 by clicking on the "OK" button.
• Save the data set in the control unit by clicking on the "Save in ECU" button.

3. Step: Start the engine and check that it runs satisfactorily.

• In the "Error memory" menu clear the error memory.

20-324
SERDIA WHAT TO DO IF...?

METHOD 2.:
Every EMR1 has a specific engine data set, which is kept in a central computer at DEUTZ AG when the engine is delivered.
Any modifications to EMR1 configuration settings must be reported back to DEUTZ AG. When a new control unit is or-
dered, it is programmed with a data set available to DEUTZ AG under the corresponding engine number.
Therefore, if setting corrections to the engine are not reported back to DEUTZ AG, these may not be taken into account
when programming a new control unit.
• Switch off the ignition/supply voltage.
• Remove both connectors from the old control unit.
• Connect the control unit with the engine and vehicle connectors (both 25-pin).
• Switch on ignition/supply voltage.
• Open the SERDIA program.
• In the "Error memory" menu, clear the error memory.
• Start the engine and check that it runs satisfactorily.

8.2.9 ERROR READING THE CONFIGURATION DATA

This error message appears if SERDIA is unable to read the Hex file. The file possibly contains Umlauts (ä, ö, ü), or other
special characters not understood by SERDIA

20-325
 CONTENTS

SECTION 30
CONTENTS

• 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT ..................................... 65 • DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND RECHARGING

• ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER .................... 107 THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ....................... 32
• ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE • DRIVER'S SEAT ................................................... 151
LIGHT SWITCHES ................................................. 73 • ENGINE ............................................................... 213
• AIR CLEANER ....................................................... 57 • ENGINE ECU ....................................................... 175
• AIR COMPRESSOR .............................................. 20 • ENGINE HOOD - LAMP ASSEMBLIES ................... 7
• AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR ................... 33 • EXHAUST PIPE ...................................................... 64
• AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ................... 195 • EXPANSION TANK ................................................ 48
• AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM .............................. 29 • FAN ........................................................................ 54
• AIR INLET PIPE ..................................................... 61 • FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT ............ 99
• AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION • FRONT CARRIER ................................................ 106
VALVE FOR CAB LIFTING ..................................... 25 • FRONT FENDERS ................................................. 85
• AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT ......... 14 • FRONT HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW) ......... 6
• ALTERNATOR ....................................................... 16 • FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY ....................................... 90
• AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE • FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS ...................................... 88
CONTROL CABLES ............................................ 186
• FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY ...................................... 93
• AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS .......................... 116
• FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING ...................... 55
• BATTERY ............................................................... 12
• FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS ...................... 94
• BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM ..................... 71
• FRONT SUSPENSION VALVES .......................... 102
• BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS .............................. 68
• FRONT WHEELS ................................................... 84
• CAB ..................................................................... 204
• FUEL TANK ......................................................... 109
• CAB ACCESS STEPS ........................................... 11
• FUSE AND RELAY BOARD ................................. 173
• CAB DOOR CABLE ............................................. 200
• GEAR PUMP ........................................................ 118
• CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD ................... 158
• GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS ........................... 42
• CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL ............................... 189
• HEATER MATRIX ................................................. 192
• CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES ........ 176
• HEATER VALVE ................................................... 190
• CONDENSER ASSEMBLY .................................... 36
• HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW) ...................... 4
• CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF
• HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (TOP VIEW) ....................... 3
THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
178 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND WIRING (TOP VIEW) 2
• CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version) .... 131 • HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING VALVE .............. 27
• CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC) ... 127 • INTERCOOLER ...................................................... 39
• CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS ........ 136 • LEFT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN ............... 198
• CONTROLS IN THE MULTIFUNCTION • LEFT-HAND CONSOLE ....................................... 169
ARMREST CONSOLE (OPTIONAL) ..................... 152 • LIFT CYLINDERS ................................................. 143
• CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER ...................... 126 • LIFT CYLINDERS ................................................. 145
• DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF • LIFT DRAFT SENSOR ......................................... 150
THE FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS .............. 97 • LIFT POSITION SENSOR .................................... 146
• LIFT POSITION SENSOR .................................... 147

30-i
 CONTENTS

• LIFT VALVE BLOCK ...............................................87 • REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS ........................ 105

• METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND • RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING
REFITTING OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING .............1 COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT AND FANBELT ........ 17
• OPERATION OF THE AIR CONDITIONING • RIGHT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN ............ 197
SYSTEM .................................................................30 • RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE .................................... 162
• PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ..................................188 • SILENCER ............................................................. 63
• PARKING BRAKES ..............................................199 • STARTER MOTOR ................................................ 15
• POSITIONING OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION • STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND
POSITION SENSOR .............................................103 THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER ...................... 156
• POWER STEERING PUMP ..................................113 • STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH
• POWER STEERING UNIT ......................................74 UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................... 154
• POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS ..........................76 • TENSION OF THE COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT ... 31
• POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS • TRAILER AIR BRAKES COUPLING VALVE ........... 26
DISPLAY ..............................................................203 • TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE ..... 202
• PRESSURE TRANSDUCER ...................................24 • TRAILER PARKING AND
• PRIORITY VALVE .................................................125 SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES ........... 22
• PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION • TRANSMISSION LIFT AND FRONT
CONTROL CABLES .............................................183 SUSPENSION ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS 171
• RADIATOR .............................................................44 • TURBOCHARGER ................................................. 59
• RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY ..................49 • VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP .................... 120
• REAR HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW) ............5
• REAR WHEELS ......................................................86
• RECEIVER-DRIER ..................................................35

30-ii
 METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING

METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING

1 - The rigid pipes of the various systems can all be re- IMPORTANT
moved individually , i.e. without having to remove
1 - After removing pipes, immediately plug the ends
any pipes belonging to other systems.
of the pipes and the open fittings on the compo-
2 - For particularly complex removal operations, num- nents from which they were disconnected in or-
ber the pipes in the order in which they are removed, der to prevent the entry of contaminants.
label any intermediate connections and the posi-
2 - After disconnecting electrical connectors, pro-
tions of the intermediate retaining clamps. Refit the
tect them against oil, dust and other contami-
pipes in reverse order to removal.
nants by covering them in bags made of
3 - After having repositioned the pipes in their original waterproof material and attach the bags to the
locations, tighten the fittings by hand and locate the wiring with insulating tape.
retaining clamps and intermediate fixings.
3 - Should any oil, coolant, moisture or water come
4 - First tighten the fittings using also a holding wrench into contact with the connectors, clean them with
to the torques specified in the tables in Section 00, compressed air at low pressure (max. 2 bar) and
and then tighten the pipe clamps. clean the wires and contacts with isopropyl al-
cohol or a specific water-repellent product.
5 - To enable the operator to determine the correct
routes for the rigid pipes and the wiring harnesses on 4 - Check wiring fixings carefully; these must not im-
the tractor frame, we have provided photographs pinge on the connectors and must be positioned
showing the original routes for the two versions of at regular intervals of about 30 cm to prevent vi-
the tractor with additional oil flow obtained by gear bration that could cause an interruption in cur-
pumps and a variable displacement pump, both of rent flow or signal loss.
which are equipped with air trailer braking.

30-1
 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND WIRING (TOP VIEW)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND WIRING (TOP VIEW)

30-2
 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (TOP VIEW)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (TOP VIEW)

30-3
 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

30-4
 REAR HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

REAR HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

30-5
 FRONT HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

FRONT HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS (SIDE VIEW)

30-6
 ENGINE HOOD - LAMP ASSEMBLIES

REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE HOOD -

LAMP ASSEMBLIES
1. Removal of lamp assemblies
1 - Press the button (1) and open the engine hood (2). 2

F0075420

2 - Unplug the connector (3) for the power supply to

the lamp assemblies and release the wiring (4) from
4
the retaining straps.

F0075430

3 - Lower the hood (2) and remove the four screws (5)
securing the grille. 2

F0075440

4 - Remove the grille (6) with all the lamp assemblies.

6

F0075450

30-7
 ENGINE HOOD - LAMP ASSEMBLIES

2. Removal of the engine hood

2
1 - Raise the hood and unplug the connector (1) for the
feed to the lamp assemblies and horn.
2 - Unscrew and remove the central screw (2) and its 1
washer from the hood support (3).
3

F0075431

3 - Unscrew and remove the six screws (4).

4 4

F0075460

4 - Remove the left panel (5) between the hood and the
cab windscreen.

F0075470

5 - While supporting the hood, detach the gas springs

(6).
Close the hood, but just rest it in position without
latching it.

F0075480

30-8
 ENGINE HOOD - LAMP ASSEMBLIES

6 - Unscrew and remove the side screws (7) and wash-

ers securing the hood support (3). 7 7
NOTE. The side screws (7) must be removed (with the
hood closed) through the apertures exposed by
removal of the left panel.
7 - Remove the hood.

Hood: 48 kg (105.7 lb.)

3
NOTE. In the absence of the specific equipment, four
persons will be required in order to remove
the hood.
F0075490

3. Removal of the lower guard

2
1 - Detach the lower stop (1).
2 - Lift the condenser-intercooler assembly (2) and
place it in the position for cleaning.

F0075500

3 - Remove the guards (3) and (4).

4
3

F0075510

4 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (5) and the rear
nuts (6) with their washers.
5

F0075520

30-9
 ENGINE HOOD - LAMP ASSEMBLIES

5 - Remove the lower guard (7), withdrawing it towards

the front.

7
F0075530

REFITTING THE HOOD - LAMP

ASSEMBLIES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-10
 CAB ACCESS STEPS

REMOVAL OF THE CAB ACCESS STEPS

1 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (1) securing the lower

fender (2).

F0017170

2 - Loosen the bolts (3) and (4) securing the steps (5).
★ For safety reasons, do not remove the bolts yet.
3
5

4 4

F0017180

3 - Attach a hoist to the steps (5).

Steps: 17 kg (37.5 lb.) 5

4 - Remove the central bolt (3), disengage the steps (5)
from the two remaining bolts (4) and remove the steps.

F0017190

REFITTING THE CAB

ACCESS STEPS
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-11
 BATTERY

REMOVAL OF THE BATTERY

1 - Open the tool box (1) and remove the retaining nut (2).
Remove the tool box (1).
2

F0017120

2 - Remove the bolts (3) with their washers (4) and remove
the battery cover (5).
3 4

3 4

F0017130

3 - Remove the terminal covers (6) and disconnect the

leads (7) and (8).
1
Always disconnect the negative lead (–) before 8
the positive lead (+). 6

7
F0017140

4 - Loosen off the nuts (9) sufficiently to tilt and remove

the battery (12) securing clamp (10) and rods (11).

10

11 12

F0017150

30-12
 BATTERY

5 - Remove the battery (12) using the handles provided.

If the battery is not to be used for several days,
store it in a dry, well-ventilated place at a tem-
perature above +5°.

Battery: 45 kg (99 lb.)

12
F0017160

REFITTING THE BATTERY

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Always re-connect the positive lead (+) before the
negative lead (–).

30-13
 AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT

REMOVAL OF THE AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT

(Versions with air trailer braking only)
Vent residual pressure from the reservoir by removing
the cap (A) and pressing the button (B).
1 - Remove the battery.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE BATTERY").

A B
F0075540

2 - Disconnect the pipes (1), (2) and (3) from the valves
mounted directly on the reservoir (4).

1
2

3 4
F0075550

3 - Support the assembly using suitable lifting equip-

ment; unscrew and remove the bolts (5) and spacers 6
(6) and (7).
★ Note that the thicker spacers are located at the top
of the bracket. 5 7

F0018120

4 - Lower the assembly (8); move the battery leads (9) out
of the way and remove the complete assembly.

9
REFITTING THE AIR 8
RESERVOIR
AND BATTERY SUPPORT
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

F0018130

30-14
 STARTER MOTOR

REMOVAL OF THE STARTER MOTOR

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1
1 - Raise the hood (1).

F0075560

2 - Remove the terminal protector (2) and the nut (3) se-
curing leads (4) and (5). 4
2 3

F0075570

3 - Remove the terminal cover (6) and disconnect the lead

(7). 8
4 - Remove the starter motor (8).
6
For details, see the engine manual.

8
7

F0075580

REFITTING THE
STARTER MOTOR
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-15
 ALTERNATOR

REMOVAL OF THE ALTERNATOR

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the neg-

ative battery lead (--).
1
1 - Raise the hood (1).

F0075560

2 - Remove the hood (2).

3 - Remove the cover (3), undo the nut (4) and discon- 7 2
nect the lead (5).
4 - Remove the nut (6) and disconnect the lead (7).
6

5 - Remove the alternator (8).

NOTE. For details, see the engine workshop manual. 5

3 4 8
F0075590

REFITTING THE
ALTERNATOR
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-16
 RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT AND FANBELT

RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT

AND FANBELT
★ The drivebelt must be renewed at the first sign of
wear. Check for fraying, cracks and separation of
1
the belt plies.
★ The operations described below refer to tractors
equipped with front PTO and cab air conditioning.
If the tractor in question is not equipped with these
items, any operations that refer specifically to them
should be ignored.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the neg-
ative battery lead (--).
1 - Raise the hood (1).
F0075560

2 - Unscrew and remove the screws (2) with their

3
washers and remove the guards (3). 3

2 2

F0075511

3 - Loosen the nut (4) securing the air conditioning

compressor (5). 4

5
F0075600

4 - Loosen the nut (6) and turn the screw (7) counter-
clockwise to slacken the drivebelt (8) of the com-
pressor (5). 6
Slacken the drivebelt sufficiently to be able to slip it
off the compressor pulley. 7

5
8

F0075610

30-17
 RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT AND FANBELT

5 - Disconnect the pipes of the radiator-coolers as-

sembly, move the assembly towards the front of the
tractor and remove the fan (9).
(For details see "REMOVAL OF THE RADIATORS -
COOLERS ASSEMBLY").

F0075620

6 - For models with front PTO only:

Loosen and fully unscrew the six bolts (10) securing
the flange of the cardan shaft (11).
10
7 - Detach the flange (12) from the flexible coupling
(13).

11
13

12

F0075630

8 - Remove the compressor drivebelt (8) and then the

fanbelt (14).
NOTE. For removal and refitting of the fanbelt see the
engine workshop manual.
9 - Fit the compressor drivebelt (8) and tension by turn-
ing the bolt (7) clockwise.
(For details see "ADJUSTING THE TENSION OF THE
COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT").
14 8

F0075640

10 - Secure the compressor in position by tightening the

nuts (4) and (6). 4
6

F0075650

30-18
 RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT AND FANBELT

11 - Reposition the radiator/coolers assembly and refill

with the appropriate liquids. 3 3

12 - Refit the guards (3).

F0075512

30-19
 AIR COMPRESSOR

REMOVAL OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR

(For air trailer braking)
Vent residual pressure from the reservoir by removing
the cap (A) and pressing the button (B).
★ For models with separate power steering pump, first
remove the pump. (For details, see "REMOVAL OF
THE POWER STEERING PUMP").

A B
F0075540

1 - Loosen the union (1) and disconnect the suction

line (2) from the compressor (3). 5

2 - Loosen the pipe fitting (4) and disconnect the delivery 2

4
pipe (5).
1

F0075660

3 - Disconnect the compressor lubrication pipe (6).

★ Recover the gaskets, which may be re-utilised if
they are not damaged.

F0075670

4 - Unscrew and remove the nut (7) and the two bolts (8).

8
F0075680

30-20
 AIR COMPRESSOR

5 - Remove the compressor (3) complete with the O-ring

seal (9).
1
Compressor: 12 kg (26.4 lb.) 3

F0075690

REFITTING THE
AIR COMPRESSOR 9
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

If the oil has been drained from the compressor crank-

case, add engine oil before re-connecting the lube
pipe.

Quantity of lubricating oil:

approximately 100 g (0.220 lb.)

1
★ Check the condition of the O-ring (9). F0017813

★ Apply grease to the seating to hold the O-ring (9) in

position.

30-21
 TRAILER PARKING AND SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES

REMOVAL OF THE TRAILER PARKING AND

SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition. 3
1
Eliminate all residual pressure from the trailer air brak-
ing circuit. 3

PARKING BRAKES
(Versions with air braking)
1- Disconnect the hydraulic brakes pipes (2) and upper
air delivery pipes (3) from the valve (1).
2
F0075700

2 - Disconnect the pipe (4) from the rear of the valve (1).
3 - Disconnect the tie-rod (6) from the valve control lever 4
(5). 1

5
1
6

F0075710

4 - Remove the two lower nuts and bolts (7); remove the
valve (1). 1
7

F0075720

SERVICE BRAKES (Version EXPORT F)

1 - Disconnect the three brake control and delivery pipes
(9) from the valve (8).
9
2 - Remove the bolts (10) and remove the valve.

10

8
F0020920

30-22
 TRAILER PARKING AND SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES

REFITTING OF THE TRAILER PARKING AND

SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and allow the pressure to build in the
air braking circuit.
2 - Check the seal at all removed fittings using a soapy
solution.
3 - Bleed the braking system
(For details see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").
4 - Check that the parking brake valve control lever op-
erates at the correct point and, if necessary, adjust the
length of the tie-rod (6).

Adjusting the length of the tie-rod

5
1
1 - Check that the parking brakes are perfectly adjusted
and that they are released.
2 - Apply the parking brake a few times, checking that
tractor and trailer brakes are applied simultaneously.
3 - If necessary, adjust the length of the tie-rod (5) to
obtain simultaneous braking actions.

D0004611

30-23
 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

(Version with air braking)
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition.
Eliminate all residual pressure from the air braking cir- 2
cuit.
3
1 - Disconnect the connector (1).
2 - Loosen the fitting (2) and remove the transducer (3).

1
F0075730

REFITTING THE PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-24
 AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION VALVE FOR CAB LIFTING

REMOVAL OF THE AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION VALVE

FOR CAB LIFTING
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition.
Vent residual pressure from the reservoir by removing
the cap (A) and pressing the button (B).

A B
F0075540

1 - Loosen the fitting (1), remove the pressure reducing

valve (2) and position it to one side.
★ If the valve is to be renewed, disconnect also the
2
pipe (3).

3 1

F0075551

2 - Disconnect the pipe (5) from the pressure regulating

valve (4).
★ Also loosen the fitting on the other end of the pipe.
3 - Hold firm the fitting (6) on the reservoir while unscrew- 6
ing the fitting (7) and remove the valve. 5

7
4
F0075740

REFITTING THE AIR

PRESSURE REGULATING/
REDUCTION VALVE FOR
CAB LIFTING
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and allow pressure to build in the
circuit.
2 - Check the seals for leaks using a soapy solution.

30-25
 TRAILER AIR BRAKES COUPLING VALVE

REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF THE TRAILER AIR BRAKES

COUPLING VALVE
★ The removal operation illustrated refers to the ver-
sion I.

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition.

Discharge the residual pressure fully from trailer air

braking circuit.

1. Removal
4
3
★ The valve complete with its support should only be re-
moved in the event of removal of the complete control
valve assembly.
2
1 - Remove the three retaining bolts (1) of the support (2)
and position the assembly to one side.
2 - Only if fitted: 1
Unscrew and remove the retaining screws (3) of the
support for the flow control knobs (4) for the right-
hand control valves.
F0075760

2. Renewal
1 - Label the pipes (5), (6) and the fittings (7), (8) to avoid 7
confusion on refitting. 9 6
8
2 - Disconnect the pipes (5) and (6) from the valve 9).
3 - Remove the valve (9) after removing the three retaining
nuts and bolts (10).

10
5

F0075750

30-26
 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING VALVE

REMOVAL OF HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING VALVE

(CUNA VERSION)
1 - Station the tractor on firm, level ground and apply
the parking brake.
2 - Stop the engine and remove the key from the
starter switch.
1 - Remove the cover (1) and unplug the connectors (2).
2

1
F0058510

2 - Detach the connector (4) from the solenoid valve (3).

F0058520

3 - Disconnect the inlet pipeline (6) and return pipeline (7)

connecting the brake valve (5) to the trailer socket (8)
and to the lubrication circuit (9).
5
Version with variable displacement pump only:
disconnect the LS signal line (10).
9 10

8
7

6
F0058530

4 - Disconnect the pipe (11) from the flow divider (12).

12
11

F0058540

30-27
 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING VALVE

5 - Loosen and remove the bolts (13) (qty 2) and remove

the entire braking valve (5).

13
5

F0058550

REFITTING THE HYDRAULIC

TRAILER BRAKING
VALVE
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Bleed the air from the brake cylinders.
(For details, see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").

30-28
 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

2
Low pressure gas
14÷17 bar
(203÷246,5 psi)
High pressure gas
3 bar 28 bar
(43,5 psi) (406 psi)
High pressure liquid

1a

3 1

9
CAB INTERIOR
D0022890

1- Compressor with electromagnetic clutch TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2- Condenser • Minimum and maximum safety pressure:
3- Receiver-drier 2.4 ÷ 28.5 bar (34.8 – 413.3 psi)
4- Bistable pressure switch for compressor clutch en- • Refrigerant type: R134a
gagement/disengagement • Refrigerant quantity:
5- Expansion valve Mod. 108 118 128
6- Evaporator
g 1950 1950 1950
7- Evaporator temperature sensor
oz. 68.74 68.74 68.74
8- Cab air blowers
9- Air cowling • Total quantity of moisture-free oil added at 1st charging:
210 cm³ (12.81 Cu.in.)

30-29
 OPERATION OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

OPERATION OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

The compressor (1) is driven from the crankshaft via a The temperature of the air flow over the evaporator (6)
drivebelt and pulley with an electromagnetic clutch (1a), generated by the centrifugal blowers (8) is significantly
which is operated from a switch on the control panel. higher than -- 8°C (17.6°F), and therefore it gives up its
The system is protected by a safety pressure switch, heat to the refrigerant, causing it to boil and evaporate.
which performs the following functions: On leaving the evaporator (6), the refrigerant returns to the
1 - To inhibit engagement of the electromagnetic clutch compressor (1) to repeat the cycle.
(1a) when the system pressure falls below 2.4 bar The removal of heat from the ambient air flowing over the
(34.8 psi) as a result of incomplete charging or re- evaporator causes the moisture in the air to condense,
frigerant loss. and the air is thus dehumidified; the moisture condenses
2 - To disengage the clutch (1a) and thereby stop the on the fins of the evaporator, where, if it is not maintained
compressor when the pressure exceeds the permit- at temperature above 0°C (32°F), it will freeze and com-
ted maximum of 28.5 bar (413.3 psi) (generally as a prise the efficiency of the evaporator.
result of over-heating). The task of maintaining the evaporator at a temperature
The refrigerant (in vapour state) is drawn in by the com- above 0°C (32°F) (and within the optimum temperature for
pressor where it is compressed, causing the temperature efficient heat exchange ), is performed by an electronic
of the vapour to rise; the refrigerant flows to the condens- temperatures sensor (7); this sensor disengages the com-
er (2), where its heat is radiated to the air flow and it is thus pressor clutch (1a) when the temperature falls to the lower
cooled to the point where it condenses to high-pressure limit and engages the clutch (1a) when the evaporator
liquid. temperature reaches an upper limit.
On leaving the condenser, the liquefied refrigerant flows The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins con-
to the receiver-drier (3) which performs three main func- tains dust, pollen and other particles suspended in the air;
tions: to filter out any impurities, to absorb any water in the continuous condensation thus has the effect of purifying
circuit, and finally, to act as a storage reservoir. the air, and the drips of condensate are conveyed out of
On leaving the receiver-drier, the clean, dry liquid passes the vehicle via two ducts.
to the evaporator (6) through an expansion valve (5), A fixed quantity of moisture-free oil is added to the circuit
which meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator to in order to lubricate all the mechanical components of the
ensure optimum evaporation. system; a certain percentage of this oil continuously cir-
In the evaporator, the refrigerant is heated and expands to culates in the form of an oil mist, thereby lubricating the
the point of evaporation with an ambient temperature of compressor (pistons and bearings) and the expansion
around -- 8°C (17.6°F). valve.

30-30
 TENSION OF THE COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT

MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

The checks and servicing operations required for the air 4 - Inspection and renewal of the electromagnetic
conditioning system are as follows: clutch pulley (to be carried out at a specialised serv-
1 - Checking the tension and condition of the compres- ice centre).
sor drivebelt.
5 - Removal and renewal of the receiver-drier.
2 - Discharging, flushing and recharging of the system
using a specific servicing machine and R134a refrig- 6 - Removal and renewal of the condenser.
erant.
7 - Removal of the evaporator and the electronic tem-
3 - Removal and renewal of the compressor. perature sensor.
(For these operations see "REMOVAL OF THE AIR
CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR").

ADJUSTING THE TENSION OF THE COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT

★ Before adjusting the tension, carefully examine the
drivebelt for signs of wear.
The belt must be renewed immediately at the first sign
of cracking, fraying or separation of the plies. 1
If a new belt is fitted, re-adjust the tension after ap-
prox. 15 operating hours.
1 - Raise the hood and remove the left guard (1).

F0075770

2 - Loosen the nut (2) of the tensioner block (3) and

loosen the nut (4) securing the compressor (5). 3
3 - Screw in the screw (6) to obtain a belt deflection of: 2
★ Static deflection ”A” on first fitting:
13 mm belt: 550±50 N 6
★ Static deflection ”A” after 15 minutes: 4
13 mm belt: 400±50 N 5
★ Use the same tool used for tensioning the alterna-
tor drivebelt.
The check should be carried out with the engine
cold.
F0075611

4 - Tighten the nut of the tensioner block (3) and secure

the compressor by tightening nut (4).
5 - Recheck the drivebelt tension.

30-31
 DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND RECHARGING

THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1 - Before discharging, flushing and recharging the d - Separation of the moisture-free oil from the
air conditioning system, inspect the system for liquid refrigerant and determination of its
leaks using a suitable leak detector. quantity by weight.
2 - In order to carry out the system servicing oper- e - Recharging the system with exactly the same
ations you will require a dedicated servicing ma- amounts of refrigerant and oil as those recov-
chine capable of performing the following tasks: ered.
a - Aspiration of the refrigerant fluid. f - Measuring the system delivery side pressure
b - Creation of a high vacuum to purge the sys- and return pressure (low pressure).
tem of contaminants.
c - Filtration of the recovered refrigerant.

1. Discharging the system

1 - Connect the service machine to the high pressure
service valve (1) and follow the specific instructions for
the service machine to discharge the system.
2 - Disconnect the system component to be renewed or
overhauled immediately after the service machine
stops; plug the open ends of the system pipes as 1
quickly as possible.

2. Flushing and recharging the system

Before each recharging, the system must be purged of all
air, moisture and contaminants (oxides, deposits).
This entails creating a high vacuum within the system to
evaporate any moisture present. The vapour, when extract-
F0075780
ed, draws with it any contaminants present in the system.
★ For the flushing and recharging operations, the serv-
ice machine must be connected to the high (1) and low
(2) pressure service valves.
Maximum vacuum" must be maintained for at least 10
minutes.
After flushing, the moisture-free oil recovered during the
discharging operation must be re-introduced into the sys- 2
tem, followed by the refrigerant.

Quantity of refrigerant (R134a):

Mod. 108 118 128
g 1950 1950 1950
oz. 68.74 68.74 68.74 F0075790

Quantity of oil: the quantity recovered.

If the system has to be discharged and flushed in order
to renew a system component, the quantity of oil in the
replaced component must be measured and the same
amount of new oil must added to that recovered with
the refrigerant
For details of the oil and refrigerant recharging pro-
cedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the
service machine.

30-32
 AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR

REMOVAL OF AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR

1 - Raise the hood (1).

2 - Recover the refrigerant from the system. 1
(For details, see "MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON-
DITIONING SYSTEM").

F0075560

3 - Remove the left guard (2).

F0075771

4 - Disconnect the inlet (4) and delivery (5) pipelines from

the compressor (3).
★ Plug the open ends of the pipes immediately to 5
prevent moisture getting into the circuit. 1

3
F0075601

5 - Cut the clip from the wiring harness and detach the
connector (6) of the electromagnetic clutch control
unit.

F0075800

30-33
 AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR

6 - Loosen the lock nut (7) on the pivot bolt (8) supporting
the compressor (3). 7 8

3
F0075602

7 - Loosen the nut (9) securing the tensioner block (10).

8 - Turn the tensioner screw (11) counterclockwise to 10
slacken the compressor drivebelt (12). 9
★ Loosen the drivebelt sufficiently to be able to
slip it off the compressor pulley.
11

12

F0075612

9 - Remove the pivot bolt and lift the entire compressor

(3) clear.
3

REFITTING THE AIR

CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
• Refitting is the reverse of removal

1
★ Remove the plugs and connect the pipes immediate-
ly, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent the entry of F0075810
moisture.
★ Check the condition of the O-ring seals and renew
them if damaged.
1 - Adjust the tension of the compressor drivebelt
(For details, see " RENEWAL OF THE AIR CONDI-
TIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT AND FAN-
BELT").
2 - Flush and recharge the system.
(For details see " DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM").

30-34
 RECEIVER-DRIER

REMOVAL OF THE RECEIVER-DRIER

1 - Recover the refrigerant from the system.

(For details, see "MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON-
DITIONING SYSTEM").

F0075820

2 - Remove the screw and remove the clip (1) securing

the outlet pipe (2).
2

F0075830

3 - Disconnect the inlet (4) and outlet (2) pipes from the re-
ceiver-drier (3). 2
★ Plug the ends of the pipes immediately to prevent 3
moisture getting into the system. 1
4 - Loosen the filter retaining clamp (5) and remove the
unit.
If a new receiver-drier is to be installed, measure the 4
quantity of oil contained in the old unit in order to de-
termine the quantity of oil to be added to the system.
5

REFITTING THE RECEIVERDRIER F0075840

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Remove the plugs and connect the pipes immediate-
ly, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent the entry of
moisture.
★ Check the condition of the O-rings and replace them if
damaged.
1 - Flush and recharge the system.
(For details see " DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM").

30-35
 CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL OF THE CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

Remove the key from the starter switch and raise the
front hood.
1 - Recover the refrigerant from the air conditioning sys-
tem.
(For details, see " DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM").

2 - Remove the clip (1).

3 - Disconnect the pipe (3) from the condenser (2). 2
1
★ Immediately plug the pipe to prevent moisture
from entering the system. 1

F0075850

4 - Remove the hose clamp (4) and disconnect the pipe

(5) from the receiver-drier (6). 5
1
6
5 - Remove the receiver-drier (6).
(For details. see "REMOVAL OF THE RECEIVER-DRI-
ER"). 1
★ Immediately plug the pipe and the filter to pre-
vent moisture from entering the system. 4

F0075841

6 - Remove the guards (7) and (8).

8
7

F0075513

30-36
 CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

7 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (9) and rear

nuts (10) and the washers; remove the lower guard
(11), withdrawing it towards the front of the tractor. 10
9

11
F0075521

8 - Remove the lower guard (11), withdrawing it to-

wards the front of the tractor.

11
F0075531

9 - Remove the spring clips (12) and withdraw the pivot

pins (13). 2

12
13

F0053390

10 - Remove the upper knobs (14) and (15).

14 15

F0075860

30-37
 CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

11 - Remove the complete condenser assembly (2).

2

F0075870

REFITTING
CONDENSER 16

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Remove the plugs and reconnect the pipelines
straight away, tightening fully to ensure mois-
ture does not get into the system.
★ Inspect the O-rings and renew if damaged.

2
★ Position the plastic washers (16) between the F0075880

condenser and its mountings.

1 - Purge and recharge the air conditioning system.
(For details, see " DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM").

30-38
 INTERCOOLER

REMOVAL OF THE INTERCOOLER

Remove the key from the starter switch and remove

the engine side panels and front grille.
2
1 - Detach and lift the intercooler assembly (1).
2 - While supporting the assembly (1), detach the gas 1
springs (2).
The gas springs must be detached from the inter-
cooler.
3 - Lower the intercooler assembly (1) while support-
ing it down to the lower catch.

F0075890

4 - Unscrew and remove the knobs (3) and (4) and turn
the condenser over. 4
3

F0075861

5 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (5) securing the in-

tercooler internal inlet and outlet hoses (6). 6

F0075900

6 - Unscrew and remove pivot bolts (7) of the inter-

cooler assembly and the relative washers. 1

F0075910

30-39
 INTERCOOLER

7 - Remove the bolts (8) with their washers, and re-

move the supports (9).

8 9

F0075920

8 - Drive out the centre bushes (10) and the Teflon seals
(11). 2 10 11
Renew the Teflon washers on reassembly.

F0053451

9 - Unscrew and remove the side bolts (12) securing

the intercooler. 3

12

12

F0053461

10 - Raise the intercooler (13) and remove it vertically.

4 13
Note which way round the seals are fitted.

F0075930

30-40
 INTERCOOLER

11 - Recover the metal oil seals (14) and inspect them

carefully; renew them at the first sign of deformation
or abnormal wear.
14

F0075940

REFITTING THE INTERCOOLER

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Pivot bolts: 45±5 Nm (33.2±3.7 lb.ft.)

2
Bushes: engine oil

3
★ Before tightening the bolts, tighten down the in-
tercooler retaining knobs. D0022920

4
★ Ensure that the seatings of the oil rings are per-
fectly clean.
★ To keep the oil seals in place during assembly,
smear lightly with grease; lubricate the rolling
surfaces.

Grease: Molikote

30-41
 GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS

REMOVAL OF THE GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS

Remove the key from the starter switch and raise the
2
front hood. 1
1 - Remove the guards (1) and (2).

F0075514

2 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (3) and rear

nuts (4) with their washers.
4
3

F0075522

3 - Remove the lower guard (5), withdrawing it towards

the front of the tractor.

5
F0075532

4 - Release the lower clip (6) and raise the complete con-
denser-intercooler assembly (7). 7

F0075501

30-42
 GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS

5 - Disconnect the oil inlet and outlet pipes (8) of the cool-
er (9).
★ Plug the pipe and the cooler immediately to pre-
vent moisture getting in.
9
6 - Disconnect the fuel inlet and outlet pipes (10) and 8
drain the fuel of lower cooler.
★ Plug the pipe immediately to prevent moisture 10
getting in.

F0076060

7 - Unscrew and remove the bolt (11) and disconnect

from the radiator the bracket (12) that limits the tilt
angle of oil and fuel coolers. 11
12

F0053491

8 - Remove the ring (13) and the pins (14).

9 - Remove the cooler (9).

13

14 9

F0053501

REFITTING THE GEARBOX OIL/

FUEL COOLERS
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and allow the gearbox oil and fuel to
circulate for about 5 minutes to fill the coolers; check
the seals and fittings for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and check the gearbox oil level; top
up, if necessary.
This operation is essential if new coolers have
been fitted.

30-43
 RADIATOR

REMOVAL OF THE RADIATOR

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully raise
2
the front hood. 1
1 - Remove the guards (1) and (2).

F0075514

2 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (3) and rear

nuts (4) with their washers.
4
3

F0075522

3 - Remove the lower guard (5), withdrawing it towards

the front of the tractor.

5
F0075532

4 - Connect a pipe “A” to the drain cock (6) and recover

the coolant.
6
Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall)
A

F0075950

30-44
 RADIATOR

5 - Disconnect the radiator connection hose (8) from the

expansion tank (7).

F0053521

6 - Detach the hose (9) of the thermostat connection

pipe from the radiator.
★ Recover the washer (10). 10
9

F0076070

7 - Remove the plug (11) and disconnect the radiator

from the bottom hose (12).

11 12

F0053542

8 - Release the lower clip (13) and raise the complete con-
denser-intercooler assembly (14). 14
9 - Tilt the oil-fuel cooler (15) towards the front.

13

15

F0075502

30-45
 RADIATOR

10 - Unscrew and remove the bolt (16) and disconnect

from the radiator the bracket (17) that limits the tilt
angle of oil and fuel coolers. 16
17

F0053492

11- Loosen and remove the gas spring mountings (18) and
the retaining bolts (19) of the radiator (20). 18
20

19

F0053551

12 - Tilt the radiator (20) forward to disengage the and the

connection hoses for the coolant inlet and outlet pipes
and the expansion tank connection pipe.

20

F0053561

13 - Raise the radiator (20) and withdraw it vertically

upwards.

Radiator: circa 20 kg (44 lb.)

★ Carefully check the condition of the vibration 20
dampers (21) and renew them at the first sign of
cracking or deformation. 21
21

F0053571

30-46
 RADIATOR

REFITTING OF THE RADIATOR

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1 - Fill the engine cooling system.

Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ
(7.4 US.gall)

2 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to circulate; check the system for leaks.
3 - Stop the engine, check the coolant level in the expan-
sion tank and top up if necessary.

30-47
 EXPANSION TANK

REMOVAL OF EXPANSION TANK

1 - Drain off part of the engine coolant.

Coolant: approx. 8 ᐉ (2.1 US. gall.)

2
2 - Disconnect the pipe on the left side (1) and remove
the circlip (2).
1

F0075960

3 - Disconnect the pipes (3) and (4) on the right-hand side

4 - Unscrew and remove the nut (5) and washer (6).

5 6

4
F0075970

5 - Unscrew and remove the screw (7) and the washer

(8). 7 8
9
6 - Remove the expansion tank (9).

F0075980

REFITTING THE
EXPANSION TANK
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Fill the engine cooling system.

Coolant: approx 8 ᐉ (2.1 US. gall.)

2 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to circulate.
3 - Stop the engine, check the level in the expansion tank
and top up if necessary.

30-48
 RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL OF THE RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

Remove the key from the starter switch and gre-

2
move the engine hood. 1
(For details see "REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE HOOD -
LAMP ASSEMBLIES").
1 - Remove the guards (1) and (2).

F0075514

2 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (3) and rear

nuts (4) with their washers.
4
3

F0075522

3 - Remove the lower guard (5), withdrawing it towards

the front of the tractor.
4 - Recover the refrigerant from the air conditioning
system.
(For details, see "MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON-
DITIONING SYSTEM").

5
F0075532

5 - Remove the screws (6) and release the dividers (7).

7 7
6
6

F0075990

30-49
 RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

6 - Disconnect the compressor connection pipe (8) from

the condenser. 1 9
★ Plug the pipe and the condenser fitting imme- 8
diately to prevent moisture getting in.
7 - Remove the clips (9) and release the pipe (8).

F0076000

8 - Disconnect the line (10) to the evaporator from the

receiver-drier.
★ Plug the pipe and the filter immediately to pre-
vent moisture getting in. 1 10

9 - Remove the clips (11) and release the pipe (10).

11
11

F0076010

10 - Raise the intercooler, withdraw air conditioning

pipes (8) & (10) from the guide rollers (12) and direct
them towards the rear of the tractor over the radi-
12
ator support. 8 10

F0076020

11 - Connect a pipe “A” to the drain cock and drain off the
coolant.

Coolant: approx 28 ᐉ
(7.4 US.gall.) A
12 - Remove the expansion tank.
(For details see "REMOVAL OF EXPANSION TANK").

F0075951

30-50
 RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

13 - Disconnect the transmission oil inlet and outlet pipes

13
(14) of the cooler (15) from the fittings (13). 15
14 - Disconnect the fuel inlet and outlet pipes (16) of the
cooler (15). 14

15 - Push the fitting (17) and the pipes (16) towards the rear
of the tractor, beyond the radiator support.

16 17 16
F0076030

16 - Loosen the clamps (18) securing the hoses (19) and

disconnect the hoses (20) from the pipes to the inter- 19
cooler.

20

18

F0076040

17 - Disconnect the hose (21) to the thermostat (22) from

the radiator. 21
22

F0076071

18 - Remove the plug (23) and disconnect the bottom hose

(24) from the radiator.

23 24

F0053543

30-51
 RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

19 - Unscrew and remove the rear fixing bolts (25) of the

support (26).

25

26
F0053651

20 - Unscrew and remove the front fixing bolts (27) of the

support (26). 27
27

26
F0076080

21 - Unscrew and remove the four nuts (28) securing the

fan (29).
Push the fan towards the radiator to disengage it from 28
the studs. 29
Rotate the fan 90° so that it cannot become
reattached to the studs during removal of the
assembly.

F0076090

22 - Detach and raise the intercooler assembly and posi-

tion a lifting sling “C” between the transmission oil
cooler and the rubber stops (30). 15
31
Insert two bars “B” and force them into the slots (31),
over the sling, making sure that they also engage the
cooler (15). 30
Lower and attach the intercooler assembly. C

F0053691

30-52
 RADIATORS - COOLERS ASSEMBLY

23 - Pass a lifting sling “D” under the intercooler inlet and

outlet fittings (32).
Attach a hoist to the lifting slings and take up the slack. D
Assembly: 70 kg (154 lb.)

32
F0076100

24 - Shift the radiator/coolers assembly (33) toward the

front of the tractor until the bulkhead fittings are dis-
engaged, and then remove it.

33

F0076110

REFITTING THE RADIATORS -

COOLERS ASSEMBLY
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Remove the plugs and reconnect the pipes im-
mediately, tightening the fittings fully to ensure
moisture does not get into the system.
★ Check the condition of the seals and renew
them if damaged.
1 - Purge and recharge the air conditioning system.
(For details, see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").
2 - Fill the engine cooling system with coolant.

Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ
(7.4 US.gall.)
3 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant and transmission oil to circulate. Check for
leaks.
4 - Stop the engine and check the coolant level in the ex-
pansion tank and the transmission oil level, topping
them up if necessary.

30-53
 FAN

REMOVAL OF THE FAN

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully raise
the front hood.
1 - Drain the engine coolant.

Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ
(7.4 US.gall.)
2 - Remove the expansion tank.
(For details see "REMOVAL OF EXPANSION TANK").

F0075952

3 - Disconnect all the pipes from the radiator-coolers

assembly; raise it and move it towards the front of
the tractor
(For details see "REMOVAL OF THE RADIATORS -
COOLERS ASSEMBLY").

F0075620

4 - Unscrew and remove the four nuts (1) securing the fan
(2).
1
5 - Push the fan (2) towards the radiator to disengage it
2
from the studs.
6 - Remove the fan (2).

REFITTING THE FAN

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
F0076091

1 - Fill the engine cooling system.

Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ
(7.4 US.gall.)
2 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant and transmission oil to circulate. Check for
leaks.
3 - Stop the engine and check the coolant level in the ex-
pansion tank and transmission oil level, topping up if
necessary.

30-54
 FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully raise
the front hood.
1 - Disconnect the radiator-coolers assembly (1) and
move it towards the front of the tractor.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE RADIATORS -
COOLERS ASSEMBLY").

F0076120

2 - Fully loosen the bolts (2) securing the flange of the

cardan shaft (3). 1
3 - Disengage the cardan shaft (3) by pushing the flange
2
(4) toward the front of the tractor.

F0075631

4 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (5) securing the cou-

pling (6) and remove it. 2
5

F0076130

30-55
 FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING

REFITTING OF FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Shaft bolts: 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.)

2
Bolts: Loctite 243

Bolts: 139±10% Nm (102.4±10% lb.ft.)

1 - Fill the engine cooling system.

Coolant: approx. 28 ᐉ
(5.5 US. gall.)
2 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant and transmission oil to circulate. Check for
leaks.
3 - Stop the engine and check the coolant level in the ex-
pansion tank and transmission oil level, topping up if
necessary.

30-56
 AIR CLEANER

REMOVAL OF THE AIR CLEANER

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully

raise the engine hood.
1 - Loosen the clip (1) and disconnect the suction pipe
(2) of the trailer braking air compressor.
2

F0076140

2 - Loosen the clip (3) and disconnect the oil vapour

suction pipe (4).
3 - Unplug the connector (5) of the filter clogging sen-
sor. 4

3 5

F0076150

4 - Loosen the clips (6) of the suction hose (7).

6 7

F0076160

5 - Remove the suction hose (7).

F0076170

30-57
 AIR CLEANER

6 - Loosen the screw (8) securing the retaining clip (9)

of the air cleaner (10).
10

9 8

F0053731

7 - Remove the knob (11), release the locating pin (12)

and tilt outwards the right-hand side panel (13) be-
tween the hood and cab.
12
11

13

F0076180

8 - Loosen the clip (14) of the hose (15) connecting the

air cleaner (10) to the suction pipe.
Disconnect the hose (15). 10

14

15

F0076190

9 - Remove the air cleaner (10).

REFITTING THE AIR CLEANER 10

• To refit, repeat the above steps in reverse order.
★ Check that all the hose clips are fully tightened.

F0076200

30-58
 TURBOCHARGER

REMOVAL OF THE TURBOCHARGER

1 - Remove the silencer.

(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE SILENCER").
2 - For versions with air trailer braking only 4
Loosen the clamp (1) and disconnect the inlet pipe (2)
of the air compressor for the trailer braking system.
3 - Loosen the clamp (3) and disconnect the oil vapour
pipe (4).
1
3

2
F0076210

4 - Disconnect the connectors (5) of the filter clogging

sensor (6).
5

F0076220

5 - Loosen the clamps (7) securing the hose (8) connect-

ing the filter to the turbocharger (9); remove the hose
(8).
7
9

7 8

8
F0076161

6 - Loosen the clamp (10) securing the outlet pipe (11) to

the intercooler. 11

10

F0076230

30-59
 TURBOCHARGER

7 - Disconnect the outlet pipe (11) from the turbocharger

(9). 11
12
★ Carefully check the condition of the seal (12) and
renew it at the first sign of any deformation or
damage.
8 - Remove the turbocharger (9) following the instruc- 9
tions “MANUALE D’OFFICINA DEL MOTORE”.

F0076240

REFITTING THE
TURBOCHARGER
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-60
 AIR INLET PIPE

REMOVAL OF THE AIR INLET PIPE

1 - Unscrew and remove the wing nut (1) with washer

(2), and remove the tool box (3).
1

2
3

F0076250

2 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (4) with their wash-

ers and remove the support (5).
4

F0076260

3 - Loosen the hose clamp (6) and disconnect the hose (8)
from the pipe (7). 9
6
4 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (9).
7

F0076270

5 - Remove the nut cover (10) and, while supporting the

pipe (7), remove the upper retaining nut (11) and wash-
er (12).
7

10 11 12

F0017672

30-61
 AIR INLET PIPE

6 - Loosen the clamp, remove the screws (13) and re-

move the inlet hose (8). 13 8

F0076280

REFITTING THE AIR INLET PIPE

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-62
 SILENCER

REMOVAL OF THE SILENCER

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully raise
the front hood.
1 - Loosen the bolts (1) and move the clamp (2) joining the
exhaust pipe (3) to the silencer (4). 4

2 3

F0076290

2 - Position supports between the cylinder head and the

silencer.
3 - Unscrew and remove the bolt (5), washer (6) and nut 5 6 7
(7).

F0076300

4 - Remove the nuts (8) securing the silencer to the tur-

bocharger (9) and remove the silencer (4). 4
9
Silencer: approx. 15 kg (33 lb.)

F0076310

5 - Remove the gasket (10).

★ Note which way round it is fitted.

10

REFITTING THE SILENCER

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
10

F0076320

30-63
 EXHAUST PIPE

REMOVAL OF THE EXHAUST PIPE

Remove the key from the starter switch and fully raise
the front hood.
1 - Unscrew the bolts (1) and move the clamp (2) joining
the exhaust and the silencer.

F0076291

2 - Attach a hoist to the exhaust pipe (3) and put the lifting
sling under slight tension.

Exhaust pipe: 23 kg (50.7 lb.) 3

3 - Remove the bolts (4), (5) and the nuts (6).
4 - Remove the exhaust pipe (3).

5
F0054841

REFITTING THE EXHAUST PIPE

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-64
 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

REMOVAL OF THE 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

(Version with front suspension)
Before switching off the engine, disengage the front
axle suspension by pressing the relative button in the
cab.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega- 1
tive battery lead (–).
Discharge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing the valve (1) two full turns.
1
★ Reclose the valve after having discharged the
pressure.

F0030530

1 - While supporting the lower guard (2), remove the nut

(3), the rear washer on the right and the rear bolt (4)on
the left.
3 2

F0017830

2 - Remove the front bolts (5) and remove the lower guard
(2).

5 5

F0017840

3 - Force an adjustable jack "A" under the suspension (6);

it must be possible to lower the jack by approx. 10 cm
(4 in.).

A
F0017850

30-65
 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

4 - Disconnect the pipes (7) of the left-hand suspension

cylinder. 7
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants
Loosen the fittings of the flexible hoses by a few
turns and, before removing them, push them to
detach them from the couplers and thereby dis-
charge any residual pressure from the system.

F0077100

5 - Disconnect the pipes (8) from the right-hand suspen-

sion cylinder.
8
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on refitting.
★ Plug the pipes and the open fittings to prevent the
entry of contaminants.
6 - Remove the clamp (9) and remove the pipes.

9
F0076440

7 - Position a jack ”B” under the shaft (10) and remove the
flange bolts and nuts (11).
1 10
★ In order to remove the upper bolts, lower the jack
positioned in step 3.

11

F0017880

8 - Disconnect the flange, lower the jack “B” and with-

draw the shaft (10) towards the front of the tractor.
2

10

F0017890

30-66
 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

REFITTING THE 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Nuts: 43.5±10% Nm (32±10% lb.ft.)
★ Tighten the nuts in a cross-wise sequence.

2
Rear coupling: Grease
1 - Start the engine and engage the front suspension by
pressing the relative button in the cab.
2 - Wait a few seconds and then disengage the front sus-
pension.
3 - Repeat this operation a number of times to purge the
air from the system.
4 - Stop the engine, check the oil level and top up if nec-
essary.

30-67
 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS

REMOVAL OF THE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the console shroud. (For details, see "RE-
MOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD").
2 - Remove the engine hood.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE HOOD -
LAMP ASSEMBLIES").
3 - Remove the air cleaner. (For details, see "REMOVAL
OF THE AIR CLEANER").

4 - Remove the left panel (1) between the hood and the
cab.

F0075471

5 - Disconnect the connectors (2) of the brake fluid level

warning light and release the wiring from the straps.
6 - Remove the cap (3) and pump out the fluid contained
3 2
in the brake fluid reservoir (4).
7 - Disconnect the pipes (5) and (6) form the reservoir.
8 - Loosen the clamp (7) and remove the reservoir (4).
7
4 6
5

F0053856

9 - Unscrew and remove bolts (8), remove the support

(9) of the air cleaner.
9

8
F0077110

30-68
 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS

10 - Unscrew and remove the screws (10) and remove

the insulation panel (11).

11

10

10
F0076340

11 - Loosen the upper screws (12) securing the hood

support (13).
12
12 - Unscrew and remove the lower screws(14).

13
14

F0077320

13 - Remove the upper screws (12) and remove the

hood support (13).

13

F0076330

14 - Unscrew and remove the four nuts (15) with their

washers.

15

15

F0076350

30-69
 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS

15 - Remove the central bulkhead (16).

16

F0076360

16 - Disconnect the outlet pipes (18) and the bypass pipe

(19) from the brake master cylinders (17).

18 17

19
F0058630

17 - Remove the cotter pins (20) and remove the pivots (21)
connecting the pedals (22) to the master cylinders 20
(17).
18 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (23) with their washers
and then remove the cylinders (17).
★ Recover and note the position of any washers
fitted between cylinder and cab to bring the 21 17
pedals into alignment. 22

REFITTING BRAKE MASTER 23

CYLINDERS F0030422

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1 - Check the alignment of the pedals by inserting the
latch pin (24).
24
2 - Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum level.
3 - Check the position of the microswitches.
(For details, see " ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCHES").
4 - Bleed the brake circuits of air.
(For details, see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").
F0018792

30-70
 BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM

BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM

1 - Disconnect the two brake pedals (1) by disengaging

the latch pin (2).
2 - Bleed the left rear brake. 1

3 - Bleed the right rear brake.

4 - For tractors with hydraulic or air trailer braking on-
ly: bleed the trailer brake valve before bleeding the
service brake system.
2

F0018791

Brake bleeding procedure

During brake bleeding operations, ensure that the flu- A
id in the brake fluid reservoir is always above the min- 1
imum level.
1 - Remove the dust cap and attach a transparent bleed
tube “A” to the bleed screw (1) of the cylinder (2).
2 - Fully depress the brake pedal corresponding to the
brake to be bled.
3 - Slowly open the bleed screw (1) and allow the fluid and
2
air to flow throughout the entire pedal travel.
F0058640
4 - While holding the pedal fully depressed, tighten the
bleed screw.
5 - Repeat the operation until the fluid flowing from the
bleed screw is entirely free of air bubbles.
6 - Repeat the procedure for the remaining brake cylin-
der.
7 - After bleeding, replace the bleed screw (1) dust caps.

8 - Use the same method also for the service brakes.

Bleed in the order given: the pilot valve, the left
brake and then the right brake.
A

F0021160

30-71
 BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM

9 - Bleed the braking valve at the bleed screws (1) (pro-

tected by caps) using the method indicated for the 1
A
pumps and choosing from among the following ver-
sions:
A - Pneumatic parking brake control valve
B - Hydraulic braking valve (CUNA).
C - Hydraulic braking valve (EXPORT).

F0076370

B
1

F0058551

F0058650

30-72
 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCHES

ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCHES

★ The switch for each pedal is adjusted separately.

1 - Check that the pedal latch pin (1) slides freely to con-
nect and disconnect the two pedals (2). 2

F0018790

2 - Force the pedals (2) upwards and check that the brake
light switches (3) have an extra opening travel of 1±0.2 3
mm (0.04±0.008 in.).
★ This extra travel protects the switches from im-
pacts at the end of travel caused by sudden re-
lease of the pedals.

F0018800

3 - If the switches (3) do not have this extra travel, loosen

the screws (4) so that they just grip the switch; move 3
the switch towards the front of the tractor and tighten 4
down the screws (4) to fix it in position. 4

F0018810

30-73
 POWER STEERING UNIT

TESTING AND REMOVAL OF THE POWER STEERING UNIT

1. Testing
1 - Disconnect a steering pipe (1) and connect a fitting A
“B” with a 400 bar pressure gauge “A”.
2 - Start the engine and turn the wheel back and forth be-
tween the full lock positions to eliminate all air from the
system.
B

3 - Force the steering to full lock on the side to which the

pressure gauge is connected and read off the maxi-
mum continuous pressure on the gauge “A”.
★ Maximum permissible pressure:
191÷198 bar (2270–2871 psi) F0021200

4 - If the pressure reading differs from that specified, ad-

just the maximum pressure valve (2) of the power 3
2
steering unit (3). 6 5 4 7

2. Adjustment
1 - Remove the plug (4).
2 - Loosen off the screw (5) using a 4 mm hex socket
wrench.
3 - Turn the screw (6) to adjust the pressure.
• To INCREASE the pressure, turn the screw F0021211
CLOCKWISE.
• To REDUCE the pressure, turn the screw COUN-
TER-CLOCKWISE.
4 - Stop the engine and fix the adjuster screw (6) in po-
sition by tightening the lock screw (5).
5 - Refit the plug (4), checking the gasket (7) is in its seat-
ing.

Plug: 20 +0 5 Nm (14.7 +0 3.7 lb.ft.)

3. Removal of the power steering unit

1 - Remove the console shroud.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE
AND SHROUD"). 1
2 - Disconnect the five pipes (2) from the power steering
unit (1). 1
2
2

F0076380

30-74
 POWER STEERING UNIT

3 - Unscrew the retaining bolts (3) and washers (4).

3 4

F0018840

4 - Remove the power steering unit (1).

★ If necessary, reposition the plate (5) with the rela-
tive bushes (6). 2 5

F0018850

REFITTING THE POWER

STEERING UNIT 7
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Pipe fittings: 60 Nm (44.2 lb.ft.)

2
★ If the power steering fittings have been undone, re-
1
new the gaskets and tighten the fittings to a torque
of 70 Nm (51.6 lb.ft.).

F0058660

1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeat-

edly in both directions to eliminate any air from the
power steering system.
2 - Check the fittings for leaks.

30-75
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

REMOVAL OF POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

11

10
F0020600 19

9
8

3 19 7

6
2

16

1
17
4 18
15
12

14

13

D0004350

30-76
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

★ For parts identification, see exploded view of the power steering unit.

1. Disassembly
1 - Hold the body of the power steering unit (1) in a vice 1
with the jaws faced in a soft material (aluminium or soft
steel), with the bolts of the unit uppermost.
★ Do not over-tighten the vice to avoid damaging the
body of the power steering unit.

F0020610

2 - Mark the relative positions of the bolts, the cover (6)

and the metering unit (8). 3 2
Loosen the bolts (2), (3), (4), (5) gradually in a cross- 4 5
wise sequence and remove them.
8
6

F0020620

3 - Remove the cover (6) by sliding it off sideways.

6

F0020630

4 - Using a pair of round-nosed pliers, remove the bush

(7).
7

F0020640

30-77
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

5 - Mark the relative positions of the drive shaft (10) and

the rotor (9). 9
Remove the outer ring (8) and the rotor (9).
★ To remove the assembly, slide it to the side while
simultaneously lifting it. 8

F0020650

6 - Withdraw the drive shaft (10).

10

F0020660

7 - Remove the stop disc (11) by sliding it off sideways.

11

F0020670

8 - Remove the power steering unit (1) from the vice and
position it horizontally on a bench. 1
Rotate the trim pin (12) inserted in the control valve
(13) so that it is horizontal and withdraw the complete
control valve assembly without removing the bearing
(14).
13

F0020680

30-78
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

2. Removal of the seals

1 - The inner seal (15) is to be removed using tool T1
(cod. 00239496). E
Insert the ring “C” in the power steering housing (1) fol-
lowed by the expander “E” fully closed.
D

C
T1
1

F0020690

2 - Open the expander “E” by turning the knob while hold-

ing the locknut “D”.

F0020700

3 - Remove the ring “C” and push the expander “E” in-
side the power steering housing (1) to withdraw the
seal (15).
4 - Slacken off the expander and withdraw it.
C
E

1
F0020710

3. Removal of the dust seal

Remove the dust seal using tool T2 (cod. 00239497). T2
Insert the ring nut “G” in the housing and, using the extractor
“H” and a hammer, remove the dust seal (16).
★ Take care not to damage the seating.
G H

F0020720

30-79
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

4. Installing the inner seal (15)

1 - Before installing the inner seal, ensure that the seal T3
seating, the inside of the housing and the cover are
completely free of all traces of grease. 15
Fit the seal (15) onto the installer “S” of tool T3 (code
00239498) and insert the installer in the bush “B” of S
the tool.

F0020730

2 - Insert the bush “B”, the installer “S” and the seal (15) in
the housing (1).
1
3 - Push the bush and installer fully in.
★ After removing the tool T3 (code. 00239498) check
that the seal is correctly positioned in its seating.
4 - Lubricate the seal with mineral oil.

T3

F0020740

5. Installing the control valve

1 - Lightly lubricate the control valve assembly (13) with a
little oil.
Check that the bearing (14) is installed with thinner
thrust plate positioned behind the outer bush of the
control valve.

14 13

F0020750

2 - Insert the control valve (13) in the housing (1) bearing

(14) side first while keeping the trim pin (12) horizontal. 1
★ The control valve should fit easily into the housing 13
without force.

12

F0020760

30-80
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

6. Final assembly
1 - Hold the power steering unit (1) in a vice as shown in 17
the photo.
Check that the ball (17) (anticavitation valve) is posi- 1
tioned correctly.

F0020770

2 - Lubricate the O-ring (18) with grease and locate it on

the power steering housing (1).
18

F0020780

3 - Install the stop disc (11), aligning the holes with those
in the housing.
11

F0020790

4 - Insert the drive shaft (10), engaging it in the trim pin

(12) of the control valve (13).

10

F0020800

30-81
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

5 - Lubricate the O-ring (19) with grease and locate it on

the outer ring (8).

19

F0020810

6 - Locate the rotor (9) on the drive shaft (10) aligning the
reference marks made on disassembly.
9
7 - Locate the outer ring (8), centering it relative to the
housing (1) and the rotor (9).

8
10

F0020820

8 - Locate the bush (7).

7
8

F0020830

9 - Lubricate the 2nd O-ring (19) with grease and seat it in

the groove in the cover (6).
6
10 - Locate the cover (6) on the metering unit, aligning the
reference marks made on disassembly.

19

F0020840

30-82
 POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS

11 - Insert the screws (2), (3), (4), (5) following the indica-
tions in the exploded view.
★ Screw (3) must be installed in the position in cor-
respondence to the ball valve (17). 4
3

F0020850

12 - Tighten down the cover screws (6) and the metering

unit (8) in a cross-wise sequence.

Screws: 30 +0 3 Nm (22 +0 2 lb.ft.)

6
8

F0020860

13 - Turn the power steering unit over; locate the dust seal
(16) on the housing (1) with seal lip facing upwards.

16

F0020870

14 - Using the tool T4 (code 00239499), and a hammer,

drive the dust seal home without using excessive
force.

T4

F0020880

30-83
 FRONT WHEELS

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT WHEELS

On tractors with front suspension, before stopping

the engine to remove the front wheels, disengage
the front axle suspension by pressing the relative
button in the cab.
1 - Apply the parking brake. 1
B
For normal front axles B
2 - Position under the differential housing a trolley jack
“A” with a minimum lifting capacity of 15 tons and a
maximum lift height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Drive safety wedges between the axle and the axle A
support. F0018360

For suspended front axles

2 - Position centrally under the pivoting support (1) a trol-
ley jack “A” with a minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons
2 3
and maximum lift height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
3 - Raise the front end of the tractor sufficiently to elim-
inate flexure of the tyre walls and to lift the wheels by
approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.).
4 - Position two jacks “B” under the axle; lower the trolley
jack so that the axle is supported on the jacks "B" with
the wheels off the ground and then remove trolley jack
“A”. F0018370

★ Jack lifting capacity: minimum 2 tons.

5 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (2); remove the wheel
nuts, leaving one (for safety) at the top of the wheel.
1
6 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last nut
and remove the wheel (3).
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other rear
wheel.

REFITTING THE FRONT WHEELS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1
4WD wheel nuts: 350 Nm (258 lb.ft.)
★ Tighten the wheel nuts gradually in a crosswise se-
quence.

30-84
 FRONT WHEELS

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT FENDERS

★ Removal of the front fenders is only necessary for ma-

jor repairs and overhauls where additional working
space is required at the side of the tractor and when-
ever the tractor is to be supported on stands.
1 - Remove the front wheels.
(For details, see, "REMOVAL OF THE FRONT
WHEELS").

2 - Attach a hoist to the fender to be removed (1).

1
Fender assembly: 19 kg (42 lb.)

F0058670

3 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (2) and remove the

fender (1) complete with the mounting bracket (3).

2
2
3

F0058680

REFITTING THE FRONT FENDERS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-85
 REAR WHEELS

REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHEELS

1 - Position under the rear gearbox a trolley jack “A” with

minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons and a maximum lift-
ing height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Position the trolley jack “A” so that it is nearer to
the wheel to be removed.
2 - Raise the tractor sufficiently to eliminate the flexure of
the tyre wall.

F0018870

3 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (1); leaving one (for safe-
ty) at the top of the wheel.
1
2
4 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last 1
wheel nut and remove the wheel (2).

F0018880

5 - Position under the rear axle an axle stand “B” with lat-
eral retaining wings for safety and lower the trolley jack
until the axle is resting on the axle stand.
★ Axle stand load capacity: 2 tons minimum.
6 - Check that the stand is in exactly the right position and
then remove the trolley jack.
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other
wheel.
B

F0058690

REFITTING THE REAR WHEELS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Wheel nuts:
M18x1.5: 350 Nm± 10%(258 lb.ft.±10%)
M20x1.5: 500 Nm±10% (369 lb.ft.±10%)
M22x1.5 (mod. 165): 500 Nm±10% (369 lb.ft.±10%)
★ Tighten the wheel nuts gradually in a crosswise se-
quence.

30-86
 LIFT VALVE BLOCK

REMOVAL OF THE LIFT VALVE BLOCK

Fully lower the lift and switch off the engine.

1 - With the control levers (1), (2) in the horizontal position, 1
label the lower pipes (3) and disconnect them from the
valve block (4).
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec-
2
tion. 4

F0017940

2 - Disconnect the rigid upper pipes (5), (6).

★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants.
6 5

F0018680

3 - Unscrew the bolts (7) and remove the valve block (4)
with the rear spacers (8).

7
F0018710

REFITTING THE
LIFT VALVE BLOCK
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-87
 FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS

★ Raise the lift to its full height and switch off the engine.
1 - Remove the lift arms (1) and the pivot pins (2) along
with their retaining chains. 1
2 - Position under the lift assembly (3) a jack ”A” which
can be lowered at least 10 cm (4 in.).
1

3 2
2
A
F0017970

3 - Remove the bolts (4) and remove the upper pins (5) of
the cylinders (6).
5

4 6

6
F0017980

4 - Disconnect the cylinder feed pipes (8), (9) from the

valve block (7).
Loosen the fitting by a few turns, but before fully
disconnecting them, push them to detach them
from the couplers and release any residual pres- 7
sure in the system
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion. 8

F0017941

5 - Lower the jack ”A” until the cylinders (6) can be tilted
outwards in order to access the connection pipes and
to align the hole provided for removal of the spring
pins securing the lower pivot pins of the cylinders. 6 6

F0017990

30-88
 FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS

6 - Disconnect the four pipes (10) from the cylinders (6).

★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion.
10

6 6 10

F0018000

7 - Using a pin punch, remove the spring pins (11) secur-

ing the lower cylinder pivot pins.

11

F0018010

8 - Withdraw the pivot pins (12) and remove the cylinders

(6).
6

12

F0018720

REFITTING OF THE
FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly raise and lower the lift
to the limit of its travel in order to bleed the system and
check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.

30-89
 FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY

★ Raise the lift arms to the maximum height and stop the
engine.
1 - Disconnect the lower pipes from the valve block (1).
Loosen the fitting by a few turns, but before fully
disconnecting them, push them to detach them
from the couplers and release any residual pres- 1
sure in the system.
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion.
★ Plug the ends of the pipes and the open fittings on
the valve block to prevent the entry of contami-
nants. F0053950

2 - Remove the lift arms (2) and the pivot pins (3) complete
with their retaining chains.
3 - Remove the shaft end cover (4) and the shield (5). 2
4
2
5

3
3
F0018030

4 - Position under the lift assembly (6) a jack ”A” that can
be lowered by at least 10 cm. (4 in.).

A
F0053941

5 - Remove the bolts (7) and remove the upper pivot pins
(8) of the cylinders (9). 8

9
9
7

F0017981

30-90
 FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY

6 - Lower the jack ”A” so that the cylinders (9) can be tilted
outwards.
7 - Remove the jack ”A” and guide the rocker assembly
(10) to the vertical position. 9 9

10

F0017991

8 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (11) and washers (12)

15
securing the brackets (13); recover the inner brackets 16
(14). 13

9 - Remove the spacer (15) and the lower bushes (16). 11

★ Do not remove the upper bushes yet for safety. 12

14

F0018040

10 - Attach a hoist to the lift assembly (6) and put the lifting
slings under slight tension.

Lift: 80 kg (176 lb.) 6

F0076390

11 - Unscrew and remove the ten bolts (17) and washers

securing the lift (6) to the front carrier.
6
1
17

F0018060

30-91
 FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY

12 - Remove the upper bushes (16) but leave them in po-

sition for safety.

16

F0018730

13 - Remove the lift assembly (6).

★ If necessary, use a lever to separate the assembly
from the front locating dowels.

F0018070

REFITTING THE LIFT ASSEMBLY

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Bolts M16: 214 Nm (158 lb.ft.)
Bolts M20: 455 Nm (355 lb.ft.)
1 - Start the engine, repeatedly raise and lower the lift to
its maximum travel to bleed the system and check for
leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.

30-92
 FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY

1 - Remove the front lift assembly.

(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT AS-
SEMBLY")
2
2 - Unplug the connector (1) and release the wiring from
the clip (2).

1
F0018080

3 - Fully unscrew the bolts (3) securing the cardan shaft

(4) to the flexible coupling (5) and detach the flange.

F0075632

4 - Unscrew the four bolts (6) but only remove the two
lower bolts.
★ Leave the two upper bolts in position for safety.
1 6

5 - Fit a non-slip block to a trolley jack; position the non-

slip block under the PTO assembly.
6 - Remove the two upper bolts previously left for safety
and remove the PTO assembly (7) while supporting F0018090

the cardan shaft (4).

★ If neccessary, use a lever to help separate the as-
sembly from the tractor.
7
PTO: 70 kg (154 lb.)

REFITTING THE FRONT PTO

ASSEMBLY
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Screw: 214 Nm (157.7 lb.ft.) F0018100

30-93
 FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

(Where fitted)
1 - Before switching off the engine, disengage the
front suspension by pressing the pushbutton in
the cab for at least 20 seconds.
2 - Apply the parking brake. 1
Discharge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing the valve (1) about two full
turns.
★ Wait a few minutes after discharging the pressure, 1
then re-close the valve.
1 - Remove the reinforcing side members.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE REINFORCING
F0030530
SIDE MEMBERS").

2 - Position a jack”A” and a non-slip block “B” under the

sump pan.

F0076400

3 - Support the swinging support (2) with a jack that can

be lowered through 10-15 cm.(4-6 in.).
4
4 - Disconnect the pipes (4), (5) from the left cylinder (3).
First loosen the fittings by a few turns, then, be-
fore disconnecting the pipes, push them to de- 3
tach them from the couplers and release any
residual pressure.
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
5
contaminants.

2
F0018180

5 - Disconnect the pipes (7), (8) from the right cylinder (6).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants. 7

F0076410

30-94
 FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

6 - Remove the bolts (9) and the plates (10) securing the
upper cylinder pivot pins.
9

10
9

F0018200

7 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove the upper pivot

pins (11).
11

F0018210

8 - Unplug the steering sensor connector (12) and release

the wiring from the straps.
12
9 - Disconnect the steering cylinder pipes (13).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants.
13

F0018223

10 - Lower the support (2) to disengage the upper mount-

ings of the cylinders (3), (6).

3 6

F0018230

30-95
 FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

11 - Remove the bolts (9) and the plates (10) of the lower
pivot pins.

10

9
F0018240

12 - Using the slide hammer puller, remove the lower pivot

pins (11) and the cylinders (3), (6).
3 6

11

F0018250

REFITTING THE FRONT

SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeat-
edly to full lock in both directions. Activate and deac-
tivate the suspension a number of times to expel air
from the system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.

30-96
 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE

FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
1. Disassembly
1 - Relieve the staking on the lock washer located be-
tween the end cap (1) and the cylinder (2).

F0021870

2 - Using a pin wrench, unscrew the end cap (1).

1

F0021880

3 - Withdraw the rod (3) complete with end cap (1) and
seals.
2
1
3

F0021890

4 - Heat the eye of the piston (4) to a temperature of 100–

120 °C (212–248 °F) and unscrew it from the rod (3).
3
4
3

F0021900

30-97
 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

5 - Withdraw the end cap (1) from the rod and remove in
order the rod wiper (5), the seals (6), (7) and the guide
(8). 9
2 1
★ Take care not to damage the seatings of the seals.
6 - Remove the O-ring seal (9).
★ Note which way round the seals are fitted.

5
6 7 8
D0005380

7 - Remove the seal (11) and the guide (12) from the pis-
ton (10).
★ Take care not to damage the seal seating. 12 11
10

D0005390

2. Assembly
• Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.

1
End cap: 320−370 Nm (236–273 lb.ft.)

2
Seals: Gearbox oil

3
Piston eye: Loctite 638

Piston eye: 50−70 Nm (37–52 lb.ft.)

1 - Stake the lock washer tabs into the notch on the cyl-
inder (2) and into one of the notches on the end cap (1).

F0021910

30-98
 FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT

(Versions with front suspension)
1 - Before switching off the engine, disengage the
front suspension by pressing the pushbutton in
the cab for at least 20 seconds.
2 - Apply the parking brake. 1
ischarge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing the valve (1) about two full
turns.
★ Wait a few minutes after discharging the pressure, 1
then re-close the valve.

F0030530

1 - Remove the front suspension cylinders.

(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUS-
PENSION CYLINDERS").
2 - Position a trolley jack under the axle (2) and the swing-
ing support; raise the jack until it supports both the as-
semblies.

Group assembly: 455 kg (1002 lb.)

2
F0018260

3 - Remove the cover and the 4WD shaft .

(For details see "REMOVAL OF THE 4WD PROPEL-
LER SHAFT").
Disconnect the differential lock pipe (3).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants.
3

F0018270

4 - Remove the support (4) of the position sensor (5) and

unplug the connector (6). 1
4
6

F0018280

30-99
 FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT

5 - Remove the plates (7) securing the pivot pins (8) of the
swinging axle support (9).
6 - Loosen the screw of the clips for the rigid steering
pipes and rotate the plate (7) to the left to release the
pivot pin (8).
7

9 8
F0018290

7 - Using a suitable drift made of soft material (aluminium,

copper, etc.,), remove the pivot pins (8).

F0018300

8 - Slowly lower the jack and remove the swinging sup-

port (9) complete with the axle (2).

9
F0018310

9 - Remove the screws (10) and remove the plate (11) se-
curing the axle pivot pin (12).

12

11

10

F0018320

30-100
 FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT

10 - Attach the swinging support (9) to lifting slings and at-

tach the slings to a hoist; put the slings under slight
tension.
9

11 - Using a suitable drift made of soft material (aluminium,

copper, etc.,), drive out the axle pivot pin (12) and re-
move the swinging support. 2

12

F0018330

REFITTING THE FRONT AXLE

AND SWINGING SUPPORT
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Check the calibration of the position sensor.
(For details, see "REMOVAL AND POSITIONING
OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SEN-
SOR").

2
Pivot pin and plain bearings: grease
1 - On starting the engine, bleed the systems as follows:
a - turn the steering wheel repeatedly to full lock in
both directions;
b - repeatedly activate and deactivate the suspen-
sion;
c - repeatedly engage and disengage the differential
lock.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.
3 - Lubricate the axle pivot pin.

30-101
 FRONT SUSPENSION VALVES

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION VALVES

1 - Before switching off the engine, disengage the

front suspension by pressing the pushbutton in
the cab for at least 20 seconds.
2 - Apply the parking brake. 1
Discharge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing the valve (1) about two full
turns.
1
★ Wait a few minutes after discharging the pressure,
then re-close the valve.

F0030530

1 - Unplug the connectors (2) from the solenoid valves (3).

★ Label the connectors and solenoid valves to avoid
confusion on reconnection.

3
2
F0017950

2 - Disconnect the five connecting pipes (4).

First loosen the fittings by a few turns, then, be- 4
fore disconnecting the pipes, push them to de-
tach them from the couplers and release any
6
residual pressure.
3 - Remove the bolts (5) and remove the assembly (6).

F0017960

REFITTING THE FRONT

SUSPENSION VALVES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly activate and deacti-
vate the front suspension in order to expel any air from
the system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.

30-102
 POSITIONING OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR

REMOVAL AND POSITIONING OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION

POSITION SENSOR
1. Removal
1 - Remove the cover (1).

F0017900

2 - Loosen the rear nut (2).

3 - Unplug the connector (3).
4 - Unscrew and remove the upper retaining bolt (4) of the
support (5) and loosen the lower bolt (6); rotate the 4
7
support (5). 2
5 - Remove the front nut (7) and remove the sensor (8).

3
6 8
5
F0017910

2. Positioning
1 - Start the engine, fully extend the front suspension cyl-
inders and fit the sensor (8) to the support (5) with the
front nut (2) fully unscrewed.
2

5
F0017930

2 - Fix the support (5) and push the sensor (8) in the di-
rection ”X” until the pin (9) is fully retracted.
3 - Keeping the pin in this position, screw in the rear nut (2) 9 7 2 8
right up to the support (5).
4 - Screw the front nut (7) up to the support (5).
5 - Back off the nut (7) by one turn and tighten the nut (2) to
secure the sensor.
★ This adjustment prevents the possibility of the
sensor sustaining impact damage at the end of its 5
travel.

Nuts: 30±6 Nm (22.1±4.4 lb.ft.) X

D0003930

30-103
 POSITIONING OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR

3. Testing
T5 3
1 - Connect the test lead T5 (code 5.9030.743.1) be-
tween the sensor (8) and the wiring (3); start the engine
and, using a multimeter, check the voltage when the
cylinders are in the mid-stroke position.
★ Voltage with cylinders in mid-stroke position =
3.8V
Fully retract the cylinders and check the voltage.
★ Voltage with cylinders retracted = 1.90–1.95V
★ The voltage is measured between the terminals of
the brown (earth) and blue (signal) wires
F0022060
NOTE. The same reading can also be taken using the
suspension section of the EDS program.
(For details, see EDS in section 20)
2- Stop the engine, disconnect the lead T5 (code
5.9030.743.1) and reconnect the wiring to the sensor
3- Refit the cover (1).

30-104
 REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS

REMOVAL OF THE REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS

(For versions with front lift only)
1 - Remove the front lift valve block.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE LIFT VALVE
BLOCK").
2 - Remove the air reservoir and the battery support.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE AIR RESERVOIR
AND BATTERY SUPPORT")
3 - Attach a hoist to the side member to be removed and
put the lifting sling under slight tension.

Side member: 125 kg (275 lb.)

F0076420

4 - Right side member (1): Unscrew and remove the

front bolts (2) complete with their washers and recover
the spacers (3). 1 3

F0018150

5 - Left side member (4): Unscrew and remove front

bolts (2) as per the right side member and the two rear 5
4
bolts (5) complete with washers. 1 2

F0076430

REFITTING THE SIDE MEMBERS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Bolts M16: 214 Nm (158 lb.ft.)
Bolts M20: 455 Nm (335 lb.ft.)

30-105
 FRONT CARRIER

REMOVAL OF THE FRONT CARRIER

(Versions with front suspension)
Before stopping the engine, deactivate the front sus-
pension by pressing the relative button in the cab.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-
tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove:
• the radiator/coolers assembly;
• the drivebelt of the air conditioning compres-
sor;
• the reinforcing side members;
• the lift assembly;
• the front PTO;
• the front suspension cylinders;
• the front axle and swinging support.
(For details, see the corresponding headings).
2 - Loosen the bolts (1) to eliminate the tightening torque.
1
1

F0018340

3 - Attach lifting slings to the front carrier (2), attach the

slings to a hoist and put them under slight tension.
4 - Remove the bolts (1) with their washers and remove
the front carrier (2). 2
★ If necessary, use a lever to separate the locating 2
dowels from the engine.

F0018350

REFITTING THE FRONT CARRIER

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1
Bolts: 260±10% Nm (191.6±10% lb.ft.)

2
Locating dowels: grease
1 - Start the engine and operate the controls to expel air
from the various systems.

30-106
 ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER

RENEWAL AND TESTING OF THE ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (--).
2
1. Renewal 1

1 - Remove the knob (1), release the locating pin (2) 3 4

and tilt outwards the panel (3) between the hood
and cab.
2 - Unscrew and remove the stop screw (4), the pivot
(5) and remove the panel (3).
5
F0076181

3 - Unplug the connector (6) of the engine wiring harness.

4 - Lift the sound insulation panel (7) to create a space al-
6
lowing access to the linkage of the potentiometer (8).

F0058741

5 - Disconnect the potentiometer linkage rod (10) from

the lever (9).

10

F0058751

6 - Lift and fold the floor mat toward the rear of the ma-
chine.
7 - Unplug the connector (7).

11

F0076450

30-107
 ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER

8 - Loosen and remove the bolts (12) (qty 2) and remove

the entire potentiometer (8).

12

F0058761

9 - Remove the cotter pin (13) and the control lever (9),
which will be refitted to the new potentiometer (8).
Always renew the cotter pin (13).

9
13
F0058771

9 - Refit the assembly, following the removal steps in re-

verse order.

2. Potentiometer calibration
Whenever the accelerator pedal potentiometer
is replaced and subsequently calibrated, the cal-
ibration of the hand throttle potentiometer must
also be checked.
Calibrate the potentiometers using the SERDIA
program.
(For details, see SERDIA in section 20).
★ Test with pedal released: 1 +0.05/–0.15V
Test with pedal fully depressed: 4 +0.25V
Test with hand throttle at minimum: 0.9V
Test with hand throttle at maximum: 4V

30-108
 FUEL TANK

REMOVAL OF FUEL TANK

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the left rear wheel.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE REAR
WHEELS").
2 - Vent all the compressed air from the cab suspension
system.
For machines equipped with air trailer braking,
release all the compressed air from the brake cir-
cuit.
The tank must be removed and handled only when
empty; use a service pump to empty the tank. F0018881

3 - Unplug the connector (1) of the fuel level sender.

4 - Mark the fuel feed and return lines (2) and (3). 3 4
Loosen the clips (4) and disconnect the hoses.

F0030581

5 - Disconnect the air inlet line (6) from the L.H. cab sus-
pension piston (5).
1

F0076460

6 - Undo the bolts (7) and remove the alignment washers

(8) by which the tank (9) is retained. 8
★ Note the position of the hole “A” of the eccentric
washer for levelling the tank. A
7

9 F0076470

30-109
 FUEL TANK

7 - Empty the screenwash bottle.

Mark the connectors (10) and (11) and detach them
from the pumps (12).
10
8 - Mark the screenwash hoses (13) and (14) and discon-
nect them from the pumps (12).
11
12

13

14
F0020103

9 - Undo the bolts (15) and remove the screenwash bottle

15
(16).

16

F0076480

10 - Loosen the upper screws (17) & (18) of the left cab
suspension cylinder. 18
Unscrew and remove the cylinder screws (19) & (20) 17
and the screws securing the damper (21) to the
support (22).
21

22
20
19
F0076490

11 - Unscrew and remove screws (23) securing the sup-

port (22).

22

23
F0076500

30-110
 FUEL TANK

12 - With a hoist, raise the rear of the cab until support

(22a) is no longer resting on the rubber buffer (24).
22a

24

F0077330

13 - Remove the nut (25) and remove the rod that limits
the upward motion of the cab.

25

F0076510

14 - Remove the support (22), detaching it from the

damper (21). 21

22

F0076520

15 - Support the fuel tank (9) with lifting equipment and

withdraw it from the guide tubes.

F0076530

30-111
 FUEL TANK

INSTALLATION OF FUEL TANK AND MOUNTINGS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Fittings “A”: 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft.)

F0021921

30-112
 POWER STEERING PUMP

REMOVAL OF THE POWER STEERING PUMP

★ The power steering pump may be installed in two

different positions depending on the tractor ver- A B
sion:
A - Version with compressor for air trailer braking
with pump mounted in line with the compres-
sor.
B - Version without air trailer braking with pump
mounted directly on the engine power take-off

F0077080

VERSION WITH COMPRESSOR

1 - Disconnect the pressure pipe (2) from the pump (1).

1
F0076700

2 - Loosen the screws (3) of the filter support (4) by two

turns.
3

F0076710

3 - Unscrew and remove the screws (5) securing the

suction pipe (6).
4 - Remove the pipe (6). 1
6

5
5

F0076720

30-113
 POWER STEERING PUMP

5 - Unscrew and remove bolts (7) securing the pump

(1).
7

F0076730

6 - Remove the pump (1) complete with drive coupling

(8).
★ Carefully inspect the coupling for signs of wear; 8
renew if the teeth are worn or if there is excessive 1
play between the coupling and the pump shaft.

F0060021

7 - Remove the gasket (9) and the trunnion cross (10).

★ Always renew the gasket. 9
★ Check the trunnion cross for signs of wear and 10
renew if necessary.

F0076740

8 - Unscrew and remove four screws (11) securing the

spacer (12).
11
9 - Remove the spacer (12) and O-ring (13). 13 12

12

F0060031

30-114
 POWER STEERING PUMP

VERSION WITHOUT COMPRESSOR

1
1 - After having disconnected the suction and pres- 2
sure pipes, loosen and remove the bolts (1) and re-
move the fixing bolts of the pump assembly (2).

F0077070

2 - Remove the pump complete with gear (3), O-ring (4)

and mounting flange (5).
2
3

5
F0060060

3 - Remove the nut (6) and the gear (7).

4 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (8) and then the
pump (2) complete with gasket (9). 7 2
★ Renew the seal every time the pump is removed.

6
8

F0060070

REFITTING THE POWER STEER-

ING PUMP 13

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

14
1
★ Carefully inspect the O-rings (13) & (14).
★ To keep the O-rings in place during assembly,
smear lightly with grease.

F0076750

30-115
 AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS

TESTING THE AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS

★ Test conditions:
• Engine at operating temperature
• Hydraulic fluid: 60–70 °C (140–158 °F)
• Handbrake on
• Gearbox in neutral

1. Flow meter connection

(CC version) To control valve 3

1 - Connect the delivery line (1) to the flow meter (2) to the
upper port of a mechanically-controlled spool valve.
2 - Connect the return line (3) from the flow meter (2) to the
lower port of the same spool.
1

From control valve

F0021931

2. Flow meter connection (LS version)

To control valve
1 - Connect the delivery lines (4) of the flow meter (2) to
the upper ports of two mechanically-controlled spool
valves. 5
2 - Connect the return lines (5) from the flow meter to the
lower ports of the same two spool valves.

4
From control valve
F0021941

3. Measuring the flow rate

CC version
1 - Start the engine and bring the revs up to 1000 rpm. 1
2 - Operate the levers of the control valve/s connected to
the flow meter delivery line/s.
3 - Set the delivery pressure to 50 bar (725 psi) and read
3
off the pump flow rate.
4 - Release the levers and repeat the operation a number
of times.
5 - Repeat the operations in points 2, 3 and 4 at pressures 2
of 100 bar (1450.3 psi) and 150 bar (2175.5 psi).
F0021951

30-116
 AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS

6 - Take the engine revs up to 2300 rpm and repeat the

operations in points 2, 3, 4 and 5 also in this condition.
LS version 4
7 - Check the readings taken against the values indicated
in the tables below.
CC CIRCUIT 5
Flow rate at Flow rate at
Pressure
1000 rpm 2300 rpm
bar (psi)
ᐉ/min (US.gpm) ᐉ/min (US.gpm)
50 (725) ~ 36.0 (9.51) ~ 82.5 (21.80)
100 (1450.3) ~ 35.5 (9.38) ~ 81.5 (21.53)
150 (2175.5) ~ 35.0 (9.25) ~ 80.0 (21.14) F0021961

200 (2900.5) ~ 34.0 (8.98) ~ 78.5 (20.74)

LS CIRCUIT
Flow rate at Flow rate at
Pressure
1000 rpm 2300 rpm
bar (psi)
ᐉ/min (US.gpm) ᐉ/min (US.gpm)
50 (725) ~ 44.5 (11.76) ~ 107 (28.27)
100 (1450.3) ~ 44.0 (11.62) ~ 106 (28.00)
150 (2175.5) ~ 43.0 (11.36) ~ 104 (27.48)
200 (2900.5) ~ 41.0 (10.83) ~ 100 (26.42)

30-117
 GEAR PUMP

REMOVAL OF GEAR PUMP

Apply the parking brake, stop the engine and remove

the key.
Vent residual pressure from the reservoir by removing
the cap (A) and pressing the button (B); wear protec- B
tive gloves of butyl rubber or nitrile latex.
★ Remove the right rear wheel.
( F o r d e t a i l s , s e e "REMOVAL OF THE REAR
WHEELS").
A

F0029771

1 - Disconnect the pull wire (2) of the bowden cable (3)

from the creeper unit control lever (1) and detach the
sleeve from the lever mounting (4). 3
2
1

F0058850

2 - Disconnect the fittings (5), (6) and remove the pipe (7).
6

5
F0058860

3 - Disconnect the fittings (8), (9) and remove the inlet

pipe (10). 10

9 8

F0058870

30-118
 GEAR PUMP

4 - Disconnect the pressure pipe (12) from the pump (11).

11

12

F0058880

5 - Loosen and remove the bolts (13) securing the pump

(11).

11

13
12
F0058890

6 - Remove the pump (11) and the seal (14).

★ Renew the seal every time the pump is removed. 14

11

F0058900

7 - Take out the drive coupling (15).

REFITTING THE GEAR PUMP 15

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

F0058910

30-119
 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

REMOVAL OF VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

Remove the key from the starter switch and apply

the parking brake.
★ Remove the cab.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE CAB").
★ Remove the right rear wheel. 1
(F o r d e t a i l s , s e e " RE M O VA L O F T H E REA R
WHEELS").
For tractors with air trailer braking only: dis- 2
charge the pressure from the air braking system.

F0021750

1 - Partially loosen the unions (1) and (2) and allow the
oil contained in the suction branch and the lubri-
cation circuit to drain off.

4
2 - Disconnect the inner cable (4) from the creeper unit
control lever (3); detach the outer cable and posi-
tion the control cable to one side. 5

F0076550

3 - Remove the clip (7) and the bracket (8).

3a -For tractors with air trailer braking only.
Disconnect the regulator (9) (if present) from the 6
support (6).

7
8
9
F0076690

4 - Disconnect pipes (10), the connection pipe (11) of

the hydraulic trailer braking valve (12) and the sup-
14
ply pipe (13) of the braking control valve (14). 13
14

11

10
12
F0076560

30-120
 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

5 - Unscrew and remove the screws (15) securing the

hydraulic braking valve (16).

16 15

15
F0076570

6 - Disconnect the linkage rod (18) from the lever (17).

18
17

F0076540

7 - Unscrew and remove two securing screws (19).

19
19
F0076580

8 - Remove the complete (6) support.

★ Rest the support on a worktop “A” positioned
behind the rear axle.

F0076590

30-121
 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

9 - Disconnect the connector (19) of the pressure

switch (20). 19
22
10 - Unscrew and remove the oil filter (21).
20 24
11 - Disconnect the suction pipe (23) from the pump (22)
and remove the lubrication pipe (24).

23

21

F0076600

12 - Fully loosen the unions of pipes (25) & (26) con-

nected to the outlet manifold (27) on the front side.

25
27

26
F0076610

13 - Loosen the union (28) of the outlet pipe on the right-

hand side of the outlet manifold (27).

27

28
F0076620

14 - Partially loosen also union (29) on the control valve;

move the pipe and disconnect the Load Sensing
pipe (30) from the manifold (27). 29

27

30
F0076630

30-122
 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

15 - Loosen the screws (31) securing the manifold (27)

by a few turns.
★ Leave the screws in position.
31

27

F0076640

16 - Loosen the union (32) connecting the pump (22)

and the manifold (27).

27
32

22

F0076650

17 - Remove the screws (31) and remove the manifold

(27).

27

F0076660

18 - Unscrew and remove screws (33) and detach the

pump (22) from the transmission.
22

33

33
F0076670

30-123
 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

19 - Remove the pump (22) and the gasket, rotating it si-

multaneously outwards. 22
1
In order to withdraw the pump, the drive cou-
pling (34) must remain in its seat in its trans-
mission.
★ Always renew the gasket.
34

F0076680

20 - Withdraw and examine the drive coupling (34)

34

F0021273

REFITTING THE VARIABLE DIS-

PLACEMENT PUMP
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 22 35
After connecting the pipes, remove the plug (35)
and fill the body of the pump (22) with oil.

Oil: approx. 1 ᐉ
1 - Check the oil level in the transmission and top up if
necessary.
2 - For tractors with air and hydraulic trailer brak- F0022004

ing only: bleed the air from the brake systems.

(For details see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").
3 - Start the engine and repeatedly turn the steering to
full lock in both directions to expel any air from the
steering circuit, the lubrication circuit and the LS
circuit; check the seals of replaced pipes for leaks.
4 - Stop the engine, and re-check the oil level in the
transmission.

30-124
 PRIORITY VALVE

REMOVAL OF THE PRIORITY VALVE

1 - Remove the right rear wheel.

( F o r d e t a i l s , s e e " RE M O V A L O F T H E R E A R
WHEELS"). 6

2 - Remove the key from the ignition and thoroughly

clean the area around the valve (1). 3 8 5 2
3 - Loosen the fittings (2) by about three turns.
4 - Disconnect, in the order given, the inlet pipe (3), the lu-
brication and hydraulic trailer braking pipe (4), the de- 1
livery pipe to the power steering (5), the Load Sensing
signal pipe (6) and finally the pilot pipe of the valve (7) 7 4
★ Plug the ends of the pipes immediately to prevent F0076760

the entry of contaminants

5 - Remove the retaining bolt (8) and remove the valve (1).

REFITTING THE PRIORITY VALVE

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeat-
edly to full lock in both directions in order to expel air
from the steering system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and bleed the hydraulic trailer braking
system.

30-125
 CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER

REMOVAL OF THE CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER

Switch off the engine and remove the key.

1 - Disconnect the wire (2) of the bowden cable from the
lever (1) and detach the sleeve (4) from the mounting 2
(3).

F0076551

2 - Only if fitted.
Remove the radar (5) and its bracket (6).

6
5
F0076770

3 - Using a punch “A”, remove the roll pin (7) securing the
lever (1); remove the entire lever assembly.
1

A
F0076780

4 - Only if necessary.
Screw a bolt “B” into the lever (1) to serve as a puller.

REFITTING THE LEVER

1
• Refitting is the reverse of removal

F0058970

30-126
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC)

REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC)

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition.
★ Only if fitted
Remove the optional linkages “A” of the control valve
flow controls. A

F0021330

1. Right control valve

1 - Disconnect the delivery (1) and return (2) pipes from
the right control valve.
1

F0058980

2 - For versions with front lift only:

remove the quick-action couplers (3) of the right con-
4
trol valve and disconnect the lift connection pipes (4)
and (5).

5
3

F0058990

3 - Machines with front suspension only:

Disconnect the LS signal oil line (6) from the control
valve body (7).
6
★ Always renew the seals.
7
NOTE
On machines without front suspension, the pipes are
connected to the drain.

F0059000

30-127
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC)

4 - Disconnect the control cables (8) from the control

valve levers.
★ Label the control cables to avoid confusion on re-
connection.
8

F0059010

5 - Remove the support (9) (3 screws) for the trailer brak-

ing couplers (10) and position it to one side.
9

10

F0059020

6 - Remove the bracket (11) fixed to the upper studs (12)

of the control valve and to the control valve support
plate.

11

12 12

F0059330

7 - Remove the lower nut (13) and remove the control

valve assembly (14).

14

13

F0021360

30-128
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC)

2. Left control valve

1 - Disconnect the delivery (15) and return (16) pipes from 17
the control valve.
15
2 - Disconnect the pipes (17) and (18) from the lift control
valve.

16
18

F0059030

3 - Machines with front suspension only:

Disconnect the LS signal pipe (19) from the outer con-
trol valve.
★ Always renew the copper gaskets.
19

F0020550

4 - Disconnect the control cables (20) from the control

valve levers.
★ Label the control cables to avoid confusion on re-
connection.

20

F0059040

5 - Remove the bracket (21) supporting the external elec-

trical outlet (22) and, where present, the supplemen-
tary hydraulic couplers (23) and position the bracket to
one side.
21
★ The bracket (21) is fixed to the upper studs of the
control valve and to the control valve support 22
plate.
23

F0021391

30-129
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Version CC)

6 - Unplug the connectors (24 upper and 25 lower) from

the solenoids (26) and (27) of the lift control valve. 26 27
7 - Remove the last rear nut (28) and remove the control 29
valve assembly (29).
1

24 25
28

F0021371

REFITTING THE CONTROL VALVE

ASSEMBLIES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Position the connectors on the solenoids of the lift
control valve spool
DW upper (24)
UP lower (25)
1 - Start the engine and operate the lift to expel air from
the circuits and check for leaks.

30-130
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
starter switch.
1 - Remove the cab.
(For details see "REMOVAL OF THE CAB". 2
2 - Only if fitted.
Unscrew and remove the screws (1) connecting the 3
flow control knobs (2) of the remote control valves.
3 - Disengage the couplings (3).

1
F0076790

4 - Remove the screws (4), remove the external cou-

pler (5) and place it to one side. 5

F0076800

5 - Disconnect the upper connector (7 - DownSV) and

lower connector (8 - UpSV) from the lift control
valve.
1
6 7

F0076810

6 - Label and disconnect the pipes (9) & (10) from the
trailer coupler (11). 11
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting
in.
10

F0076820

30-131
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

7 - Remove the retaining springs (12) and the pins (13)

of the control cables of the remote control valves. 12

13

F0076830

8 - Disconnect the pipes (14), (15) and (16) (respec-

tively pressure, return and Load Sensing) from the 15
supplementary couplers on the left-hand side.
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting
in.
16

14
F0076840

9 - Disconnect the pipes (17) and (18) from the control

valve supply and exhaust ports.
17
10 - Remove the pipe (17).

18

F0076850

11 - Unscrew and remove the screws (19) securing the

support (20) for the supplementary couplers to the 21
brackets (21).

19 19
21

20
20
F0076860

30-132
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

12 - Unscrew and remove the screws (22).

22

22

F0076870

13 - Remove the complete support (20) for the supple-

mentary couplers. 20

F0076880

14 - Unscrew and remove the quick couplers (23) of

the right-hand control valve assembly; 25
disconnect the pressure and return pipes (24),
23 24
(25), (26), (27) of the front and rear lifts.
★ Always renew the copper gaskets.

26
23 27
F0076890

15 - Loosen the control valve pressure and return pipe

unions (28), (29) by a few turns.
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting 29
in. 28

F0076900

30-133
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

16 - Disconnect the pressure (30) and return (31) pipes

from the control valves (6). 6

30

31

F0076910

17 - Disconnect the Load Sensing signal pipe (33) from

the right-hand end cover (32).
32
★ Plug the pipe and the port to prevent dirt from
entering the system.

33

F0076920

18 - Screw a lifting eyebolt “B” with a long shank fully

into the control valve support (6) and sling to hoist. B
6

F0076930

19 - Unscrew and remove the four nuts (34) and their

washers.

34

34

F0076940

30-134
 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)

20 - Remove the complete control valve assembly (6).

F0076950

REFITTING THE CONTROL

VALVE ASSEMBLIES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Position the connectors on the solenoids of the
lift control valve spool
Down SV (upper) (7)
UP SV (lower) (8)
1 - Start the engine and operate the lift to expel air from
the circuits and check for leaks.

30-135
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

CAUTION!
1 - The control valves are assembled in stacks and
should only be disassembled in order to renew
the individual sections or in the event of leaks
between the sections.
Overhaul of the control valves should be carried
out directly by the manufacturer or an author-
ised service centre.
2 - Before proceeding with replacement of valve
sections, thoroughly clean and dry the sur-
rounding area.
3 - When disconnecting pipes and removing valve
sections, always plug the pipes and open ports
to prevent dirt getting in.
1. Operations common to both sides
1 - Only if fitted.
Unscrew and remove the screws (1) connecting the
flow control knobs (2) of the remote control valves. 2
2 - Detach the couplings (3).
3

1
F0076790

3 - Remove the screws (4), remove the external cou-

pler (5) and place it to one side. 5

F0076800

4 - Label and disconnect the pipes (6) and (7) from the
trailer coupler (8). 8
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting
in.
7

F0076821

30-136
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

5 - Remove the retaining springs (9) and the pins (10) of

the control valve control cables. 9

10

F0076831

6 - Disconnect the pipes (11), (12) and (13) (respec-

tively pressure, return and Load Sensing) from the 12
supplementary couplers on the left-hand side.
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting
in.
13

11
F0076841

7 - Disconnect pipes (14) and (15) from the pressure

and supply ports of the external control valves.
14
8 - Remove the pipe (14).

15

F0076851

9 - Unscrew and remove the screws (16) securing the

support (17) for the supplementary couplers to the 18
brackets (18).

16 16
18

17
17
F0076861

30-137
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

10 - Unscrew and remove the screws (19).

19

19

F0076871

11 - Remove the complete support assembly (17) for

the supplementary couplers. 17

F0076881

2. Sections on right-hand side

12 - Disconnect the LS signal pipe (19) from the end 18
cover (18).

19

F0076921

14 - Disconnect the upper connector (21 - DownSV)

and lower connector (22 - UpSV) from the lift con-
trol valve (20) .
21
20

22

F0076811

30-138
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

15 - Remove the quick-action couplers (23) and the rel-

ative gaskets.
★ Always renew the copper gaskets. 23

F0077340

16 - Progressively loosen and remove the nuts (24) and

washers securing the valve sections. 24

24
F0076970

17 - Remove the end cover (25) and spacers (26).

★ Check that the O-rings (27) and (28) are present
on the end cover (25). 27
26

25
28 26
F0076980

18 - Remove the first section (29) complete with O-rings

(27).

27

29
F0077350

30-139
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

19 - Remove the intermediate plate (30) complete with

O-rings (27) and (28) and spacers (26). 26

27
26

26

30
28
F0077360

20 - Remove the second section (31) complete with O-

ring (27).

27

31
F0077370

21 - Remove the lift section (32) complete with O-rings

(27).

27

32
F0077380

3. Sequence of control valve sections on 28

right-hand side 26 30

27

25
29

26
31
32
F0077390

30-140
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

4. Sections on left-hand side

22 - Progressively loosen and remove the nuts (24) and 24
washers securing the valve sections.
23 - Remove the end cover (33).
33

24 F0077400

24 - Remove the first section on the left (34) complete

with O-rings (27).

27

34

F0077410

25 - Remove the spacers (26) and the intermediate plate

(35) complete with O-rings (27) and (28). 26

27
35
26

28 26
F0077420

26 - Remove the second section on the left (36) com-

plete with O-rings (27).

27

36

F0077430

30-141
 CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS AND SEALS

27 - Remove the inner plate (37) complete with spacers

(26) and O-rings (27) & (28). 26
38
28 - Remove the O-rings (27), (28) and spacers (26) from 27
27
the central support (38).
37

26

26

28
F0077440

5. Sequence of control valve sections on left-

hand side 27 37
26
26

33 28
36
35

26
34
F0077450

REFITTING 26 26
THE VALVE SECTIONS
1 - Clean the mating faces of the sections and plates
thoroughly; position the O-rings (27) and (28) and
apply a light smear of grease.
2 - Assemble the valve sections following the disas-
sembly steps in reverse order.
★ Always renew all the O-rings (27) & (28) in each
section dismantled.
★ Take care to ensure that the spacers (26) are po-
sitioned correctly, i.e. between surfaces without D0022900

chasing.
3 - Tighten the nuts gradually to the specified torque in
the sequence indicated.

Nuts: 30 Nm (22.1 lb.ft.) 3 3

★ Nut tightening sequence: 1 - 2 - 3

2 2
1 1

D0022910

30-142
 LIFT CYLINDERS

REMOVAL OF THE LIFT CYLINDERS

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition. 4 3
1 - Remove the pins (1) and lower the lift rods (2) towards
the rear of the tractor.
★ Recover the spacers (3) and washers (4); make a
note of their postions. 1 1

2 2

F0020310

2 - Disconnect the pipes (6) from the cylinders (5).

★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants. 5

F0020320

3 - Using a pin punch “A”, remove the spring pin (7) se-
curing the upper pivot pin (8).

8
7

F0020330

4 - Remove the screws (9) and remove the bracket (10)

securing the lower pivot pin (11).

11 10

9
F0021400

30-143
 LIFT CYLINDERS

5 - Support the cylinder (5) while removing the upper piv-

ot pin (12). 1

5
12

F0020340

6 - Rotate the cylinder (5) so that it is horizontal and attach

it to a hoist.
Cylinder: approx 55 kg (121.2 lb.)
7 - Remove the lower pivot pin (11) and the cylinder.
1 11
5

F0020350

REFITTING THE LIFT CYLINDERS

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Lubricate the pivot pins.
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly extend the cylinders
to their full extent in order to expel air from the system.

30-144
 LIFT CYLINDERS

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE LIFT CYLINDERS

1. Disassembly
1 - Withdraw the piston (1) to the point where the circlip
(2) is visible through the hole of the delivery pipe fitting.
2
2 - Rotate the rod so that the gap in the circlip (2) is visible.

F0009200

3 - Using a screwdriver through the delivery line hole,

push one end of the circlip (2) towards the groove “A”
in the piston (1) while simultaneously rotating the pis-
ton (1) in order to release the circlip (2).
2
4 - Withdraw the complete piston assembly (1).

1
D0000821

5 - Remove in sequence the wiper seal (4), the guide (5),

the seal (6) and the second guide (7).
1 2
★ Note which way round the seal is fitted.

7 6 5 4

D0000830

2. Assembly
• Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.

1
Seal and guides: Gearbox oil.

2
★ Before inserting the piston, check that the guides
are correctly positioned in the seatings in the cyl-
inder.

30-145
 LIFT POSITION SENSOR

TESTING THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition.
1 - Cut the retaining strap and, using a thin blade, dis- 1
connect the connector (2) from the position sensor (1).

F0021410

2 - Connect the test lead T6 (code 5.9030.743.0) be-

tween the connector (2) and the sensor (1).
3 - Start the engine and with a multimeter check that the
supply voltage and the signal voltages with the lift T6
raised and lowered are within the specified ranges:
★ Supply voltage (red-blue wires):
2
5.5±1V (DC) 1
★ Signal voltage with lift raised (brown-blue wires):
equal to or greater than 0.5V (DC)
★ Signal voltage with lift lowered (brown-blue wires):
less than or equal to 4.5V (DC)
F0022070
★ If the voltage readings are not within the specified
ranges, renew the sensor.

30-146
 LIFT POSITION SENSOR

RENEWAL OF THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition

2
1. Removal of the position sensor
1 - Remove the screws (1) securing the cover (2) and the
sensor. 1

F0020360

2 - Remove the sensor (3) and unplug the connector (4).

F0020370

2. Renewal of the position sensor bush

(only if necessary)
1 - After removing the worn bush, clean and activate the
seating.

Activator: Loctite 7649 A

19 º
2 - Apply sealant to the surfaces of the hole and fit the
new bush, aligning the machined guide surfaces of
19° manteining the protusion “A” of 4.5 --0 0.5 mm.

Sealant: Loctite 648

3 - Allow the sealant to cure for at least 30 minutes before D0004771

fitting the sensor.

3. Refitting the position sensor

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
★ Before finally tightening the screws, rotate the sen-
sor fully in a counter-clockwise direction; adjust
the position sensor as described in the following
paragraph.

30-147
 LIFT POSITION SENSOR

4. Position sensor adjustment

1 - Detach any mounted implements from the 3-point
linkage. 1
2 - With the engine stopped, raise the lift arms to their
A
maximum height using suitable lifting equipment.
3 - Make reference marks on the lever (1) and on the bear-
ing support (2).

2
F0021420

4 - Lower the lift to its maximum depth position.

5 - Start the engine, push the external pushbutton (3) to 3
rise the lift arms up to it stop. Hold the pushbutton (3)
depressed and at the same time rotate the sensor (4)
in clockwise.

F0021430

6 - As the sensor (4) is rotated, the lift will start to rise; top
rotating the sensor and release the pushbutton (3)
when the reference marks made in step 3 are apart a
distance of “D” di 5–6 mm (0.20 - 0.24 in.). D

F0021440

7 - Fix the sensor (4) in position by tightening the screws

(5).
4

F0020361

30-148
 LIFT POSITION SENSOR

8 - Check the adjustment by first lowering the lift (using

external pushbutton (3)) to an intermediate position 3
and then raising to the maximum height by holding the
pushbutton pressed; the lift arms should stop before
reaching the mechanical limit and thus over-pressu-
rising the hydraulic system, at which point the refer-
ence marks should be the distance apart indicated in
step 6.
If the hydraulic system is maintained at maximum
pressure for more than 30 seconds during the adjust-
ment procedure, the system will automatically switch
to neutral and the error code “37” will be signalled.
In this case, before repeating the adjustment proce- F0021430

dure, first turn the ignition key to the “O” position.

9 - If necessary, alter the position of the sensor by turning
it a few degrees in a counter-clockwise direction.

30-149
 LIFT DRAFT SENSOR

REMOVAL OF THE LIFT DRAFT SENSOR

1 - Remove the screws (1) and remove the cover (2) and
the spacers (3).
1

F0020380

2 - Support the lever and remove the bracket (4) and then
the sensor (5).
4
5

F0020390

3 - Release the wiring from the retaining straps and un-

plug the sensor connector (6).
★ The connectors are located under the cab and can 6
be accessed from the left-hand side of the tractor

F0020400

REFITTING THE LIFT

DRAFT SENSOR
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
★ Make sure the sensor is installed the right way
round.

F0021450

30-150
 DRIVER'S SEAT

REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT

Remove the key from the ignition and apply the park-
ing brake.
1
1 - Lift the rear floor mat (1) and disconnect the feed wire
(2) for the seat compressor.

F0018900

2 - Only if installed
Raise the rear hatch (3) and remove the armrest fixing
bolts (4).
3 - Remove the armrest (4). 3

4
F0041440

4 - Unplug the connector (5) of the multifunction armrest

console.

F0041450

5 - Remove the four nuts (6) and remove the complete

driver's seat (7).

REFITTING THE DRIVER'S SEAT 7

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

6
F0018911

30-151
 CONTROLS IN THE MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST CONSOLE (OPTIONAL)

REMOVAL OF THE CONTROLS IN THE MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST

CONSOLE (OPTIONAL)
Remove the key from the ignition and apply the park-
ing brake.
1 - Unplug the connector (1) of the multifunction armrest
console. 1

F0041451

2 - Raise the rear hatch (2) and remove the armrest fixing
bolts (3).
3 - Remove the armrest.
1

3
F0041441

4 - Place the armrest (3) upside down on a work bench,

remove the three fixing screws of the lower cover (4)
and remove the cover.
4

F0041640

1. Removal of the lift control and hand throttle

assembly.
5 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (1).
3
6 - Unplug the connectors (2), (3).
2

F0041650

30-152
 CONTROLS IN THE MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST CONSOLE (OPTIONAL)

7 - Turn the armrest over and withdraw the controls as-

sembly (4). 1

F0041660

2. Removal of the range change control

assembly
8 - Lift the gaiter (1), withdraw the pivot pin (2) and remove
the lever (3).

1
3
2

F0041670

9 - Unplug the connector (4).

10 - Remove the four bolts (5) and remove the control as-
5
sembly (6).

5
4
F0041680

REFITTING THE CONTROLS IN

THE MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST
CONSOLE
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ If a new hand throttle is fitted, it will have to be cal-
ibrated (see the SERDIA program in section 20).

30-153
 STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL

REMOVAL OF THE STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH

UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-
tive battery lead (–).
1
1 - Remove the centre cover (1) and remove the nut (2) 3
with its washer.
2 - Remove the locknut (3) for telescopic adjustment of
the steering wheel.
2

F0018920

3 - Remove the nut (4), the toothed washer (5) and re-
move the steering wheel (6). 1 6
4 5

F0059060

4 - Remove the circlip (7) and remove the steering col-

umn switch unit (8) from the steering column.
8

F0059070

5 - Insert a thin blade “A” under the gasket and prise off
the instrument panel (9).
★ Alternatively, withdraw the right and left switch
groups “B” and push the instrument panel from the 9
inside.

B
F0059080

30-154
 STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL

6 - Unplug the connectors (10) and (11) from the in-

strument panel (9); remove the assembly.

10
9

11

F0018950

REFITTING THE STEERING

WHEEL,STEERING COLUMN
SWITCH UNIT AND INSTRUMENT
PANEL
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
Steering wheel nut:
M18x1.5: 40±10% Nm (29.5±10% lb.ft.)
M8: 10 +0 2 Nm (7.4 +0 1.5 lb.ft.)

30-155
 STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER

RENEWAL OF THE STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND

THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-
tive battery lead (–). 1
1 - Remove the steering wheel (1).
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE STEERING
WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND
INSTRUMENT PANEL").

F0059090

2 - Remove the lower screws (2) joining the shrouds (3) of

the shuttle control lever (4) and remove the safety bar 4
(5).

F0018970

3 - Unscrew and remove six screws (6) securing the

shrouds of the steering column switch unit (7).

F0059100

4 - Remove the circlip (8) of the steering column switch

unit (7).

7
8

F0059110

30-156
 STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER

5 - Lift off the switch unit (7) and place it to one side.
The contacts of the switch unit are protected by 7
adhesive insulation material; recover this insu-
lation as it will have to be repositioned.

F0059120

6 - Unplug the connector (9), remove the screws (10) and

detach the shuttle control lever assembly (11).

10

11

F0059130

7 - Remove the shuttle control lever (11), detaching it

from the cover (12).

11
12

F0059140

ASSEMBLY OF THE STEERING

COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND
THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1 - Turn the ignition key to position “I” and check oper-
ation of the direction indicators, lights and windscreen
wiper.
2 - Start the engine and run it at idle speed ; engage a
gear and check that the shuttle control lever functions
correctly.

30-157
 CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

REMOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S 1
SEAT").
2 - Remove the floor mats.
3 - Remove the steering wheel and steering column 1
switch unit.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE STEERING
WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT
AND INSTRUMENT PANEL") F0019030

4 - Unscrew and remove the screws (1).

5 - Remove the upper centre console (2) by lifting it up-
wards.
2

F0019040

6 - Rotate the console (2) towards the rear of the tractor

and unplug the connectors (3), (4) and (5).
★ Note that connectors and pushbuttons all bear
identification marks with the exception of the 2nd
pushbutton “C” from the left.
★ The unmarked pushbutton is to be connected to its
connector only on models equipped with a front
lift.
★ The connector marked 3a is not to be connected.

7 - Remove cap (6), remove the self-locking nut (7) and its
washer and remove the accelerator pedal (8).

7
6

F0019060

30-158
 CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

8 - Fully lower the steering column.

Pull outwards the lock handle (9) of the steering tilt ad-
justment; remove the cotter pin (10) and remove the
handle.
★ Renew the cotter pin at each reassembly. 10

F0019070

9- Unscrew and remove the retaining screws (11) of the

air duct fascia (12).

11

11

12

F0019080

10 - Detach the air duct (14) from the centre shroud (13)
and remove it.

13

14
F0019090

11 - Remove the cable ties (15) to release the wiring from

the guide fixed to the footplate. 15
★ Note that the cable ties are located in grooves. 15

F0019100

30-159
 CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

12 - Withdraw the wiring (17) from the right-hand console

(16).
1
17

16

F0019110

13 - Release the wires of the pushbutton connectors from

the cable ties (18).
18

F0019120

14 - Release the vertical wiring (20) from the cable tie (19);
withdraw the complete wiring harness through the ap-
erture exposed by tilting the console forwards.

19

20

F0019130

15 - Rotate the shroud (21) to align the rotation lock key

with the spring (22); remove the shroud (21).
2
16 - Remove the complete console assembly (2).

22
21

F0019140

30-160
 CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

17 - Remove the screws (23).

23

F0019150

18 - Lift and tilt the console shroud (13) towards the rear of
the tractor to disengage it from the clutch and brake
pedals.
13

F0019160

REFITTING THE CENTRE

CONSOLE AND SHROUD
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Check the condition of the fascia gasket; renew it if
damaged.

30-161
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

• The right-hand console can be partially opened to in-

spect the wiring and the air conditioning blower and
for removal of the hand throttle assembly.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the neg-
ative battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat. 2
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S
SEAT".
2 - Remove the gaiter (1) and unplug the connector (2). 1

F0019581

3 - In case of removal only: disconnect the control ca-

bles (3) from the auxiliary service control valves.
1
3

F0019641

4 - Disconnect the control cables (6) and (7) from the

speed selector lever (4) or the operating mode lever
(5).
4
6

5
F0019611

5 - Remove the front floor mat and remove the plate (8) of
the cable guide (9) in order to free the control cables (6)
and (7).

6
8
7

F0019571

30-162
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

6 - Drive out the spring pin (10) and remove the creeper
engagement lever (11).

10

11

F0019850

7 - Remove the screw (12) move the support (13).

13
12

F0019860

8 - Unplug the connector (14) of the lever position sensor

5 0+1
(15).
If the sensor (15) has been removed or re-
placed, on refitting adjust the protrusion to 5 +0 1
mm (0.197 +0 0.04 in.) relative to the tightened
nut. 15

14

F0019870

9 - Withdraw the pin (16) and disconnect the creeper con-

trol cable (17). 1

16
17

F0019880

30-163
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

10 - Unscrew and remove the lower bolt (18) of the console

(19).

19

18

F0020050

11 - Position a hydraulic jack “A” with a non-slip block un-

der the tow hook (20) so that it is inclinded towards the
right-hand wheel; raise the tractor so that the right
wheel is off the ground (21).
20

A 21

F0018871

12 - Position a jack “B” with safety wings under the right

brake assembly; remove the right wheel and lower the
tractor onto the stand.
1
★ Stand load capacity: minimum 2 tons.

B
F0019890

13 - In case of console removal only:

Remove the four screws (22) and remove the cover
plate (23).
23

22

F0019900

30-164
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

14 - In case of console removal only: disconnect from

the bulkhead fitting the connectors of the lift line (24)
(TKAB2), the transmission (25) (TKAB1), the front sus-
24
pension (26), the feed cable (27), the creeper engage-
28 25
ment indicator cable (28),the cab lights connector (29)
and the feed cable (30).

30

29

26
27

29

F0019910

15 - Disconnect the engine line connector (31) and the

connector (32) from the bulkhead fitting.
31 32

F0020040

16 - Remove the grille (33) and the filter (34) from the right-
hand cab pillar.
34

33

F0019920

30-165
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

17 - Unscrew and remove the trim panel retaining screws

(35). 35

35

F0019930

18 - Insert a thin blade between the cab pillar (36) and the
interior trim (37) and detach the clips (38) from the pil-
lar and the trim.
Remove the trim (37).

38
36

37
F0019940

19 - Unplug the lower connectors (39), (40) and (41) and the
upper connector (42). 39

40
42

41

F0019950

20 - Disconnect the gas spring (43) of the right-hand door

and remove the mounting pin (44).

44

43

F0019960

30-166
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

21 - Remove the bolts, lift the seat support (45) and dis-
connect the hose (46).

46 45

F0000771

22 - In case of console removal only: unplug the con-

nectors (47) and (48).

48
47

F0019990

23 - Open the rear right cable hatch (49) to access the

screw (50).
50

49

F0019970

24 - Remove the screws (51) and remove the flanged nut

(52) located under the right fender.
51

51
52

F0019980

30-167
 RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE

25 - Loosen and remove the bolt (53).

53

F0020020

26 - Unscrew and remove the front retaining screws (54).

54

F0020010

27 - Raise the front of the right-hand console (55) and

move it away from the side of the cab; if necessary, re-
move the console.
★ When removing the console, support the electrical 55
wiring and control cables.

F0019631

REFITTING THE RIGHT-HAND

CONSOLE
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Connect the control cables following the opera-
tions described in the heading "REFITTING THE
PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION CONTROL
CABLES" and "REFITTING THE AUXILIARY
SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES").

30-168
 LEFT-HAND CONSOLE

REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND CONSOLE

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat. (For details, see "REMOVAL OF 1
THE DRIVER'S SEAT").
2 - Remove the accelerator pedal (1) and remove the front
floor mat (2).

F0019061

3 - Only where fitted.

Remove the passenger seat (3). 3

F0021460

4 - Remove the rear floor mat (4).

F0021470

5 - Remove the parking brake cover (5).

6 - Remove the seat support (6) and remove the strap (7) 8
to disconnect the hose (8).
Remove the screw (9).
5 7

6 9

F0021480

30-169
 LEFT-HAND CONSOLE

7 - Remove the interior trim (10) from the cab pillar.

8 - Disconnect the gas spring of the left door and remove
the mounting pin.
(For details, see "OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE").

10

F0021490

9 - Remove the fixing screws and move the left-hand

console (11) away from the side of the cab.
11

F0021500

10 - Unplug the four connectors (12).

13
11 - Disconnect the heating valve control cable (13).
12 - Remove the left-hand console (11). 12

12

12
F0021510

REFITTING THE
LEFT-HAND CONSOLE
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-170
 TRANSMISSION LIFT AND FRONT SUSPENSION ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

REMOVAL OF THE TRANSMISSION LIFT AND FRONT SUSPENSION

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-
tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the rear hatch of the right-hand console.
2 - Withdraw the switch assembly (1). 1
3 - Label the switches and the corresponding connectors
to avoid confusion on reconnection; unplug the con-
nectors (2) and remove the switches.
2

2
F0019170

1. Transmission electronic control unit

1 - Remove the two bolts (3) and withdraw the ECU (4).

F0041580

2 - Unplug the connector (5).

F0041590

2. Lift electronic control unit

3 - Unplug the connectors (6), (7).
★ Note the positions of the connectors.

7
6
F0041600

30-171
 TRANSMISSION LIFT AND FRONT SUSPENSION ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

4 - Remove the fixing screws (8).

F0041610

5 - Withdraw the ECU (9).

F0041620

3. Front suspension electronic control unit

6 - Unplug the connectors (10), (11), remove the fixing
screws (12) and withdraw the ECU (13).

11 12
10

13

F0041630

REFITTING THE TRANSMISSION

LIFT AND FRONT SUSPENSION
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-172
 FUSE AND RELAY BOARD

REMOVAL OF THE FUSE AND RELAY BOARD

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1
1 - Remove the ECUs of the lift, the front suspension and
the transmission.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE TRANSMISSION
LIFT AND FRONT SUSPENSION ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL UNITS"). 2
2 - Unplug the connectors (1) and (2) from the signal out-
let sockets and the external outlet socket for trailer-
mounted implements.

F0019260

3 - Remove the bracket (3) of the diagnostics outlet (4)

and place it to one side.

F0019270

4 - Disconnect the connectors (P2), (P6), (P3), (P5), (J1),

(J2) and (J3) from the fuse/relay board.
5
★ The connectors are marked with the same sym-
bols as the sockets on the circuit board. 6
5 - Remove the cover and disconnect the earth lead (6).

F0019280

6 - Disconnect the connector (7) (P5), which is accessed

through the ECU compartment.

F0019290

30-173
 FUSE AND RELAY BOARD

7 - Remove the relays from the board (5) which prevent its
removal:
RL4 - front windscreen (8) 8
RL14 - direction indicators (9)

F0019300

8 - Disconnect the lead (10) and remove the five fixing

screws (11).

11

10
F0019310

9 - Remove the board (5).

F0019320

REFITTING THE FUSE AND

RELAY BOARD
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-174
 ENGINE ECU

REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE ECU

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the ventilation and heater control panel.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE CLIMATE CON-
TROL PANEL").
2 - Disconnect the air hose (1) from the outlet vent and
position it to one side.
1
1

F0020000

3 - Loosen the fixing screws (2) and partially withdraw the

ECU (3).

2
3
F0019700

4 - Label and unplug the connectors (4) and (5).

5 - Remove the ECU (3).

F0019710

REFITTING THE ENGINE ECU

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ The air hose must be routed over the top of the
ECU between the two connectors.

30-175
 CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES

CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES

1. Removal of the potentiometer

1 - Remove the centre console and console shroud.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE
AND SHROUD"). 2
2 - Disconnect the tie-rod (2) from the clutch pedal (1).
1

F0019340

3 - Unplug the connector (4) from the potentiometer (3).

5
4 - Remove the screws (5) and remove the potentiometer
3
complete with the tie-rod.

F0019350

★ If a new potentiometer is to be fitted, disconnect the

tie-rod (2), remove the cotter pin (6) and the lever (7).
★ Renew the cotter pin at each re-assembly. 3 2

6
F0021520

1.1. Refitting the potentiometer.

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
After refitting the potentiometer, check the po-
sition of the pedal and its travel; check also the
calibration values using the programming/diag-
nostics tester.
NOTE. After adjusting the height of the clutch pedal,
check using the EDS program in section 20
that the output voltage of the potentiometer is
4.3V.
If necessary, adjust the length of the tie-rod (2)
to obtain this value.

30-176
 CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES

2. Adjustment of the clutch pedal position and

travel
1 - Check that the distance between the top edge of the
clutch pedal (1) and floor is the same as that of the
brake pedals.
If necessary, adjust the pedal height by adjusting the
buffer (8). 1

F0019380

2 - Adjust the stop (9) so that the pedal travel “A” of 155 +0 5
mm (6.107 +0 0.197 in.)
NOTE. With the EDS program in section 20, check
that the voltage reaches a value of 0.9–1.1V.

A
D0005400

3. Renewal of the proximity sensor

1 - Unplug the connector (10).
2 - Unscrew the nut (11) sufficiently to disengage it from 10
the sensor (12).
3 - Check that the axial play of the pedal is within the
range of 0.1–0.6 mm (0.004 – 0.024 in.); if the play ex-
ceeds the permitted maximum, adjust it before ad- 12
11
justing the position sensor (12).

F0019360

4 - Fit the new sensor (12) following the removal proce-

dure in reverse.
Fully depress the clutch pedal.
5 - Adjust the position of the sensor relative to the lever by D
way of the adjuster nuts (11). 11
★ Distance “D” between the lever and the sensor:
12
0.5–1 mm (0.02 – 0.04 in.).

F0019370

30-177
 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO

REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF

THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-
tive battery lead (–).
2
1. Removal of the lift and rear PTO control panel.
1 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (1) of the lift control
panel (2).

F0019400

2 - Lift the assembly (2) and disconnect the PTO selector

control cable (4) from the lever (3). 2
3 - Remove the yoke (5) securing the outer cable (6) and 3
disconnect it.
1
4

5
F0019410

4 - Unplug the connector (7) and remove the assembly

(2). 2

F0019420

5 - Only in the case of testing or renewal of the po-

tentiometers.: Unscrew and remove the screws (8)
and remove the lower cover (9). 8

F0019430

30-178
 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO

2. Removal of the auxiliary service valve

control levers
1 - Remove the lift control panel as described in the pre-
vious paragraph.
2 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (10) of the control 11
levers assembly (11).

10
F0019440

3 - Lift the assembly (11) and rotate it through 90°.

11

F0019450

2.1 Removal of the cross-gate control lever

assembly
1 - Remove the yokes (12) securing the outer cables and
disconnect the cables (13) and (14). 1
★ Label the control cables to avoid confusion on re-
connection.
13
14

12
F0019460

2 - Unscrew and remove the nuts (15) with their washers;

withdraw the control assembly (16) from the panel
(11). 15
11

16

F0019470

30-179
 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO

2.2 Removal of the individual service valve

control levers
18
1 - Remove the yokes (17) securing the outer cables and
disconnect the inner cables (18). 1
★ Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion.

17

F0019480

2 - Unscrew and remove bolts(19) with their washers and

remove the levers (20) and the lever pivot supports
(21).

20 19

21

F0019490

2.3 Removal of the PTO control panel.

1 - Unscrew and remove the screws (22).

22
F0019500

2 - Lift the control panel (23) and unplug the connectors

(24).
★ Label the connectors to avoid confusion on recon-
nection. 23

24

F0019510

30-180
 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO

3 - Remove the yoke (25) securing the outer cable (26),

disconnect the cable (27) and remove the assembly 23
(23). 1

27

26
25

F0019540

2.4 Removal of the lift control assembly and the

hand throttle
1 - Unscrew and remove the two outer fixing screws (28)
of the assembly (29).
29

28

F0019520

2 - Release the right-hand console (30) from its fixings

and tilt it towards the centre of the cab in order to re- 30
move the inner screws (31) and unplug the connectors
(32).
★ (For details, see "OPENING AND REMOVAL OF 31
THE RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE").
3 - Remove the lift control assembly. 2
32

F0019530

30-181
 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO

REFITTING THE CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE

AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ The slotted bush “A” securing the cable must be
oriented towards the outer end of the fixing pin.
1 - Adjust the length of the control cables.
(For details, see "RENEWAL OF THE AUXILIARY
SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES"). A
2
★ If a new hand throttle is fitted, it will have to be cal-
ibrated. (See the SERDIA program in section 20).

F0019550

30-182
 PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION CONTROL CABLES

RENEWAL OF THE PTO ENGAGEMENT AND

SELECTION CONTROL CABLES
(Figures refer to the speed selector)
1 - Remove the lever assembly relative to the cable to be
renewed.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL PAN-
ELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE
VALVES AND THE PTO").

F0019561

2 - Disconnect the control cable (1) from the control lever

(2) and remove the yoke (3) to remove the outer cable
(4).

4 3

F0019543

3 - Remove the front floor mat and remove the plate (5) of
the cab guide (6) in order to release the outer cable to
be renewed.

F0019570

4 - Loosen the fixing screw (7) of the gear lever gaiter (8).
5 - Raise the gaiter (8), unplug the connector (9) and with-
draw the control cable to be renewed.
7

F0019580

30-183
 PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION CONTROL CABLES

6 - Disconnect the cable end fitting (10) from the speed

change lever (11) or the operating mode lever (12); re-
move the yoke securing the outer cable and remove 10 (Cambio velocità)
the control cable.

12

11 (Modo di lavoro)
F0019590

REFITTING THE PTO

ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION
CONTROL CABLES
1 - Extend the new cable and engage it in the cable guide
1
(6). 6
2 - Connect the end fitting of the inner control cable (2) to 2
the control lever (1) and secure the outer cable (3) with
the yoke (4). 3

4
F0022180

3 - Fix the lever assembly (13) to the right-hand console.

4 - Move the lever (14) to the position corresponding to
the position of the lever (10) or (11) mounted on the 10
transmission. 14 13

11
F0019600

5 - Secure the outer cable with the yoke.

6 - Stretch the cable slightly to connect it to the fitting on
the lever (10) or (11), making sure that the lever on the 10
console is still in the correct position.

11

F0019610

30-184
 PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SELECTION CONTROL CABLES

7 - Move the lever (14) or (15) in the cab and check that the
corresponding lever on the transmission moves
through its entire travel and changes the gear. 14
★ Check that the travel of the lever (14) or (15) is cen-
tred relative to the slot in the console.

15

F0019560

8 - Secure the outer cable in the bulkhead fitting (6) by in-

stalling the plate (5).
9 - Reconnect the connector, reposition the gaiter (8) of
the gear lever and fix in position with the screw (7) and 8
its washer.
6

5
F0019620

30-185
 AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

RENEWAL OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

1 - Remove the seat.

(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S
SEAT").
2 - Remove the control levers assembly and disconnect
the control cables to be renewed from the levers.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL PAN-
ELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE
VALVES AND THE PTO").

F0019441

3 - Detach the right-hand console (1) from the cab, but do

not unplug any of the connectors. 1
(For details, see "OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE").

F0019630

4 - Disconnect the outer cables (2) and inner cables (3)

from the control valve assembly.

F0019640

5 - Remove the screws and remove the plate (4) securing

the bulkhead gasket (5).
Release the control cables (6) from the bulkhead fitting
4
and withdraw them towards the rear of the tractor.

F0019650

30-186
 AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

REFITTING THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1 - Check that the control cable lever and the corre-
sponding control valve lever are both in neutral.

F0019561

2 - Fix the outer cables with the yokes (1).

3 - Connect the inner cables (2) to the control levers. 2

1
F0020030

4 - With the control lever in neutral position, lift the re-

taining bush (3) and, while keeping the cable under
slight tension, insert the end in the fitting (4).

3
3

2
F0021540

5 - Lower the retaining bush (3); check that the control

valve spool travels through its full stroke and that the
control lever is positioned centrally in its slot when the
control valve is in neutral.
★ For the cross-gate control lever, check the spool
travel for both side-to-side and vertical move-
ments of the lever.

F0021550

30-187
 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

1 - Remove the screws (1) and (2) and remove the shroud
(3).
3

4
2

F0019720

2 - Operate the lever (4) repeatedly to eliminate any play in

the mechanism. 4

3 - With the lever (4) fully lowered, adjust the height of the
microswitch (5) by raising it to its maximum height and
then lowering it to obtain the correct amount of resid-
ual travel. 5
★ Residual travel: 1 mm (0.04 in.)
4 - Replace the shroud (3).

F0019730

30-188
 CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

REMOVAL OF THE CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Pull off the air conditioning on/off knob (1).

F0019660

2 - Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (2) of the con-

trol panel (3).

F0019670

3 - Detach the control panel (3) by pressing the spring

clips (4) securing it to the left-hand console.

4
4

F0019680

4 - Lift the panel (3), disconnect the connectors (4) and

(5), the wiring (6), and the heater control cable (7).

7
REFITTING THE CLIMATE 4
CONTROL PANEL
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
6

F0019690

30-189
 HEATER VALVE

RENEWAL OF THE HEATER VALVE

1. Removal
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition.
1 - Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system.

Coolant:
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)

2 - Disconnect the inner control cable (2) and the outer

cable (3) from the valve (1). 1
1

F0021560

3 - Loosen the retaining straps (4) and remove the valve

(1).

4 4

F0021570

2. Refitting and adjustment of the control cable.

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
MAX.
1
★ Connect the heating valve control cable as follows:
+2
1 - Turn the heater control knob fully to the left (blue
section) and then two notches back to the right
(red section).

D0004730

30-190
 HEATER VALVE

2 - Turn the lever (5) of the heater valve (1) up to to the

stop (6). 1
3 - Fix the outer part (7) of the control cable (2) with 5
the spring clip (8) and the inner cable (2) with the
screw (9).

6
8
9 7
2

F0021580

1 - Fill the cooling system.

Coolant
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)
2 - Fully open the heater valve.
3 - Start the engine: allow the coolant to circulate and
check for leaks.
4 - Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.

30-191
 HEATER MATRIX

REMOVAL OF THE HEATER MATRIX

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat. (For details, see "REMOVAL OF 1
THE DRIVER'S SEAT").
2 - Remove the accelerator pedal (1) and remove the front
floor mat (2).

F0019061

3 - Remove the rear floor mat (3).

F0021471

4 - Remove the retaining strap (4) and the air hose (5).

F0019081

5 - Remove the bolts and lift the seat support (6).

6 - Remove the bolts and remove the upper cover (7) of 6
the air conditioning assembly.

F0021590

30-192
 HEATER MATRIX

7 - Turn the heater control knob to the MAX position (red

section).
Drain the coolant from the engine and the heater ma-
8
trix by disconnecting the pipes (8).

Coolant:
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)
★ After draining the system, reconnect the pipes (8).
8 - Remove the evaporator.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE AIR CONDI-
TIONING EVAPORATOR").
F0021600

9 - Remove the hose clamp (9) and disconnect the ver-

tical return hose (10) from the matrix.

10

F0021610

10 - Remove the hose clamp and disconnect the horizon-

tal delivery pipe (11) from the matrix.

11

F0021620

11 - Remove the matrix (12) by lifting the right side verti-

cally and then rotating it towards the rear of the tractor.
12

F0021630

30-193
 HEATER MATRIX

REFITTING THE HEATER MATRIX

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1 - Fill the cooling system.

Coolant
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)
2 - Start the engine: allow the coolant to circulate and
check for leaks.
3 - Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.

30-194
 AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR

REMOVAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat. (For details, see "REMOVAL OF 1
THE DRIVER'S SEAT").
2 - Remove the accelerator pedal (1) and remove the front
floor mat (2).

F0019061

3 -Remove the rear floor mat (3).

F0021471

4 - Connect the quick-fit couplers of the high (R) and low

(S) pressure pipes to the refrigerant (R134A) charging,
testing and recovery machine.
Set the machine for recovery operation and start it; al- R
low the machine to run until all the refrigerant has been
recovered, then disconnect it. 1 S

★ Measure the quantity of oil recovered and conse-

quently to be reintroduced into the system.

F0077090

5 - Remove the hose clamp (4) and the air hose (5)

F0019081

30-195
 AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR

6 - Remove the bolts and lift the seat support (6).

7 - Remove the screws and remove the cover (7) of the air 6
conditioning assembly.

F0021590

8 - Disconnect the inlet (8) and outlet (9) pipes from the
evaporator. 2
Immediately seal the ends of the pipes (8) and (9) to
prevent atmospheric moisture from getting into the
air conditioning system. 8
9 - Release the rubber diaphragm (10).
9
10 - Lift up the evaporator (11); remove the temperature
sensor (12) and place it on one side. 3
11 - Remove the evaporator (11).
F0021650

REFITTING THE EVAPORATOR

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Quantity R134a: 10
Mod. 108 118 128
g 1950 1950 1950
oz. 68.74 68.74 68.74

★ After recharging the system, check the seals on

the pipes (R and S) and throughout the system us- F0001062

ing a leak detector.

2
High pressure fitting (5/8’ - 18UNF): 11
13.6-- 20.3 Nm (10 -- 15 lb.ft.)
Low pressure fitting (7/8’ - 14UNF):
35.3-- 42 Nm (26 -- 31 lb.ft.)

3 12
★ Check that the temperature sensor is securely
fixed.
1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover (7).

F0000941

30-196
 RIGHT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–). 1
1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S
SEAT").
2
2 - Remove the centre console shroud. (For details, see
"REMOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD").
3 - Remove the fixing screws of the right-hand console.
(For details, see "OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE").

F0021592

4 - Remove the seat support (1) and upper cover (2) of the
air conditioning assembly.
5 - Remove the evaporator. (For details, see "REMOVAL 3
4
OF THE AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR")
6 - Remove four bolts (3) securing the fan (4).
7 - Remove the fan (4) and turn it over.

F0001000

8 - Unplug the connectors (5) and (6). 1

If a new fan is to be fitted, the support block (7) 7
should also be renewed. 4

5
6
F0001010

REFITTING THE RIGHT-HAND AIR

CONDITIONING FAN
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Stick the support block on to the fan screw before
positioning the fan

Block: Loctite 401

1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover.

30-197
 LEFT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–). 1
1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT").
2 - Remove the left-hand console without disconnecting 2
the control cable of the heater valve. (For details, see
"REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND CONSOLE").
3 - Remove the seat support (1) and the upper cover (2) of
the air conditioning assembly
4 - Withdraw the evaporator. (For details, see "REMOVAL
F0021592
OF THE AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR").

5 - Remove the four screws (3) securing the fan (4).

6 - Remove the fan (4) and turn it over. 3 4

F0001020

7 - Unplug the connectors (5) and (6). 1

7
If a new fan is to be fitted, the support block (7)
should also be renewed. 4

6
F0001030

REFITTING THE LEFT-HAND

AIR CONDITIONING FAN
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Stick the block to the fan screw before positioning
the fan.

Block: Loctite 401

1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover.

30-198
 PARKING BRAKES

ADJUSTMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKES

1 - Before proceeding with the adjustment, operate the

handbrake lever (1) repeatedly in order to eliminate
any play and check that the control cable slides freely.
2 -Apply a dynamometer with a scale of up to 500 Nm to
the handgrip, and raise the handbrake lever to the first
notch; check that the force applied to reach the first
notch is within the normal limits.
★ Normal force: 300 +0 30 N (55 +0 5 lb.)
1

F0021660

3 - If the force is outside these limits, screw out the nut (2)
with the least clearance and screw in the nut (3) with

m m
5 m
m
most clearance.

0, ,5
IN 1
M AX
2

M
4 - Then check that the distances between the nuts (2)
and (3) of the tie-rods (4) are 0.5–1.5 mm (0.02 -- 0.06
in.).
3

F0021671

5 - Take the tractor to straight section of apshalted road

at least 50 m (97 yard) in length.
6 - Engage gear and move off.
7 - With the tractor in motion, depress the clutch pedal
and fully apply the handbrake (1); check that the rear
wheels lock up simultaneously.
8 - If the rear wheels do not lock up at the same time,
screw in gradually and by just a few degrees the nut
(2) corresponding to the wheel that fails to lock up
and screw out the nut corresponding to the other
wheel.
9 - Repeat the previous operations until both rear wheels
lock up simultaneously when the handbrake is fully
applied.

30-199
 CAB DOOR CABLE

RENEWAL OF CAB DOOR CABLE

1 - Unscrew and remove the four screws (1) securing the

two halves of the handle (2).

1 1

F0019740

2 - Remove the two halves of the handle and recover the

bushes (3) and the pin (4).
3

4
2
3
F0019750

3 - Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (5) of the door

lock cover (6).
5

F0019760

4 - Loosen the clamp nut (7) and withdraw the cable (8).

8 F0019770

30-200
 CAB DOOR CABLE

5 - Feed the new cable (8) starting from the handle side;
engage it with the pin (4) and the clamp nut (7).
With the cable under slight tension, tighten down the
clamp nut.
7

4
8
F0019780

6 - Lubricate the bushes (3) and the slide ways for the
handle; fit the bushes to the pin and refit the handle (2).

Slide ways and bushes: Molikote 3

2
7 - Check that the door opens correctly and complete the
refitting procedure.

F0019790

30-201
 TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

REMOVAL OF THE TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

Remove the key from the ignition.

1 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (1) of the upper

cover (2); remove the cover. 2
1

F0019800

2 - Remove the gauge (3); if a new gauge is to be fitted,

unplug the connectors (4) and (5).
★ Label the connectors (5) to avoid confusion on re-
connection. 3

5
F0019810

3 - To replace the bulb, unplug the connectors (4) and

withdraw the bulb holder (6).

F0019820

REFITTING THE TRAILER

BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-202
 POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS DISPLAY

REMOVAL OF THE POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS DISPLAY

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

1 - Insert a thin blade “A” between the cab pillar and the
display unit (1).
2 - Prise off the display (1).
A

F0019830

3 - Unplug the connector (2).

F0019840

REFITTING THE POWERSHIFT -

POWERSHUTTLE STATUS
DISPLAY
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

30-203
 CAB

REMOVAL OF THE CAB

Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
Discharge any residual pressure from the trailer brak-
ing air reservoir and the cab suspension system.
1
1 - Remove the rear wheels.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE REAR
WHEELS").
2 - Remove the air cleaner.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE AIR CLEANER").

F0077460

3 - Remove the cover plate (1) and disconnect from the

bulkhead fitting the connectors of the electrical leads
of the transmission (2) (TKAB1), the lift (3) (TKAB2)
and the connector (4) and power supply lead (5) for the
front axle (if present). 2

(3) TKAB2 SERVIZI

CABINA 3

COMANDO
SUPERRIDUTTORE

4
(2) TKAB1
F0021700

(4) SOSPENSIONE (5)

ANTERIORE

F0019911

4 - Disconnect from the front bulkhead plate the connec-

tor (6) and the connector (7) of the engine wiring.
7 6
5 - Remove the bolts and nuts (8) of the gear lever (9).

8
9

F0020041

30-204
 CAB

6 - Remove the gear lever gaiter (10), unplug the connec-

tor (11) and remove the complete lever assembly (12).
12

11

10

F0019583

7 - Disconnect the control cables (13) from the auxiliary

service control valves.
★ Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion. 13
★ Disconnect also the outer cables.

F0076990

8 - Disconnect the control cable (14) from the PTO speed

selector lever (15).
9 - Disconnect the control cable (16) from the PTO oper-
ating mode selector lever (17). 14 15
★ Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion.
★ Disconnect also the outer cables.
17

16

F0020160

10 - Disconnect the control cable (18) from the creeper

control lever (19).
★ Disconnect also the outer cable. 18
19

F0076552

30-205
 CAB

11 - Remove the cab access steps (20).

12 - Remove the fuel tank. 20
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF FUEL TANK").

F0017191

13 - Disconnect the system feed wire from the positive ter-

minal (21) (+) of the battery (22).

21

22

F0017141

14 - Disconnect the earth leads (23) from the engine.

23

23

F0018524

15 - Draw the fluid out of the brake fluid reservoir (24); dis-
connect the suction pipes (25) and remove the panel
(26).

24

25

26

F0077470

30-206
 CAB

16 - Disconnect the brake cylinder lines (28) from the

brake units (27).
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting
in.

28 27

F0077000

17 - Label and disconnect the pipes (29) and (30) con-

necting the power steering to the steering cylinder.

29 30

F0077010

18 - Disconnect the pressure (31), return (32) and LS

signal (33) pipes of the power steering unit. 33

31

32

F0077020

19 - Drain the engine cooling system.

34
Coolant:
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)
20 - Disconnect the cab heating pipes (34). 36

21 - Disconnect the inlet pipe (35) and the outlet pipe (36)
of the air conditioning compressor.
1

35
F0077030

30-207
 CAB

22 - Disconnect the control cable (37) from the parking

brake lever (38). 38
★ Disconnect also the outer cable from the support
(39).

39

37
F0020222

23 - Empty the screenwash bottle.

Mark the connectors (40) and (41) and detach them
from the pumps (42).
40
24 - Mark the screenwash hoses (43) and (44) and discon-
nect them from the pumps (42).
41

42
43

44
F0020104

25 - Undo the bolts (45) and remove the screenwash bottle

45
(46).

46

F0076481

26 - Operate the lift valve (47) to raise the cab sufficiently

to insert two blocks 5 cm thick “A” between the
axle and cab supports.

A
F0077040

30-208
 CAB

27 - Detach the tie-rod (48) from the cab lifting control

valve (47). 2 47

48

F0020237

28 - Remove the exhaust pipe end fitting (49) from the

cab.
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE EXHAUST 49
PIPE").

F0059191

29 - Remove the cover of the rear screen wiper and unplug

the connector (50) and the screen wash pipe (51).

51

50

F0020246

30 - Disconnect the gas springs (53) from the rear window

(52); lower the window (52).

52

53

F0020256

30-209
 CAB

31 - While supporting the rear window, remove the hinge

pins (54) with a pin punch. 54 54
32 - Remove the complete rear window assembly (52).

F0020265

33 - Remove the front central nuts (55) securing the cab

to the vibration dampers (56).
55

56

F0077050

34 - Remove the centre bolts (57) of the rear supports (58)

and the cab fixing bolts (59).

57

58
59

F0076511

35 - Remove the bolts (60) to release the stabiliser rod

(61) on the rear right-hand side.
60

61

F0077060

30-210
 CAB

36 - Disconnect the lift cylinder (62) and the damper (63)

from the supports (58).

62

63

58

F0076491

37 - Fold the rearview mirrors (64) against the cab win-

dows.
38 - Attach the cab lifting frame “A” to a hoist.
Attach slings “B” of different length to the cab using
the holes “F” provided on the rear supports and the
supports (65) for the work lights and direction indica-
tors

64

65

F0020294

30-211
 CAB

39 - Slowly raise the cab by about 15 cm and disconnect

the connection pipe (66) to the cab suspension valve
and the pipe (67) from the reservoir from the T fitting.
Complete cab assembly:
approx 780 kg (1718 lb.) 66
40 - Release the wiring from all the clips and remove the 67
cab while guiding the pipes and control cables.

F0020303

REFITTING THE CAB

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
47

1
Air conditioning pipes fittings: 48
delivery (5/8” - 18UNF):13.6-- 20.3 Nm (10–15 lb.ft.)
suction (7/8” - 14UNF): 35.3-- 42 Nm (26–31 lb.ft.)

2
★ Check the adjustment of the tie-rod (48) to obtain
the correct cab lifting height (without operator).
F0020237

1 - Fill the engine cooling system.

Coolant:
approx 28 ᐉ (7.4 US.gall.)

2 - Fully open the cab heater valve.

3 - Start the engine and check the hydraulic, pneumatic
and heating systems for leaks.
4 - Turn the steering wheel back and forth between the
full lock positions to expel any air from the power
steering circuit.
5 - Switch off the engine; check the coolant level and top
up if necessary.
6 - Bleed the hydraulic brake system.
(For details, see " BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM").

30-212
 ENGINE

REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE

★ This operation does not require the removal of the

cab.
Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
★ Remove the following components in sequence:
• Front wheels
• Fenders
• Radiator - coolers - condenser assembly
• Front lift assembly and relative pipelines, com-
plete with mounting bracket
• Front PTO assembly - Propeller shaft
• Front axle and axle pivot support
• Front support
• Exhaust pipe
• Cab access steps
• Battery shelf - air reservoir for trailer braking
system (if present)
• Air conditioning compressor
• Silencer
• Engine air cleaner and intake pipe
• Fuel tank
For detailed instructions, refer to the corresponding
sections in this manual.
A
1 - Position a jack ”A” with non-slip block under the
centre of the gearbox and raise the jack to support
the load.
F0018400

2 - Unplug the connectors (1) of the brake fluid level

sensor.
3 - Draw the fluid out of the reservoir (2); disconnect 1
the oil lines (3) from the reservoir and plug the ends.
1

F0053855

4 - Remove the air cleaner mounting plate (4) and the

support (5).
4

F0077111

30-213
 ENGINE

5 - Loosen the clip (6) and disconnect the fuel supply

line (7) from the pump.
★ Recover the residual fuel and plug the pipe to
prevent the entry of impurities. 6

F0077120

6 - Unscrew and remove the screws of the clips (8) and

remove fuel return pipe (9).

9
F0077130

7 - Disconnect and remove the suction pipe (11) from

the compressor (10).
8 - Disconnect the pressure pipe (12).
12 11
★ Plug all the pipes to prevent dirt from entering
the system.

10

F0077140

9 - Disconnect the union (13), remove the clip (14) and

the pipe (12).

12
14

13

F0077150

30-214
 ENGINE

10 - Disconnect the cab heating pipes (15).

15

F0077160

11 - Unplug the connector (16) of the pressure switch

(17). 20 17
12 - Disconnect the inlet (19) and outlet (20) lines from
the air conditioning compressor (18).

16

18 19

F0077131

13 - Disconnect the evaporator connection pipes (22)

and (23) from the bracket (21). 22

21

23

F0077170

14 - Remove the bracket (21) supporting the air condi-

tioning pipe unions.

21

F0077180

30-215
 ENGINE

15 - Unplug the clogging sensor connector (24) and

temperature sensor connector (25) from the fuel fil-
ter.

25

24

F0077190

16 - Disconnect the leads (27) and (28) from the starter

motor (26). 26
27

26 28

F0077200

17 - Disconnect the leads (30) and (31) from the alter-

nator (29) . 29

18 - Only if fitted: unplug the front PTO connector (32). 32

31

30
F0077210

19 - Remove the clips (33) and (34) for diff lock pipe (35)
and fuel supply pipe (36).
Direct the fuel supply pipe (36) towards the rear of
the tractor. 33

36

35
34
F0077480

30-216
 ENGINE

20 - Remove the diff lock pipe (35).

35
F0059271

21 - Unplug the connector (37) of the coolant temper-

ature indicator light from the engine. 39
22 - Disconnect the pipe (39) from the thermostat (38).

37

38
F0077220

23 - Disconnect the feed wire (40) of the thermostarter

(41).
40

41

F0077230

24 - Remove the radiator connection pipes (39) and (42)

and the suction pipe (43). 1
43
39

42

F0077240

30-217
 ENGINE

25 - Label and disconnect the steering pipes (44) and

(45).
26 - Remove the clip (46) and the bracket (47).
46
45

44
47

F0077250

27 - Disconnect the earth leads (48) from the engine.

48

48

F0018523

28 - Disconnect the suction pipe (50) from the pump

(49).
29 - Remove the pipe (50), the filter (51) and its support 49
(52).

52

51

50
F0076721

30 - Disconnect and remove the pressure pipe (53) from

the pump (49).

53

49
F0076701

30-218
 ENGINE

31 - Release the wiring from the clips and unplug the en-
gine ECU connector (54).
54
★ Turn the ringnut anticlockwise.
55
32 - Unplug the connector (55) of the engine coolant
temperature sensor.
★ Free the entire harness from the quick-release
straps, and direct tidily toward the rear of the
machine.

F0077260

33 - Remove the front suspension solenoid valves as-

sembly (56).
(For details, see "REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUS-
PENSION VALVES").
56

F0031841

34 - Fit the bracket (57); sling the engine (58) to a hoist.

Take up the slack in the lifting slings or ropes.

58
57

F0077270

30-219
 ENGINE

35 - Unscrew and remove the nuts (59), (60) and (61)

and the lower bolts (62) securing the engine (58).
2

59 59

F0077280

60

61

62

F0077290

36 - Split the engine (58) from the transmission assem-

bly (63), using a lever if necessary. 58
3

63

F0077300

30-220
 ENGINE

REFITTING THE ENGINE

• Refitting is the reverse of removal.

1
★ Bleed the braking system.
(For details, see «SPURGO DELL’ARIA DAI
CIRCUITI DI FRENATURA»).

2
M12 nuts and bolts:
110±10% Nm (81±10% lb.ft.)

M16 nuts and bolts:

260±10% Nm (191.7±10% lb ft.)
★ Tighten first the nuts and then the bolts gradu-
ally in a crosswise sequence.

3
★ Thoroughly clean the surfaces and lubricate the
surfaces and locating dowels.

Locating dowels: Engine oil

1- Fill all the systems with the appropriate fluids. Start
the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the flu-
ids to circulate, then check for leaks.
2- Bleed the air from the hydraulic circuits by perform-
ing a few manoeuvres.

3- Stop the engine, check all the fluid levels and top up
if necessary.

30-221
 CONTENTS

SECTION 40

CONTENTS

THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT .......................................... 1 5. WIRING ............................................................................ 71

• ENGINE WIRING (1/2) 71
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT ............................................. 2
• ENGINE WIRING (2/2) 72
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................... 3 • ENGINE WIRING (1/2) 77
• 1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES............................................... 3 • ENGINE WIRING (2/2) 78
• 1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS.................. 4 • ENGINE HOOD WIRING 87
• 1.3 GENERAL RULES ................................................................... 4 • TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) 91
• • 1.3.1 MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR'S • TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2) 92
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS .................... 4 • TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY) 103
• • 1.3.2 MAIN WIRING FAULTS ............................................. 4 • TRAILER BRAKE WIRING 104
• • 1.3.3 REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF
• FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING (ROPS) 107
CONNECTORS AND WIRING ................................... 5
• CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING 111
• 1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS ................................................ 6
• FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING 117
• 1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES.......................................................... 6
• FENDER WIRING - WIDE 121
2. INDICES ............................................................................. 7 • NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (WIDE FENDERS) 122
• 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX ..................................... 7 • FENDER WIRING - NARROW 127
• 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX................................................. 12 • NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (NARROW FENDERS) 128
• 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX ............................................................ 17 • FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2) 133
• FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2) 134
3. COMPONENTS ............................................................... 26
• 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS ...................................................... 26 • SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (1/3) 139
• SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (2/3) 140
• 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA ........................................ 31
• SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (3/3) 141
• 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS 40 • AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB) 151
• DISPLAY WIRING 157
• • 3.3.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ....................................... 40
• • 3.3.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT .......................... 42 • ROOF WIRING (1/2) 161
• • 3.3.3 INFOCENTER .......................................................... 44 • ROOF WIRING (2/2) 162
• • 3.3.4 HPSA CONTROL UNIT ........................................... 46 • CAB LOWER HEADLIGHTS WIRING 169
• • 3.3.5 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT ................. 48 • WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR WIRING 169
• CAB LOWER FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING 170
4. SYSTEMS ........................................................................ 49
• (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT) 170
• 4.1 GROUND POINTS................................................................. 49
• 4.2 ENGINE START..................................................................... 50 • CAB FULL AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
(WITH FRONT LIFT) 170
• 4.3 PREHEATING........................................................................ 51
• CAB ROOF FRONT AND REAR WORKLIGHTS WIRING 171
• 4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL ........................................ 52
• 4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH • LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING 177
• ARMREST WIRING 181
(MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT) 53
• FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (1/2) 183
• 4.6 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH
(MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT) 54 • FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (2/2) 184
• 4.7 CAB ACCESSORY................................................................ 55
• 4.8 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)...... 56
• 4.9 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT) ............. 57
• 4.10 WINDSCREEN WIPER .......................................................... 58
• 4.11 INFOCENTER........................................................................ 59
• 4.12 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY............................................ 60
• 4.13 AUTORADIO - CB ................................................................. 61
• 4.14 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN................................... 62
• 4.15 BRAKES ................................................................................ 63
• 4.16 TRAILER BRAKES................................................................. 64
• 4.17 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION................................................. 65
• 4.18 TRANSMISSION ................................................................... 66
• 4.19 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL ............................................... 67
• 4.20 REAR LIFTER ........................................................................ 68
• 4.21 FRONT AND REAR PTO ....................................................... 69

40-i
 STRUCTURE

THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:

1. Introduction
Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for trouble-
shooting and repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.

2. Indices
Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component de-
scription.

3. Components
Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the com-
ponents installed on the tractor,the technical data necessary for functional testing and the pi-
nouts of the electronic control units.

4. Systems
Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractor's systems.

5. Wiring harnesses
Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.

40-1
 HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

How to consult the table
The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunc-
A B tion of a component (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all
E the components in the system in which the component is
2 incorporated.
1
In this example, the problem is a malfunction of the start-
er motor, which fails to start the engine.
Interruttore avviamento 0441.1512.4 42 X4 2 0443.7847
X4 1- Look in paragraph “2.1. Component description
17
index” for the starter motor and identify the system
in which it is incorporated.
The system is indicated in the column “System
Motorino d'avviamento X70-X71 2
(para 4.xx)” and in this case is “2” (figure A).
2- Consult paragraph “4.2 Starting” (figure B), in
which the electrical diagram indicates all the com-
C ponents in the system; these components are ac-
companied by numbers that correspond to the key
on the same page.
3- Check all the components in the system, starting,
for example, with the switch “2”.
4- Look in paragraph “2.1. Component description
1 Interruttore avviamento
index” (figure A) for “Starting enabling switch
(Green)” and check in the column “Technical (para
42 X4 3.2.xx)” if there is a technical description of the
0.012.5957.4/10
component (in this case it is given at n° 11 of the
paragraph “3.2 Component technical data”) (fig-
ure C).
F Note down also the name of the connector to which
the component is connected (in this case
D X4 “START”).

Only if the position of the component is not known

5 - Look in paragraph “2.3 Connector index” (figure
D) for the name of the connector to which the com-
X4 19 0.012.5957.4 Interruttore avviamento ponent is connected (in this case “START”) and
note down the wiring harness in which it is incor-
porated (in this case “0443.7847” or
“0.012.3639.4”) and the type of connector (in this
G case “10”).
6 - Look for the wiring harness in chapter “5. Layouts,
electrical wiring diagrams, connector posi-
19 tions” using the index at the beginning of the chap-
ter.
7 - Look for the name of the connector in the photos at-
tached to the electrical diagrams and determine its
position on the tractor from the drawing (figure E).
NOTE.
In the electrical diagrams (figure F) are indicated
the names of the connectors and the descrip-
tions that are used in all the tables of chapter 2.
0.012.5957.4/10 8 - Using the data contained in the paragraph “3.2
Component technical data” (figure C) in position
n° 11, check the operation of the switch.
If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in
X4
0.012.5957.4/10 paragraph “3.1 Connector layouts” (figure G) for
the number found in the column “Type” of para-
graph “2.3 Connector index”.

40-2
1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES

1. INTRODUCTION
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the
tractor's electrical and electronic systems.
The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information regarding the
tractor's systems and components.
Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line
with our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our
printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document are
subject to modification and as such are not binding.

1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES

DESCRIPTION CODE PAGE.

Cab power supply wiring 0443.7846/20 40-111

Air conditioning wiring 0.010.2562.2 40-151

Armrest wiring 0443.7354.4 40-181

Engine hood wiring 0.013.0663.4/20 40-87

Front console wiring 0.012.8894.4/30 40-133

Side console wiring 0.012.8732.4/30 40-139

Lights selector switch wiring 0443.8656 40-177

Display wiring 0443.7875 40-157

Cab lower headlights wiring 0441.1923.4 40-169

Cab roof front and rear worklights wiring 0443.4993 40-171

Cab lower front worklights wiring (machine without front lift) 0442.5602 40-170

Trailer brake wiring 0443.7355.4 40-104

Trailer brake wiring (Italy) 0443.7356.4 40-103

Engine wiring 0.013.5916.4/30 40-77

Number plate light wiring (Wide fenders) 0.012.2018.4/10 40-122

Number plate light wiring (Narrow fenders) 0441.4114 40-128

Cab full and dipped beam headlights (with front lift) 0441.6727 40-170

Engine wiring 0419.9869 40-71

Windscreen wiper motor wiring 0441.2045 40-169

Fender wiring - wide 0.012.2010.4/10 40-121

Fender wiring - narrow 0442.9835/10 40-127

Front axle suspension wiring (cab) 0443.7850/10 40-117

Front axle suspension wiring (ROPS) 0443.7849 40-107

Roof wiring 0443.7851/10 40-161

Transmission wiring 0443.7848/20 40-91

Fuses and relays control unit 0441.9533.4/10 40-183

40-3
1. INTRODUCTION 1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key
terms used in this unit..
TERM DESCRIPTION

Connector Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch. wiring-

wiring)
Temperature Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium (air,
sensor water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Pressure Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air,
sensor water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance

Position sensor Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of an
object into a voltage
Pressure Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the
switch operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed
Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the
Thermostat
temperature of the medium in which it is immersed.

Switch Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical

contacts.
Solenoid valve Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)

Chapter “3.2 Description of components” shows the wiring diagrams for certain switches and
buttons. The following symbols are used for ease of identification
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Contact between CLOSED pins (stable position of switch)

Contact between CLOSED pins (non-stable position of switch)

Indicator LED

Indicator lamp

Diode

1.3 GENERAL RULES

The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure
that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and bre-
akdowns. The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the
quality of repairs.
1.3.1 MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR'S ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the
connection of any non-approved electrical applicances or components.
In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified
without authorisation, the manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle
and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.

1.3.2 MAIN WIRING FAULTS

a. Poor contact between connectors
The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male
into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or oxi-
disation of the pin contact surfaces.

40-4
1. INTRODUCTION 1.3 GENERAL RULES

b. Defective pin welding or crimping

The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or welded
area, but the wires are subjected to excessive tension, leading to breakage of the insu-
lation or the wire itself and a poor connection.
c. Disconnecting wiring
If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed
with the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to a heavy impact this could da-
mage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.
d. Penetration of water in connectors
The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however,
it is possible that when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water
could penetrate or condense in the connectors.
As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in
will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause shortcircuits across the pins.
For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of com-
pressed air after washing the tractor.
e. Oil or dirt on connectors
Oil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are non-
conductors) .
Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet of compressed air
and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the contacts.
★ Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them.
★ Use dehydrated not lubricated compressed air.

1.3.3 REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND WIRING

a. Disconnection of connectors
When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves.
For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws,
then pull on the connector.
For connectors that are clipped togther, fully depress the clip then pull the connector
apart.
After disconnecting connectors, cover them in a waterproof material to prevent dirt or
moisture getting into the contacts.
b. Connecting the connectors
Check the condition of the connectors:
• Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
• Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded.
• Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.
★ If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the
casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying any
force.
For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together.

40-5
1. INTRODUCTION 1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

c. Cleaning and drying wiring

When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if ne-
cessary, with water or steam.
If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the
connectorsi; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ Check that the connector is not short circuited by water by testing the continuity
across the pins.
★ After checking the connector is in good condition, degrease the contacts using a
deoxidising product.
d. Renewal of damaged electrical components.
• When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts
supplied by the manufacturer.
• When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 standards
and in particular:
- fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
-bayonet fuse (F2, F3, ecc.) DIN 72581/3C
- fuse F51 (100A) e F52 (200A) ISO 8820
The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will in-
validate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer from any
liability.
• When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards
marked on the original relay.

1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

For the correct diagnosis of any faults in tne tractor's electrical system, the following instru-
ments are required:
1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:
AC VOLT 0-600
DC VOLT ..... 0-600
OHM............ 0-32M
AC AMP ...... 0-10
DC AMP ...... 0-10
2 - Computer loaded with the “SERDIA”
3 - All Round Tester

1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES

COLOUR CODES COLOUR CODES
A Light blue M Brown
B White N Black
C Orange R Red
G Yellow S Pink
H Grey V Green
L Dark blue Z Purple

40-6
2. INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

2. INDICES
2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX
Description Code Technical Connector System
(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
4WD switch 0441.1496.4 44 8 19
50S lights switch 0441.1496.4 43 4 8-9
Accelerator pedal position sensor 0443.2708 28 X30 4
Actuator 0211.2588 4 Y3 4
Air cleaner clogged sensor 0441.9014 L 11
Air conditioning compressor 0442.6744.4 K 14
Air conditioning control panel illumination X24 14
connector
Air conditioning on/off switch 0.010.2532.0 X26 14
Air conditioning thermostat 0.010.2537.1 X25 14
Alternator 0118.2038 B+ D+ 2-3-8-9-21
Armrest 0443.8670.4 X21 4-20
ASM switch 0441.1498 48 6 19
Auxiliary air conditioning fan power supply fuse FU120 14
Auxiliary power socket 0114.3529 X15 12
Axle Down control solenoid valve coil 0442.3803 S 17
Axle Up control solenoid valve coil 0442.3803 H 17
Battery +30
Brake fluid level sensor X81 15
Brake pedal switch 0439.1395 9 X32 15-17-19
Cab headlights dipped beam switch 0441.1496.4 41 3 6
Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup) 0419.9792 6 B40 4
CB power connector X44 13
Cigar lighter 0441.2338 X7 7
Clock 0441.2337 X49 7
Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor 0442.4165 23 X33 18
Clutch pedal position sensor 0443.2708 29 X34 18
Compressed air pressure gauge 0442.5709 24 X39 16
Compressed air pressure gauge light X38 5-6
Compressor and condenser fan pressure switch 0442.6492 25 X74 14
Configuration connector (Powershift) LS
Configuration connector (Powershuttle) PS 18
Configuration connector LS/PS 18
(Powershift/Powershuttle)
Creeper engagement switch 0443.6527 X4 4-18
Diagnostics connector X18 4-17-18-20
Differential lock solenoid valve 0441.7555 21 EVDF 19
Differential lock switch 0441.1498 49 7 19
Direction indicators flasher unit 0441.9531 X1-X2 5-6
Door open warning signal switch 0441.4097 X45 7
Driver seat air suspension compressor 0.010.2274.1 X5 7
Engine control unit 0419.4998 MX1 - MX2 2-3-4-12-18
Engine coolant temperature sensor 0419.9410 B43 4

40-7
2. INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

Description Code Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
Engine coolant temperature sensor 0419.9809 8 T 11
(for Infocenter)
Engine ECU circuit board 0.010.3627.1 X8 2-4-18
Engine hood front worklights relay RL20 8-9
Engine oil low pressure switch 0443.1690 27 PRESS. SWITCH 18
Engine oil pressure switch 0118.2227 3 P 11
Engine speed keypad 0443.7505 X20 4
Engine speed sensor 0.010.2874.2 1 NLSE 18
Engine starter relay RL40 2
Fan speed selector switch 0.010.2528.1 X27 14
Forward/reverse solenoid valves (Y6, Y7) 0441.6685 19 ADD.EV. V/R 18
Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid valve 0443.1661 26 DT 15-19
Front axle suspension control unit 2.8519.008.0 JX3 - YX4 12-17
Front axle suspension load sensing solenoid 0442.3803 X68 17
valve coil
Front axle suspension position sensor 0.009.2194.4 11 X69 17
Front left sidelight and direction indicator 0441.1920.4 X59 5-6
Front left worklight (on hood) 2.8039.160.0 X93 8-9
Front left worklight on cab (with front lift) 0441.4087.4 X63 6
Front left worklight on cab (without front lift) 0442.5599.4 X61 8-9
Front PTO pushbutton (in cab) 0441.1533 14 X9 21
Front PTO solenoid valve FZW 21
Front right sidelight and direction indicator 0441.1921.4 X60 5-6
Front right worklight (on hood) 2.8039.160.0 X89 8-9
Front right worklight on cab (with front lift) 0441.4087.4 X64 6
Front right worklight on cab (without front lift) 0442.5599.4 X62 8-9
Front suspension pushbutton 0442.2763 52 5 17
Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay RL21 6-8-9
Fuel level sensor 0.012.6230.0 FUEL 11
Fuel temperature sensor 0419.9809 7 B37 4
Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 0443.8449 33 NLSA 18
Gearshift lever 0442.2746.4/10 X12 18
Gearshift solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y5) 0441.6685 20 EVGROUP 18
Gearshift solenoid valves (Y3, Y4) 0443.6315 31 EVGROUP 18
Glowplug warning light ON relay RL41 3
Handbrake switch 0439.1395 10 X6 15-16
Hazard warning lights on/off switch 0442.9401 53 X36 5-6
Heater fan speed 1 relay RL32 14
Heater fan speed 3 relay RL30 14
Heater fan speed 4 relay RL31 14
Horn 0116.9304 X87 5-6
Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch 0118.0413 FILTER 18
3-4-5-6-11-12-
Instrument panel 0443.7488/10 ST1 - ST2 15-16-18-20-21
Interior roof light 0442.6316 X46 7

40-8
2. INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

Description Code Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
ISO4 socket (power supply to implements) 0442.2323.4 ISO4 12
ISO7 socket (implement connection) 0442.2324.4 ISO7 4-12-21
Left front loudspeaker 0.012.1725.0 X50 13
Left headlamp 2.8039.240.0 X86 5-6
Left headlamp (UK) 2.8039.250.0 X86 5-6
Left rear loudspeaker 0.012.1726.0 X41 13
Lift and hand throttle console 0441.9425.4/10 54 EHR - EMR 4-20
Lift control panel 0442.9597.4 X14 20
Lift Down solenoid valve EVDW 20
RIGHT DRAFT -
Lift draft sensor 0441.5586.4 16 20
LEFT DRAFT
Lift Up solenoid valve EVUP 20
Lower front worklights (on cab) switch 0441.1496.4 42 3A 8
Lower rear left worklights X65SX 8-9
Lower rear right worklights X65DX 8-9
Lx heater fan 0.010.2537.0 X22 14
Lx heater fan resistor 0.010.2535.1 X23 14
Main heating fuse FU131 14
Main power supply fuse FU100
Number plate light 0441.4115 X67 5-6
Preheating device 0425.8670 X78 3
Preheating relay 0419.4081 RL42 2-3
Preheating relay 0419.4081 RL42A 2-3
Preheating relay 0419.4081 RL42B 2-3
Preheating relay power fuse FU101 2-3
Proportional solenoid valve coil 0443.4425 30 EVPROP 18
PTO AUTO switch 0441.1496.4 46 PTO AUTO 21
Radar 0443.8654 35 RADAR 20
Radar (UK) 0443.8655 36 RADAR 20
Radar control switch 0441.4584 X13 20
Radio X51 - X52 5-6-13
Rear left tail light and direction indicator 0442.9833.4/10 X66SX 5-6-15
(narrow fenders)
Rear left tail light and direction indicator 2.8029.880.0/10 X66SX 5-6-15
(wide fenders)
12-15-17-19-
Rear lift control unit 2.8519.013.0 JX1 - JX2 20-21
Rear lift Down Lx pushbutton 0441.2688 15 DWSX 20
Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton 0441.2688 15 DWDX 20
Rear lift position sensor 0443.8667 37 POS SEN 20
Rear lift Up Lx pushbutton 0441.2688 15 UPSX 20
Rear lift Up Rx pushbutton 0441.2688 15 UPDX 20
Rear PTO Lx pushbutton 0441.1533 12 PTOSX 21
(on fender)
Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab) 0441.1533 13 X10 21

40-9
2. INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

Description Code Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
Rear PTO Rx pushbutton (on fender) 0441.1533 12 PTODX 21
Rear PTO solenoid valve 0441.7555 22 EVPTO 21
Rear PTO speed sensor 0443.8352 PTO SEN 21
Rear right tail light and direction indicator 0442.9834.4/10 X66DX 5-6-15
(narrow fenders)
Rear right tail light and direction indicator 2.8029.880.0/10 X66DX 5-6-15
(wide fenders)
Rear screen washer pump 0441.4105 RP 10
Rear screen wiper motor 0441.3192 X42 10
Rear screen wiper switch 0441.9283 51 REAR WIPER 10
Rear worklights switch 0441.1496.4 40 WORK LIGHT 8-9
Right front loudspeaker 0.012.1725.0 X48 13
Right headlamp 2.8039.240.0 X88 5-6
Right headlamp (UK) 2.8039.250.0 X88 5-6
Right rear loudspeaker 0.012.1726.0 X43 13
Rotating beacon X47 8-9
Rotating beacon on/off switch 0441.1496.4 45 FLASHING LIGHT 8-9
Rx heater fan 0.010.2535.0 X29 14
Rx heater fan resistor 0.010.2535.1 X28 14
Shuttle control lever 0.012.6472.4 39 X37 18
Side console courtesy light 0441.2616 X53 7
Sidelights switch 0441.1497 47 1 5-6
Speed sensor for odometer 0443.8436 32 NAB 18
Start enable switch 0441.6066 17 X80 2
Starter motor 0118.0928 +30C - +50 2-3
2-3-4-5-6-7-8-
9-10-11-12-13-
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 50 X17 14-15-16-17-
18-19-20-21
Steering angle sensor 0441.5266 38 X82 19
Steering column switch unit 0443.8656 AS4 5-6-10
Steering system pressure switch 0.012.4371.0 X79 11
Trailer brake lights fuse FU121 15
Trailer braking air pressure sensor 0.011.9428.0 2 X71 16
Trailer braking low pressure switch X73 16
Trailer parking brake solenoid valve coil X72 16
Trailer socket 0442.4116 X70 12-15
(lights and auxiliary power)
Transmission display 0441.9280.4 X40 5-6-18
Transmission ECU 0443.8083/10 ECU PS 2-18
Transmission oil temperature sensor 0441.6649 18 TEMP 18
Transmission speed sensor 0443.8450 34 NHK 18
Turbo charge pressure sensor 0419.9552 5 B41 4
Upper front left worklight 0445.0666 X56 8-9
Upper front right worklight 0445.0666 X57 8-9
Upper rear left worklights 0445.0666 X55 8-9

40-10
2. INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

Description Code Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
Upper rear right worklights 0445.0666 X54 8-9
Windscreen washer pump 0441.4105 FP 10
Windscreen wiper motor 0441.3192 X58 10

40-11
2. INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Technical System
Code Description Connector
(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)

0.009.2194.4 Front axle suspension position sensor 11 X69 17

0.010.2274.1 Driver's seat air suspension compressor X5 7

0.010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch X27 14

0.010.2532.0 Air conditioning on/off switch X26 14

0.010.2535.0 Rx heater fan X29 14

0.010.2535.1 Lx heater fan resistor X23 14

0.010.2535.1 Rx heater fan resistor X28 14

0.010.2537.0 Lx heater fan X22 14

0.010.2537.1 Air conditioning thermostat X25 14

0.010.2874.2 Engine speed sensor 1 NLSE 18

0.010.3627.1 Engine ECU circuit board X8 2-4-18

0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket X15 12

0116.9304 Horn X87 5-6

0118.0413 Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch FILTER 18

0118.0928 Starter motor +30C - +50 2-3

0118.2038 Alternator B+ D+ 2-3-8-9-21

0118.2227 Engine oil pressure switch 3 P 11

0.011.9428.0 Trailer braking air pressure sensor 2 X71 16

0.012.1725.0 Right front loudspeaker X48 13

0.012.1725.0 Left front loudspeaker X50 13

0.012.1726.0 Left rear loudspeaker X41 13

0.012.1726.0 Right rear loudspeaker X43 13

0.012.4371.0 Steering system pressure switch X79 11

0.012.6230.0 Fuel level sensor FUEL 11

0.012.6472.4 Shuttle control lever 39 X37 18

0211.2588 Actuator 4 Y3 4

0419.4081 Preheating relay RL42 2-3

0419.4081 Preheating relay RL42A 2-3

0419.4081 Preheating relay RL42B 2-3

0419.4998 Engine control unit MX1 - MX2 2-3-4-12-18

0419.9410 Engine coolant temperature sensor B43 4

0419.9552 Turbo charge pressure sensor 5 B41 4

0419.9792 Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup) 6 B40 4

0419.9809 Fuel temperature sensor 7 B37 4

40-12
2. INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Code Description Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)

0419.9809 Engine coolant temperature sensor (for Infocenter) 8 T 11

0425.8670 Preheating device X78 3

0439.1395 Brake pedal switch 9 X32 15-17-19

0439.1395 Handbrake switch 10 X6 15-16

0441.1497 Sidelights switch 47 1 5-6

0441.1498 ASM switch 48 6 19

0441.1498 Differential lock switch 49 7 19

Rear PTO Rx pushbutton

0441.1533 12 PTODX 21
(on fender)

Rear PTO Lx pushbutton

0441.1533 12 PTOSX 21
(on fender)

0441.1533 Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab) 13 X10 21

0441.1533 Front PTO pushbutton (in cab) 14 X9 21

0441.2337 Clock X49 7

0441.2338 Cigar lighter X7 7

0441.2616 Side console courtesy light X53 7

0441.2688 Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton 15 DWDX 20

0441.2688 Rear lift Down Lx pushbutton 15 DWSX 20

0441.2688 Rear lift Up Rx pushbutton 15 UPDX 20

0441.2688 Rear lift Up Lx pushbutton 15 UPSX 20

0441.3192 Rear screen wiper motor X42 10

0441.3192 Windscreen wiper motor X58 10

0441.4097 Door open warning signal switch X45 7

0441.4105 Windscreen washer pump FP 10

0441.4105 Rear screen washer pump RP 10

0441.4115 Number plate light X67 5-6

0441.4584 Radar control switch X13 20

0441.5266 Steering angle sensor 38 X82 19

0441.6066 Start enable switch 17 X80 2

0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature sensor 18 TEMP 18

0441.6685 Forward/reverse solenoid valves (Y6, Y7) 19 ADD.EV. V/R 18

0441.6685 Gearshift solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y5) 20 EVGROUP 18

0441.7555 Differential lock solenoid valve 21 EVDF 19

0441.7555 Rear PTO solenoid valve 22 EVPTO 21

0441.9014 Air cleaner clogged sensor L 11

0441.9283 Rear screen wiper switch 51 REAR WIPER 10

0441.9531 Direction indicators flasher unit X1-X2 5-6

40-13
2. INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Code Description Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)

0442.2763 Front suspension pushbutton 52 5 17

0442.3803 Axle Up control solenoid valve coil H 17

0442.3803 Axle Down control solenoid valve coil S 17

0442.3803 Front axle suspension load sensing solenoid valve coil X68 17

0442.4116 Trailer socket (lights and auxiliary power) X70 12-15

0442.4165 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor 23 X33 18

0442.5709 Compressed air pressure gauge 24 X39 16

0442.6316 Interior roof light X46 7

0442.6492 Compressor and condenser fan pressure switch 25 X74 14

0442.9401 Hazard warning lights on/off switch 53 X36 5-6

0443.1661 Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid valve 26 DT 15-19

0443.1690 Engine oil low pressure switch 27 PRESS. SWITCH 18

0443.2708 Accelerator pedal position sensor 28 X30 4

0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor 29 X34 18

0443.4425 Proportional solenoid valve coil 30 EVPROP 18

0443.6315 Gearshift solenoid valves (Y3, Y4) 31 EVGROUP 18

0443.6527 Creeper engagement switch X4 4-18

0443.7505 Engine speed keypad X20 4

0443.8352 Rear PTO speed sensor PTO SEN 21

0443.8436 Speed sensor for odometer 32 NAB 18

0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 33 NLSA 18

0443.8450 Transmission speed sensor 34 NHK 18

0443.8654 Radar 35 RADAR 20

0443.8655 Radar (UK) 36 RADAR 20

0443.8656 Steering column switch unit AS4 5-6-10

0443.8667 Rear lift position sensor 37 POS SEN 20

0445.0666 Upper rear right worklights X54 8-9

0445.0666 Upper rear left worklights X55 8-9

0445.0666 Upper front left worklight X56 8-9

0445.0666 Upper front right worklight X57 8-9

0441.1496.4 Cab headlights dipped beam switch 41 3 6

0441.1496.4 Lower front worklights (on cab) switch 42 3A 8

0441.1496.4 50S lights switch 43 4 8-9

0441.1496.4 4WD switch 44 8 19

40-14
2. INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Code Description Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)

0441.1496.4 Rotating beacon on/off switch 45 FLASHING LIGHT 8-9

0441.1496.4 PTO AUTO switch 46 PTO AUTO 21

0441.1496.4 Rear worklights switch 40 WORK LIGHT 8-9

2-3-4-5-6-7-8-
9-10-11-12-13-
0441.1512.4 Starter switch 50 X17 14-15-16-17-
18-19-20-21

0441.1920.4 Front left sidelight and direction indicator X59 5-6

0441.1921.4 Front right sidelight and direction indicator X60 5-6

0441.4087.4 Front left worklight on cab (with front lift) X63 6

0441.4087.4 Front right worklight on cab (with front lift) X64 6

RIGHT DRAFT -
0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor 16 20
LEFT DRAFT

0441.9280.4 Transmission display X40 5-6-18

0442.2323.4 ISO4 socket (power supply to implements) ISO4 12

0442.2324.4 ISO7 socket (implement connection) ISO7 4-12-21

0442.5599.4 Front left worklight on cab (without front lift) X61 8-9

0442.5599.4 Front right worklight on cab (without front lift) X62 8-9

0442.6744.4 Air conditioning compressor K 14

0442.9597.4 Lift control panel X14 20

0443.8670.4 Armrest X21 4-20

2.8039.160.0 Front right worklight (on hood) X89 8-9

2.8039.160.0 Front left worklight (on hood) X93 8-9

2.8039.240.0 Left headlamp X86 5-6

2.8039.240.0 Right headlamp X88 5-6

2.8039.250.0 Left headlamp (UK) X86 5-6

2.8039.250.0 Right headlamp (UK) X88 5-6

2.8519.008.0 Front axle suspension control unit JX3 - YX4 12-17

12-15-17-19-
2.8519.013.0 Rear lift control unit JX1 - JX2 20-21

0441.9425.4/10 Lift and hand throttle console 54 EHR - EMR 4-20

0442.2746.4/10 Gearshift lever X12 18

Rear left tail light and direction indicator

0442.9833.4/10 X66SX 5-6-15
(narrow fenders)

Rear right tail light and direction indicator

0442.9834.4/10 X66DX 5-6-15
(narrow fenders)

3-4-5-6-11-12-
0443.7488/10 Instrument panel ST1 - ST2 15-16-18-20-21

0443.8083/10 Transmission ECU ECU PS 2-18

40-15
2. INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Code Description Technical Connector System

(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)

Rear right tail light and direction indicator

2.8029.880.0/10 X66DX 5-6-15
(wide fenders)

Rear left tail light and direction indicator

2.8029.880.0/10 X66SX 5-6-15
(wide fenders)

40-16
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

+30A 0443.7846 Battery

+30C 0.013.0732.4/10 0118.0928 Starter motor (+30)

+50 0.013.0732.4/10 0118.0928 Starter motor (+50)

1 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1497 Sidelights switch

3 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1496.4 Cab headlights dipped beam switch

3A 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1496.4 Lower front worklights (on cab) switch

4 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1496.4 50S lights switch

5 28 0.012.8894.4 0442.2763 Front suspension pushbutton

6 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1498 ASM switch

7 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1498 Differential lock switch

8 28 0.012.8894.4 0441.1496.4 4WD switch

Forward/reverse solenoid valves

ADD.EV. V/R 0443.7848 0441.6685 (Y6, Y7)

APS 28 0.012.8732.4 Not utilised

AS1 20 0.012.8732.4 0.012.8894.4

AS2 19 0.012.8732.4 0.012.8894.4

AS3 18 0.012.8732.4 0.012.8894.4

AS4 20 0.012.8732.4 0443.8656 Steering column switch unit

AS5 14 0.012.8732.4 0443.7875

AS6 15 0.012.8732.4 0.012.8894.4

B1 0419.9869 Not utilised

B6 0419.9869 Not utilised

B37 0419.9869 0419.9809 Fuel temperature sensor

B40 0419.9869 0419.9792 Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup)

B41 0419.9869 0419.9552 Turbo charge pressure sensor

B42 0419.9869 Not utilised

B43 0419.9869 0419.9410 Engine coolant temperature sensor

B+ 0.013.0732.4/10 0118.2038 Alternator (B+)

CLEANFIX 28 0.012.8732.4 Not utilised

D+ 0.013.0732.4/10 0118.2038 Alternator (D+)

DS1 15 0.012.8732.4 0443.7851

40-17
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid

DT 12 0443.7848 0443.1661 valve

0.012.2010.4
DWDX 3 0441.2688 Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton
0442.9835

0.012.2010.4
DWSX 3 0441.2688 Rear lift Down Lx pushbutton
0442.9835

ECU PS 44 0.012.8732.4 0443.8083/10 Transmission ECU

0441.9425.4/10 Lift and hand throttle console (EHR)

EHR 3 0.012.8732.4
0443.7354.4

0441.9425.4/10 Lift and hand throttle console (EMR)

EMR 3 0.012.8732.4
0443.7354.4

EVDF 12 0443.7848 0441.7555 Differential lock solenoid valve

EVDW 12 0443.7848 Lift Down solenoid valve

EVPROP 12 0443.7848 0443.4425 Proportional solenoid valve coil

EVPTO 12 0443.7848 0441.7555 Rear PTO solenoid valve

EVUP 12 0443.7848 Lift Up solenoid valve

Gearshift solenoid valves

0441.6685 (Y1, Y2, Y5)
EVGROUP 11 0443.7848
Gearshift solenoid valves
0443.6315 (Y3, Y4)

F30 0419.9869 Not utilised

F/S LEVER 1 0.012.8732.4 Not utilised

FE1 16 0.012.8732.4 0443.7850

FE2 0443.7849 0443.7850

Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure

FILTER 0443.7848 0118.0413 switch

FLASHING LIGHT 28 0.012.8732.4 0441.1496.4 Rotating beacon on/off switch

FP 0443.7848 0441.4105 Windscreen washer pump

FU100 0443.7846 Main power supply fuse

FU101 0.013.5916.4/30 Preheating relay power fuse

FU120 0.013.0732.4/10 Engine hood front worklights fuse

FU121 0.012.8732.4 Trailer brake lights fuse

FU131 0.012.8732.4 Main heating fuse

FUEL 2 0443.7848 0.012.6230.0 Fuel level sensor

40-18
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

FZW 2 0.013.0732.4/10 Front PTO solenoid valve

G1 0.012.8732.4 0.010.2562.2

G2 32 0.012.8732.4 0.010.2562.2

G3 33 0.012.8732.4 0443.7354.4

G4 0.012.8894.4 0443.8656 Steering column switch unit

G5 1 0443.7851 0443.4993

G6 1 0443.7851 0443.4993

G7 5 0443.7851 0441.1923.4

G8 5 0443.7851 0443.4993

G9 5 0443.7851 0441.1923.4

G10 6 0443.7851 0441.2045

G11 5 0443.7851 0443.4993

0441.6727
G12 5 0441.1923.4
0442.5602

0441.6727
G13 5 0441.1923.4
0442.5602

0.012.2010.4
G14 0443.7846
0442.9835

0.012.2010.4
G15 0443.7846
0442.9835

0.012.2010.4 0.012.2018.4
G16
0442.9835 0441.4114

0443.7355.4
G17 4 0443.7848
0443.7356.4

G18 0.013.0732.4/10 0419.9869

G19 0.013.0732.4/10 0.013.0663.4

H 12 0443.7849 0442.3803 Axle Up control solenoid valve coil

ISO4 socket
ISO4 24 0.012.8732.4 0442.2323.4 (power supply to implements)

ISO7 socket
ISO7 25 0.012.8732.4 0442.2324.4 (implement connection)

J1 9 0.012.8732.4

J2 3 0.012.8732.4

40-19
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

J3 3 0.012.8732.4

JX1 31 0.012.8732.4 2.8519.013.0 Rear lift control unit

JX2 31 0.012.8732.4 2.8519.013.0 Rear lift control unit

JX3 31 0443.7850 2.8519.008.0 Front axle suspension control unit

JX4 31 0443.7850 2.8519.008.0 Front axle suspension control unit

K 0.013.0732.4/10 0442.6744.4 Air conditioning compressor

L 0.013.0732.4/10 0441.9014 Air cleaner clogged sensor

LEFT DRAFT 13 0443.7848 0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor (left)

LS 2 0443.7848 Not utilised

Configuration connector
LS/PS 2 0443.7848 (Powershift/Powershuttle)

MS1 41 0.012.8732.4 0.013.0732.4/10

MS2 29 0.012.8894.4 0.013.0732.4/10

MX1 43 0419.4998 0211.2704 Engine control unit

MX2 43 0419.4998 0211.2704 Engine control unit

NAB 3 0443.7848 0443.8436 Speed sensor for odometer

NEUTRAL LS 0443.7848 Not utilised

NHK 3 0443.7848 0443.8450 Transmission speed sensor

NLSA 3 0443.7848 0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor

NLSE 3 0443.7848 0.010.2874.2 Engine speed sensor

P1 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P2 14 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P3 22 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P4 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P5 22 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P6 16 0.012.8732.4 0441.9533

P 12 0.013.0732.4/10 0118.2227 Engine oil pressure switch

POS SEN 3 0443.7848 0443.8667 Rear lift position sensor

PRESS. SWITCH 2 0443.7848 0443.1690 Engine oil low pressure switch

Configuration connector
PS 2 0443.7848 (Powershuttle)

PTO SEN 3 0443.7848 0443.8352 Rear PTO speed sensor

PTO AUTO 28 0.012.8732.4 0441.1496.4 PTO AUTO switch

40-20
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

0.012.2010.4
Rear PTO Rx pushbutton
PTODX 3 0441.1533 (on fender)
0442.9835

0.012.2010.4 0441.1533 Rear PTO Lx pushbutton (on fender)

PTOSX 3
0442.9835 Not utilised

0443.8654 Radar
RADAR 13 0443.7848
0443.8655 Radar (UK)

REAR WIPER 28 0.012.8732.4 0441.9283 Rear screen wiper switch

RIGHT DRAFT 13 0443.7848 0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor (Right)

RL20 27 0.013.0732.4/10 Engine hood front worklights relay

RL21 0443.7851 Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay

RL30 0.010.2562.2 Heater fan speed 3 relay

RL31 0.010.2562.2 Heater fan speed 4 relay

RL32 0.010.2562.2 Heater fan speed 1 relay

RL40 27 0.013.0732.4/10 Engine starting relay

RL41 0.012.8732.4 Glowplug warning light ON relay

RL42 2 0.013.5916.4/30 0419.4081 Preheating relay

RL42A 2 0.013.5916.4/30 0419.4081 Preheating relay

RL42B 2 0.013.5916.4/30 0419.4081 Preheating relay

RP 0443.7848 0441.4105 Rear screen washer pump

S 12 0443.7849 0442.3803 Axle Down control solenoid valve coil

ST1 17 0.012.8894.4 0443.7488/10 Instrument panel

ST2 21 0.012.8894.4 0443.7488/10 Instrument panel

Engine coolant temperature sensor

T 12 0.013.0732.4/10 0419.9809 (for Infocenter)

TEMP 12 0443.7848 0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature sensor

TKAB1 42 0.012.8732.4 0443.7848

TKAB2 41 0.012.8732.4 0443.7848

TKAB3 0.012.8732.4 0443.7846

0.012.2010.4
UPDX 3 0441.2688 Rear lift Up Rx pushbutton
0442.9835

0.012.2010.4 Rear lift Up Lx pushbutton

UPSX 3 0441.2688
0442.9835 Rear lift Up Lx pushbutton

40-21
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

WORK LIGHT 28 0.012.8732.4 0441.1496.4 Rear worklights switch

X1 0.012.8732.4 0441.9531 Direction indicators flasher unit (Red)

X2 0.012.8732.4 0441.9531 Direction indicators flasher unit (black)

X4 12 0.012.8732.4 0443.6527 Creeper engagement switch

X5 1 0.012.8732.4 0.010.2274.1 Driver's seat air suspension compressor

X6 0.012.8732.4 0439.1395 Handbrake switch

X7 1 0.012.8732.4 0441.2338 Cigar lighter

X8 0.012.8732.4 0.010.3627.1 Engine ECU circuit board

X9 3 0.012.8732.4 0441.1533 Front PTO pushbutton (in cab)

X10 3 0.012.8732.4 0441.1533 Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab)

X11 34 0.012.8732.4 Not utilised

X12 1 0.012.8732.4 0442.2746.4/10 Gearshift lever

X13 0.012.8732.4 0441.4584 Radar control switch

X14 26 0.012.8732.4 0442.9597.4 Lift control panel

X15 0.012.8732.4 0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket

X16 1 0.012.8732.4 Not utilised

X17 7 0.012.8732.4 0441.1512.4 Starter switch

X18 8 0.012.8732.4 Diagnostics connector

Auxiliary power supply connector

X19 1 0.012.8732.4 (in cab)

0443.7505 Engine speed keypad

X20 0.012.8732.4
0443.7354.4

X21 0443.7354.4 0443.8670.4 Armrest

X22 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2537.0 Lx heater fan

X23 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2535.1 Lx heater fan resistor

Air conditioning control panel illumination

X24 0.010.2562.2 connector

X25 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2537.1 Air conditioning thermostat

X26 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2532.0 Air conditioning on/off switch

X27 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch

X28 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2535.1 Rx heater fan resistor

X29 0.010.2562.2 0.010.2535.0 Rx heater fan

X30 30 0.012.8894.4 0443.2708 Accelerator pedal position sensor

40-22
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

X31 30 0.012.8894.4 Not utilised

X32 36 0.012.8894.4 0439.1395 Right brake pedal switch

Clutch pedal depressed proximity

X33 13 0.012.8894.4 0442.4165 sensor

X34 30 0.012.8894.4 0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor

X35 36 0.012.8894.4 0439.1395 Left brake pedal switch

X36 0443.8656 0442.9401 Hazard warning lights on/off switch

X37 0443.8656 0.012.6472.4 Shuttle control lever

X38 0443.7875 Compressed air pressure gauge light

X39 0443.7875 0442.5709 Compressed air pressure gauge

X40 0443.7875 0441.9280.4 Transmission display

X41 0443.7851 0.012.1726.0 Left rear loudspeaker

X42 0443.7851 0441.3192 Rear screen wiper motor

X43 0443.7851 0.012.1726.0 Right rear loudspeaker

X44 0443.7851 CB power connector

X45 0443.7851 0441.4097 Door open warning signal switch

X46 0443.7851 0442.6316 Interior roof light

X47 0443.7851 Rotating beacon

X48 1 0443.7851 0.012.1725.0 Right front loudspeaker

X49 10 0443.7851 0441.2337 Clock

X50 1 0443.7851 0.012.1725.0 Left front loudspeaker

X51 23 0443.7851 Radio (grey)

X52 23 0443.7851 Radio (brown)

X53 0443.7851 0441.2616 Side console courtesy light

X54 2 0443.4993 0445.0666 Upper rear right worklights

X55 2 0443.4993 0445.0666 Upper rear left worklights

X56 2 0443.4993 0445.0666 Upper front left worklight

X57 2 0443.4993 0445.0666 Upper front right worklight

X58 5 0441.2045 0441.3192 Windscreen wiper motor

Front left sidelight and direction

X59 0441.1923.4 0441.1920.4 indicator

Front right sidelight and direction

X60 0441.1923.4 0441.1921.4 indicator

40-23
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

X61 0442.5602 0442.5599.4 Front left worklight on cab

Front right worklight on cab

X62 0442.5602 0442.5599.4 (without front lift)

X63 0441.6727 0441.4087.4 Front left worklight on cab

Front right worklight on cab

X64 0441.6727 0441.4087.4 (with front lift)

X65SX 0.012.2010.4 Lower rear left worklights

X65DX 0442.9835 Lower rear right worklights

Rear left tail light and direction indicator

0.012.2010.4 2.8029.880.0/10 (wide fenders)
X66SX
Rear left tail light and direction indicator
0442.9835 0442.9833.4/10 (narrow fenders)

Rear right tail light and direction indicator

0.012.2010.4 2.8029.880.0/10 (wide fenders)
X66DX
Rear right tail light and direction indicator
0442.9835 0442.9834.4/10 (narrow fenders)

Number plate light

0.012.2018.4 0441.4115 (wide fenders)
X67
Number plate light
0441.4114 0441.4115 (narrow fenders)

Front axle suspension load sensing

X68 0443.7849 0442.3803 solenoid valve coil

X69 0.009.2194.4 0439.1530 Front axle suspension position sensor

Trailer socket
X70 39 0443.7848 0442.4116 (lights and auxiliary power)

0443.7355.4
X71 40 0.011.9428.0 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
0443.7356.4

X72 35 0443.7356.4 Trailer parking brake solenoid valve coil

X73 0443.7356.4 Trailer braking low pressure switch

Compressor and condenser fan pressure

X74 0.013.0732.4/10 0442.6492 switch

X78 0.013.0732.4/10 0425.8670 Preheating device

X79 0.013.0732.4/10 0.012.4371.0 Steering system pressure switch

X80 2 0.013.0732.4/10 0441.6066 Start enable switch (Green)

X81 0.013.0732.4/10 Brake fluid level sensor

X82 4 0.013.0732.4/10 0441.5266 Steering angle sensor

2.8039.240.0 Left headlamp

X86 37 0.013.0663.4
2.8039.250.0 Left headlamp (UK)

40-24
2. INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description

X87 0.013.0663.4 0116.9304 Horn

2.8039.250.0 Right headlamp (UK)

X88 37 0.013.0663.4
2.8039.240.0 Right headlamp

40-25
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

3. COMPONENTS
This chapter contains:
1 - Connectors table: the shapes and pinouts of the connectors
2 - Components table: technical and functional description of the components
3 - Pinouts of the electronic control units

3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

1 2 3
1

2 1 3 2 1

1 2 3
1 2

4 1
4 2 5 6
1
3 4

3 2

1 4
3 4

1 2
4 3 2 1 2 3

7 X
8 3 1
9 2
3 1
15
7 4
6 4
S 50 11 8 5

P
30 14 12 9 8 7

40-26
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

10 11 C B 12
D A

E F

1 3 5
1 2

13 14 15
6 5
8 7
7 8
2 1
5 6 2
2 1 1
1 2
1 2 3

16 17 6 12 18
14 13
13 14
10 9 9 10

1 2
2 1
2 1 1 2
1 7

19 20 21
17 21 22
18 22 21 13 26
17 18

2 1 1 2 1 2 1 14
2 1

40-27
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

22 23 24
14 1
13
1 1 2

25 13 3 4
4 16
8 12

25 26 27 5
8 9
1 3
1 2 1
6

7 12

7 6
4 6
3

28 1 7 29 30
1 12 12 1 4 6

1 3
2 8
6 7 7 6

1
31 32 33
3 1

8 1

23 16
6 4
6

40-28
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

34 35 2 36 1

2
3 4
1

3 3

2
1

37 38 39 54
56B L
58R

31 58L
56A

R 54
1 5 31

40 41
6 31 20
9 20 31 19 8
30 30 19 9 21
21 7
3 3
10 18 18 7 10
22 29 22
2
29
11 4
1
6 17 17 11
5

23 28 28 23
12 16
16 12
25 13 27 27 25
15
24 14 26 15 26 24 13
14

42 X
K J W H J X K
B
L
B V A H W L
V A
M U U M
C G G C
N T T N
F F
D
O S R D O
R S
P E Q P
Q E

40-29
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

1 13
43

14 25

44 2 22

45
24

68
46

40-30
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
1 Engine speed 0.010.2874.2 Pin3 = 12V power NLSE
sensor High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V

12 Vdc power
Trailer braking air
2 0.011.9428.0 Resistance at 0 bar 10-13 Ohm X71
pressure sensor Resistance at 6 bar 119-129 Ohm

Engine oil pressure Normally closed contact (NC)

3 0118.2227 P
switch Operating pressure: 0.5 ± 0.2 bar to 90 ± 5 °C

Measured across pin 3 and pin 4: ~ 25 Ohm

4 Actuator 0211.2588 Measured across pin 3 and pin 5: ~ 25 Ohm Y3
Measured across pin 1 and pin 2: ~ 1.3 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = analog signal
Pin3 = 5V power
Turbo charge Signal with pressure of 0.5 bar: approx. 0.5 V
5 0419.9552 B41
pressure sensor Signal with pressure of 4 bar: approx. 4.5 V
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 58 kOhm
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 3: 13 kOhm
Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: 58 kOhm

Camshaft speed Resistance: 336 ± 34 Ohm

6 0419.9792 B40
sensor (Pickup) Inductance: 128.8 ± 13 mH

Fuel temperature
7 0419.9809 Resistance at 21.5 °C: ~2.3 kOhm B37
sensor

Engine coolant
8 temperature sensor 0419.9809 Resistance at 21.5 °C: ~2.3 kOhm T
(for Infocenter)

Across Pin 1 and Pin 2:

Normally closed contact (NC)
Resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm X32
9 Brake pedal switch 0439.1395 Across Pin 3 and Pin 4: X35
Normally open contact (NO)
Resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm

Across Pin 1 and Pin 2:

Normally closed contact (NC)
Resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm
10 Handbrake switch 0439.1395 X6
Across Pin 3 and Pin 4:
Normally open contact (NO)
Resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
Front axle Pin2 = analog signal
11 suspension 0.009.2194.4 Pin3 = 8VDC power X69
position sensor Output 1.8 +0.1V
(Cylinders fully retracted)

Rear PTO Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2 with switch PTOSX
12 pushbutton 0441.1533 depressed: ~160 Ohm PTODX
(on fender) Diode test between pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative)

Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2 with switch

13 Rear PTO 0441.1533 depressed: ~160 Ohm X10
pushbutton (in cab) Diode test between pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative)

Front PTO Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2 with switch

14 pushbutton 0441.1533 depressed: ~160 Ohm X9
(in cab) Diode test between pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative)

40-31
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

DWDX
DWSX
15 Rear lift pushbutton 0441.2688 Normally open contact (NO) UPDX
UPDX

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = analog signal LEFT DRAFT
16 Lift draft sensor 0441.5586.4 Pin3 = 8V power RIGHT DRAFT
Signal with no implement hitched: 4V ± 0.2 V

Normally closed switch (NC)

17 Start enable switch 0441.6066 resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm X80
Colour: Green

Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2:

18 T ransmission oil at 25°C 1000 ±15 Ohm
0441.6649 TEMP
temperature sensor at 100°C 1696 ±35 Ohm
at 150°C 2211 ±80 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
19 Forward/reverse 0441.6685 Pin2 = power ADD EV V/R
solenoid valves Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 28 ± 2 Ohm

Gearshift Pin1 = earth

20 solenoid valves 0441.6685 Pin2 = power EVGROUP
(Y1, Y2 and Y5) Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 28 ± 2 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
21 Differential lock 0441.7555 Pin2 = power EVDF
solenoid valve Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 8 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
22 Rear PTO solenoid 0441.7555 Pin2 = power EVPTO
valve Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 8 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
Clutch pedal Pin2 = analog signal:
23 depressed proximity 0442.4165 0 Volt with sensor covered by metal X33
sensor 12 Volt with sensor exposed
Pin3 = 12V power

Pin G = input from sensor

24 Compressed 0442.5709 Pin + = 12V power X39
air pressure gauge Pin - = earth

Compressor connector (female): normally open contact

- with pressure increasing:
contact closed at max 2.4 bar
contact open at 28.5 ±1.5 bar
Compressor and - with pressure decreasing: X74
25 condenser fan 0442.6492 contact closed at 19.5 ±1.5 bar X76
pressure switch contact open at 1.2 ±0.3 bar
Fans connector (male): normally open contact
- with pressure increasing: contact closed at 20±1 bar
- with pressure decreasing: contact open at 16±1 bar

Four wheel drive Pin1 = earth

26 (4WD) clutch 0443.1661 Pin2 = power DT
solenoid valve Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 10 Ohm

Normally open contact (NO)

27 Engine oil low 0443.1690 Operating pressure: 18 bar PRESS SWITCH
pressure switch Colour: red

Pin1 = 5.0V DC power

Pin2 = earth
Pin4 = analog signal
28 Accelerator pedal 0443.2708 Output 0.5V DC X30
position sensor (Pedal fully released)
Output 4.5V DC
(Pedal fully depressed)

40-32
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

Pin1 = 5.0V DC power

Pin2 = earth
Pin4 = analog signal
29 Clutch pedal 0443.2708 Output 0.5V DC X34
position sensor (Pedal fully released)
Output 4.5V DC
(Pedal fully depressed)

Pin1 = earth
30 Proportional 0443.4425 Pin2 = power EV PROP
solenoid valve coil Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: ~ 5 Ohm

Pin1 = earth
31 Gearshift solenoid Pin2 = power
0443.6315 EVGROUP
valves (Y3 and Y4) Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: 27 Ohm
Inductance between pin1 and pin 2: 160 mH

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
32 Speed sensor 0443.8436 Pin3 = 12V power NAB
for odometer High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
33 Gearbox output 0443.8449 Pin3 = 12V power NLSA
shaft speed sensor High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
34 Transmission speed 0443.8450 Pin3 = 12V power NHK
sensor High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V

Pin 1 = earth
Pin 2 = square wave signal (130 pulses per metre)
Pin 3 = 12 V power supply
35 Radar Italy 0443.8654 RADAR
With the radar powered up, a variation in voltage should register
at pin 2 when a hand is passed over the sensing element
Nominal radar frequency: 24125 GHz ± 25 MHz

Pin 1 = earth
Pin 2 = square wave signal (130 pulses per metre)
Pin 3 = 12 V power supply
36 Radar (UK) 0443.8655 RADAR
With the radar powered up, a variation in voltage should register
at pin 2 when a hand is passed over the sensing element
Nominal radar frequency: 24300 GHz ± 25 MHz

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = 5.0V DC power supply
Pin3 = analog signal
37 Rear lift position 0443.8667 Output 0.6V DC POS SEN
sensor (Lift links fully Up)
Output 4.5V DC
(Lift links fully Down)

40-33
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

Pin1 = signal 1
Pin2 = 8V power
Pin3 = earth
Pin4 = signal 2

Steering angle right

PIN
0°÷15° 15°÷25° 25°÷30° >30°

1 0V 8V 8V 8V
38 Steering angle 0441.5266 4 0V 0V 8V 8V X82
sensor

Steering angle left

PIN
0°÷15° 15°÷25° 25°÷30° >30°

1 0V 8V 8V 8V

4 0V 8V 8V 0V

1 3

4 6

39 Shuttle control 0.012.6472.4 Pin X37

lever 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pos
Forward
Avanti
Neutral
Folle
Reverse
Indietro
NOTE: In every position the resistance
must be 3.9 Ohm

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

40 Rear worklights 0441.1496.4 WORK LIGHT

switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

40-34
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

41 Cab headlights 0441.1496.4 3

dipped beam switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2
Lower front
42 worklights (on cab) 0441.1496.4 3A
switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

43 50S lights switch 0441.1496.4 4

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

40-35
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

44 4WD switch 0441.1496.4 8

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

45 Rotating beacon 0441.1496.4 FLASHING LIGHT

on/off switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

46 PTO AUTO 0441.1496.4 PTO AUTO

switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

40-36
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

0
1
2

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

47 Sidelights switch 0441.1497 1

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

48 ASM switch 0441.1498 6

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

49 Differential 0441.1498 7
lock switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

40-37
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

83
50
30
86s

75 15

50 Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X17

Pin 30 15 50 75 83
Pos

0
1
2

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

51 Rear screen 0441.9283 REAR WIPER

wiper switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

52 Front suspension 0442.2763 5

pushbutton

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pos

40-38
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

53 Hazard warning 0442.9401 X36

lights on/off switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos

Hand throttle lever (EMR)

Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = analog signal
Pin3 = 8V power
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 3: ~ 4.5 kOhm
With throttle lever on minimum:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 3.9 kOhm
- Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: ~ 0.6 kOhm
With throttle lever on maximum:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 0.6 kOhm
- Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2: ~ 3.9 kOhm
54 Lift control EMR
0441.9425.4/10 Lift control lever (EHR)
console Pin1 = earth EHR
Pin2 = analog signal
Pin3 = 8V power
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 3: ~ 5.0 kOhm
Lever in “UP” position:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 1.45 kOhm
Lever in “STOP” position:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 2.6 kOhm
Lever in “DOWN” position:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 3.8 kOhm
Lever in “FLOAT” position:
- Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ~ 4.2 kOhm

40-39
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR MX1

1 13

14 25

Pin Volts. Code Description

1 Not utilised
2 Not utilised
3 Power, relay power fuse
4 Not utilised
5 Input, fuel temperature signal
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 5 and 9
9 Analog input, coolant temperature sensor
10 0V GND Earth
11 Not utilised
12 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 13
13 Digital input, speed 1 (camshaft)
14 STG- PWM output, actuator electromagnet signal
15 STG+ PWM output, actuator electromagnet signal
16 Shielding of control rack position sensor (for pins 17, 18 and 19)
17 RF- Common connection for measurement and reference coils
18 RF REF Analog input, reference coil signal
19 RF MESS Analog input, measurement coil signal
20 Not utilised
21 Not utilised
22 Not utilised
23 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 24
24 Analog input, turbo charge pressure sensor signal
25 +5V +5V LDA 5V reference voltage for signal on pin 24

40-40
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

CONNECTOR MX2

1 13

14 25
Pin Volts. Code Description
1 0V +31 Battery negative
2 0V +31 Battery negative
3 Digital output, glowplugs control light
4 Not utilised
5 Not utilised
6 Input, gearbox in neutral
7 Input, wheel speed signal
8 Not utilised
9 Not utilised
10 L ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
11 K ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
12 Not utilised
13 Not utilised
14 +12V +15 Battery positive (15+)
15 Engine memory LED
16 Engine speed output
17 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pins 18, 19, 20, 21
18 “MAX” key signal
19 “HOLD” key signal
20 Hand throttle signal
21 “MIN” key signal
22 Not utilised
23 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 24
24 Analog input, signal from accelerator pedal sensor (SWG)
25 +5V +5V REF 5V reference voltage for signal on pin 24

40-41
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

ECU CONNECTOR (PS)

2 22

45
24

68
46

Pin Volts. Code Description

1 0V VM1 Battery negative
2 0V VM2 Battery negative
3 0V VMG1 Reference voltage for signal on pins 16, 17, 40 and 62
4 0V VMG2 Reference voltage for signal on pin 44
5 ADM4 Output for fault warning light
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 VPS2 Power (+) common, solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5
9 Not utilised
10 Not utilised
11 ADM6 Power, solenoid valve Y2
12 Not utilised
13 +12V VPS1 Power (+), proportional solenoid valve and solenoid valves Y6, Y7
14 SD1 Display control signal
15 SDDK Diagnostics connector
16 EF5 Digital input, main clutch rpm sensor (NHK)
17 EF7 Digital input, input rpm sensor (nMot. nLse)
18 Not utilised
19 Not utilised
20 ED3 Analog input, reverse drive control signal
21 ED10 Battery positive (15+)
22 ED7 Digital signal, range downshift pushbutton
23 VPE1 Battery positive (30+)
24 VMGA1 Power (-), clutch pedal angular position sensor and temperature sensor
25 Not utilised
26 Not utilised
27 Not utilised
28 Not utilised
29 ED11 Analog input, low transmission oil pressure signal
30 Not utilised

40-42
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

Pin Volts. Code Description

31 EDM1 Signal, mechanical gearbox neutral
32 AIP3 Power, solenoid valve Y6
33 ADM8 Power, solenoid valve Y4
34 ADM7 Power, solenoid valve Y3
35 Not utilised
36 SD4 Vehicle speed output
37 AU Power (+) clutch pedal angular position sensor
38 EU1 Analog input, angular position of clutch pedal sensor signal
39 ER1 Analog input, temperature sensor signal
40 EF6 Digital input, output rpm sensor (nLsa)
41 Not utilised
42 Not utilised
43 Not utilised
44 ED8 Digital input, clutch pedal full travel sensor
45 VPI Battery positive (15+)
46 Not utilised
47 Not utilised
48 Not utilised
49 Not utilised
50 AIP7 Power, solenoid valve Y5
51 Not utilised
52 Not utilised
53 Not utilised
54 Not utilised
55 AIP4 Power, solenoid valve Y7
56 0V AIP1 Power (-), proportional solenoid valve
57 +12V ADM5 Power, solenoid valve Y1
58 Not utilised
59 Not utilised
60 Not utilised
61 Not utilised
62 EF4 Digital input, rpm sensor (nAb)
63 ED1 Analog input, forward drive control signal
64 Not utilised
65 ED2 Analog input, neutral control signal
66 Not utilised
67 ED6 Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton
68 +12V VPE2 Battery positive (30+)

40-43
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.3 INFOCENTER

ST1 6 12 ST2
13 26

1 14
1 7

CONNECTOR ST1
Pin Volts. Code Description
1 TXD Diagnostics interface transmission
2 +12V KL15-ST +15 key
3 KL31 Lamps earth
4 +12V KL58 +58 lights
5 GROUT Actual vehicle speed output (radar)
6 RPOUT Rear PTO speed output
7 GETOEL Transmission oil pressure
8 HANDBR Handbrake on and brake fluid warning light
9 0V KL30-ST Vehicle earth
10 RXD Diagnostic interface reception
11 VHOUT Theoretical vehicle speed output (wheels)
12 0V KL31E Electronics earth
CONNECTOR ST2
Pin Volts. Code Description
1 DIFF Differential lock indicator light
2 BLINK2 2nd trailer flasher indicator light
3 BLINK1 1st trailer flasher indicator light
4 BLINK Tractor flasher indicator light
5 HML DOWN
6 HML UP
7 LADEK Battery charge indicator light
8 LUFTF Air cleaner clogged
9 MOTOEL Engine oil pressure warning light
10 FRONTZ Front PTO indicator light
11 HECKZ Rear PTO indicator light
12 MOTOR Engine rpm
13 TANK Fuel gauge
14 ALLRAD 4WD indicator light
15 KUEHLT Engine coolant temperature

40-44
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

Pin Volts. Code Description

16 FERNL Main beam indicator light
17 HYDRA Hydraulic system oil filter clogged
18 Not utilised
19 VORGL Glowplugs test
20 RPTO Rear PTO rpm
21 GROUND Input, actual ground speed (radar)
22 WHEEL Input, theoretical vehicle speed
23 TRAILER Input, trailer braking indicator light (Italy)
24 Not utilised
25 EMR Input, engine indicator light
26 Not utilised

40-45
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.4 HPSA CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR JX1 (BLACK)

8 1

23 16

Pin Volts. Code Description

1 Up solenoid valve
2 Down solenoid valve
3 8V Power input to draft sensors
4 12V Power input to ECU (F34)
5 12V Power input to ECU (F34)
6 Control lever: Transport 5.5 V
Stop: 3.8 V
Control: 2.1 V
Float: 1.7 V
7 0.3–8.0V Depth potentiometer
8 0.3–8.0V Lowering speed potentiometer
9 Manual UP key
10 0–8.0V Input, left draft sensor
11 PTO AUTO switch output
12 Not utilised
13 Output, status indicator LED
14 0.3–8.0V Maximum height potentiometer
15 5.0 V Power input to position sensor
16 Manual DOWN key
17 0–8.0V Input, right draft sensor
18 0V Earth for potentiometer panel
19 0.3–8.0V Mix potentiometer
20 0V Control unit earth
21 0V Sensors earth
22 8V Power input to panel and lever
Lift position sensor:
23 High position: 0.6V (± 0.1V)
low position: 4.5V (± 0.1V)

40-46
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

CONNECTOR JX2 (WHITE)

8 1

23 16

Pin Volts. Code Description

1 Not used
2 Differential output
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 4WD output
9 8V External sensor power (ISO4 socket)
10 8V Steering sensors power
11 ASM AUTO input
12 Wheelslip control input
13 Differential input
14 External sensor input (ISO4 socket)
15 ISO9141 K Line
16 Steering sensor 1 input
17 0V External sensor earth (ISO4 socket)
18 Steering sensor 2 input
19 Wheel speed input (130 pulses/metre)
20 Brakes input
21 Not used
22 ISO9141 L Line
23 0V Steering sensors earth

40-47
3. COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.5 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT

8 1

23 16

CONNECTOR JX3 (BLACK)

Pin Volts. Code Description
1 Output, Up solenoid valve
2 Output, Down solenoid valve
3 Not utilised
4 +12 V +12 V
5 +12 V +12 V
6–19 Not utilised
20 0V Control unit earth
21–23 Not utilised
CONNECTOR JX4 (WHITE)
Pin Volts. Code Description
1 Not utilised
2 Output, load sensing solenoid valve
3–7 Not utilised
8 Control light output
9 Power input to external sensor
10 Not utilised
11 Input, 4WD status
12 Input, control button
13 Input, brakes switches
14 Input, position sensor
15 ISO 9141 K diagnostic line
16 Not utilised
17 0V Earth for external sensor
18 Not utilised
19 Input, wheel speed
20 Not utilised
21 Not utilised
22 ISO 9141 L diagnostic line
23 Not utilised

40-48
 4.1 GROUND POINTS

4. SYSTEMS
4.1 GROUND POINTS

GND5

GND3

F0024530 F0024280

GND6
GND2

P4

F0033510 F0058350
F0075410

GND1
GND4

GND4

F0075380 F0033520 F0075380

F0058350

F0076960 40-49
 4.2 ENGINE START

4.2 ENGINE START

8 1
0 1 2

0.012.8732.4
68 23 1 2 31 50 15 X 30 6 +30 7
ECU PS X17 J2 P1 J1 MX2
1 GDN POWER
GND4 2 GDN POWER
14 +21VCC POWER (+15)
2
6 INPUT, GEARBOX IN NEUTRAL

2
4
3
X8
TKAB3 MS1
1 31 20

FU100

0.013.0732.4
0443.7846

100A
+30A +50 +30C D+ B+ RL40 X80
3 1 2 5 2 1
+
GND7
M G

- 4
7
6 5

+ -

BATTERY

1 Starter switch
2 Engine control unit
3 Engine ECU circuit board
4 Start enable switch
5 Engine starter relay
6 Alternator
7 Starter motor
8 Transmission ECU

D0021780 40-50
 4.3 PREHEATING

4.3 PREHEATING

0441.9533
RL1(40A)

30 85 86 87

F27

F16

F30
0 1 2

7.5A

7.5A
3A
0.012.8894.4 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 7
P1

0.012.8732.4
X17 J2 P4 J3 J1

AS6
ST2 7
RL41
PRE HEATING 19 12 30
85
+15 2 9
AS3 86 2
6 +30 9 5 87

GND 3 21 MX1
GND 12 AS1
10 GND POWER
ST1 3 PRE HEATING RELAY OUTPUT COMMAND

MX2 3
3 PRE HEATING LIGHT OUTPUT SIGNAL

2 GDN POWER

1 GDN POWER

14 +12VCC POWER (+15)

GND4
11 4 18 1
MS2 MS1 TKAB3

FU100 +30A
0.013.0732.4

100A
FU101
125A

+30B
RL42B
+ -
X78 RL42A RL42
2 1 BATTERY
0443.7846

4
5

1 Starter switch
2 Glowplug warning light ON relay
3 Engine control unit
4 Preheating relay
5 Preheating device
6 Instrument panel

D0021790 40-51
 4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL

4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL

RL1 (40A) 1 Starter switch

0441.9533
2 Engine ECU circuit board
3
30 85 86 87

Engine control unit

1 4 Accelerator pedal position sensor

F27

F16

F30
0 1 2
5 Instrument panel

7.5A

7.5A
3A
GND2 0.013.5916.4 0.012.8732.4
6 ISO7 socket (implement connection)
0419.9869
X17
50 15 X 30
P1 J2
+30 9 -31

P4
7 6
J3
7
J1 X8
7 Engine speed keypad
1
2 1Kohm
8 Lift and hand throttle console
3
4 2 9 Creeper engagement switch
t° B37 2.2Kohm

15 2
1
G18
15
5
6
10 Diagnostics connector
11 Turbo charge pressure sensor
MS1 MX1 12 Actuator
15 5 FUEL TEMP. SENS. INPUT SIGNAL
t° B43
14 2
1
8
9
22
24
8
9
FUEL AND WATER TEMP SENS. GND

WATER TEMP. SENS. INPUT SIGNAL

13 Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup)
4 14
15
PWM (-) ACTUATOR

PWM (+) ACTUATOR

14 Engine coolant temperature sensor
B40
13
1
2
12
13
16
28
12
13
PICK UP SUPPLY (-)

PICK UP SUPPLY SIGNAL INPUT

15 Fuel temperature sensor
14
15 6
10 GND POWER
16 Armrest
1
Y3 16 ACTUATOR SHIELD

2 17 10 17 ACTUATOR REFERENCE COM.

12 3
4
18 19
11
18
19
ACTUATOR REFERENCE SIGNAL

ACTUATOR MEASURED SIGNAL

19
5 25
29 24 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL INPUT

27 25 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SUPPLY (+5V)

p 1
B41 23 17 23 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SUPPLY (-)

11 2 24
3 25 MX2 3
1 GND POWER

2 GND POWER

6 INPUT, GEARBOX IN NEUTRAL

GND4 see 40-50

7 INPUT, SPEED SIGNAL

X18
3 10 ISO9141
10 4 11 ISO9141

21 PRESS. SIGN.

19 “HOLD” KEY SIGNAL

1 18 “MAX” KEY SIGNAL

9 2 17 REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR

SIGNAL ON PINS 18, 19, 20

X4 15 ENGINE MEMORY LED

14 +21VCC POWER (+15)

4 EMR ALARM

Versione con bracciolo EMR 16 ACTUATOR SHIELD

3 25 ACCELERATOR PEDAL SUPPLY (+5V)

1 2 3 5 2 4 3 1 6 8 2 20 HAND THROTTLE SIGNAL

1 23 ACCELERATOR PEDAL SUPPLY (-)

EMR X20 24 ACCELERATOR PEDAL SIGNAL INPUT
0443.7354.4

X20 ISO7 TKAB3 AS3 AS1 AS2 AS6

5 2 4 3 1 6 3 1 9 5 4 21 4 10 11 9 10

0.012.8894.4
FU100
0443.7846

6
100A

X21
6 7 8 20 17 19 18 16 21
7
+30A ST1 ST2 X30
2 9 11 3 12 25 12 2 1 4
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT

EMR ALARM
ENGINR RPM
+15
+30

GND
GND

+ -
16 BATTERY
4

D0022760 40-52
 4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH

4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)

0441.9533 1 Starter switch

16 17 + - 2 Instrument panel
RL 11 RL 6
BATTERY FULL BEAM RL 10 RL 5 RL 1 HALF BEAM RL 7 RL 14 3 Sidelights switch

F9
TOP FULL BEAM POSITION (40A) TOP HALF BEAM HAZARD

7.5A
1 2 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 1 2 85 86 1 2 1 2
G
Right headlamp
X38 X40

0443.7875
+30A 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 30 87 4 5 3 4 5 3 C3 C2 C1 49A 49 31
5 Left headlamp
D9 D8 D8 1N4007 D4 D5
D2
+30A

0443.7846
1N4007 1N4007 1N4007 1N4007 1N4007
D1

1N4007
6 Horn
15 1 7

FU100
Rear right tail light and direction indicator

F33

F24

F25

F20
F26

F23

F15
F16

F12

F31
F32

F27
13 14 8 Rear left tail light and direction indicator
0 1 2

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A
7.5A
100A

15A

30A
15A

15A

15A

15A

7.5A
3A
9 Number plate light
0443.7851 GND4 P5 P4

X60
3 1 2 3 1 2
X59
14 1 2
AS5 X17
50 15 X 30 1 3
J1 P6
2 25
P5 P5
12 7 3 9 1 8 23
P5
10 9 13 6
P1
+30 -31
J3
7 3 6 17 2 1
J1 P5 J3
22 2 1 4
P5
11 8
J2
9 10 Direction indicators flasher unit

0.012.8732.4
P6 J1 P6 J1
X51 TKAB3
G7 11 Hazard warning lights on/off switch
-31
1
12 Steering column switch unit
2
3 13 Front right sidelight and direction indicator
4
14 Front left sidelight and direction indicator
G9 15 Radio
-31
1
2 DS1 16 Compressed air pressure gauge light
3 13
4 17 Transmission display
11
6
0441.1923.4 5

LOW BEAN
HIGH BEAN
CONTROL
Abb
Flash 0
HORN
CONTROL AS4
H
17
15/1
12
56a
11
56b
10
12 56
9

DIRECTION 8
LIGHT -31
7
CONTROL 49
6
15
0

5
30
R

4
L

L
3
0443.8656

R
2
49a
1

G4

X36 X1-X2 GND4 TKAB3 MS1 AS1 AS3 AS2

7 10 6 8 2 5 3 1 49b RE LE 49 31 49a RA LA 3 4 5 6 12 9 8 7 26 22 20 19 18 16 21 5 9 8 2 1 18 7

0.012.8894.4
0443.7846

0.013.5916.4
GND2 G4
10 1 ST1 ST2
G15 G14 G19
11 4 1 5 4 1 5 1 7 8 12 13 9 2 1 10 9 3 8 12 3 4 9 2 2 3 4 16
0442.9835

TRAILER 2
TRAILER 1
DIRECTIONS LIGHT
GND
GND
+58
+30
+15

HIGH BEAM
0.013.0663.4
X66 DX
X66 SX

G16
1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
0441.4114

3
X87 X86 X88
1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3
8 7
X67
1 2
6 5 4
9

D0022770 40-53
 4.6 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH (MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT)

4.6 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH (MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT)

0441.9533 1 Starter switch

20 21
+ -
2 Instrument panel
1 2 4 5 6
3 Cab headlights dipped beam switch

0443.7875
X38 X40 BATTERY
RL 11
FULL BEAM RL 10 RL 5
RL 6
HALF BEAM RL 7 RL 14

F9
RL 1
TOP FULL BEAM POSITION TOP HALF BEAM HAZARD
(40A)
4 Sidelights switch

7.5A
G

4 5
1 2

3 4 5
1

D8
2

3 4 5
1

D8
2

3
1N4007
85

30
86

87 4 5
1 2

3 4 5
1 2

3 C3 C2 C1 49A 49 31
5 Right headlamp
D9 D4 D5
D2
6 Left headlamp

0443.7846
+30A 1N4007 1N4007 1N4007
D1
1N4007 1N4007

1N4007

18 1 7 Horn

FU100

F33

F24

F25

F20
F26

F23

F15
F16
F12
F10

F31
F32

F21
F22

F27
16 17 19 8 Rear right tail light and direction indicator

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A
7.5A

7.5A
7.5A
100A
0 1 2

15A

30A
15A

15A

15A

15A
7.5A

7.5A
3A
9 Rear left tail light and direction indicator
0441.6727 3 1 2 3 1 2
0443.7851 1 2 50 15 X 30 1
P5 P4 P5
10 Number plate light
3 1 2 5 4 15 3 2 25 12 7 3 9 1 8 23 10 9 13 6 +30 -31 7 3 6 17 18 2 1 5 1 22 2 1 4 11 8 9
AS5 X17

0.012.8732.4
X60 X59 RL21 X51 TKAB3 J1 P6 P5 P5 P6 J1 P6 J1 P5 P1 J3 J1 P2 P5 J3 P5 J2
11 Direction indicators flasher unit
15
X63 G7
2 G12 -31 12 Hazard warning lights on/off switch
1 1 1
56b
-31
2
3
2
3
13 Steering column switch unit
14
not used

56a 4 4 Front right worklight on cab

X64 G9 15 Front left worklight on cab
2 G13 -31 DS1
1 1 1 20 16 Front right sidelight and direction indicator
56b 2 2 16
-31 3 3 13 17 Front left sidelight and direction indicator
56a 4 4 12

14
11
6
18 Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay
0441.1923.4 5
19 Radio
GND4 20 Compressed air pressure gauge light
21 Transmission display
LOW BEAN
HIGH BEAN
CONTROL
Abb
Flash 0
HORN
CONTROL AS4
H
17
15/1
12
56a
11
56b
10
56
9
13 DIRECTION 8
LIGHT -31
7
CONTROL 49
6
0

15
5
30
R
L

4
L
3
0443.8656

R
2
49a
1

G4

X36 X1-X2 GND4 TKAB3 MS1 AS1 AS3 AS2

7 10 6 8 2 5 3 1 49b RE LE 49 31 49a RA LA 3 4 5 6 12 9 8 7 26 22 20 19 18 17 5 16 21 5 9 8 2 1 18 7
0443.7846

0.012.8894.4
0.013.5916.4
GND2 G4
11 G15 1 3 ST1 ST2
4 1 5 4 1 5 G19
12 1 7 8 12 13 9 2 1 10 9 3 8 1 10 9 5 12 3 4 9 2 2 3 4 16
0442.9835

G14

TRAILER 2
TRAILER 1
DIRECTIONS LIGHT
GND
GND
+58
+30
+15

HIGH BEAM
X66 DX
X66 SX

0.013.0663.4

G16
1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3
3 2
0441.4114

4
X87 X86 X88
9 8 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3

X67
1 2

10 7 6 5

D0022780 40-54
 4.7 CAB ACCESSORY

4.7 CAB ACCESSORY

0441.9533/10
RL 5 RL 1
POSITION (40A)

5A
1 2 85 86

F8
4 5 3 30 87
D3

1N4007

4 6 1
2 3 5 7

F24

F20

F18

F28

F7
0 1 2

7.5A

30A

30A

15A

20A
30 58
15
- GND4
- 30 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 50 15 X 30 7 3 4 +30 -31 7 21 6 3
0443.7851

0.012.8732.4
X45 X46 X49 X53 X5 X7 X17 P5 P6 P3 P1 P4 J3 P3 P2

GND 5

DS1
13
21
18

TKAB3
1

0443.7846
FU100
100A
+30A

+ -

BATTERY

1 Starter switch
2 Door open warning signal switch
3 Interior roof light
4 Clock
5 Side console courtesy light
6 Driver seat air suspension compressor
7 Cigar lighteri

D0016880 40-55
 4.8 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)

4.8 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)

16 17 1 Starter switch
2 Rear worklights switch
3 Rotating beacon on/off switch
2 1 2 1
4 Lower rear right worklights

0441.1923.4 0442.5602
X62 X61

14 15 19 20 5 Lower rear left worklights

6 Front left worklight
7 Front right worklight
1 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 2
8 Alternator (B+)

0443.4993
0443.4993

X55 X54 G13 G12 X56 X57

9 Engine hood front worklights fuse
18 10 Engine hood front worklights relay
13
11 50S lights switch

0441.9533
12 Lower front worklights (on cab) switch
1 2 1 2 1 2 -31 1 -31 1 3 1 2 5 4 1 3 -31 1 3 -31 RL 10 RL 11
RL 2 RL 3 RL 1
13 Rotating beacon
0443.7851

X47 G6 G5 G9 G7 RL21 G8 G11 (40A) (40A) (40A) FULL BEAM FULL BEAM TOP

F20
F6

F4
85 86 85 86 85 86 1 2 1 2
14 Upper rear left worklights

30A

30A
30A
87 30 87 30 30 87 4 5
D8
3 4 5
D7
3
15 Upper rear right worklights
1N4007 1N4007
16 Front right worklight on cab
1 17 Front left worklight on cab

F10

F14
F33

F2
18 Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay

7.5A

30A
15A
15A
0 1 2
GND5 19 Upper front left worklight
7 8 9 10 12 17 19 50 15 X 30 5 6 9 4 2 +30 -31 7 21 18 14 12 2 6
20 Upper front right worklight
DS1 X17 J1 J3 P2 P1 P4 J3 P5 P6 P3

0.012.8732.4
FLASHING WORK
AS1 TKAB3 LIGHT LIGHT
15 21 5 14 13 2 1 1 10 9 5 1 10 9 5
0442.9936.4

GND4
100A
FU100

3A 4 MS2 +30A 3 2
6
0443.7846

1 10 9 5 5 9 10 1
0.013.5916.4

GND3

+ -
3 2 3 2
12 11 RL20 FU120 D+ B+ G19 G15 G14 BATTERY
5 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 10 11 20
+
GND2
0.012.2010.4
0.013.0663.4

G
0442.9835

-
9
10
X65 DX
X65 SX

8
X89 X93
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1

7 6 5 4

D0022790 40-56
 4.9 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT)

4.9 WORKING LIGHTS (MACHINE WITH FRONT LIFT)

15 16

2 1 2 1

0441.1923.4 0442.5602
X62 X61

13 14 18 19
1 Starter switch
2 Rear worklights switch
1 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 Rotating beacon on/off switch

0443.4993
0443.4993
X55 X54 G13 G12 X56 X57
4 Lower rear right worklights
12
17 5 Lower rear left worklights
6 Front left worklight

0441.9533
7 Front right worklight t
1 2 1 2 1 2 -31 1 -31 1 3 1 2 5 4 1 3 -31 1 3 -31
RL 2 RL 3 RL 1 RL 10 RL 11 8 Alternator (B+)
0443.7851

X47 G6 G5 G9 G7 RL21 G8 G11 (40A) (40A) (40A) FULL BEAM FULL BEAM TOP

F20
Engine hood front worklights fuse

F6

F4
85 86 85 86 85 86 1 2 1 2

10

30A

30A
30A
87 30 87 30 30 87 4 5 3 4 5 3 Engine hood front worklights relay
D8 D7
1N4007 1N4007
11 50S lights switch
12 Rotating beacon
1

F10

F33

F2
13 Upper rear left worklights

7.5A

30A
15A
GND5 0 1 2
14 Upper rear right worklights
15 Front right worklight on cab
8 9 10 12 17 19 50 15 X 30 5 6 9 4 2 +30 -31 7 21 18 12 2 6
DS1 X17 J1 J3 P2 P1 P4 J3 P5 P6 P3 16 Front left worklight on cab

0.012.8732.4
17 Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay
18 Upper front left worklight
19 Upper front right worklight

FLASHING WORK
AS1 TKAB3 LIGHT LIGHT
21 5 13 2 1 1 10 9 5 1 10 9 5
0442.9936.4

GND4
100A
FU100

4 MS2 +30A 3 2
6
0443.7846

5 9 10 1
0.013.5916.4

GND3

+ -
3 2 3 2
11 RL20 FU120 D+ B+ G19 G15 G14 BATTERY
5 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 10 11 20
+
GND2
0.012.2010.4
0.013.0663.4

G
0442.9835

-
9
10
X65 DX
X65 SX

8
X89 X93
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1

7 6 5 4

D0022800 40-57
 4.10 WINDSCREEN WIPER

4.10 WINDSCREEN WIPER

7

31b
53a
31
53
2 1 3 4

0441.2045
X58

RL4
6

0441.9533
FRONT GLASS W.

RL1
BATTERY (40A)

31b
53a
31
53
- +
85 86
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4

0443.7851
X42 G10
30 87
2 5 8 4 1 6

+30
GND5

0443.7846
2

FU100

F10

F12
F2
2

1
1

100A

30A

15A
7.5A
0

0 1 2

GND4 TKAB3
4 3 2 1 15 14 50 15 X 30 4 5 9 10 7 2 1 +30 -31 6 5 18 16 17 10 4 7 5 8
DS1 X17 REAR P1 P4 P3 P5 P6 J3
WIPER

0443.8656
FRONT WIPER
CONTROL
31b

53

16
5 7 15
14
15/1 13
H
12
AS4
1

r
FRONT WASHER
0
PUMP CONTROL
26 27
TKAB2 0.012.8732.4

0443.7848
F.P. R.P.
1 2 2 1

M
GND2 M

4 3

1 Starter switch
2 Rear screen wiper switch
3 Rear screen washer pump
4 Windscreen washer pump
5 Steering column switch unit
6 Rear screen wiper motor
7 Windscreen wiper motor

D0016890 40-58
 4.11 INFOCENTER

4.11 INFOCENTER

0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
7

STEERING PRESS. CURCUIT

30 85 86 87

1
ENGINE PRESSURE

F27

F16
ENGINE TEMP.

0 1 2
AIR FILTER

7.5A

3A
FUEL
GND
GND
+15
+30

2 9 3 12 15 24 8 9 13 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6
0.012.8894.4

0.012.8732.4
ST1 ST2 X17 P1 J2 P4 J3

9
13
AS2
5
9
AS3
21 GND4
AS1
TKAB3
2 5 10 3 14 8 1
MS2 MS1 TKAB2

FU100

0443.7846
8

100A

+30A
0.013.5916.4

0443.7848

+ -

BATTERY

T X79 L P FUEL
1 2 14 1 2 1 1 2

P
GND2 P
GND2
P

6 4 2
5 3

1 Starter switch
2 Fuel level sensor
3 Engine oil pressure switch
4 Air cleaner clogged sensor
5 Steering system pressure switch
6 Engine coolant temperature sensor (for Infocenter)
7 Instrument panel

D0022810 40-59
 4.12 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

4.12 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

8 10

0441.9533
012.8894.4 0443.7848 RL1
19 2 1 (40A)

0443.7850
JX4 X70 GND2
ST1
GND 12
30 85 86 87
GND 3
+30 9
7 9 1
6 2

F18

F19
+15

F27

F16

F10
F1
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT 11 0 1 2

100A
6

7.5A

7.5A
RPM PTO OUTPUT

30A

30A

3A
RADAR OUTPUT 5
GND4
7 6 4 9 5 21 11 5 - + 30 31 50 15 X 30 3 1 2 +30 9 -31 7 6 18

0.012.8732.4
AS3 AS1 MX1 FE1 X15 TKAB1 X17 P3 P1 J2 P4 J3 P5

ISO7
2
4
5 3
5 1
1 2 2
X19
ISO4
1
4 2
3

JX1 JX2 TKAB3

11 9 14 17 19 1

FU100

0443.7846
100A
3
+30

+ -

BATTERY

1 Starter switch
2 Auxiliary power supply connector (In cab)
3 Rear lift control unit
4 ISO4 socket (power supply to implements)
5 ISO7 socket (implement connection)
6 Instrument panel
7 Engine control unit
8 Front axle suspension control unit
9 Auxiliary power socket
10 Trailer socket (lights and auxiliary power)

D0016920 40-60
 4.13 AUTORADIO - CB

4.13 AUTORADIO - CB
0441.9533

RL1
(40A)

30 85 86 87

F7

F8
20A

5A
0 1 2

0443.7851 50 15 X 30 +30 -31 7 6 3

X17 P1 P4 J3 P2
-
X41
7 +

GND4
X50
1
6 2

X44 DS1
30 3 18

5 15 2
- 1
21

GND5

X51
- 16
30 14
15 12
58 15
4 - rechts 6
+ rechts 2
- links 7
+ links 3

X52

0.012.8732.4
+

3 -
X43

2
2 1
X48 TKAB3
1
FU100

0443.7846
100A

+30A

+ -

BATTERY

1 Starter switch
2 Right front loudspeaker
3 Right rear loudspeaker
4 Radio
5 CB power connector
6 Left front loudspeaker
7 Left rear loudspeaker

D0022820 40-61
 4.14 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN

4.14 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN

0441.9533
RL1

0443.7846
RL5
(POSITION) (40A)

+30A + - 1 2

30 85 86 87

4 5 3

FU100

F3
BATTERY D7

F24
1N4007

30A
7.5A
100A
0 1 2 F20
30A

1 50 15 X 30 7 +30 -31 7 15 14
P5 P1 P4 J3 P3

0.012.8732.4
TKAB3 X17

0.013.0732.4

K
15
2
14 P
1 5
X74 MS1

G2 G1 FU131
4 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 1 2
GND4
30A
F50

0.010.2562.2
X24 X25 X26 RL30 RL32 X28 X23 X22 X29 X27 RL31
2 1 A B C 2 1 87b 87 86 85 30 30 85 86 87 87b 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 1 30 85 86 87 87b
1 2 3 4 C

M M

12 11 10 8 7 6 5 3
13 4
9

1 Starter switch 9 Heater fan speed 1 relay

2 Main heating fuse 10 Heater fan speed 3 relay
3 Heater fan speed 4 relay 11 Air conditioning on/off switch
4 Fan speed selector switch 12 Air conditioning thermostat
5 Rx heater fan 13 Air conditioning control panel illumination connector
6 Lx heater fan 14 Compressor and condenser fan pressure switch
7 Lx heater fan resistor 15 Air conditioning compressor
8 Rx heater fan resistor

D0021800 40-62
 4.15 BRAKES

4.15 BRAKES

8 9 10

54

0.012.2010.4
1

X66 DX
Starter switch

X66 SX
X70

0442.9835
2 Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid valve
+30A
3 Rear lift control unit

0441.9533
RL1 RL 8 RL 9
(40A) (STOP) (DT/BRAKE)
-- + 4 Brake fluid level sensor
BATTERY G15 G14 30 85 86 87
4 5
1 2

3 4 5
1 2

3
5 Instrument panel
1 6 1 6 D6 D7
6 Brake pedal switch (Left)

0443.7846
1N4007 1N4007

6 7 7 Brake pedal switch (Right)

F16

F11

F27
GND3
1 8 Trailer socket (lights and auxiliary power)
12

7.5A
20A
3A
FU100
100A 11 0 1 2 9 Rear left tail light and direction indicator
50A
10 Rear right tail light and direction indicator
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 25 1 7 1 2 2 4 3 1 50 15 X 30 -31 +30 7 6 4 20 24 17 19 8 9 11 Trailer brake lights fuse

0.012.8732.4
0.012.8894.4

X35 X32 TKAB1 TKAB3 FU121 X6 X17 P1 P4 J3 J1 P5 P3 J2

12 Handbrake switch

AS3
11
ST1 10
+15 2 9
+30 9 5

5 HAND BRAKE OIL LEVEL 8 1

GND 3 21 GND4
12
GND
AS1

MS2 JX2 TKAB2

1 20 8 14
0.013.5916.4

0443.7848
2 3
4 1
X81

DT
GND2 2 1
GND2

D0022830 40-63
 4.16 TRAILER BRAKES

4.16 TRAILER BRAKES

6
5 7
P

p
2 1 2 1

0443.7356.4
X73 X72 X71
4
2

ITA TRAILER BRAKE

0441.9533
RL1
(40A)

GND
GND
+30
+15
1 + G 0.012.8894.4 85 86

0443.7875.01 X39
ST1
9 2 12 3 23
ST2
1 3 4 2
G17
30 87

0443.7848
1
3

F27

F16

F28
0 1 2

7.5A

15A
3A
TKAB3
1 3 4 2 4 3 1 5 9 21 2 30 28 5 29 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 21

0.012.8732.4
AS5 X6 AS3 AS1 TKAB2 X17 P1 J2 P4 J3 P3

TKAB3
1
FU100
0443.7846

100A

+30A GND4

+ - 7
BATTERY
p

0443.7355.4
X71
4
2
ITA TRAILER BRAKE

0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
GND
GND
+30
+15

1 + G 0.012.8894.4 85 86
0443.7875.01

9 2 12 3 23 1 3 4 2
X39 30 87

ST1 ST2 G17

0443.7848
1
3

F27

F16

F28
0 1 2

7.5A

15A
3A
TKAB3
1 3 4 2 4 3 1 5 9 21 2 30 28 5 29 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 21

0.012.8732.4
AS5 X6 AS3 AS1 TKAB2 X17 P1 J2 P4 J3 P3
1 Starter switch
TKAB3
1
2 Compressed air pressure gauge
3 Handbrake switch
FU100
0443.7846

4 Instrument panel
100A

5 Trailer braking low pressure switch

+30A GND4
6 Trailer parking brake solenoid valve coil
7 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
+ -

BATTERY

D0022840 40-64
 4.17 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

4.17 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

RL1 RL8 RL9

0441.9533
(40A) (STOP) (D/T BRAKE)

1 2 1 2

30 85 86 87
4 5 3 4 5 3
D6 D7
1N4007 1N4007

F11
20A
9 10
1

F1
11

F34

F17
0 1 2

100A

7.5A

7.5A
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 8 20 4 5 50 15 X 30 +30 -31 7 5 4 20 24 17 19 8 7 5 2
JX2 JX1 X17
0.012.8894.4

X35 X32 P1 P4 J3 P5 J1 P5 P3 J2

AS3 GND 4
11
3

0443.7849
AS1
3
12 10
21 9 FE2
8 7
7 6
6 5 X68
5 4 1
4 3 2 2
3 2
2 1
1
S
FE1
1
2 3
H
1
2 4

5 TKAB3 X18 JX4 JX3 X69

1 10 9 5 1 14 13 12 8 19 13 11 2 15 22 9 14 17 5 4 20 2 1 1 2 3
0.012.8732.4 0443.7850 U
S
0443.7846

FU100

7
6 5
100A

8
+30A

+ -

BATTERY

1 Starter switch 8 Front suspension pushbutton

2 Front axle suspension load sensing solenoid valve coil 9 Brake pedal switch (Left)
3 Axle Down control solenoid valve coil 10 Brake pedal switch (Right)
4 Axle Up control solenoid valve coil 11 Rear lift control unit
5 Front axle suspension position sensor
6 Front axle suspension control unit
7 Diagnostics connector

D0016960 40-65
 4.18 TRANSMISSION

4.18 TRANSMISSION
23 1
2
1 Starter switch 0 1 2

2 Creeper engagement switch E.C.U. (PS)

3 Gearshift lever 0443.8656 0.012.8732.4 65 63 20 30 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 29 5 14 39 15 16 3 40 17 55 32 21 45 36 13 56 62 4 44 24 37 38 67 22 66 68 23 31 15 X 30 1 2

0441.9533
RL1
4 Diagnostics connector AS4 X17 X4 (40A)
3 21
5 Engine ECU circuit board 22
3.9 Ohm

3.9 Ohm
1
4
18
19
30 85 86 87

6 Engine control unit 3.9 Ohm 2 22

20
FW
X37

F16
7 Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch

F35

F27
N
RV

3A
8

7.5A

7.5A
Speed sensor for odometer
0443.7875
9 Configuration connector 3 1 3 6 9 +30 -31 7 6

(Powershift/Powershuttle) P5 J2 P1 P4 J3
10 Proportional solenoid valve coil
11 Forward/reverse solenoid valves
12 Engine speed sensor 21 +12V

M
1
5 3
AS5
13 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor M

Sig
6
2
1
5
14 Transmission speed sensor X40
15 Transmission oil temperature sensor
16 Engine oil low pressure switch
17 Gearshift solenoid valves 0.012.8894.4
18 Instrument panel X33 AS6
GND 4
19 Clutch pedal position sensor 1 8
20 2 4
20 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor 3 3
2
21 Transmission display X34
1
6
22 Shuttle control lever 19
4
1
5

23 Transmission ECU 2

ST1 AS3
+152 9
GEAR BOX PRESSURE 7 5
+30 9
GND 3 21

18
GND 12
AS1

see 40-50
ST2
WHEEL INPUT 22 AS2
HYDRAULIC FILTER 17 6
TKAB1 TKAB2 MX2 X8 X18 X12 TKAB3 G3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 4 6 6 4 2 2 8 1 2 3 1 3 4 5

0443.7534.4
0443.7846
FU100
6 5 4 3

100A
+30A X21
10 12 9 11

+ -

BATTERY
0443.7848

PRESS. SWITCH

NEUTRAL LS

ADD. EV V/R
EV GROUP

EV. PROP.

FILTER
TEMP.

LS/PS
NLSA

NLSE

NAB
NHK

PS
LS
F A E D C B 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1

Y7
fN fN f Y6 U
P
HK

lsa lse N Prop

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

D0022850 40-66
 4.19 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL

4.19 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL

0441.9533
RL9 RL8
RL1 (DT/BRAKE) (STOP)
(40A)

F10

F13
F11
1 2 1 2

30 85 86 87 4 5 3 4 5 3

7.5A
20A

15A
10 11 D7

1N4007
D7

1N4007

F27
0 1 2

7.9A
0.012.8894.4 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1
0.012.8732.4 50 15 X 30 +30 9 6 7 8 19 17 -31 24 20 18 1 4

DF 1
ST2 X35 X32 X17 P1 J2 J3 J2 P3 P4 P5
9 DT 14
+15 2
+30 9 AS3
GND 3 11
GND 12 9
5
10
8
1

8
1

10
9 AS2
5 5

7
1

7
1

10
9
6
5
AS1
6 21 GND4
1 11
7 9
2 10
8 8
1

6
0

10
9 5
6 6
5 7 MS1 JX2 TKAB3 TKAB2
1 2 3 30 18 23 10 16 20 11 2 13 8 1 13 14

FU100
0.013.5916.4

0443.7896

0443.7848
100A

X82 +30A EV DF DT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
GND2

+ -

BATTERY
3 2

1 Starter switch 6 ASM switch

2 Four wheel drive (4WD) clutch solenoid valve 7 Differential lock switch
3 Differential lock solenoid valve 8 4WD switch
4 Rear lift control unit 9 Instrument panel
5 Steering angle sensor 10 Brake pedal switch (Left)
11 Brake pedal switch (Right)

D0022860 40-67
 4.20 REAR LIFTER

4.20 REAR LIFTER

0.012.2010.4
0442.9835 0443.7846
UPDX
1
17 2 G14
7
1 8
16 2 9
DWDX +30A
0441.9533
1
UPSX + - RL1
15 2 G15
(40A)

BATTERY

FU100
7 85 86

1 8
14 2 9
30 87

100A
DWSX
0.012.2010.4 1

F27

F16
0442.9835 0 1 2

7.5A

3A
F34
7.5A

13 12 11 1 50 15 X 30 3 5 2 9 1 +30 -31 7 6
TKAB3 X17 P5 J2 P1 P4 J3

ST1 AS1
GND 3 21 GND4
12
GND
+30 9 5
AS3
3
+15 2 9
RADAR OUTPUT 5 7 2 2

1
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT 11 4
13 1

0
RADAR INPUT 21 2
AS2 X13
ST2

X18
9
10
3
0.012.8894.4

1 Starter switch
2 Radar control switch
3 Diagnostics connector
4 Lift and hand throttle console
5 Rear lift control unit
6 Lift control panel
7 Lift draft sensor (Right)
8 Lift draft sensor (Left) 3
2
4
9 Rear lift position sensor 1

EHR
10 Lift Up solenoid valve 10 1 21 22 24 25 23 17 19 20
TKAB2 X14
11 3 9 7 8 4 1 6 10 5 12
JX1
1 2 3 21 15 23 10 17 14 22 8 18 13 7 19 16 9 4 20 5 6 3 12 15 22 19
JX2
11 Lift Down solenoid valve 0.012.8732.4

470R

470R

4K7

4K7

4K7

4K7
12 Radar

220R

220R

220R

220R
Versione con bracciolo

0443.7848
13 Instrument panel
1 2 3
14 6 EHR

0443.7354.4
Rear lift Down Lx pushbutton
15
RADAR

Rear lift Up Lx pushbutton

DRAFT

DRAFT
EV DW

RIGHT
EV UP

5
LEFT
POS.
SEN.

16 Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

17 Rear lift Up Rx pushbutton GND2 U U U

X21
18 Armrest 11 10
S F F 3 4 5

12 8 7
9
18

D0016980 40-68
 4.21 FRONT AND REAR PTO

4.21 FRONT AND REAR PTO

0.012.2010.4
0442.9835 1 Starter switch
G14 2 ISO7 socket (implement connection)

0443.7846
PTO DX
3 12
13 2 11 0441.9533 3 Rear PTO speed sensor
1 10
RL1(40A) 4 Rear PTO solenoid valve
G15 5 Alternator (D+)

F29
PTO SX
3 12

6
30 85 86 87

12 2 11
Front PTO solenoid valve

7.5A
1 10

7 Rear lift control unit

0.012.2010.4 PTO MODULE
8

+30A
+ - Instrument panel
0442.9835 D12

FU100
BATTERY PTO AUTO switch

F34

F10

F16
6A100R

10 Front PTO pushbutton (in cab)

F27

F16
F1

7.5A

7.5A
100A

3A
9 1 IC1
+
3 IC2
+
3

11 Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab)

100A

7.5A
4 4

3A
DIA DIA
10 11 5
OUT H
IN
2
5
OUT V
IN
2

0 1 2 GND
1
GND
1
6V 2 6H 5 7V 3V7H 3H 1 10W 2V 2H
12 Rear PTO Lx pushbutton
13 Rear PTO Rx pushbutton
1 10 9 5 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 8 9 10 50 15 X 30 -31 +30 9 7 6 24 12 13 8 10 11 23 25 9 3 18 1 2 5

PTO X9 X10 TKAB3 X17 P4 P1 J2 J3 P3 P5 J2

AUTO

0.012.8894.4

GND4
ST1 AS1 9
+15 2
+30 9 5
GND 3
GND 12 21
5 2
ISO7
8
PTO RPM INPUT20
ST2 AS2 3
REAR PTO 11 11
FRONT PTO 10 12
MS1 TKAB2
JX1
11 4 5 20 13 23 12 9 1
0.012.8732.4

0.013.5916.4

0443.7848
PTO SENS
7

EV PTO
FZW D+ B+
1 2 1 2 1 2 3
GND2 + GND2
G

4 3
6 5

D0022870 40-69
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CABLAGGIO MOTORE ENDOTERMICO (1/2) 0419.9869

5. WIRING
ENGINE WIRING (1/2)
Y1 B6

1 2 1 2 3
B43

1 2

1
B42

2
2 1

G18 Y3

F30

1 2 1 2 1
2

3 2 1 B40 B1
B37

B41

B1 Not utilised
B6 Not utilised
B37 Fuel temperature sensor
B40 Camshaft speed sensor (Pickup)
B41 Turbo charge pressure sensor
B42 Not utilised
B43 Engine coolant temperature sensor
F30 Not utilised
G18 To engine wiring
Y1 Not utilised
Y3 Actuator 0419.9869

D0014421 40-71
CABLAGGIO MOTORE ENDOTERMICO (2/2) 0419.9869

ENGINE WIRING (2/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
G18

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
F30 Y1 B42 B37 B43 B1 B40 Y3 B6 B41

0419.9869

D0014411 40-72
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1 G18

B43

F0058370

Y1

F0050730

B6 B42

F0050740

40-73
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE WIRING

ENGINE WIRING

4
F30
1
2

B40
5

B1

X3
F0050750 3

5 4

F0075200

B41

B37

F0050760

0419.9869

40-75
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ENGINE WIRING (1/2) 0.013.5916.4/30

ENGINE WIRING (1/2)

RL42 RL20 RL40
2 1

FU120

FZW

DEUTSCH

DT06-12S
IPD-USA
MS2
T X79
G18
GND2 2 1

2 1

T
MS1
FZW

S
P

G19
2 1

1 2
L

B+ X80
D+ P

L
+30C +50
1 2

X74
FU101
X81 FUSE
RL42A +30B

X82

RL42B X78

+30B Battey G18 To engine wiring RL40 Engine starting relay RL42 Relay control unit
+30C Starter motor (+30) G19 To engine hood wiring T Engine coolant temperature sensor (for Infocenter) RL42A Relay control unit
+50 Starter motor (+50) K Air conditioning compressor X74 Compressor and condenser fan pressure switch RL42B Relay control unit
B+ Alternator (B+) L Air cleaner clogged sensor X78 Preheating device
D+ Alternator (D+) MS1 To side console wiring X79 Steering system pressure switch
FU120 Engine hood front worklights fuse MS2 To front console wiring X80 Start enable switch (Green)
FZW Front PTO solenoid valve P Engine oil pressure switch X81 Brake fluid level sensor
0.013.5916.4/30
RL20 Engine hood front worklights relay X82 Steering angle sensor

D0022490 40-77
ENGINE WIRING (2/2) 0.013.5916.4/30

ENGINE WIRING (2/2)

RL40 RL20
+50 +30C +D +B
FZW P G18 RL42 FU120
1 2 2 1 5 3 2 8 9 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 23 24 25 3 2 1 5 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 5

D+

M1
B4

BN 4
R4

B4
MN 1.5
M 1.5

B+
30

50

M1

RN 4
R4
R 10

RN 4
M 2.5
1
M 2.5
10
X74 1 2 1
K S.U.3 BN 1.5
2
BN 1.5

H 1.5
3

4
X81 5

1 2 6
M1
7
G19

M1
8

12

13
S.U.5 M 2.5
11
M 2.5
20

1 2

X80 L
1 2 3 4

X82

M1
T
1 2

GND2
1 X79

N25
RL42B X78

FU101
N25
RL42A ( ) +30B

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
MN 1.5
GR 1.5

GN 1.5

RN 1.5

BR 1.5
HR 1.5

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

HV 1.5
LR 1.5

H1
G 1.5

C 1.5
B 1.5
MN 1

B 1.5
AG 1

BN 1

CB 1

CN 1
VG 1

HN 1
RV 1

VN 1
LR 1

GH 1
NZ 1

HL 1

MB 1
GH 1
RN 1

ZB 1
M1

M1
B1
V1

Z1
L1

B1

C1

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

MS1 MS2

0.013.5916.4/30

D0022500 40-78
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1 MS2

MS1

F0029110

2
X79

F0075210

3
G18

F0075290

40-79
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

4
T

F0075310

5
X78

F0075270

6 D+

FZW B+

F0075230

40-80
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

7
P

F0075260

8 GND2

F0025180

9
+30B

F0075390

40-81
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

10 RL20
RL40

FU120

RL42B

RL42
RL42A

F0075360

11

X82

F0075300

12
K

F0075250

40-82
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE

13
X74

F0075240

14
+30C
+50

F0075220

15 X81

G19

F0075280

40-83
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE WIRING

ENGINE WIRING

16
15

X80
14

13
12
A

F0075320

11
F0075330

1 4 5
2 3
16
A

10
6
9

7
8

F0075340

0.013.5916.4/30

40-85
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ENGINE HOOD WIRING 0.013.0663.4/20

ENGINE HOOD WIRING

X86
3

1 2

X93
72
X87
C

1
2
G19

2
M 1.5
1 X87
72

C
M 1.5
1
X89

1
2

2
X89

M 1.5
1
2 X93
2 1

X88

X88 X86 TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

M 1.5 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

1 1
BN 1.5 Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
2 2
GN 1.5

GR 1.5
BN 1.5
BN 1.5

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

M 2.5

M 2.5
M 2.5
M 2.5

G .15
B 1.5
B 1.5

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1 10 11 20 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13

G19

G19 To engine wiring

X86 Left headlamp
X87 Horn
X88 Right headlamp
X89 Front right worklight (on hood)
X93 Front left worklight (on hood)

0.013.0663.4/20

D0022510 40-87
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE HOOD WIRING

ENGINE HOOD WIRING

1 X88 X86
2

X87

X93

X89

F0075400

2
1
1

G19

F0050972

F0058161

0.013.0663.4/20

40-89
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) 0443.7848/20

TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2)

ADDEV
NAB
V/R
LS
G17 PRESS

1 2
3 2 1

NAB

1
LS SWITCH

2
RIGHT
DRAFT NLSE
NHK

3 2 1
1

NHK 32 1
3 2 1
3 2

NEUTRAL

1 2
43 21

LS

1 2
TEMP

NLSE
FILTER TEMP

FILTER

PS

PS

2 1

1 2
DT

LS/PS
TKAB2

2 1
LS/PS

NLSA

1 2 3
TKAB1 NLSA

LEFT

1 23
DRAFT EV

1 2
PROP

1 2 3
PTO EV
SEN GROUP

1 2
FUEL
PO
S

UP

1 2
EVUP
3

RADAR
1

2
2

1 23
GND2 RADAR
EVPTO
1 2 POS
SEN
EVDF R.P.

1 2
RP

ADD. EV. V/RForward/reverse solenoid valves (Y6, Y7) F.P.

1 2
DT Forward/reverse solenoid valves (Y6, Y7) FP
EVDFDifferential lock solenoid valve DW
EVDWLift Down solenoid valve
1 2

EVDW
EVPROPProportional solenoid valve coil
EVPTORear PTO solenoid valve
EVUPLift Up solenoid valve
EVGROUPGearshift solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5)
FILTERHydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch X70
FP Windscreen washer pump NEUTRAL LSNot utilised PTO SENRear PTO speed sensor X70 Trailer socket (lights and auxiliary power)
FUELFuel level sensor NHK Transmission speed sensor RADARRadar
G17 To trailer brake wiring NLSAGearbox output shaft speed sensor RIGHT DRAFTLift draft sensor (Right)
LEFT DRAFTLift draft sensor (left) NLSEEngine speed sensor RP Rear screen washer pump
LS Configuration connector (Powershift) POS SENRear lift position sensor TEMPTransmission oil temperature sensor
LS/PSConfiguration connector (Powershift/Powershuttle) PRESS. SWITCHEngine oil low pressure switch TKAB1To side console wiring
NAB Speed sensor for odometer PS Configuration connector (Powershuttle) TKAB2To side console wiring
0443.7848/20

D0022520 40-91
D0022530
C 1.5

F
AG 1.5
Y5

G 1.5

S
V

R
N
M
Y4
EV HG 1.5
Y3
GROUP L 1.5
Y2 C 1.5

Rosa/Pink
Nero/Black

Rosso/Red
Viola/Violet
Verde/Green
AN 1.5 AG 1.5

Marrone/Brown
Y1
G 1.5

3
HG 1.5

P
4
MN 1.5
TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2)

PRESS
L 1.5

5
SWITC BN 1.5

L
B
A

H
C

G
AN 1.5 6
CM 1
NEUTRAL MB 1 MN 1.5
7

LS M 1.5
RN 1

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

8

Grigio/Gray
Giallo/Yellow
Azzurro/Blue

Bianco/White
CM 1

Blu/Dark Blue
TEMP VG 1
9

Arancio/Orange
GN 1.5 RN 1
10

f
V1 GN 1.5
NHK

N
11

MB 1
V1

HK
12

GN 1
TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2)

MB 1.5

f
CN 1
CN 1

NIsa
NLSA MB 1
13 14

RG 1
15

GN 1

f
RG 1 Z1
16

NLSE

NIse
MB 1 ZB 1
17

GN 1.5
18

ADDEV Z1
19

V/R ZB 1
VG 1
20

CN 1.5 CN 1.5

U
21

EV
LR 1.5 LR 1.5

Prop
PROP
22
23

HN 1

2
LS/PS BN 1.5

1
C 1.5

2
LS M 1.5

1
CN 1

2
PS GN 1

1
BN 1.5 G 1.5

L
24

G 1.5 RN 1.5
25

M 1.5 HN 1.5
26

54A 31
VN 1.5 HR 1.5

R
27

X70 HR 1.5 BN 1.5

28

RN 1.5
58R 54

HN 1.5
58L

VN 1.5
29

R 1.5
1
30

R 1.5
2
31

HG 1
TKAB1

NAB VB 1
M 1.5

MV 1
FILTER
HG 1.5
1

VB 1
2

FUEL ZB 1
3

MV 1
4

HG 1.5 Z1
5

GN 1
PTO SEN M 1.5
6
7

HG 1
ZB 1.5 ZB 1
8

RADAR

40-92
L 1.5 GN 1
9

EVPTO ZB 1.5
10
11

CA 1.5
L 1.5
12

EVDF CA 1.5
13

MN 1.5 MN 1.5
14

DT M1
15
16

GND2 M 1.5

MB 1.5
EVDW
17
18
19

EVUP
NZ 1.5 NZ 1.5
20

M 1.5

HR 1.5
21

RV 1.5 ZG 1.5
22

POS ZG 1.5 RV 1.5

23

SEN HR 1

GN 1

LEFT HN 1 HN 1
24

DRAFT HR 1

GN 1.5

RIGHT HV 1 HV 1
25

DRAFT HR 1.5
Z 1.5
26

V 1.5
27

HV 1.5
M 1.5
28

HN 1.5
Z 1.5
29

FP
1

AN 1.5
30

M 1.5
2

RP V 1.5
1
TKAB2

Z1
HV 1.5
4 3

HN 1.5
2

G17
AN 1.5
1

0443.7848/20
0443.7848/20
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1 GND2

F0025180

2
ADD. EV. V/R

F0058170

3
RADAR

F0058180

40-93
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

NLSE

F0058190

EVPROP
NEUTRAL LS

F0058200

G17

F0058210

40-94
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

POS SEN

F0025290

8
TKAB1

TKAB2

F0025350

EVDW

F0025300

40-95
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

10
X70

F0025281

11
EVUP

F0025320

12

RP

FP

F0025310

40-96
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

13

EVPTO

F0025250

14
EVDF

F0025210

15

PTO SEN

F0025230

40-97
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

16
RIGHT
DRAFT

LEFT
DRAFT

F0025220

17 NHK

NAB

FILTER

F0058230

18

FUEL

F0058240

40-98
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION

19 TEMP

DT

F0058220

20
NLSA

F0058250

21
LS/PS

PS

F0058260

40-99
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION WIRING

TRANSMISSION WIRING

22 5 8
9
10
4
PRESS.
SWITCH 7
3
11
2 6

1
12

13
14
F0058270

23 15

EVGROUP 16

17

18

19

20
21
22
F0025140
23

0443.7848

40-101
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY 0443.7356.4

TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY)

X71

1
2

2
G17 3
X72
3
4
1

G17

1 2 3 4

AN 1

HN 1.5

Z 1.5
HV 1.5
X73
AN 1

HN 1 HN 1.5
Z 1.5
HN 1.5

HV 1.5

X73
X71
1 2

X72

G17 To transmission wiring

X71 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
X72 Trailer parking brake solenoid valve coil
X73 Trailer braking low pressure switch

0443.7356.4

D0003993 40-103
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING 0443.7355

TRAILER BRAKE WIRING

1
2
G17 X71

3
4

Z1
4 X71

G17
2

1 TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

G17 To transmission wiring

X71 Trailer braking air pressure sensor

0443.7355.4

D0003853 40-104
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRAILER BRAKE WIRING

TRAILER BRAKE WIRING

1
X72

X73
F0058280

1
2
X71

G17

F0075350

F0075370

0443.7356.4
0443.7355.4

40-105
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING (ROPS) 0443.7849

FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING (ROPS)

2
S

1
H
FE2
DEUTSCH

DT06-12S
IPD-USA

2
H

1
2
X68

1
FE2

3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GN 1.5

B1
CN 1.5

VN 1.5

Z1
L1

M 1.5
X69

GN 1.5
CN 1.5

VN 1.5

B1

Z1
L1
2 2 2 1 2 3

H S X68
1 1 1

M1

M1

M1
X69

FE2 To front axle suspension wiring (cab)

H Axle Up control solenoid valve coil
S Axle Down control solenoid valve coil
X68 Front axle suspension load sensing solenoid valve coil
X69 Front axle suspension position sensor
0443.7849

D0004172 40-107
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING

FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING

1
1

FE2

F0025000

X68 2
H
F0025011
3

X69
X39
F0024991

0443.7849

40-109
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING 0443.7846/20

CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING

X1 X2
TO 0.442.9835 TO 0.442.9835

GND3

F51 100 A

TKAB3 +12 BATTERY (30)

GND4 GND2

F51
H 16
1 100 A +12 BATTERY (30)
GV 2.5
2
BN 1.5
3
HN 1
4
VN 1.5
5
HR 1
6
RN 1.5
7
BL 1
8
LR 1
9
RG 1
10
L1
11
H1
GND2
12
BR 1
13

14
M5

TKAB3 GND3
M5

+30A Battery
FU100Main power supply fuse
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
M5 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
G14 To fender wiring
GND4 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue G15 To fender wiring
RG 0.5

RG 0.5
GV 1.5

BN 1.5

RN 1.5

BR 0.5

GV 1.5

BN 1.5

RN 1.5

BR 0.5
LR 0.5

LR 0.5
BL 0.5

BL 0.5
M 1.5

M 1.5

M 1.5

M 1.5
H 0.5

H 0.5

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
HN 1

HR 1
L 0.5

L 0.5

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue TKAB3 To side console wiring

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

12 12 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

X2 X1

0443.7846/20

D0011492 40-111
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION CAB POWER SUPPLY

CONNECTORS LOCATION

G14
F0024262

2
GND4

TKAB3

F0024270

G15
F0024302

40-113
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
 CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING

CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING

GND3

1 3
F0024280

5 6

GND2

GND2

F0075410

6 5
4

+30

F0076050

0443.7846/20

40-115
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING 0443.7850/10

FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING

FE1

FE2

JX3 JX4
4 5 20 1 2 11 13 22 15 2 17 14 9 19 8 12

GN 1.5

MN 1.5
M 1.5

G 1.5
CN 1.5
V 1.5
V 1.5

BL 1
AG 1

L1
VN 1.5

B1
Z1
HV 1.5
H1
R 1.5
JX3 JX4

G 1.5
1
MN 1.5 2
V 1.5
3

4
HV 1.5
5
AG 1 FE1
6
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE BL 1 7
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
M 1.5
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
8
H1

GN 1.5
CN 1.5

VN 1.5
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White 9

M 1.5
L1
B1
Z1
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue R 1.5
10
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FE2

FE1 To side console wiring

FE2 To front suspension wiring
JX3 Front axle suspension control unit
JX4 Front axle suspension control unit

0443.7850/10

D0004193 40-117
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING

FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING

1
FE2

F0024400

3
JX4

JX3

F0058130

1 2

3
FE1

F0024380

0.012.4027.4

40-119
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FENDER WIRING - WIDE 0.012.2010.4/10

FENDER WIRING - WIDE

PTOSX UPSX DWSX

X66 X65 G16 PTODX UPDX DWDX
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2

AB 1

H1
LR 1
M1
M1

HN 1

GR 1

LN 1

LN 1

BR 1
HV 1
BN 1.5

RN 1.5
HN 1.5
M 1.5

G14-G15
M 1.5 1

M1
2

HV 1
3

BN 1.5
4

HN 1.5
5

RN 1.5
6

LN 1
7

H1
8

BR 1
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
9
X66
AB 1
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange 10

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue LR 1
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
11 X65
GR 1
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue 12
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
G16
DWSX UPSX PTOSX
DWDX UPDX PTODX

AMP

AMP

AMP

AMP
1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

DW

PTO
UP
G14-G15

DWDXRear lift Down Rx pushbutton UPDXRear lift Up Rx pushbutton

DWSXRear lift Down Lx pushbutton UPSXRear lift Up Lx pushbutton
G14 To cab power supply wiring X65 Lower rear left worklights
G15 To cab power supply wiring X66SXRear left tail light and direction indicator (wide fenders)
G16 To number plate light wiring X66DXRear right tail light and direction indicator (wide fenders)
PTODXRear PTO Rx pushbutton
PTOSXRear PTO Lx pushbutton

0.012.2010.4/10

D0003623 40-121
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (WIDE FENDERS) 0.012.2018.4

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (WIDE FENDERS)

2
X67 G16

1
1
M1

X67 G16
2
H1

G16 To Fender wiring - wide

X67 Number plate light

0.012.2018.4

D000363 40-122
CONNECTORS LOCATION FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1 X65

F0024333

2 PTOSX

G16 UPSX

DWSX

F0039421

PTODX

UPDX

DWDX
F0039431

40-123
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION NUMBER PLATE LIGHT AND FENDER WIRING

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT AND FENDER WIRING

4 1

G14-G15 1

5
3

F0024342

5 X66

4
6
2

5
X66
2

X66

F0039441

6
X67

FENDER PLATE LIGHT

0.012.2010.4/10 0.012.2018.4

F0024201

40-125
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FENDER WIRING - NARROW 0442.9835

FENDER WIRING - NARROW

X65

X66

1
PTOSX

2
PTODX

3
G16 PTOSX UPSX DWSX
2
SEN X66 X65 G16 PTODX UPDX DWDX

1
1

DWSX 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2

2
DWDX

VG 1

H1
LR 1
BL 1

L1

L1
M1
HN 1

HN 1
BN 1.5

RG 1

BR 1
RN 1.5
M 1.5

M1
HEB

1
UPSX

2
UPDX

3
G14-G15
M 1.5
1
M1
G14-G15 2
VG 1
3
BN 1.5
4
HN 1
5
RN 1.5
6
L1
7
H1
8
BR 1
9
BL 1
10
LR 1
11
RG 1
12

DWDXRear lift Down Dx pushbutton UPDXRear lift Up Rx pushbutton

DWSXRear lift Down Lx pushbutton UPSXRear lift Up Lx pushbutton
G14 To cab power supply wiring X65 Lower rear right worklights
G15 To cab power supply wiring X66SXRear left tail light and direction indicator (wide fenders)
G16 To number plate light wiring X66DXRear right tail light and direction indicator (wide fenders)
PTODXRear PTO Rx pushbutton (on fender)
PTOSXNot utilised

0442.9835

D003761 40-127
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (NARROW FENDERS) 0441.4114

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING (NARROW FENDERS)

X67 G16

1
M1

X67 2
G16
HN 1

G16 To Fender wiring - wide

X67 Number plate light (narrow fenders)

0441.4114

D0003801 40-128
CONNECTORS LOCATION FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1 X65

F0024333

2 UPSX
DWSX

G16

PTOSX
F0024363

3 DWDX UPDX
G16
PTODX

F0024353

40-129
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION NUMBER PLATE LIGHT AND NARROW FENDERS WIRING

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT AND NARROW FENDERS WIRING

4 1 1

G14-G15

3
F0024342

5 X66
6

4
5

4 2

F0024323

6
X67

FENDERS PLATE LIGHT

0442.9835 0441.4114

F0024201

40-131
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2) 0.012.8894.4/30

FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2)

ST1

ST2

X34

X30 X31 X33 4

AS3

1
X32

2
3
AS6

3A

3
MS2
G4

X35
1
AS1

AS2
8

7
5

6
1 Sidelights switch AS1 To side console wiring X30 Accelerator pedal position sensor
3 Cab headlights dipped beam switch AS2 To side console wiring X31 Not utilised
3A Lower front worklights (on cab) switch AS3 To side console wiring X32 Right brake pedal switch
4 50S lights switch AS6 To side console wiring X33 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
5 Front suspension pushbutton G4 To lights selector switch wiring X34 Clutch pedal position sensor
6 ASM switch MS2 To engine wiring X35 Left brake pedal switch
7 Differential lock switch ST1 Instrument panel
8 4WD switch ST2 Instrument panel 0.012.8894.4/30

D0016681 40-133
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2) 0.012.8894.4/30

FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2)

X60 X59 X61 X62 X39

M1 2 2 1 Z1 2 1 1
3 3 4 NZ 1 3 4 4
2 1 4 1 2 3
2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 4

AR 0.5
LB 0.5

H 0.5

N 0.5

GH 1

LR 1
MN 1
HR 1

MB 1

GV 0.5

LN 0.5

HL 1
HG 0.5
12
RN 1.5
7
HL 1 11
LR 1
10
GH 1 9
AR 0.5

AS6
8
G 0.5
6
AB 0.5
5
LN 0.5 4
H 0.5 3
GV 0.5 2
LB 0.5 1
14
GV 0.5
13
V1
12
MN 1
11
TX V1 MB 1
1 10
N 0.5 N 0.5
15 2 9
M 0.5
GND 3
58 4
H 0.5 H 0.5 8
HR 0.5 HR 0.5 7
RADAR OUTPUT 5
SG 0.5 SG 0.5
ST1 RPM PTO OUTPUT
GEAR BOX PRESSURE
6
7
G 0.5
6

HAND BRAKE-OIL LEVEL 8

RN 0.5
R 0.5 R 0.5
30 9 5
RX 10
GV 0.5
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT 11 HV 1 HV 1 4
GND 12 M 0.5

AS3
RN 1
1
M1
2
MB 0.5
3
4
HG 0.5
5
A 0.5
ZB 1
MS2 6
7
RV 1
GH 1
8
LR1
9
10
HL1
RN1.5
11
12

A1 3
DF
LN 0.5
1
TRAILER 2 VN 0.5 VN 0.5
2 2
TRAILER 1
LB 0.5 LB 0.5
3 1
HV 0.5 HV 0.5
DIRECTIONS LIGHT 4 18
HN 0.5 HN 0.5
HML DOWN 5 17
HB 0.5 HB 0.5 16
HML UP 6
L 0.5 L 0.5
GENARATORE 7 15
MB 0.5 B1
AIR FILTER 8 14
AG 0.5 AG 0.5
ENGINE PRESSURE 9 13
V 0.5 V 0.5 12
FRONT PTO 10
REAR PTO
LR 0.5 LR 0.5 11
11
CB 0.5 CB 0.5 10
ENGINE RPM 12

AS2
FUEL 13
ZB 0.5 ZB 0.5 9
ST2 DT 14
A 0.5
RV 0.5
SN 1 8
ENGINE TEMPERATURE 15
B 0.5 B 0.5 7
HIGH BEAM 16
HyHYDRAULIC FILTER 17
MV1 MV1 6
SPARE 18
NZ 1 5
HG 0.5 4
PRE HEATING 19
PTO RPM INPUT 20
GN 0.5 GN 0.5 3
RADAR INPUT 21
Z 0.5 Z 0.5 2
WHEEL INPUT 22
AB 0.5 1
ITA TRAILER BRAKE 23
AN 0.5
C 0.5 CN 0.5
STEERING PRESSURE CIRCUIT 24 4
CN 0.5 V 1.5 3
EMR ALARM 25
26 AN 0.5 2
SPARE
RN 0.5 1
MV 1 22
M 2.5 21
VN 1 20
HN 1 19
N1 18
GH 1 17
BN 1 16
V 2.5

AS1
15
VN 2.5 14
ZB 1 13
R 1.5 12
VG 1 11
GN 1
10
LN 1 9
RV 1
8
VB 1 7
HR 1 6
RG 1 5
M1

M1

M1
RG 1

M1
M1

RG 1
M1
RG 1

RG 1

M1
RG 1

RG 1
RG 1

RG1

M1
10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9
VN 2.5

S
V 1.5

S S S 10 9 S S S
BN 1 8
RV 1

R 1.5

3 HN 1 5 5 8 7 5 RV 1 6 6 NZ 1 5 NZ 1
BN 1 GH 1 1 V 2.5 1 1 GN 1 2 HR 1 2 HR 1 1
1
6 5
MV 1
2 8 N1 LN 1 7 5 5
4 3 VG 1 1 VB 1 1 NZ 1
ZB 1

2 1
H 0.5

1 3 3a RG 1
5 6 7 8
4
X96

0.012.8894.4/30

D0011540 40-134
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE

CONNECTORS LOCATION

X33

X34
F0025431

2 3
4

G4

1
F0058140

ST2

ST1
F0025020

40-135
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE

4 5
8

6
7

A0025060

MS2

A0025080

AS1
AS3

AS6 AS2

A0025090

40-136
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE WIRING

FRONT CONSOLE WIRING

7
4
3

X31

F0039452

8 X35

X32

X30
6
8 5
7

A0025071

0.012.8894.4/30

40-137
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
 SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (1/3) 0.012.8732.4/30

SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (1/3)

P2

GND6 X2
BLACK
P6 FE1
TKAB2 TKAB3 TKAB1

DS1 X5 X6
R
ED
X4

X1 1 2

JX1 Rear lift control unit

JX2 Rear lift control unit
MS1 To engine wiring
GND4
MX1 Engine control unit
X7 MX2 Engine control unit
X19
G1 P1 Fuses and relays control unit
MS1
X18 X20 P2 Fuses and relays control unit
6

P3 Fuses and relays control unit

5
4
3

G2
2

AS6
1

P4 Fuses and relays control unit

AS1 X8
P5 Fuses and relays control unit
P6 Fuses and relays control unit
YELLOW

P5 PTO AUTO PTO AUTO switch

J1 AS5 REAR WIPER Rear screen wiper switch
RL41 Glowplug warning light ON relay
FU131 TKAB1 To transmission wiring

LEVER
F/S
AS3 TKAB2 To transmission wiring
TKAB3 To cab power supply wiring
P1 X9 X10
BLACK

P3 MX2 MX1 WORK LIGHT Rear worklights switch

AS4 AS2
RL41 1 2 3 1 2 3 X1 Direction indicators flasher unit (Red)
DS1 Roof wiring
X2 Direction indicators flasher unit (black)
ECU PS Transmission ECU
X4 Creeper engagement switch
EHR Armrest wiring
X5 Driver's seat air suspension
X17 EHR Lift and hand throttle compressor
EHR console (EHR)

3 2 1
X6 Handbrake switch
EMR Armrest wiring
APS
WHITE

JX1 G3 X7 Cigar lighter

1
32
EMR Lift and hand throttle console (EMR)
EMR X8 Engine ECU circuit board
X11 X12 F/S LEVERNot utilised
X9 Front PTO pushbutton (in cab)
FE1 Front axle suspension wiring (cab)
WOR X10 Rear PTO pushbutton (in cab)
KLIGHT FLASHING LIGHT Rotating beacon on/
X11 Not utilised
off switch
BLACK

JX2 X12 Gearshift lever

FU121 Trailer brake lights fuse
FLASHING X13 Radar control switch
LIGHT FU131 Main heating fuse
X13 X14 Lift control panel
E.C.U. (PS) G1 Air conditioning wiring
X15 Auxiliary power socket
X14 G2 Air conditioning wiring
APS Not utilised X16 Not utilised
P4 G3 Armrest wiring
CLEANFIX AS1 To front console wiring X17 Starter switch
ISO4 ISO4 socket
FU121 AS2 To front console wiring X18 Diagnostics connector
X15 ISO7 (power supply to implements)
ISO4 AS3 To front console wiring ISO7 ISO7 socket X19 Auxiliary power supply connector
X16 REAR PTO (in cab)
AUTO AS4 Steering column switch unit (implement connection)
J3 J2 WIPER
AS5 To display wiring J1 Fuses and relays control unit X20 Engine speed keypad
AS6 To front console wiring J2 Fuses and relays control unit X20 Armrest wiring
CLEANFIX Not utilised J3 Fuses and relays control unit 0.012.8732.4/30

D0011503 40-139
 SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (2/3) 0.012.8732.4/30

SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (2/3)

F/S LEVER

FU121
GND4
PTO REAR FLASHING WORK P6
AUTO CLEANFIX P2 DS1
X1 X3 X2 WIPER LIGHT LIGHT X9 X10

P4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 9 10 1 5 9 10 X17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 X5 X7 X15

21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 5 9 10 1 2 3

11
VF 49b RE LE 31 P1 P2 49 LA RA 49a
TKAB1 TKAB3

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 1 2 3 - +

RG 1
VB 1

GR 1.5

BR 1

AG 1.5
C 0.5

BL 1

BL 1

HN 1.5

HR 1.5
B 1.5
RG 1

RG 1

RG 1
B1

B 2.5

VN 1.5

ZB 1

V 1.5

Z1

ZB 1

BR 1
RG 0.5

RG 0.5

BN 1.5
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M 1.5

H 2.5
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

RN 1.5
RN 2.5
RN 4
M4

M4

M6

M1
LN 1
N 2.5

H 2.5

B 1.5

V 2.5

G 1.5

HN 2.5

H1
HR 2.5

HN 1.5

HR 1.5

GV 1.5

VN 1.5

HV 1.5
50 15 X 30

RN 1.5

HR 1.5

R 1.5
VN 1.5

BR 1.5

L 1.5

RN 1.5

BN 1.5
LR 1.5

R 16
VN 1.5
LR 1.5
V1

HR 2.5
MB 1.5
R 1.5

N 2.5

H 2.5
M 0.5
P3 - 23 R 0.5

RG 1
BN 1.5
HN 1

GN 1.5
VN 1.5

A 2.5

HV 1.5

M1

M1

M 1.5
M 0.5

M1
See sheet 2

BR 1

R 1.5

MB 1.5

GV 1.5

Z1

BN 1.5

GN 1.5

P3 - 05 RV 1.5

M 2.5
GR 1.5

AG 1.5

R4
NZ 1

RN 2.5

H 1.5

GR 1.5

BL 1

HR 1.5

HN 1.5

GV 2.5
R 1.5
HN 1.5

BN 1.5

P3 - 07
P3 - 25
P3 - 08
CN 1

R 2.5

A
R 16 P1
RN 2.5
04-J1

P3 - 06
P5 - 11
B HN 1.5
J3 - 07
P5 - 03

09-J1
HR 1.5
08-J1
GV 1.5
GV 1.5
05-J1
6 GV 1.5
See sheet 2 GV 1.5
5 06-J1
AS 5

4 CB 1.5
N1
3
H1 BL 1
2 24-P3
M1 RN 1.5 01-P3
1
RN 1.5 02-P3
See sheet 2 B 1.5
22 03-J1
See sheet 2 L 1.5 05-J2
21
See sheet 2 C 1.5
20 14-P3
See sheet 2 C 1.5 15-P3
19
18 See sheet 2 RG 1
GN 1.5 RG 1 18-P5
17
MB 1.5 16-P5 R 2.5
16 03-P3
G 1.5 R 2.5
15 04-P3
RN 1.5 05-J3
14 Z1
H1
13 Z1 08-J3 07-P5
AS4

N 2.5 17-P5 GND

12 B1
B1 GND
11 12-P5
G1 22-P5
10
BN 1 GND
9 N1
N1 GND
8
M1
7
H 2.5 RG 1
6
L 1.5 03-J3 RG 1
5 10-P3
R 2.5 06-P5 LR 1.5
4
BN 1.5 LR 1.5
3 09-P3
VN 1.5 L1
2
B 2.5 L1
1 11-P3
H 2. 5
8-P5
V1
V1
Pin 1 13-P3
See sheet 2 N1
bis 8 13-P5
LR 1.5
AS6

LR 1.5
Pin 9 12-P3
See sheet 2 HN 2.5
bis 11 21-P3
RV 1
02-J2
RV 1
See sheet 2
13 CB 1 M1
V1 RV 1
12 1
MN 1 20-P3 VN 1.5
11
MB 1.5 M1 2 X13
10 3
N1
N1 06-J3 M1
9 1
H1 See sheet 2
2
AS3

8 HR 1 See sheet 2
3
HR 1 See sheet 2
7 4
SG 1
6 5
R1 09-J2
5 6
HV 1
4 7
See sheet 2
8 X18
See sheet 2 BN 1
3 9
VN 1 02-J3 S1
2 10
BL 1 01-J3 V1
1 11
HV 1 04-J3 CB 1
18 12
HN 1 19-P5
17 13
HB 1 15-P5 14
16
L1
15
B1
14
AG 1.5
13 BL 1
V1 1
12 VN 1
LR 1 2
11
10
See sheet 2 B1
3 ISO4
ZB 1.5 4
9
AS2

8
B 0.5 M1
7 1
6
MV 1 RG 1
2 X19
NZ 1 01-P5
5
M1
4 1
GN 1 HR 1
3 2
Z 1.5 HV 1
2 3
1
SG 1
4 ISO7
C1
5
6
See sheet 2
See sheet 2

MV 1 23-P5
22 H 1.5
M 2.5 4
21
VN 1 10-P5 M1
20
HN 1 09-P5 3
19
18
N1 RN 1
2 X6
GH 1 25-P5
17 M1
BN 1 1
16
V 2.5
15
VN 2.5 14-P5
14
ZB 1 21-P5
AS1

13
See sheet 2
12 C 2.5
VG 1 C
11
GN 1 M4
10
B
9
LN 1
24-P5
G1
RV 1 R4
8 A
7
6
RG 1 R4
5
See sheet 2
4
See sheet 2 R4 FU131
3
AN 1
2
RN 1
1 H1
4
HR 1.5
3
G2
22-P3
01-J2

N 0.5
2
18-P3
02-J1
01-J1

07-J1

08-J2

N 0.5
1
See sheet 2

See sheet 2

See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 2
See sheet 2
MN 1.5

MN 0.5

GR 0.5
MN 0.5

AR 0.5

MN 1.5

MB 1.5
GR 0.5
HN 1.5

BR 1.5

LB 0.5

VN 1.5
HN 1.5

LR 0.5

ZB 1.5
ZG 1.5
NZ 1.5
MV 1

GN 1
V 1.5
G 1.5

L 1.5

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M 1.5

R 0.5
G 0.5

V 0.5
MB 1

L 1.5
V 0.5
H 1.5

L 1.5

VN 1

RV 1
AN 1

HL 1

S1
Z1

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
HG 1.5

GN 1.5
CB 1.5

AB 1.5

HR 1.5

HN 1.5
ZB 1.5

HV 1.5

MB 0.5
RV 1.5
GN 1.5

AG 1.5

GN 1.5

AR 0.5
BR 1.5
GR 1.5

HR 1.5
HR 1.5

ZG 1.5

HV 1.5

RV 1.5

RV 1.5
LR 1.5

NZ 1.5

LB 0.5

NZ 0.5

LR 0.5
RV 1.5

M 1.5
G 1.5

MB 1
Z 1.5

V 1.5

R 0.5

G 0.5
B 1.5

H 1.5
B 1.5

GN 1
Z 0.5

Z 0.5

HR 1

VG 1

BN 1
L 0.5

L 0.5

HV 1
L 1.5

RV 1
NZ 1

HL 1
RV 1

BL 1
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
C1

B1

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
MS1 TKAB2 JX1 EHR JX2
BLACK X14 WHITE
S

R
Rosa/Pink

Rosso/Red
G

H
Giallo/Yellow

Grigio/Gray
0.012.8732.4/30

D0011521 40-140
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (3/3) 0.012.8732.4/30

SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (3/3)

E.C.U. (PS)
25 26 27 08 50 33 34 11 57 29 39 16 03 40 17 55 32 21 66 13 56 43 64 15 01 02 23 68 31 04 62 05 36 44 24 37 38 14 63 20 45 65 30 67 22 49

VN 1
BN 1

L1
MV 1

GN 1

RV 1
MN 1

MB 1

HN 1

M1

RL 1

V1
AB 1
LN 1

GV 1

CN 1
AG 1

HG 1

RG 1

H1
BL 1
SN 1
VN 1

B1
C1

G1

L1

V1

Z1

VB 1
AN 1

RN 1

CN 1

ZB 1

LB 1
B 0.5

M 1.5

C1
C 1.5

LN 1
LR 1
A 0.5

VB 1.5
G 0.5
L 0.5

GN 1

BL 1
VB 1.5

VN 1
GN 1
BN 1

B
A
3 1 7 9 10

APS

See sheet 1

GN 1.5
MN 1.5

MN 1.5

MB 1.5
MN 1.5
GN 1.5
MB 1.5

LR 1.5
VB 1.5

G 0.5
M 1.5
G 1.5

G 1.5
R 1.5

R 1.5

C 1.5

GN 1

GN 1
RV 1
V 1.5

AG 1

GN 1
MV 1
AG 1

V 1.5

RL 1

V1
AB 1
LN 1

GV 1

CN 1
BL 1

B1

BL 1
MN 1

LN 1
GN 1
AG 1

HG 1

RG 1

SN 1
VN 1

HV 1

LN 1
LR 1
AN 1

RN 1

CN 1

ZB 1

HN 1

BL 1

BL 1
LB 1

LB 1

M6

G1

H1

L1
A1

A1
G1

V1
C1

V1
L1

Z1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 12 3 2 8 13 14 3 6 7 17 19 2 6 14 7 8 6 5 4 1 2 3 5 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

AS3
X18

GND4
AS1
TKAB1 FE1 J2 P3 TKAB2 AS6 AS5 AS4 X12 G3 X11

MX1 MX2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
free MN 1.5

free
free RN 1.5

HN 1.5

BN 1.5
CN 1.5

GV 1.5

M 1.5

HL 1
H 1.5
HV 1.5

Z 1.5
LR 1.5

CB 1.5
RN 1

CB 1

M 1.5

MN 1.5

S1

MV 1
LN 1

A1
VB 1

B 0.5

G1

H1
RG 1
HN 1

L1

HG 1
VN 1

LR 1.5
B1
CN 0.5
X16

L 0.5
M1
2

free
free
free
free

free
free

free

free

CN 0.5
1

CN 0.5
4

AS1

BR 1.5
AS2
CB 1
10

AS6
RN 1
7
HG 0.5
12
HG 1
9
LR 1.5
10
KL 1
11

RL41
30 87
85
85
86 86
87 30

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
BR
1 1
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
GN
2 2
1 kOhm Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
CB
3 3
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
MV
4 4 S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
LN 2.2 kOhm
5 5 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
HV
6 6
MN 1.5
GV 1.5

RN 1.5
BN 1.5

BR 1.5

HN 1.5

CN 1.5
HV 1.5
LR 1.5

H 1.5

GN 1
CB 1

Z 1.5

L
VN 1

HL 1

7 7
See sheet 2
See sheet 2
See sheet 2

See sheet 1

See sheet 1
See sheet 1
See sheet 1

See sheet 1
See sheet 1
See sheet 1

See sheet 1

See sheet 1

See sheet 1

B 120 Ohm
8 8
BR 1.5

X8
MV 1

HG 1
VB 1

HN 1

HL 1
RG 1

BR 1
M1

G1

B1
A1

H1

L1
See sheet 1 AS3-4

1 2 07 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3 4

MS1 X4 GND4 X18 J1 X20 EMR

0.012.8732.4/30

D0016610 40-141
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1
MX2 X8

MX1

F0022191

2
X7

F0022202

3
X6

F0022211

40-143
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

X5

F0022221

5
G2

G1

F0022231

6
TKAB2
TKAB1
TKAB3

GND4

F0022240

40-144
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

7
X4

F0022251

8 X1

X2

GND6

X19

F121 FE1
X121

F0058120

9
E.C.U. (PS)

F0022271

40-145
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

10 11

X20

X15
X17

ISO7

ISO4

F0022281 F0022291

12 13

MS1
DS1

F0022300 F0022310

40-146
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

14 FLASHING WORK
LIGHT LIGHT CLEANFIX

REAR PTO
WIPER AUTO

F0039461

15 P2 P6
FU131

P1

J1
P3
J2

X18
P4

P5 J3

F0058110

16
JX2

JX1

F0022340

40-147
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE

17 X9

X10

F0022351

18 X14

F0022361

19
AS5
AS4
AS6 AS2
AS1 AS3

F0022390

40-148
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE WIRING

SIDE CONSOLE WIRING

20 12

X12 11
17
16
18 15
EMR
X13
✽X11 13
20

19 14
X16
1 2 9
X11: NOT UTILISED F0022381

10

G3 6

5
EHR
4
3

0.012.8732.4/30

40-149
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB) 0.010.2562.2

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB)

M
87b 87 86 85 30 RL31 87b 87 86 85 30 RL30
X23

AR
S
R

R
N

A
BR

N
GL
X22
G1
BR

BR

GL

V
N

LR
3 2 1

R
N

C
G2
6

GN
4

CB
3

V
2

B
1

VN

LN

B
AR

CB

VN
LR
LR

GN
X25
A

S
N

V
C

C
V

N
R

N
C
C B A
2 3 4 5 1
X26
X29 X27 1 2 3 4 5
X24
X28 RL32 30 85 86 87 87b
4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 C TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

1 2
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

M V

Z
Verde/Green

Viola/Violet
A

B
Azzurro/Blue

Bianco/White

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

G1 To side console wiring X24 Air conditioning control panel illumination connector
G2 To side console wiring X25 Air conditioning thermostat
RL30Heater fan speed 3 relay X26 Air conditioning on/off switch
RL31Heater fan speed 4 relay X27 Fan speed selector switch
RL32Heater fan speed 1 relay X28 Rx heater fan resistor
X22 Lx heater fan X29 Rx heater fan
X23 Lx heater fan resistor

0.010.2562.2

D0009353 40-151
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION AIR CONDITIONING

CONNECTORS LOCATION AIR CONDITIONING

X28

X29
F0024243

2
G2

RL
G1

F0024213

X22

X23
F0024253

40-153
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION AIR CONDITIONING WIRING

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING

X25

F0024233

5 X27

1
X26
2
4 3
X24

F0024223

0.010.2562.2

40-155
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
DISPLAY WIRING 0443.7875

DISPLAY WIRING

X38

AS5 X39

X38 X39 X40

Light

Light

+ G 12V Sig Light M M

01 02 03 04 05 06
M1

M1

M 0.5

M 0.5
H1

N1

N 0.5
H 0.5

N 0.5
CB 1

B 0.5

H 0.5

X40

06

B 0.5 05 TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

CB 1 04 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

N1
03 AS5 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
H1 02 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
M1 S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
01
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

AS5 To side console wiring

X38 Compressed air pressure gauge light
X39 Compressed air pressure gauge
X40 Transmission display

0443.7875

D0016641 40-157
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION DISPLAY WIRING

DISPLAY WIRING

1 1 2
X38

X39

F0024461

3
2
X40

F0024471

3
AS5

F0024450

0443.7875

40-159
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ROOF WIRING (1/2) 0443.7851/10

ROOF WIRING (1/2)

X42
X41

DS1 X43

G5 GND5

G6
X45

2 1 X44

M
AR
4 3
X52

RO

I T 85 8
6 5

NE

AL 7
AM
8 7

E C 87a
12

86
V
X46

36
RL21
2 1

G
4 3
X51

RI
G
IO
6 5
8 7

X53
X47 X48

1
2
3 X49 GND
4
5
X50

G8

G10

G11
GND

GND G9
G7

DS1 To side console wiring RL21 Front upper cab (50S) worklights relay X48 Right front loudspeaker
G5 To cab roof rear worklights wiring X41 Left rear loudspeaker X49 Clock
G6 To cab roof rear worklights wiring X42 Rear screen wiper motor X50 Left front loudspeaker
G7 Left front work linght connector X43 Right rear loudspeaker X51 Radio (grey)
G8 To cab roof front worklights wiring X44 CB power connector X52 Radio (brown)
G9 Right front work linght connector X45 Door open warning signal switch X53 Side console courtesy light
G10 To windscreen wiper motor wiring X46 Interior roof light
G11 Cab roof front worklights wiring X47 Rotating beacon 0443.7851/10

D0004253 40-161
ROOF WIRING (1/2) 0443.7851/10

ROOF WIRING (2/2)

X52-X51
X45 X46 X53 X49 X44 X42 G10
G6 G51 X47

+ right

- right
+ left

- left

31b
53a
31b
53a
X48 X43 X41

58
G8 G11

30
15

53
53

31
31
-
1 2 1 2 1 2
G7 G9 - 30 58 15 30 - - 15 30

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 6 7 12 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GND GND GND GND

MB 1

MB 1
Z1

HN 1

HR 1

BR 1

BR 1

BR 1
M1

HN 1

M1

M1
M1

HG 1.5
GR 1.5

M 2.5

GR 1.5
M1.5

M1.5

MB 1.5
BN 1.5

HR 2.5
HN 1.5

MB 1.5

G 1.5
M 1.5

M 1.5
N1
GV 1.5

GV 1.5

HG 1.5
AG 1.5

HN 1

N 2.5

AG 1.5

HR 1

GN 1.5

HV 1.5

B 1.5
R 1.5
RV 1.5
NV 1.5

H 2.5
M 1.5

M 1.5
M 2.5

M 2.5
M 1.5

M 1.5
GND5
M 1.5

M 1.5

M 1.5

R 1.5
DS 14
B 1.5
DS 15

MB 2.5
DS 12
AG 1.5
DS 16
H 2.5
DS 17
GR 1.5
DS 20
HR 2.5
DS 19
HN 1
DS 13
N 2.5
DS 21
BR 1
DS 18
HR 1
DS 11
DS1

G 1.5
DS 01
RV 1.5
DS 02
HV 1.5
DS 03
GN 1.5
DS 04
Low work light

VN 1.5
DS 05
BN 1.5
DS 06
V 2.5
DS 07
Z1
DS 08
GV 1.5
DS 09
GV 1.5
DS 10

4
MB 2.5
HG 2.5 3
3 V1
5 5

2 4 1
M1 V 2.5
1 2

HIGH BEAM LIGHTS/LOW WORK LIGHTS SWITCH OVER (AS)

RL21

0443.7851/10

D0004201 40-162
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1
G8

F0024502

2 X50-X48

X46

F0024562

3 X45

X41-X43
F0024542

40-163
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF

4 X44

G5-G6

F0024572

5 G11

G10

F0024552

X53
F0024582

40-164
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF

7 X51
X52

RL21

F0024513

8 GND5

F0024530

X49

F0024491

40-165
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF WIRING

ROOF WIRING

10 2
3 4 3
5 2 5 6
7
3
X42 X47 1 4

10
12 11
F0024522

11 DS1

F0024480

12
GND

G7 - G9

F0055552

0443.7851/10

40-167
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CAB LOWER HEADLIGHTS WIRING 0441.1923.4
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR WIRING 0441.2045

CAB LOWER HEADLIGHTS WIRING WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR WIRING

G12-G13
G7- G9
G10 X58
X59-X60

1
G1.5 1
BG1.5 HIGH BEAM-WORKING LIGHT BG1.5 M1.5
1 1 2 2
2
G1.5 LOW BEAM G1.5
2 G10 3
N1.5 3
G58
3
M1.5 DIRECTION LIGHT M1.5
3 G12-G13 4
VN1.5 4
HR0.75 POSITION LIGHT HR0.75
G7- G9 4 4

M1.5
GND M1.5

N1
HR0.75 X59-X60
HR0.75

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

G7 To roof wiring G10 Roof wiring

G9 To roof wiring X58 Windscreen wiper motor
G12 To cab lower headlights wiring (machine without front lift)
G12 To cab full and dipped beam headlights (with front lift)
G13 To cab lower headlights wiring (machine without front lift)
G13 To cab full and dipped beam headlights (with front lift)
X59 Front left sidelight and direction indicator
X60 Front right sidelight and direction indicator

0441.1923.4 0441.2045

D0015573 D0015140 40-169

CAB LOWER FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING (MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT) 0442.5602
CAB FULL AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS (WITH FRONT LIFT) 0441.6727

CAB LOWER FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING CAB FULL AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
(MACHINE WITHOUT FRONT LIFT) (WITH FRONT LIFT)

G12- G13 X61-X62

G12- G13
X63-X64

31

56b
56a
R0.75 H0.75
1 4
N0.75 3 M1.5
G12-G13
2
3
X61-X62 G12- G13 2
G1.5 X63-X64
1 B1.5
4

31
56b
56a

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

G12 To cab lower front worklights wiring G12 To cab lower front worklights wiring
G13 To cab lower front worklights wiring G13 To cab lower front worklights wiring
X61 Front left worklight on cab X63 Front left worklight on cab
X62 Front right worklight on cab (without front lift) X64 Front right worklight on cab (with front lift)

0442.5602 0441.6727

D0015582 40-170 D0016830

CAB ROOF FRONT AND REAR WORKLIGHTS WIRING 0443.4993

CAB ROOF FRONT AND REAR WORKLIGHTS WIRING

G8- G11 G5- G6

X56-X57 X54-X55

1 2

1 2
1
2 HB1.5
H1.5 1 1
3 1
X56-X57 G5- G6 2
M1.5
2 X54-X55
G8- G11 4 2

M1.5

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White

N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

G5 To roof wiring
G6 To roof wiring
G8 To roof wiring
G11 To roof wiring
X54 Upper rear right worklights
X55 Upper rear left worklights
X56 Upper front left worklight
X57 Upper front right worklight

0443.4993

D0016812 40-171
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION WORKLIGHTS AND WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR

CONNECTORS LOCATION

1
X59-X60

G12-G13

F0055531

2
X61-X62

X61-X62

F0055541

X63 - X64

F0058330

40-173
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION WORKLIGHTS AND WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR WIRINGS

WORKLIGHTS AND WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR WIRINGS

3 G5
X54

X55

G7 - G9
G6

F0055551
X57 X56 5

4 G11

G10 2

1 X58 2
F0058310

5 F0055570

G8

0441.1923.4 0441.2045
F0058320 0442.5602 0443.4993
0441.6727

40-175
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING 0443.8656

LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING

AS4

X120

DIRECTION LOW BEAM

X119 LIGHT HIGH BEAM
CONTROL CONTROL
L
Flash FRONT WIPER
X118 CONTROL Z
0
Abb
R 0 1

Int.
0

X120
NVB1
1
R1
2
NV1 FRONT WASHER
3 PUMP CONTROL
4
NB1
5
H1
6

7
L1
8 HORN
9
CONTROL
M0.75
10 X118
1

3
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
X119 4
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

N0,75/1 15/1
1

56b

56a
49a

MB0,75 31b
MB0,75 53c
-31

56
5

53
30

15

49
L
R

NG0,75 H
NR0,75 J
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue

NGL0,75
BV0,75

RV0,75
6

LNB1

G0,75
M0,75
NBV1
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White

C0,75
V0,75
BN1
NV1

G1

B1
R1

H1
L1
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow

R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 AS4

AS4 To side console wiring

G4 To side console wiring
X36 Hazard warning lights on/off switch
X37 Shuttle control lever

0443.8656

D0015103 40-177
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING

LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING

1 G4
1
2

X36
F0025481

X37
3

F0024421

3
AS4

F0024430

0443.8656

40-179
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ARMREST WIRING 0443.7354.4

ARMREST WIRING

X21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 bis 42

AR 1

R1

BN 1

RV 1
LR 1
V1

B1

VB 1
HL 1

HR 1

RG 1
G1
LR 1

LN 1

BR 1
L1
H1
GH 1 / HG 1
1
2
X20

3
4
5
6
G3
1

EHR
2

X21
3

GH 1 / HG 1

VB 1
BN 1
RV 1

LR 1
LN 1
AR 1

HR 1

RG 1
G1
HL 1

BR 1
L1
R1

H1
V1

B1
1

EMR
2
3

1 2 3 1 2 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6

EHR EMR G3 X20

EHR To side console wiring

EMR To side console wiring
G3 To side console wiring
X20 To side console wiring
X21 Armrest

0443.7354.4

D0003872 40-181
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (1/2) 0441.9533.4/10

FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (1/2)

FUSES
F2 Rotating beacon - Rear screen wiper (30A) F21 Upper left high light (see F23 - F9 too) (7.5A)
P1 F3 Fan - Air conditioning system (30A) F22 Upper right high light (see F23 - F9 too) (7.5A)
RL1 RL2 RL3
+ F4 Rear worklights (see F10 too) (30A) F23 High lights (15A)
F5 Not used F24 Left lower beam - light - Rear left side lights -
P2
P6 F6 Front worklights (see F10 too) (30A) Trailer socket terminal 58L - Left number plate light
F7 Radio - CB - terminal +15 (20A) (7.5A)
F8 Radio - clock - CB - courtesy light - terminal +15 (5A) F25 Right lower beam - Right number plate light - Rear ri-
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 ght side lights - railer socket terminal 58 right
F9 Lower beam - lower beam including lights switch
F26 Emergency lights (15A)
30A

30A

30A

30A

20A

5A

7.5A

10A

20A

15A

15A

15A

15A

3A

7.5A
(see F21 - F22 - F23 too) (7.5A)
R LAP F10 Computer - lights switch lighting (7.5A) F27 Power Shift - Infocenter (7.5A)
CB F
TOP
HPSA
RADIO
CLOCK STOP
CHECK
F11 Stop lights - 4WD (15A) F28 Operator’s seat(15A)
SENSOR

F12 Front screen wiper - Horn (15A) F29 PTO control - PTO keypad (7.5A)
F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30
F13 4WD - diff. locking (15A) F30 Electronic control engine speed (7A)
30A

30A

30A

RL4

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

15A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A
F14 Front worklights on the flashing pilot lamp (15A) F31 Left lower beam (see F23 too) (7.5A)
+12 F32 Right lower beam (see F23 too) (7.5A)
DIN F15 Direction indicators lights (15A)
J1 PTO
F33 Lower and upper lower beam (15A)
RIGHT LEFT CHECK F F16 INFOCENTER - Transmission speed sensor - Rear
F18 F19 F20
TOP PTO - Transmission display - air compressed gene- F34 Agronotric h - hD (7.5A)
F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 rator - Radar sensor - Switchs pilot lamp (3A) F35 Power Shift terminal 15 (7.5A)
F17 Front axle suspension (see F11 too) (7.5A)

15A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A
RL5 RL6 RL7 F18 Cigar lighter - Connection socket (30A)
J2 F19 Electric socket (30A)
F20 Lower beam including lights switch - High lights
TOP
(see F24 - F25 too) (30A)
RL8 RL9
STOP
P3
STOP

RL10 RL11
TOP
RL12 P4 RELAYS
GND
LIGHT RL1 Terminal 15 (40A) RL9 4WD solenoid valve (10A)
RL14 RL2 Rear worklights (40A) RL10 High lights
RL13
RL3 Front worklights (40A) RL11 High lights(10A)
RL4 Front screen wiper (10A) RL12 Field/road indicator (10A)
RL15
PTO EV J3 RL5 Lights (10A) RL13 4WD solenoid valve (10A)
E.C.U. RL6 Upper and lower lower beacon (10A) RL14 Direction indicators - emergency lights (10A)
RL7 Lower beacon (10A) RL15 High lights commutator (10A)
RL8 Stop lights - 4WD (10A)
P5
CONNECTORS
J1 To side console wiring P3 To side console wiring
J2 To side console wiring P4 To side console wiring
J3 To side console wiring P5 To side console wiring
P1 To side console wiring P6 To side console wiring
P2 To side console wiring

0441.9533.4/10

D0016750 40-183
D0016760
P4 (-31)

P5 - 7 SWITCH LIGHT (LF)

P6 - 3 ROOF POSITION F24

7.5A

2
J1 - 9 SOCKET/FENDER POSITION

5
3

4
P6 - 1 ROOF POSITION (RH) F25

1
7.5A
J1 - 8 SOCKET/FENDER POSITION

4
5
1

D8
FULL BEAM

1N4007
RL10
P1 (+30)

2
FULL BEAM LIGHT COMAND P5 - 12

3
P2 - 3 30 ROOF(clock-cb-radio-light) F8
5A
D2
1N4007

4
P5 - 6 HAZARD/LIGHTS COMAND F26

5
15A

D3
POSITION
1N4007 J2 - 9 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1N4007
SWITCH LIGHT FR.CONSOLE

RL5
P5 - 10
D1 J2 - 6 30 TRANSMISSION F27

2
POS.SWITCH LIGHT P5 - 23 7.5A
FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (2/2)

3
POSITION P5 - 13
REAR WORK LIGHT POSITION LIGHT F20
J1 - 5 30A

87
85
REAR WORK LIGHT J1 - 6
P3 - 4 LIGHER

REAR WORK L.
P3 - 3 TRAILER SOCKET POWER SUPPLY F18

RL2(40A)
30A
WORK LIGHT COMAND J3 - 9

86

30
P3 - 1 25A SOCKET

ROOF FRONT WORK LIGHT P2 - 2 P3 - 2 25A SOCKET F19

30A

87
85
ROOF FRONT WORK LIGHT P2 - 4

REAR WORK LIGHT F4

RL3(40A)
30A

FRONT WORK L.
FRONT WORK LIGHT COMAND P5 - 21

86

30
ROFF FRONT WORK LIGHT F6
30A
FUSES AND RELAYS CONTROL UNIT (2/2)

EV F/S P3 - 22

4
5
P3 - 7 HALF-BEAM F23

EV F/S
F/S LEVER SWITCH 15A

D11

1N4007
30

RL13
85

3
CLEAN FIX/LIGHTER P3 - 21
RL1(40A)

J3 - 7 STARTING SWITCH (15)

86

FIELD LIGHT P5 - 19
87

4
STREET LIGHT P5 - 15

5
F/S GEAR BOX SWITCH P3 - 18

D10
SWITCH S/F

1N4007
P5 - 9 HALH/FULL BEAM SWITCH F9

RL12
7.5A

3
STREET/FIELD/CLEAN FIX
F28
15A

4
STOP LIGHT (15A EXT.FUSE) J1 - 4

5
P5 - 20 STOP
F11
STOP COMAND (PEDAL) 20A

D6

1N4007
RL8
STOP

2
FRONT GLASS WIPER/HORN
F12
15A

3
P3 - 5 REAR WINDSCREEN (53a)
EV DT P3 - 17

4
P3 - 6 FLASHER/REAR WINDSCREEN F2
30A

5
1

D7
P3 - 15 HEATING GROUP

1N4007
DT x ASM P5 - 24
RL9

P3 - 14 HEATING GROUP F3
30A
DT/BRAKE

DT LIFT INPUT J2 - 8
3

TRAILER BRAKE EV/FRONT AXLE P3 - 19

NOT USED P6 - 9 F10
P5 - 18 COMPUTER/LIGHT SWITCH CONSOLE
ZERO SETTING 7.5A
P5 - 16
2

31b FRONT WINDSCREEN P6 - 10

5

J1 - 7 ENGINE/COLD START E.C.U.

F30
7.5A
RL4

INTERMITTANCE
J3 - 5
FRONT GLASS W.

P5 - 14 LOW FRONT LIGHT

F14
FRONT WIPER POUMP
4 1 6

J3 - 8 15A
HORN/FRONT GLASS WIPER P5 - 17
P5 - 4 NOT USED
53a WINDSCREEN P6 - 4
P5 - 1 DT SWITCH/DISTRIBUTOR
F13
NOT USED P6 - 6 15A

P3 - 12
5

BACK EV PTO J3 - 3 15 HAZARD/LIGHTS COMAND F15

15A
IC1

OUT
+

1
3

GND
PTO MODULE

J2 - 7 FRONT AXLE F17

7.5A

40-184
DIA

IN

INFOCENTER/DISPLAY/ON-OFF CLUTCH SENSOR

2
4

J3 - 6
J2 - 4 NOT USED F16
3A
J2 - 1 REAR PTO/RADAR/WHEEL SENSOR/ARMREST
P3 - 13
5

FRONT EV PTO
P3 - 16 HPSA F7
20A
IC2

OUT

6A100R P2 - 6 15 ROOF(CLOCK-CB-RADIO)
V
+

1
3

GND

D12 F29
7.5A
DIA

IN

P3 - 24 REAR/FRONT PTO E.C.U.

2
4

P5 - 2

FRONT PTO LED P3 - 8 6V

P3 - 20 NOT USED
2
REAR PTO LED P3 - 10 6H
D+ P3 - 11 5
7V
3V
7H
3H
J2 - 2 NOT USED
1
PTO AUTO P3 - 23 IOW LIFT CONTROL/RADAR F34
P3 - 25 J2 - 5
FRONT PTO COMAND 2V 7.5A
REAR PTO COMAND P3 - 9 2H

J2 - 3 15 TRANSMISSION F35 P5 - 3
7.5A

FULL BEAM
J1 - 3
4

FULL BEAM TOP P6 - 2

5
1

D9

1N4007
FULL-BEAM TOP
RL11

TOP SWITCH P5 - 25
3

FULL-BEAM F33
15A
4
5
1

D4

1N4007
RL6
HALF-BEAM TOP

J1 - 2 HALF-BEAM F31
4

7.5A
5
1

D5

1N4007

F32
RL7

J1 - 1 HALF BEAM
7.5A
2

LIGHT COMAND P5 - 22
HALF-BEAM

P2 - 1 HALF-BEAM F22
7.5A
J3 - 2
2 TRAILER
C3

J3 - 1
1 TRAILER F21
P2 - 5 HALF-BEAM
C2

7.5A
J3 - 4
DIR.LIGHT
C1

P5 - 11
TEMP HAZARD ECU 49a
RL14(HAZARD)

49A

TEMP HAZARD ECU 49 P5 - 8

49
G

31

0441.9533.4/10
0441.9533.4/10